DL205 User Manual Volume 1 of 2

D2–USER–M WARNING

Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as AutomationDirect. We want your new DirectLOGIC automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or operating the equipment.

To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to verify that the equipment, installation, and operation are in compliance with the latest revision of these codes.

At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical Code, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). There may be local regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for safe installation and operation.

Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation.

Our products are not fault–tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on–line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail–safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (”High Risk Activities”). AutomationDirect specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.

For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our Desk Reference. If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need additional information, please call us at 770–844–4200.

This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product.

Trademarks This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners. AutomationDirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.

Copyright 2003, Automationdirect.com Incorporated All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written consent of Automationdirect.com Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all information included in this document. AVERTISSEMENT

Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté l’équipement d’automatisation de Automationdirect.comE, en faisant des affaires comme AutomationDirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d’automatisation DirectLOGIC fonctionne en toute sécurité. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les autres publications pertinentes) avant de l’installer ou de l’utiliser. Afin de réduire au minimum le risque d’éventuels problèmes de sécurité, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux et nationaux applicables régissant l’installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement. Ces codes diffèrent d’une région à l’autre et, habituellement, évoluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et de vous assurer que l’équipement, l’installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la plus récente de ces codes. Vous devez, à tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prévention des incendies, du Code national de l’électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). Des organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer les codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs. L’omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l’équipement ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n’assumons aucune responsabilité à l’égard de la conception, de l’installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit. Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l’utilisation ou la revente en tant qu’équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue, par exemple, l’exploitation d’installations nucléaires, les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication, le contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d’armes, pour lesquels la défaillance du produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux (”activités à risque élevé”). La société AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d’aptitude à l’emploi en ce qui a trait aux activités à risque élevé. Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité, veuillez consulter la section Modalités et conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l’installation ou du fonctionnement de cet équipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires, n’hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au 770–844–4200. Cette publication s’appuie sur l’information qui était disponible au moment de l’impression. À la société AutomationDirect, nous nous efforçons constamment d’améliorer nos produits et services. C’est pourquoi nous nous réservons le droit d’apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans préavis ni quelque obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne pas être offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit.

Marques de commerce

La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d’autres entreprises. Les désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement à leurs propriétaires respectifs. AutomationDirectE nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations. Copyright 2003, Automationdirect.comE Incorporated Tous droits réservés Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée, reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le consentement préalable écrit de la société Automationdirect.comE Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les droits exclusifs à l’égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document. 1 Manual Revisions

If you contact us in reference to this manual, remember to include the revision number.

Title: DL205 User Manual Manual Number: D2–USER–M

Edition/Rev Date Description of Changes Original 1/94 original issue Rev A 9/95 minor corrections 2nd Edition 6/97 added DL250, downsized manual Rev A 5/98 minor corrections Rev B 7/99 added torque specs for base and I/O Rev C 11/99 minor corrections Rev D 03/00 added new PID features, minor corrections Rev E 11/00 added CE information, minor corrections Rev F 11/01 added surge protection info, corrected RLL and DRUM instructions, minor corrections 3rd Edition 06/02 added DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs, local expansion I/O, ASCII and MODBUS instructions split manual into two volumes (Note: DL250 has same functionality as DL250–1 except for local expansion I/O capability.) Rev A 08/03 extensive corrections and additions 1 i Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Getting Started Introduction ...... 1–2 The Purpose of this Manual...... 1–2 Where to Begin ...... 1–2 Supplemental Manuals ...... 1–2 Technical Support ...... 1–2 Conventions Used ...... 1–3 Key Topics for Each Chapter...... 1–3 DL205 System Components...... 1–4 CPUs ...... 1–4 Bases ...... 1–4 I/O Configuration ...... 1–4 I/O Modules ...... 1–4 Programming Methods ...... 1–4 DirectSOFT32 Programming for Windows ...... 1–4 Handheld Programmer ...... 1–4 DL205 System Diagrams...... 1–5 DirectLOGIC Part Numbering System...... 1–7 Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming...... 1–9 Step 1: Unpack the DL205 Equipment...... 1–9 Step 2: Install the CPU and I/O Modules...... 1–10 Step 3: Remove Terminal Strip Access Cover...... 1–10 Step 4: Add I/O Simulation...... 1–10 Step 5: Connect the Power Wiring...... 1–11 Step 6: Connect the Handheld Programmer...... 1–11 Steps to Designing a Successful System...... 1–12 Step 1: Review the Installation Guidelines...... 1–12 Step 2: Understand the CPU Setup Procedures...... 1–12 Step 3: Understand the I/O System Configurations...... 1–12 Step 4: Determine the I/O Module Specifications and Wiring Characteristics...... 1–12 Step 5: Understand the System Operation...... 1–12 Step 6: Review the Programming Concepts...... 1–13 Step 7: Choose the Instructions...... 1–13 Step 8: Understand the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Procedures...... 1–13 Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Safety Guidelines ...... 2–2 Plan for Safety ...... 2–2 Safety Techniques ...... 2–2 Class 1, Division 2 Approval...... 2–2 Orderly System Shutdown...... 2–3 System Power Disconnect...... 2–3 Mounting Guidelines ...... 2–4 Base Dimensions ...... 2–4 Panel Mounting and Layout...... 2–5 ii Table of Contents

Enclosures ...... 2–6 Environmental Specifications...... 2–7 Power ...... 2–7 Agency Approvals ...... 2–7 Component Dimensions...... 2–8 Installing DL205 Bases ...... 2–9 Choosing the Base Type...... 2–9 Mounting the Base ...... 2–9 Using Mounting Rails ...... 2–10 Installing Components in the Base...... 2–11 Base Wiring Guidelines...... 2–12 Base Wiring ...... 2–12 I/O Wiring Strategies ...... 2–13 PLC Isolation Boundaries...... 2–13 Powering I/O Circuits with the Auxiliary Supply...... 2–14 Powering I/O Circuits Using Separate Supplies...... 2–15 Sinking / Sourcing Concepts...... 2–16 I/O “Common” Terminal Concepts...... 2–17 Connecting DC I/O to “Solid State” Field Devices...... 2–18 Solid State Input Sensors...... 2–18 Solid State Output Loads...... 2–18 Relay Output Guidelines...... 2–20 Surge Suppresion For Inductive Loads...... 2–20 Prolonging Relay Contact Life...... 2–22 I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specification...... 2–24 Slot Numbering ...... 2–24 Module Placement Restrictions...... 2–24 Special Placement Considerations for Analog Modules...... 2–25 Discrete Input Module Status Indicators...... 2–25 Color Coding of I/O Modules...... 2–25 Wiring the Different Module Connectors...... 2–26 I/O Wiring Checklist ...... 2–27 Glossary of Specification Terms...... 2–28 DL205 Modules ...... 2–30 Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations Overview ...... 3–2 General CPU Features ...... 3–2 DL230 CPU Features ...... 3–2 DL240 CPU Features ...... 3–2 DL250–1 CPU Features...... 3–3 DL260 CPU Features ...... 3–3 CPU General Specifications...... 3–4 CPU Base Electrical Specifications...... 3–5 CPU Hardware Features ...... 3–6 Mode Switch Functions ...... 3–7 Status Indicators ...... 3–7 Adjusting the Analog Potentiometers...... 3–8 Communication Ports ...... 3–8 Port 1 Specifications ...... 3–9 iii Table of Contents

Port 2 Specifications ...... 3–10 Using Battery Backup ...... 3–11 Enabling the Battery Backup...... 3–11 Selecting the Program Storage Media...... 3–12 Built-in EEPROM ...... 3–12 EEPROM Sizes ...... 3–12 EEPROM Operations ...... 3–12 CPU Setup ...... 3–13 Installing the CPU ...... 3–13 Connecting the Programming Devices...... 3–13 Auxiliary Functions ...... 3–14 Clearing an Existing Program...... 3–15 Setting the Clock and Calendar...... 3–15 Initializing System Memory...... 3–15 Setting the CPU Network Address...... 3–16 Setting Retentive Memory Ranges...... 3–16 Password Protection ...... 3–16 Setting the Analog Potentiometer Ranges...... 3–17 CPU Operation ...... 3–19 CPU Operating System...... 3–19 Program Mode Operation...... 3–20 Run Mode Operation ...... 3–20 Read Inputs ...... 3–21 Read Inputs from Specialty and Remote I/O...... 3–21 Service Peripherals and Force I/O...... 3–21 CPU Bus Communication...... 3–22 Update Clock, Special Relays, and Special Registers...... 3–22 Solve Application Program...... 3–23 Solve PID Loop Equations...... 3–23 Write Outputs ...... 3–23 Write Outputs to Specialty and Remote I/O...... 3–24 Diagnostics ...... 3–24 I/O Response Time ...... 3–25 Is Timing Important for Your Application?...... 3–25 Normal Minimum I/O Response...... 3–25 Normal Maximum I/O Response...... 3–25 Improving Response Time...... 3–26 CPU Scan Time Considerations...... 3–27 Initialization Process ...... 3–28 Reading Inputs ...... 3–28 Reading Inputs from Specialty I/O...... 3–29 Service Peripherals ...... 3–29 CPU Bus Communication...... 3–30 Update Clock / Calendar, Special Relays, Special Registers...... 3–30 Writing Outputs ...... 3–30 Writing Outputs to Specialty I/O...... 3–31 Diagnostics ...... 3–31 Application Program Execution...... 3–32 PLC Numbering Systems...... 3–33 PLC Resources ...... 3–33 V–Memory ...... 3–34 iv Table of Contents

Binary-Coded Decimal Numbers...... 3–34 Hexadecimal Numbers...... 3–34 Memory Map ...... 3–35 Octal Numbering System...... 3–35 Discrete and Word Locations...... 3–35 V–Memory Locations for Discrete Memory Areas...... 3–35 Input Points (X Data Type)...... 3–36 Output Points (Y Data Type)...... 3–36 Control Relays (C Data Type)...... 3–36 Timers and Timer Status Bits (T Data type)...... 3–36 Timer Current Values (V Data Type)...... 3–37 Counters and Counter Status Bits (CT Data type)...... 3–37 Counter Current Values (V Data Type)...... 3–37 Word Memory (V Data Type)...... 3–37 Stages (S Data type) ...... 3–38 Special Relays (SP Data Type)...... 3–38 Remote I/O Points (GX Data Type)...... 3–38 DL230 System V-memory...... 3–39 DL240 System V-memory...... 3–41 DL250–1 System V-memory (applies to DL250)...... 3–44 DL260 System V-memory...... 3–47 DL230 Memory Map ...... 3–50 DL240 Memory Map ...... 3–51 DL250–1 Memory Map...... 3–52 DL260 Memory Map ...... 3–53 X Input / Y Output Bit Map...... 3–54 Control Relay Bit Map ...... 3–56 Staget Control / Status Bit Map...... 3–60 Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps...... 3–62 Remote I/O Bit Map (DL 260 only)...... 3–63 Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration DL205 System Design Strategies...... 4–2 I/O System Configurations...... 4–2 Networking Configurations...... 4–2 Module Placement ...... 4–3 Slot Numbering ...... 4–3 Module Placement Restrictions...... 4–3 Automatic I/O Configuration...... 4–4 Manual I/O Configuration...... 4–4 Removing a Manual Configuration...... 4–5 Power–On I/O Configuration Check...... 4–5 I/O Points Required for Each Module...... 4–6 Calculating the Power Budget...... 4–7 Managing your Power Resource...... 4–7 CPU Power Specifications...... 4–7 Module Power Requirements...... 4–7 Power Budget Calculation Example...... 4–9 Power Budget Calculation Worksheet...... 4–10 Local Expansion I/O ...... 4–11 v Table of Contents

D2–CM Local Expansion Module...... 4–11 D2–EM Local Expansion Module...... 4–12 D2–EXCBL–1 Local Expansion Cable...... 4–12 DL260 Local Expansion System...... 4–13 DL250–1 Local Expansion System...... 4–14 Expansion Base Output Hold Option...... 4–15 Enabling I/O Configuration Check using DirectSOFT32...... 4–16 Remote I/O Expansion ...... 4–17 How to Add Remote I/O Channels...... 4–17 Configuring the CPU’s Remote I/O Channel...... 4–18 Configure Remote I/O Slaves...... 4–20 Configuring the Remote I/O Table...... 4–20 Remote I/O Setup Program...... 4–21 Remote I/O Test Program...... 4–22 Network Connections to MODBUS and DirectNet ...... 4–23 Configuring Port 2 For DirectNet For MODBUS RTU...... 4–23 MODBUS Port Configuration...... 4–24 DirectNET Port Configuration...... 4–25 Network Slave Operation...... 4–26 MODBUS Function Codes Supported...... 4–26 Determining the MODBUS Address...... 4–26 If Your Host Software Requires the Data Type and Address...... 4–26 Example 1: V2100 ...... 4–28 Example 2: Y20 ...... 4–28 Example 3: T10 Current Value...... 4–28 Example 4: C54 ...... 4–28 If the Host Software Requires an Address ONLY...... 4–29 Example 1: V2100 584/984 Mode...... 4–31 Example 2: Y20 584/984 Mode...... 4–31 Example 3: T10 Current Value 484 Mode...... 4–31 Example 4: C54 584/984 Mode...... 4–31 Network Master Operation...... 4–32 Step 1: Identify Master Port # and Slave #...... 4–33 Step 2: Load Number of Bytes to Transfer...... 4–33 Step 3: Specify Master Memory Area...... 4–34 Step 4: Specify Slave Memory Area...... 4–34 Communications from a Ladder Program...... 4–35 Multiple Read and Write Interlocks...... 4–35 Network MODBUS RTU Master Operation (DL260 only)...... 4–36 MODBUS Function Codes Supported...... 4–36 MODBUS Port Configuration...... 4–37 RS–485 ...... 4–38 Network ...... 4–38 RS–232 ...... 4–38 Network ...... 4–38 MODBUS Read from Network (MRX)...... 4–39 MRX Slave Memory Address...... 4–40 MRX Master Memory Addresses...... 4–40 MRX Number of Elements...... 4–40 MRX Exception Response Buffer...... 4–40 MODBUS Write to Network (MWX)...... 4–41 vi Table of Contents

MWX Slave Memory Address...... 4–42 MWX Master Memory Addresses...... 4–42 MWX Number of Elements...... 4–42 MWX Exception Response Buffer...... 4–42 MRX / MWX Example in DirectSOFT32...... 4–43 Multiple Read and Write Interlocks...... 4–43 DL260 Non–Sequence Protocol (ASCII In/Out and PRINT)...... 4–45 MODBUS Port Configuration...... 4–45 RS–485 ...... 4–46 Network ...... 4–46 RS–232 ...... 4–46 Network ...... 4–46 DL250–1 Non–Sequence Protocol (PRINT)...... 4–47 MODBUS Port Configuration...... 4–47 RS–422 ...... 4–48 Network ...... 4–48 RS–232 ...... 4–48 Network ...... 4–48 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions Introduction ...... 5–2 Using Boolean Instructions...... 5–5 END Statement ...... 5–5 Simple Rungs ...... 5–5 Normally Closed Contact...... 5–5 Contacts in Series ...... 5–6 Midline Outputs ...... 5–6 Parallel Elements ...... 5–6 Joining Series Branches in Parallel...... 5–7 Joining Parallel Branches in Series...... 5–7 Combination Networks ...... 5–7 Boolean Stack ...... 5–7 Comparative Boolean ...... 5–8 Immediate Boolean ...... 5–9 Boolean Instructions ...... 5–10 Store (STR) ...... 5–10 Store Not (STRN) ...... 5–10 Store Bit-of-Word (STRB)...... 5–11 Store Not Bit-of-Word(STRNB)...... 5–11 Or (OR) ...... 5–12 Or Not (ORN) ...... 5–12 Or Bit-of-Word (ORB) ...... 5–13 Or Not Bit-of-Word (ORNB)...... 5–13 And (AND) ...... 5–14 And Not (ANDN) ...... 5–14 And Bit-of-Word (ANDB)...... 5–15 And Not Bit-of-Word (ANDNB)...... 5–15 And Store (AND STR) ...... 5–16 Or Store (OR STR) ...... 5–16 Out (OUT) ...... 5–17 Out Bit-of-Word (OUTB)...... 5–18 vii Table of Contents

Or Out (OR OUT) ...... 5–19 Not (NOT) ...... 5–19 Positive Differential (PD)...... 5–20 Store Positive Differential (STRPD)...... 5–21 Store Negative Differential (STRND)...... 5–21 Or Positive Differential (ORPD)...... 5–22 Or Negative Differential (ORND)...... 5–22 And Positive Differential (ANDPD)...... 5–23 And Negative Differential (ANDND)...... 5–23 Set (SET) ...... 5–24 Reset (RST) ...... 5–24 Set Bit-of-Word (SETB)...... 5–25 Reset Bit-of-Word (RSTB)...... 5–25 Pause (PAUSE) ...... 5–26 Comparative Boolean ...... 5–27 Store If Equal (STRE) ...... 5–27 Store If Not Equal (STRNE)...... 5–27 Or If Equal (ORE) ...... 5–28 Or If Not Equal (ORNE)...... 5–28 And If Equal (ANDE) ...... 5–29 And If Not Equal (ANDNE)...... 5–29 Store (STR) ...... 5–30 Store Not (STRN) ...... 5–30 Or (OR) ...... 5–31 Or Not (ORN) ...... 5–31 And (AND) ...... 5–32 And Not (ANDN) ...... 5–32 Immediate Instructions ...... 5–33 Store Immediate (STRI)...... 5–33 Store Not Immediate (STRNI)...... 5–33 Or Immediate (ORI) ...... 5–34 Or Not Immediate (ORNI)...... 5–34 And Immediate (ANDI)...... 5–35 And Not Immediate (ANDNI)...... 5–35 Out Immediate (OUTI)...... 5–36 Or Out Immediate (OROUTI)...... 5–36 Out Immediate Formatted (OUTIF)...... 5–37 Set Immediate (SETI) ...... 5–38 Reset Immediate (RSTI)...... 5–38 Load Immediate (LDI) ...... 5–39 Load Immediate Formatted (LDIF)...... 5–40 Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions...... 5–41 Using Timers ...... 5–41 Timer (TMR) and Timer Fast (TMRF)...... 5–42 Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits...... 5–43 Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts...... 5–43 Accumulating Timer (TMRA) Accumulating Fast Timer (TMRAF)...... 5–44 Accumulating Timer Example using Discrete Status Bits...... 5–45 Accumulator Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts...... 5–45 Counter (CNT) ...... 5–46 Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits...... 5–47 viii Table of Contents

Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts...... 5–47 Stage Counter (SGCNT)...... 5–48 Stage Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits...... 5–49 Stage Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts...... 5–49 Up Down Counter (UDC)...... 5–50 Up / Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits...... 5–51 Up / Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts...... 5–51 Shift Register (SR) ...... 5–52 Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions...... 5–53 Using the Accumulator...... 5–53 Copying Data to the Accumulator...... 5–53 Changing the Accumulator Data...... 5–54 Using the Accumulator Stack...... 5–55 Using Pointers ...... 5–57 Load (LD) ...... 5–58 Load Double (LDD) ...... 5–59 Load Formatted (LDF) ...... 5–60 Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Constants (LDSX)...... 5–63 Load Real Number (LDR)...... 5–64 Out (OUT) ...... 5–65 Out Double (OUTD) ...... 5–66 OutFormatted (OUTF) ...... 5–67 Out Indexed (OUTX) ...... 5–68 Out Least (OUTL) ...... 5–69 Out Most (OUTM) ...... 5–69 Pop (POP) ...... 5–70 Accumulator Logical Instructions...... 5–71 And (AND) ...... 5–71 And Double (ANDD) ...... 5–72 And Formatted (ANDF)...... 5–73 And with Stack (ANDS)...... 5–74 Or (OR) ...... 5–75 Or Double (ORD) ...... 5–76 Or Formatted (ORF) ...... 5–77 Or with Stack (ORS) ...... 5–78 Exclusive Or (XOR) ...... 5–79 Exclusive Or Formatted (XORF)...... 5–81 Exclusive Or with Stack (XORS)...... 5–82 Compare (CMP) ...... 5–83 Compare Double (CMPD)...... 5–84 Compare Formatted (CMPF)...... 5–85 Compare with Stack (CMPS)...... 5–86 Compare Real Number (CMPR)...... 5–87 Math Instructions ...... 5–88 Add (ADD) ...... 5–88 Add Double (ADDD) ...... 5–89 Add Real (ADDR) ...... 5–90 Subtract (SUB) ...... 5–91 Subtract Double (SUBD)...... 5–92 Subtract Real (SUBR) ...... 5–93 Multiply (MUL) ...... 5–94 ix Table of Contents

Multiply Double (MULD)...... 5–95 Multiply Real (MULR) ...... 5–96 Divide (DIV) ...... 5–97 Divide Double (DIVD) ...... 5–98 Divide Real (DIVR) ...... 5–99 Increment (INC) ...... 5–100 Decrement (DEC) ...... 5–100 Add Binary (ADDB) ...... 5–101 Add Binary Double (ADDBD)...... 5–102 Subtract Binary (SUBB)...... 5–103 Subtract Binary Double (SUBBD)...... 5–104 Multiply Binary (MULB)...... 5–105 Divide Binary (DIVB) ...... 5–106 Increment Binary (INCB)...... 5–107 Decrement Binary (DECB)...... 5–108 Add Formatted (ADDF)...... 5–109 Subtract Formatted (SUBF)...... 5–110 Multiply Formatted (MULF)...... 5–111 Divide Formatted (DIVF)...... 5–112 Add Top of Stack (ADDS)...... 5–113 Subtract Top of Stack (SUBS)...... 5–114 Multiply Top of Stack (MULS)...... 5–115 Divide by Top of Stack (DIVS)...... 5–116 Add Binary Top of Stack (ADDBS)...... 5–117 Subtract Binary Top of Stack (SUBBS)...... 5–118 Multiply Binary Top of Stack (MULBS)...... 5–119 Divide Binary by Top OF Stack (DIVBS)...... 5–120 Transcendental Functions...... 5–121 Sine Real (SINR) ...... 5–121 Cosine Real (COSR) ...... 5–121 Tangent Real (TANR) ...... 5–121 Arc Sine Real (ASINR)...... 5–121 Arc Cosine Real (ACOSR)...... 5–122 Arc Tangent Real (ATANR)...... 5–122 Square Root Real (SQRTR)...... 5–122 Bit Operation Instructions...... 5–123 Sum (SUM) ...... 5–123 Shift Left (SHFL) ...... 5–124 Shift Right (SHFR) ...... 5–125 Rotate Left (ROTL) ...... 5–126 Rotate Right (ROTR) ...... 5–127 Encode (ENCO) ...... 5–128 Decode (DECO) ...... 5–129 Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator)...... 5–130 Binary (BIN) ...... 5–130 Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)...... 5–131 Invert (INV) ...... 5–132 Ten’s Complement (BCDCPL)...... 5–133 Binary to Real Conversion (BTOR)...... 5–134 Real to Binary Conversion (RTOB)...... 5–135 Radian Real Conversion (RADR)...... 5–136 x Table of Contents

Degree Real Conversion (DEGR)...... 5–136 ASCII to HEX (ATH) ...... 5–137 HEX to ASCII (HTA) ...... 5–138 Segment (SEG) ...... 5–140 Gray Code(GRAY) ...... 5–141 Shuffle Digits (SFLDGT)...... 5–142 Shuffle Digits Block Diagram...... 5–142 Table Instructions ...... 5–144 Move (MOV) ...... 5–144 Move Memory Cartridge / Load Label (MOVMC) (LDLBL)...... 5–145 Copy Data From a Data Label Area to V Memory...... 5–146 Copy Data From V Memory to a Data Label Area...... 5–147 Set Bit (SETBIT) ...... 5–148 Reset Bit (RSTBIT) ...... 5–148 Fill (FILL) ...... 5–150 Find (FIND) ...... 5–151 Find Greater Than (FDGT)...... 5–152 Table to Destination (TTD)...... 5–154 Remove from Bottom (RFB)...... 5–157 Source to Table (STT)...... 5–160 Remove from Table (RFT)...... 5–163 Add to Top (ATT) ...... 5–166 Table Shift Left (TSHFL)...... 5–169 Table Shift Right (TSHFR)...... 5–169 AND Move (ANDMOV)...... 5–171 OR Move (ORMOV) ...... 5–171 Exclusive OR Move (XORMOV)...... 5–171 Find Block (FINDB) ...... 5–173 Swap (SWAP) ...... 5–174 Clock / Calendar Instructions...... 5–175 Date (DATE) ...... 5–175 Time (TIME) ...... 5–176 CPU Control Instructions...... 5–177 No Operation (NOP) ...... 5–177 End (END) ...... 5–177 Stop (STOP) ...... 5–178 Reset Watch Dog Timer (RSTWT)...... 5–178 Program Control Instructions...... 5–179 Goto Label (GOTO) (LBL)...... 5–179 For / Next (FOR) (NEXT)...... 5–180 Goto Subroutine (GTS) (SBR)...... 5–182 Subroutine Return (RT)...... 5–182 Subroutine Return Conditional (RTC)...... 5–182 Master Line Set (MLS)...... 5–185 Master Line Reset (MLR)...... 5–185 Understanding Master Control Relays...... 5–185 MLS/MLR Example ...... 5–186 Interrupt Instructions ...... 5–187 Interrupt (INT) ...... 5–187 Interrupt Return (IRT)...... 5–188 Interrupt Return Conditional (IRTC)...... 5–188 xi Table of Contents

Enable Interrupts (ENI)...... 5–188 Disable Interrupts (DISI)...... 5–188 Interrupt Example for Interrupt Module...... 5–189 Interrupt Example for Software Interrupt...... 5–190 Intelligent I/O Instructions...... 5–191 Read from Intelligent Module (RD)...... 5–191 Write to Intelligent Module (WT)...... 5–192 Network Instructions ...... 5–193 Read from Network (RX)...... 5–193 Write to Network (WX)...... 5–195 Message Instructions ...... 5–197 Fault (FAULT) ...... 5–197 Fault Example ...... 5–198 Data Label (DLBL) ...... 5–199 ASCII Constant (ACON)...... 5–199 Numerical Constant (NCON)...... 5–199 Data Label Example ...... 5–200 Print Message (PRINT)...... 5–201 MODBUS RTU Instructions (DL260)...... 5–205 MODBUS Read from Network (MRX)...... 5–205 MRX Slave Memory Address...... 5–206 MRX Master Memory Addresses...... 5–206 MRX Number of Elements...... 5–206 MRX Exception Response Buffer...... 5–206 MRX Example ...... 5–207 MODBUS Write to Network (MWX)...... 5–208 MWX Slave Memory Address...... 5–209 MWX Master Memory Addresses...... 5–209 MWX Number of Elements...... 5–209 MWX Exception Response Buffer...... 5–209 MWXExample ...... 5–210 ASCII Instructions (DL260)...... 5–211 Reading ASCII Input Strings...... 5–211 Writing ASCII Output Strings...... 5–211 Managing the ASCII Strings...... 5–211 ASCII Input(AIN) ...... 5–212 ASCII Find (AFIND) ...... 5–216 AFIND Search Example...... 5–217 ASCII Extract (AEX) ...... 5–219 ASCII Compare (CMPV)...... 5–220 ASCII Print to V–memory (VPRINT)...... 5–221 ASCII Print from V–memory (PRINTV)...... 5–226 ASCII Swap Bytes (SWAPB)...... 5–227 Byte Swap Preferences...... 5–227 ASCII Clear Buffer (ACRB)...... 5–228 1 1 Getting Started

In This Chapter. . . . — Introduction — Conventions Used — DL205 System Components — Programming Methods — DirectLOGIC Part Numbering System — Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming — Steps to Designing a Successful System Getting Started 1–2 Technical Support Manuals Supplemental Where toBegin this Manual The Purposeof Introduction DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Getting Started fill outandreturnthe‘Suggestions’cardthatwas shippedwiththismanual. have a throughFridayfrom9:00A.M.to 6:00P.M.Monday EasternStandard Time. Ifyou group isgladtoworkwithyouinansweringyour questions.Theyareavailable youstillneedassistance,pleasecall us at770–844–4200.Ourtechnicalsupport If You canalsocheckouronlineresources forthelatestproductsupportinformation: resources forhelpinlocatingtheinformation: resources arranged We realizethateventhoughwestrivetobethebest,informationmay thismanual withthemanualsthatarewrittenfortheseproducts. supplement If youhavepurchasedoperatorinterfacesor much youcanaccomplishwithourproducts. theDL205familyofproducts.We in suggest handy Specifications”, andproceedontootherchaptersasneeded.Keepthismanual If youalreadyunderstandPLCspleasereadChapter2,“Installation,Wiring,and your systemupandrunning. youneedtostartand keep information systems, ourmanualswillprovideallthe programmer.PLC IfyouunderstandPLC DL205 forpersonnelwhowillinstall information This manualcontainsimportant control system. tointerface themtootherdevicesina how Italsohelpsyouunderstand equipment. how toinstall,program,andmaintainthe of products.Thismanualshowsyou family Thank youforpurchasingourDL205 S S S S for referencewhenyouhavequestions.IfareanewDL205customer, we PLCs andcomponents,for the comment orquestionaboutanyofourproducts,services, ormanuals,please you readthismanualcompletelytounderstandthe Internet Index manual Appendices of thismanual Table ofContents in suchawayyoucannotfindwhatarelookingfor. First,checkthese –alphabeticallistingofkeywords,attheendthismanual –Oradesi http://www.automationdirect.com –Ouraddressis –referencematerialforkeytopics,neartheendofthis –chapterandsectionlistingofcontents,inthefront believe youwillbepleasantlysurprisedwithhow Direct SOFT32, youwillneedto wide varietyoffeatures Getting Started 1–3 1 Getting Started Getting . DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. . . This information could prevent injury, loss of injury, . This information could prevent special tip warning special note in boldface will mark the beginning of the text. in boldface will mark the beginning in boldface will mark the beginning of the text. in boldface will in boldface will mark the beginning of the text. in boldface will WARNING: TIP: NOTE: When icon in the left–hand margin, the paragraph to you see the “exclamation mark” its immediate right will be a The each chapter will list the beginning of in that key topics that can be found chapter. property, or even death (in extreme cases). or even death property, The word When you see the “light bulb” icon in the left–hand margin, the paragraph to its the paragraph left–hand margin, bulb” icon in the see the “light When you immediate a right will give you The word margin, the paragraph to its the “notepad” icon in the left–hand When you see immediate right will be a The word Key Topics for Key Topics Each Chapter Conventions Used Getting Started 1–4 DL205 SystemComponents DL205 Programming Methods Programming Programmer Handheld Windows Programming for Direct I/O Modules I/O Configuration Bases CPUs DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 SOFT32 Getting Started  Ladder Logic)andRLL Ladder aretwoprogrammingmethodsavailabletotheDL205CPUs,RLL(Relay There Severalspecialtyandcommunicationsmodulesarealsoavailable. bipolar). resolution andseveralselectionsofinputoutputsignalranges(including outputs range of The DL205hassomeofthemostpowerfulmodulesinindustry. Acomplete explained inChapter4,SystemDesignandConfiguration. provide abuilt–inmasterforremoteI/Onetworks.Theconfigurationsare can alsobeexpandedbyaddingremoteI/Opoints.TheDL250–1andDL260 can beassignedasinputoroutputpoints.TheDL240,DL250–1andDL260systems supportupto1280localI/Opointswithfourexpansionbases.These can can supportupto768localI/Opointswithtwoexpansionbases.TheDL260 DL230andDL240CPUscansupportupto256localI/O points.TheDL250–1 The existing non(–1)basesifnecessary. Allconfigurations. local Four CPU SpecificationsandOperation. local instructions, 16PIDloopswithautotuningandupto4basesof trigonometric and DL260featuresASCIIIN/OUTandextendedMODBUScommunications,table The built inPIDloopswithautomatictuningand2basesoflocalexpansioncapability. advanced diagnostics.TheDL250–1featuresdrumtimers,floating–pointmath,4 offers alargeamountofprogrammemory, asubstantial instruction set and DL250–1 andDL260.AllCPUsincludebuilt-incommunicationports.EachCPU arefourfeatureenhancedCPUsinthisproductline,theDL230,DL240, There ofthemajorDL205systemcomponents. summary offers normally onlyfoundinlarger, moreexpensivesystems.Themodulardesignalso The CPUsaresmall,butofferpackage. compact extremely manyinstructions an DL205familyisaversatileproductlinethatprovideswidevarietyoffeaturesin The software packages intheindustry–– The DL205canbeprogrammedwithoneofthe mostadvancedprogramming Handheld Programmeris available. debug yourapplicationprogram.Aseparatemanual thatdiscussestheDL205 and (D2–HPP).Thehandheldprogrammer canbeusedtocreate,modify programmer All DL205CPUshave a built-inprogrammingportforusewiththe handheld discusses the any newCPUswemayaddtoourproductline. Thereisaseparatemanualthat Direct programming packageandthehandheldprogrammersupportRLL programming supports the multiple applicationprogramsatthesametime, etc. cut andpastebetweenapplications,point click editing,viewingandediting base sizesareavailable:3,4,6and9slot.The(–1)bases(withaconnectorfor expansion ontherightside)canserveinlocal,localandremoteI/O expansion. DetailsoftheseCPUfeaturesandmorearecoveredinChapter3, more flexibilityinthefastmovingindustryofcontrolsystems.Thefollowingisa SOFT32 SOFT32 (subject toderating)areoffered. Theanalogmodules discrete moduleswhichsupport24 package thatsupportsmanyWindows-features Direct Direct package toprogramDL05,DL06,DL105,DL205, DL305,DL405or bases includeabuilt-inpower LOGIC SOFT32 programmingsoftware. PLUS  Direct CPUfamilies.Thismeansyoucanusethe

(Stage SOFT32.

Programming). Boththe Programming). VDC, 110/220 V Direct supply. The SOFT32 isaWindows-based Direct you alreadyknow AC andupto10Arelay (–1) bases provide 12and16bit SOFT32 universally Direct

and Stage. can replace , suchas SOFT32 same Getting Started 1–5 Stepper Motor RS232C RS232/422 Convertor (max.50ft/16.2m) Drive Operator Interface Amplifier Pulse Output Getting Started Getting DL305 Simple Motion Control High–speed Edge timing High–speed Edge Pulse train output (up to 50KHz Pulse train output DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Flexible solutions in one package Flexible solutions High-speed counting (up to 100 KHz) High-speed counting (max. Handheld Programmer 6.5ft / 2m) DL260 with H2–CTRIO High Speed I/O Module DL260 with H2–CTRIO Simple programming through the RLL Program DCM Networking RS422 DL405 DL250–1 or DL260 DL240 RS232C Programming or Computer Interface (max.50ft/16.2m) Control Thethe DL205 of and configurations the major components below shows diagram system. for building your components show specific The next two pages system. Machine Elevators Packaging Conveyors RS232/422 Convertor DL240 RS232C (max.50ft/16.2m) Programming or Computer Interface Handheld Programmer DL205 System Diagrams Getting Started 1–6 DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Getting Started DC INPUT 32pt 5–15 VDC 2t24VDC 32pt 24VDC 16pt p 12–24VDC 8pt DC OUTPUT Filler Module Temperature Input Communications Remote Slaves Remote Masters CPU Slotcontrollers High SpeedCounters SPECIALTY MODULES 2t12–24VDC 32pt 12–24VDC 16pt p 12–24VDC 8pt 12–24VDC 4pt 4 Commons 2 Commons Direct

LOGIC ming forWindows Direct Handheld Programmer PROGRAMMING AC INPUT with Built-inRLL 6t110 VAC 16pt SOFT32 Program- p 110 VAC 8pt AC OUTPUT 2t18–110 VAC 12pt p 18–220VAC 8pt DL205Family BASES DL260 –15.8KBuilt-inFlashMemory DL250–1 –7.6KBuilt-inFlashMemory DL240 –2.5KBuilt-inEEPROMMemory DL230 –2.0KBuilt-inEEPROMMemory CPUs 2 commons PLUS 9 SlotBase,110/220VAC, 24VDC, 125VDC 6 SlotBase,110/220VAC, 24VDC, 125VDC 4 SlotBase,110/220VAC, 24VDC 3 SlotBase,110/220VAC, 24VDC 4IN/2OUT ANALOG 8CH OUTPUT INPUT 8 CH C OUTPUT 2CH INPUT 4CH available) (isolated pts.module RELAY OUTPUT 2t5–30VDC 12pt p 5–30VDC 8pt 5–30VDC 4pt 5–240VAC 5 –240VAC 5–240VAC 1–7 Getting Started

DirectLOGIC Part Numbering System Getting Started

As you examine this manual, you will notice there are many different products available. Sometimes it is difficult to remember the specifications for any given product. However, if you take a few minutes to understand the numbering system, it may save you some time and confusion. The charts below show how the part numbering systems work for each product category. Part numbers for accessory items such as cables, batteries, memory cartridges, etc. are typically an abbreviation of the description for the item.

CPUs Specialty CPUs Product family D0/F0 D4– 440DC –1 D1/F1 D2/F2 D3/F3 D4/F4 Class of CPU / Abbreviation 230...,330...,430... Denotes a differentiation between –1, –2, –3, –4 Similar modules D3– 05B DC Bases Product family D2/F2 D3/F3 D4/F4 Number of slots ##B Type of Base DC or empty D4– 16 N D 2 F

D3– 16 N D 2 –1

Discrete I/O DL05/06 Product Family D0/F0 DL205 PProduct d t ffamily il D2/F2 DL305 Product family D3/F3 DL405 Product family D4/F4 Number of points 04/08/12/16/32 Inputp N Outputp T Combination C AC A DC D Either E Relay R Current Sinkingg 1 Current Sourcingg 2 Current Sinking/Sourcing 3 Highg Current H Isolation S Fast I/O F Denotes a differentiation between –1, –2, –3, –4 Similar modules

DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 Getting Started 1–8 CoProcessors andASCIIBASICModules Name Abbreviation DL405 Productfamily DL305 Productfamily DL205 Productfamily Programming Special I/OandDevices Communication andNetworking Similar modules Denotes adifferentiation between Isolated Combination Output (DigitaltoAnalog) Input (AnalogtoDigital) Number ofchannels il DL405 Productfamily f t family Product DL305 d P DL205 Productfamily DL05/06 Analog I/O Telephone modem Radio modem 512K memory 128K memory 64Kmemory ASCII BASIC CoProcessor DL405 Productfamily DL305 Productfamily DL205 Productfamily (gg) g g p( ( g) p(g

DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Product Getting Started y y

family y y T R 512 128 64 AB CP D4/F4 D3/F3 D2/F2 see example D4/F4 D3/F3 D2/F2 –1, –2,–3,–4 S AND DA AD 02/04/08/16 D4/F4 D3/F3 D2/F2 D0/F0 3 HPP D3– HSC D3– DCM D4– 4 P18–R – 128 CP F4– 3 4A –1 S AD 04 F3– HSC (HighSpeedCounter) DCM (DataCommunicationModule) HPP (RLLPLUSHandheldProgram- mer) such as:J,K, T, R,SorE note: –nindicatesthermocoupletype using abbreviations Alternate exampleof Analog I/O o 3 8THM 08 F3– –n Getting Started 1–9 Getting Started Getting SOFT32 Manual, and a Direct DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. SOFT32 Programming Software, SOFT32 Programming Software, L205 equipment and verify you have the parts necessary to build this and verify you have the parts necessary L205 equipment Base CPU simulator module input module or a F2–08SIM input D2–16ND3–2 DC output module D2–16TD1–2 DC *Power cord *Hook up wire the input simulator module) *A 24 VDC toggle switch (if not using Phillips type regular or *A screwdriver, Direct programming cable (connects the CPU to a personal computer), or programming cable (connects the and the Handheld Programmer Manual D2–HPP Handheld Programmer S S S S S S S S S S If is example, this section to setup a quick PLCs, or want experience with you have what to to explain everything needed use. This example is not intended you want to start-up general picture of what is It is only intended to provide a your system. system powered-up. needed to get your Unpack the D demonstration are as follows: system. The minimum parts needed with your PLC. * These items are not supplied programming options: will need at least one of the following You Step 1: Unpack the Step 1: Unpack DL205 Equipment Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming and PLC Validation Start for Quick Getting Started 1–10 Simulation Step 4:AddI/O Access Cover Terminal Strip Step 3:Remove Modules CPU andI/O Step 2:Installthe DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Getting Started provides alistofI/Owiring guidelines. CPU terminalstripasshown. Chapter2,Installation,Wiring,andSpecifications input module(X0)tothe toggleswitchand24VDCauxiliarypowersupply onthe ensure apointisnotaccidentally turnedonduringthewiringoperation. Wirethe Wire theswitchesorother fielddevicespriortoapplyingpowerthe system to status, anydiscreteoutputmodulewillwork. physical inputsforcheckingoutthesystemoranewprogram.To monitoroutput and addanoutputmodule.Usinginputsimulatoristhequickestwaytoget toinstallaninput simulatormodule(orwireaninputswitchasshownbelow), need To finishthisquickstartexerciseorstudyotherexamplesinmanual,youwill the basepowersupply. stripofclearplastic thatislocatedon small terminal strip cover.the Remove Itisa PowerbudgetingisalsodiscussedinChapter4. configuration. sure youdonotexceedthepowerbudgetforeachbaseinyoursystem discussedinChapter4,SystemDesignandConfiguration.Youare mustalsomake CPUandtheinputmoduleinnext.Li the slot in of Placement (adjacent tothepowersupply). (adjacent Insert S S S S pushing intheretainerclips. Secure theunittobaseby is firmlyseatedinthebackplane. Gently pushtheunitbackuntilit lower guides. slide itinusingtheupperand With theunitsquaretobase, module. position beforeinstallingthe the retainerclipstoout clip atthetopandbottom.Slide Each unithasaplasticretaining the CPUandI/Ointobase.Themustgofirstslotofbase any base,howeverforthisexample,installtheoutputmoduleinslotnextto discrete, analogandrelaymodulesarenotcriticalmay go in any Toggle switch Lift off miting factorsforothertypesofmodules Retaining Clips Module Output Module Input in firstslot! mustreside CPU Getting Started 1–11 Y0 END TERM position Getting Started Getting X0 Line Ground Neutral DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. position (250–1 / 260 only) and then back to position (250–1 / 260 only) and then ENT ENT This puts the CPU in the program mode and allows access to the This puts the CPU in the program 2 1 C B It is not necessary for you to configure the I/O for this system since the DL205 It is not necessary for you to configure STR OUT GX $ the switch on the CPU to the STOP the switch on the CPU to the STOP entering the simple example program slide the switch from the entering the simple example program slide the switch from the Handheld Programmer Keystrokes After CPU program. The PGM indicator should be illuminated on the HPP. Enter the should be illuminated on the HPP. CPU program. The PGM indicator following keystrokes on the HPP: NOTE: installed modules and establishes the correct CPUs automatically examine any configuration. Apply power to the system and ensure the PWR indicator on the CPU is on. If not, Apply power to the system and ensure remove the system and check all wiring and refer to the troubleshooting power from section in Chapter 9 for assistance. Slide the TERM position. Connect the D2–HPP to the top port (RJ Connect the D2–HPP the using CPU of the style phone jack) appropriate cable. to The RUN indicator on the CPU will come on the RUN position and back to TERM. 8 insuring the indicating the CPU has entered the run mode. If not repeat Step program guide in chapter 9. is entered properly or refer to the troubleshooting output module During Run mode operation, the output status indicator “0” on the should be on. should reflect the switch status. When the switch is on the output Connect the wires as shown. Observe all the wires as shown. Connect precautions manual. earlier in this stated see Chapter 2, on wiring For details Specifications. Wiring, and Installation, is complete, replace the When the wiring covers. Do not apply CPU and module power at this time. Step 8: Enter the Program Step 7: Switch On the System Power Step 6: Connect the Handheld Programmer Step 5: Connect Step 5: Wiring the Power Getting Started 1–12 Characteristics and Wiring Specifications Module Determine theI/O Step 4: Configurations I/O System Understand the Step 3: Procedures CPU Setup Understand the Step 2: Guidelines Installation Review the Step 1: Steps toDesigningaSuccessfulSystem System Operation Understand the Step 5: DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Getting Started manual. manualsandarenotincludedinthis own NOTE: modules. and wiringdiagramsforthediscreteI/O Chapter 2providesthespecifications available withtheDL205system. aremanydifferentThere I/Omodules options. configuration can affect yourI/Oplacementand/or system also importanttounderstandhowthe local I/Osystemcanbeconfigured.It is It isimportanttounderstandhowyour setup requirements. thevariousfeatures and understand system. Makesureyoutaketimeto CPUistheheartofyourautomation The components. guidelines forthevarioussystem This chapteralsoincludeswiring provide asafer, morereliablesystem. provides any systemapplication.Chapter2 Always makesafetyyourfirstpriorityin information. SeeChapter3formore characteristics. modes ofoperationandmemory layout steps, butalsoinvolvesthevarious This DL205 systemprocessesinformation. very helpfultounderstandhow the Before involves notonl Specialtymoduleshavetheir you begintoenteraprogram,it is Power Budgetiscalculated.This several guidelinesthatwillhelp y program execution Initialize hardware Check I/Omodule config. andverify Power up Input 16pt X17 X0 - Input 8pt X27 X20 - Output 8pt Y7 Y0 - Getting Started 1–13 K10 CNT CT3 Getting Started Getting PID Process (see Chapter 8) PID Loop Operation K30 – PV ) is based on state-transition S Timer/Event Drum Sequencer Timer/Event TMR T1 Plus + DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. SP UP Y0 OUT Push– RAISE DOWN LDD V1076 CMPD K309482 LIGHT ures can occur at any time. (see Chapter 7) etc. In most cases, the majority LOWER Push–UP (see Chapter 5) Chapter 6) (see Stage Programming diagrams. Stages divide the ladder program into sections which divide the ladder program into diagrams. Stages states in a flow chart of your process. correspond to the to configure 16 loops. Loop Operation uses setup tables The DL260 PID uses setup tables to configure 4 The DL250–1 PID Loop Operation alarms, SP ramp/soak generation, loops. Features include; auto tuning, and more. RLL diagram-style programming is the best tool for solving boolean logic tool for solving is the best programming RLL diagram-style dozens It includes manipulation. CPU register/accumulator and general and loops. will augment drums, stages, of instructions, which drum types, each with DL260 have four timer/event The DL250–1 and step transitions. both time and/or event-based offer up to 16 steps. They a single series of for a repetitive process based on Drums are best steps. (also called RLL Stage programming S S S S X0 Standard RLL Programming SP62 DOWN Once you have installed the system and understand the theory of operation, you can choose from one of the most powerful instruction sets available. Equipment fail Switches fail, batteries need to be replaced, of the troubleshooting and maintenance time is spent trying to locate the problem. The DL205 system has many built-in features identify that help you quickly problems. Refer to Chapter 9 for diagnostics and troubleshooting tips. The DL205 provides four main approaches to solving the application program, the application to solving main approaches provides four The DL205 next figure. depicted in the the PID loop task including Step 8: Understand the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Procedures Step 7: Choose the Instructions Step 6: the Review Programming Concepts 1 2 Installation, Wiring, and Specifications

In This Chapter. . . . — Safety Guidelines — Mounting Guidelines — Installing DL205 Bases — Installing Components in the Base — Base Wiring Guidelines — I/O Wiring Strategies — I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specifications — Glossary of Specification Terms Installation and Installation, Wiring,

Safety Guidelines and Specifications 2–2 Approval Class 1,Division2 Safety Techniques Plan forSafety Guidelines Safety DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications WARNING: or non–hazardouslocationsonly. This listed belowwillfurtherhelpreducetheriskofsafety problems. safety. Ataminimum,youshouldfollowtheseregulations.Usingthe techniques The publicationsmentionedprovidemanyideas andrequirementsforsystem fromthefollowingsources. information not haveestablishedinstallationguidelines,youshouldobtainadditional youarenotfamiliarwithPLCsysteminstallationpractices,oryourcompanydoes If the systemtodeterminewhichareasarecriticaloperatorormachinesafety. equipment The bestwaytoprovideasafeoperatingenvironmentismakepersonneland requirementsfortheproper installationanduseofyourequipment. government your particularapplication.Makesureyoufollowallnational,state,andlocal Every automationapplicationisdifferent, sotheremaybespecialrequirementsfor personal injuryordamage. PLCapplicationtoprovideprotectionforany part ofthesystemthatmaycause the electromechanical system alonetoprovideasafeoperatingenvironment.You shoulduseexternal serious installation. your responsibilityandshouldbeprimarygoalduringsystemplanning WARNING: equipment issuitableforuseinClass1,Division2, Zone2,groupsA,B,CandD • • • • S • • injury topersonnelordamageequipment.Donotrelyontheautomation area isknowntobenon–hazardous. Do notdisconnectequipment unlesspowerhasbeenswitchedoff orthe Zone 2. Substitution ofcomponents mayimpairsuitabilityforClass1,Division2, Emergency stopswitchfordisconnectingsystem power. Orderly systemshutdownsequenceinthePLC control program. Inspector orFireMarshalloffice forinformation. described intheNECHandbook.CheckwithyourlocalElectrical governments haveadditionalrequirementsaboveandbeyondthose Local andStateAgencies—manylocalgovernmentsstate equipment distributororyourlocallibrary. of theNECHandbookcanoftenbeobtainedfromyourlocalelectrical the installationanduseofvarioustypeselectricalequipment.Copies NEC —TheNationalElectricalCodeprovidesregulationsconcerning ICS 6,EnclosuresforIndustrialControlSystems ICS 3,IndustrialSystems ICS 1,GeneralStandardsforIndustrialControlandSystems publications directlyfromNEMA.Someoftheseinclude: standards forindustrialcontrolsystems.You canorderthese Washington, D.C.,publishesmanydifferent documentsthatdiscuss NEMA —TheNationalElectricalManufacturersAssociation,locatedin safety partoftheplanningprocess.You shouldexamine

Automation systemscanfailandmayresultinsituationsthatcause Providing asafeoperatingenvironmentforpersonnelandequipmentis Explosion Hazard: devices, suchasrelaysorlimitswitches,thatareindependentof every aspectof Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–3 system system all all RST RST Arm Saw Retract Turn off Turn Saw Relay Arbor Master Limit Guard Jam To disconnect PLC Power To Output Module Detect Power On Use E-Stop and Master Relay Master Relay Contacts DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. E STOP Relay Relay Master Master Contacts Contacts must Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, module power machine operations from occurring. To disconnect output To any Stop Emergency switch. that must be met before the PLC control program can be restarted. For that must be met before the PLC control program can be restarted. The control program The control program ove the part, you must include a bypass switch to disconnect ove the part, you must include a bypass your application and identify any and identify your application Emergency shutdown or any other type of power interruption, there may be Emergency shutdown or any other type of power interruption, there be the only form of protection for any be the only form not problemsin a risk of that may result equipment damage. personal injury or WARNING: WARNING: The first level of protection can be level of protection The first program with the PLC control provided problems. machine by identifying Analyze that must be shutdown sequences problems are performed.Typical jammed parts, empty bins, or missing pose a risk of personal etc. that do not damage. injury or equipment power. This is accomplished with a mechanical device clearly labeled as an This is accomplished with a mechanical device clearly labeled power. Emergency Stop power any time the guard is opened. The also have a quick method of manually disconnecting operator must After an After an requirements established (or example, there may be specific register values that must be maintainedfrom the state prior to the shutdown) before operations can resume. In constants in this case, you may want to use retentive memory locations, or include the control program to ensure a known starting point. By using electromechanical devices, such as master control relays and/or limit By using electromechanical devices, equipment startup. When installed properly, switches, you can prevent accidental these devices will prevent For can turn off if the machine has a jammed part, the PLC control program example, must open the since the operator However, the saw blade and retract the arbor. rem guard to Guard Limit Switch System Power Disconnect Orderly System Orderly Shutdown Installation and Installation, Wiring,

Safety Guidelines and Specifications 2–4 Base Dimensions Mounting Guidelines DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 with D2–DSCBL–1 base exp.unitcable ZIPLink cableor 9-slot 6-slot 4-slot 3-slot Base with 32pt. 12 or16ptI/O on port2 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications 4 or8pt.I/O DIN EN50022. DIN Railslot.Userailconformingto with with A (BaseTotal Width) Inches 14.09” 10.43” 7.99” 6.77” followed theinstallationguidelinesforproperspacing. module.Thelengthvariesasthenumberofslotsincrease.Makesureyouhave I/O isthe dimension The followinginformationshowsthepropermountingdimensions.height manual todeterminehowthoseunitscanaffect mountingdimensions. NOTE: dimcomponent considered.Thediagrams onthefollowingpagesprovide components Before installingthePLCsystemyouwillneedtoknowdimensionsof to leaveroomforpotentialexpansion. Millime- 358mm 265mm 203mm 172mm (75mm) ters (113mm) (92mm) (148mm) 2.95” Ifyouareusingothercomponentsinyoursystem,refertotheappropriate 3.62” 4.45” 5.85” B (MountingHole) Inches ensions touseindefining 13.74” 10.07” 7.63” 6.41” same forallbases.Thedepthvariesdependingonyourchoiceof Millimeters (90mm) 349mm 256mm 194mm 163mm 3.54” C (ComponentWidth) with D2–EMExpansionUnit Inches 13.14” 9.48” 7.04” 5.8” your enclosure specifications.Remember Millimeters 334mm 241mm 179mm 148mm A C B D D (Width withExp.Unit) Inches 14.56” 10.90” 8.46” 7.24” (76mm) 2.99” Millimeters 370mm 277mm 215mm 184mm Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–5 insure proper à application to application clearance between the panel door and the nearest DL205 component for the Note: there is a minimum of 2” (50mm) or any devices mounted in the panel door 2” min. 50mm DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev.  Ground Panel or 2” min. Single Point 50mm  2” min. ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Ä 50mm Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation,  BUS Bar Ç Copper Lugs Ground Braid Star Washers inimum clearance of 2” (50mm) between the base and all sides all and base the inimum clearance of 2” (50mm) between DL205 CPU Base À À must be a minimum of 2” (50mm) clearance between the panel door must be a minimum of 2” (50mm) The cabinet configuration below is not suitable for EU installations. The cabinet configuration below Å Earth Ground and the nearest DL205 component. Note: Directives. Refer to Appendix F European Union 7.2” (183mm) between bases. be at least 1.2” (30mm) of clearance of the cabinet. There should also ducts. between the base and any wiring 2” min.  ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Æ comply with all appropriate electrical codes and standards. It is important the and standards. electrical codes all appropriate comply with 50mm 1. to provide proper ventilation. Mount the bases horizontally 2. If of you place more than one base in a cabinet, there should be a minimum 3. m Provide a 4. There  performance. the items in the following list. The diagrams below reference It is important to design your panel properly to help ensure the DL205 products the DL205 to help ensure your panel properly to design It is important operateThe system installation limits. and electrical their environmental within should the operating standards conforms to system also Probe Terminal Panel Ground Temperature OK Airflow È Star Washers Power Source      Panel Ç Panel Mounting and Layout Installation and Installation, Wiring,

Safety Guidelines and Specifications 2–6 Enclosures DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications require additionalfeatures.Theminimumconsiderationsforenclosuresinclude: require ofyourDL205system.Applicationssystems vary andmay operation Your selectionofaproperenclosureisimportanttoensuresafeand proper 6. There must There 6. ThegroundterminalontheDL205basemustbeconnectedtoasingle 5. .Properlyevaluateanyinstallationswhere theambienttemperaturemay 7. .Devicemountingboltsandgroundbraid terminationboltsshouldbe#10 8. S • • • • • • DL205systemisdesignedto The 9. single pointground. to achievea0.1ohmofDCresistancebetweentheDL205baseand is usecopperlugsandstarwashersatterminationpoints.Ageneralrule and wiretoensure stranded Copper eyelugsshouldbecrimpedandsolderedtotheendsof point ground.Usecopperstrandedwiretoachievealowimpedance. within the the ambienttemperaturehasstabilized.Ifisnot temperature thelower orupperlimitsofthespecifications.Placea approach be connectedtothepanelgroundtermination. panelrequiringanearthgroundreturn.Thesinglepointofmust the copper withintheDL205operatingspecifications. temperature installing acooling/heatingsourcemustbetakentogettheambient Sufficient spaceforproperinstallationandmaintenance ofequipment Security orrestrictedaccess Access toequipment Maintenance ofspecified ambienttemperature Common groundreference Protection fromtheelementsinanindustrialenvironment Conformance toelectricalstandards These unitsinstalleasilybetweenthepowersource andthePLC. www.automationdirect.com), however, you 240 VAC, 1–5Amps,isanexellentchoice (canbelocatedat noise.TheAutomati EMI/RFI recommendedforprotectingtheDL205PLCs frompowersurgesand are stable andstormscancausepowersurges.Duetothis,powerlinefilters Electrical 125 VDCnormallyavailablethroughoutanindustrialenvironment. in theareaofcontact. areas should be connection panelgroundterminationmustbeconnectedtoearthground.Forthis The b) Connectiontoincomingpowersystemground. a) Installingagroundrodasclosetothepanelpossible. adequate commongroundreference,including: oftheDL205.Thereareseveralmethodsprovidingan operation A goodcommongroundreference(Earthground)isessentialforproper comply withappropriateelectricalcodesandstandardsforyourregion. wiresizes,colorcoding,andgeneralsafetypracticesshould Minimum impediments suchaspaint,coatingor bolts orequivalent.T power insomeareaswherethePLCsareinstalledisnotalways operating specification used wheneverpossible.To assuregoodcontactontermination you shoulduse#12AWG be asinglepointground(i.e.copperbusbar)foralldevicesin probe inthepanel,closedoorandoperatesystemuntil good surfacecontact.Removeanodizedfinishes apped holesinsteadofnut–boltarrangements on PowerlineFilter, for theDL205system,measuressuchas be poweredby1 stranded copperwireasaminimum. can useafilterofyourchoice. corrosion shouldberemoved for usewith120VACand 10/220 V AC, 24VDC,or Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines C) 2–7 C). ° ° to 50 to70 ° ° F (0 ° F (–20 ° to 122 ° C) to 158 ° ° C) ° 125 VDC Powered Bases hat generally apply to the hat generally D2–06BDC2–1, D2–09BDC2–1 104–240 VDC +10% –15% 20A 30W 20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p 300mA max. non–replaceable 2A @ 250V slow blow fuse; external fus- ing recommended C to 70 ° C to 55 ° F (–20 F (0 ° ° DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. tic floor coverings, etc. if you use the equipment in tic floor coverings, etc. if you use the equipment F to 158 F to 131 ° ° Rating –4 32 humidity (non–condensing) 30% – 95% relative 514.2 MIL STD 810C, Method 516.2 MIL STD 810C, Method NEMA (ICS3–304) No corrosive gases Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, 24 VDC Powered Bases D2–03BDC1–1, D2–04BDC1–1, D2–06BDC1–1, D2–09BDC1–1 10.2 – 28.8VDC (24VDC) with less than 10% ripple 10A 25W None non–replaceable 3.15A @ 250V slow blow fuse; exter- nal fusing recommended at 500 VDC W depending on the ambient temperature and your application. Please refer your application. temperature and on the ambient depending UL (Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.) CSA (Canadian Standards Association) FM (Factory Mutual Research Corporation) CUL (Canadian Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.) AC Powered Bases temperature for the Handheld Programmer and the DV–1000 is –4 temperature for the Handheld Programmer • • • S 20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p 300mA max. non–replaceable 2A @ 250V slow blow fuse; external fus- ing recommended D2–03B–1, D2–04B–1, D2–06B–1, D2–09B–1 100–240 VAC +10% –15% 30 A 80 VA run relay field ground, and secondary, between primary, 1 minute @ 1500 VAC > 10 M Shock resistance Noise immunity Atmosphere Specification Storage temperature temperature* Ambient operating Ambient humidity** resistance Vibration Storage The t environmental specifications table lists the following Handheld vary for the The ranges that I/O Modules). (CPU, Bases, DL205 system Programmeroperation may I/O module of this chart. noted at the bottom are fluctuate the temperature derating curves I/O module specifications for to the appropriate modules. applying to specific Some applications require agency approvals. Typical agency approvals which your SomeTypical applications require agency approvals. application may require are: *Handheld Programmer and the DV–1000 is 32 Operating temperature for the Thewith must be capable of supplying voltage and current complying power source the base power supply specifications. **Equipment will operate below 30% humidity. However, static electricity problems occur much more static electricity problems However, below 30% humidity. will operate **Equipment the touch you when precautions adequate take humidity levels. Make sure you at lower frequently Consider using ground straps, anti-sta equipment. low humidity environments. Specification Fusing (internal to base power supply) Insulation Resistance Auxiliary 24 VDC Output Maximum Power WithstandVoltage (dielectric) Input Voltage Range Input Voltage Maximum Inrush Current Part Numbers Agency Approvals Power Environmental Specifications Installation and Installation, Wiring,

Safety Guidelines and Specifications 2–8 Dimensions Component DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 (72mm) 2.83 ” with D2–DSCBL–1 base exp.unitcable ZIPLink cableor with 32pt. 12 or16ptI/O Direct Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications on port2 4 or8pt.I/O (125mm) with with (130mm) 4.92 ” VIEW 1000 5.12 ” for eachcomponent. Remember toleave Remember component inyoursystem.The diagramsonthefollowingpagesprovide components Before installingyourPLCsystemyouwillneedtoknowthedimensionsfor appropriate appropriate NOTE: (75mm) (113mm) (92mm) (148mm) 2.95” If youareusingothercomponentsinyour 3.62” 4.45” 5.85” (34mm) (26mm) 1.03 ” 1.34 ” dimensions andshouldbeusedtodefineyourenclosurespecifications. manual todeterminehowthoseunitscanaffect mountingdimensions. DIN Railslot. (67mm) 2.64 ” room forpotentialexpansion.AppendixE (12.7mm) I/O modulesinBase 0.5” (44.5mm) (75mm) 1.75” Handheld programmercable (88.9mm) (50.8mm) 3.5” 6.6 ft.(2m) 2” We recommend4inches. reach theaddressswitchonback. you maywanttoallowforhandroom removing panelsforamulti-drop,then power connector. Ifyouwillbeaddingor behind thepanelforserialcable,and Note (Large panelrearviewshown) : Spaceallowanceshouldbemade 90 mm 3.54 ” system, make Optimation Units (241.3mm) (213.3mm) 9.5” 8.4” 30.8 mm 1.21”

provides theweights sure yourefertothe (101.6m 4” m Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–9 I/O Slots DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, CPU Slot abs of the base. The full mounting dimensions are given in the abs of the base. The full mounting To minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or equipment risk of electrical shock, personal injury, minimize the To Connections Power Wiring Number of I/O modules required DC power) Input power requirement (AC or power budget Available • • S WARNING: WARNING: damage, removing any always disconnect the system power before installing or system component. Your choice of base depends on three things. Your may use any of the base configurations. The All I/O configurations of the DL205 panel or mounting location using four M4 bases are secured to the equipment t corner the screws in The DL205 system offers four different sizes of bases and three different power different bases and three sizes of different four system offers The DL205 supply options. base. shows an example of a 6-slot The following diagram previous section on Mounting Guidelines. Mounting Tabs Mounting the Base Choosing the Base Choosing Type Installing DL205 Bases DL205 Installing Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–10 Safety Guidelines and Specifications Rails Using Mounting DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications pull itawayfromtherail. To removethebase,pulldownonretainingclips,liftup onthebaseslightly, and clips. Theclipslockthebaseontorail. basetoaDINrail,placetheontorailandgentlypushuponretaining the If youexaminethebottomofbase,you’llnoticesmallretainingclips.To secure minimize thepossibilityofaccidentallypullingwiringloose. brackets helpkeepthebasefromslidinghorizontallyalongrail.Thishelps you shouldalsoconsiderusingendbracketsoneachoftherail.The approximately35mmhigh,withadepthof7.5mm.Ifyoumountthebaseonrail, are complete lineofDINrail,DINnectorsandrailmountedapparatus.Theserails should DL205basescanalsobesecuredtothecabinetbyusingmountingrails.YouThe DIN RailDimensions use railsthatconformtoDINENstandard50022.Referourcatalogfora 7.5mm 35 mm Retaining Clips Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–11 Push the retaining to the DL205 base DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. clips in to secure the module Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, slots in base and slide in Align module PC board to Minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or equipment personal injury, Minimize the risk of electrical shock, be positioned in of the base. Push the module straight into the base until it is firmly seated in the module straight into the base of the base. Push must WARNING: WARNING: damage, power before installing or removing any always disconnect the system system component. To insert components into the base: first slide the module retaining clips to the out module retaining first slide the into the base: insert components To with the grooves on the top and the PC board(s) of the module position and align bottom base, push in the the module is inserted into the Once the backplane connector. base. firmly secure the module to the retaining clips to the first slot of the base CPU CPU Installing Components in the Base Components Installing Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–12 Safety Guidelines and Specifications Base Wiring WiringBase Guidelines DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications the wiringorterminals. thecoverisremovedthereariskofelectricalshockifyouaccidentally touch When WARNING: N Direct not requiredaswithsomeoftheother Specialwiringorjumpersare terminals. VAC or220VAC supplytotheAC NOTE: torque the connectorscrews;recommended size.Donotovertighten recommended typeofwireused,but16AWGthe isthe able touselargerwiringdependingon can acceptupto16AWG. You maybe of theDL205bases.Thebaseterminals connections The diagramsshowtheterminal • m). 12/24 VDCBaseTerminal Strip LOGIC value is You canconnecteithera115 Once thepowerwiringisconnected,installplasticprotectivecover. located onthepowersupply  products. 7.81 pound-inches(0.882 12 –24VDC + – LG G 110/220 VAC BaseTerminal Strip 125 VDCBaseTerminal Strip + – 85 –264VAC 24 VDCOUT + – 115 –264VDC 24 VDCOUT 0.3A 0.3A LG G LG G Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–13 Inputs Outputs Field Side Isolation Boundary that a fault in one Input Module Module Output Supply for Output Circuit Output Module Outputs Backplane (backplane) (backplane) DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Field Side Input Module Inputs Commons Commons Logic side Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, CPU Logic side When wiring a PLC, it is extremely important to avoid When wiring a PLC, it is extremely Electrical isolation provides safety, so so provides safety, Electrical isolation Programming Device, Programming Operator Interface, or Network CPU Comm. Internal Main Power Supply To Programming To Device, Operator Interface, Network By studying this section before actual installation, you can probably section before actual installation, By studying this PLC damage another. A powerline filter will provide isolation between the will provide isolation between A powerline filter damage another. PLC DL205 the drawing below. the drawing below. Isolation Boundary optical isolation in Input and Output circuits. This isolates logic circuitry from Input and Output circuits. This isolates optical isolation in best wiring strategy for your application . This will help to lower system cost, for your application . This will best wiring strategy ults or field wiring faults. Filter Primary SidePrimary or Secondary, Main Power Supply Supply Auxiliary +24VDC Power Input area not does provides A transformer in the power supply the power supply. power source and secondary sides. Opto-couplers between the primary and magnetic isolation provide Note the discrete inputs are factory machinery connects. the field side, where isolated is isolated from the logic side. discrete outputs, because each from the operator interface (and the operator) from power Isolation boundaries protect the input fa The of a DL205 PLC system, as viewed from next figure shows the physical layout the and 125VDC front. In addition to the basic circuits covered above, AC-powered power supply with its own isolation boundary. bases include an auxiliary +24VDC from the other three circuits, it can power input Since the supply output is isolated and/or output circuits! The DL205 PLC system is very flexible and will work in many different wiring in many different and will work is very flexible PLC system The DL205 configurations. find the avoid safety problems. wiring errors, and by isolation boundaries, into three main regions separated PLC circuitry is divided shown in connect logic side circuits to any other. making external connections that Filter +24VDC Out Primary SidePrimary or Secondary, Power Input PLC Isolation Boundaries I/O Wiring Strategies I/O Wiring Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–14 Safety Guidelines and Specifications Auxiliary Supply Circuits withthe Powering I/O DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications able topowerbothcircuitsasshowninthefollowingdiagram. input devicesANDoutputloadsneed+24VDCpower, theauxiliarysupplymaybe All ACpoweredand125VDCDL205basesfeaturetheinternalauxiliarysupply. If use the+24VDCauxiliarysupply. yourapplication,youmaybeabletoselectanddesigninfielddeviceswhichcan for careful savings foryourcontrolsystem.Itcanpowercombinedloadsup to 300mA. Be In somecases,usingthebuilt-inauxiliary+24VDCsupplycanresultinacost DC-powered applicationsisshowninthefollowingdiagram. DC-powered output loadstypicallyusethesameDCpowersource.Typical wiringfor vehicles, portablemachines,etc.Forthisapplicationtype,allinputdevicesand range ofbattery–poweredapplications,suchasremotely-locatedcontrol,in which l 12/24VDC poweredDL205basesaredesignedforapplicationenvironmentsin ow-voltage DCpowerismorereadilyavailablethanAC.Theseincludeawide not toexceedthecurrentratingofsupply. Ifyouarethesystemdesigner + – + Power Input Power Input +24VDC Auxiliary Supply – – + AC Poweror125VDCBases DC Power DL205 PLC nusCm upt Com. Outputs Com. Inputs Input Module nusCm upt Com. Outputs Com. Inputs Input Module DL205 PLC Output Module Output Module Loads Loads Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–15 Load Load Supply Supply this situation Output Module Output Module Loads Loads Input Supply DL205 PLC DL205 PLC Input Module Input Module Inputs Com. Outputs Com. Inputs Com. Outputs Com. ce. You will want to avoid ce. You AC Power AC Power DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. – – Supply Supply Auxiliary Auxiliary +24VDC +24VDC Power Input Power Input + + Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, Load Supply Loads Output Module Loads Output Module likely to come in close contact with input wiring, then safety reasons also then safety with input wiring, in close contact likely to come This typically occurs on DC-powered PLCs, as shown in the drawing below to This typically occurs on DC-powered requires separate power sources for the PLC, input devices, and output loads. requires separate power sources DL205 PLC In one power devices from to power the input be necessary applications it will most require Loads often another source. loads from and to power output source, If a machine low-energy DC. sensors use while input high-energy AC power, operator is requireconvenient if the loads output circuits. It is most isolation from high-energy the input sensors can use the power source as the PLC, and can use the same below. as shown to the left in the figure auxiliary supply, be then a separate supply must If be powered from the PLC supply, the loads cannot the right in the figure below. used as shown to Some applications will use the PLC external power source to also power the input Some applications will use the PLC circuit. while the outputs have their thepower source supply, left. The inputs share the PLC own separate supply. and complexity view-point, is an application A worst-case scenario, from a cost which on the right shows how this can work, but also The example wiring diagram below the unused resour auxiliary supply output is an if possible. Input Module Inputs Com. Outputs Com. Input Module Inputs Com. Outputs Com. DL205 PLC DC Power AC Power – + – Supply Auxiliary +24VDC Power Input Power Input + – + Powering I/O Powering Using Circuits Supplies Separate Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–16 Safety Guidelines and Specifications Concepts /Sourcing Sinking DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications of thearrowwhenswitchisclosed. .Current flowsinthedirection completed and theinput,circuithasbeen adding supply (–)tothecommonterminal.By the commonterminal,andconnect theinputsensingcircuit,exitat through Start atthePLCinputterminal,follow theinput so external a “sinking”input.To properlyconnectthe example,thefiguretorightdepicts For and“sinking”. “sourcing” successfully connectthesupplyandfielddeviceeverytimebyunderstanding flow inthewrongdirection,andcircuitwillnotoperate.However, youcan connecttheexternalsupplyandfielddevicetoI/Opointwithcurrenttrying to or sourcing understanding of“ understanding further inthestudyofwiringstrategies,youmusthaveasolid going Before at theendofthischapterlistinputoroutputtype. input/output By applyingthecircuitprincipleabovetofourpossiblecombinationsof only thereferenceto(+)and(–)polarities.Therefore, of First First thefollowingshortdefinitionsareprovided,followedbypracticalapplications. First these conceptseasytounderstand,furtherensuringyoursuccessininstallation. in frequently origIptSourcing Output SinkingOutput Sourcing Input Sinking Input applies toDCinputandoutputcircuits. – – + + you willnoticetheseareonlyassociatedwithDCcircuitsandnotAC,because the switch,betweensupply(+) Sourcing = Sinking = supply, only provides a sinking/sourcing typesasshownbelow. TheI/Omodulespecifications input oroutputcircuitdiscussions.Itisthegoalofthissectiontomake Common Common canconductcurrentinonlyonedirection.Thismeansitispossible you willhavetoconnectit Input Input sinking provides apathtosupply path toground(–) provides apathtosupply ” and“ PLC PLC Sensing Sensing Input Input sourcing . ” concepts.Useofthesetermsoccurs Inputandoutputpointsthataresinking Output Output Switch Switch – + sinking andsourcingterminology PLC PLC ground(–) Common (sinking) source(+) Output Common Common Output Input Load Load PLC Sensing Input – – + + Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–17 I/O PLC Circuit PLC Input Sensing 4 5 6 7 VDC (I/O Point) Main Path Return Path Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 4 Input 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7 Common CA CB 0 1 2 3 IN 24 A B 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 D2–16ND3–2 20-28VDC 8mA CLASS2 NC D2-16ND3-2 Field Device + – + DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. – Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, for the L to the power main path + – input points in each. The ) of 4 input points which DC supply return path for most applications. So, most bank ). figure to the right shows a The the figure to the right, the Input or the figure to the right, Input SwitchLoad Output must enter at one terminal and exit at one terminal must enter which share the return path (called In the circuit above, the current in the common path is 4 times any channel’s In the circuit above, the current in their I/O points into banks that share two dedicated terminals as the figure two dedicated terminals AC supply AC or DC supply In order for a PLC I/O circuit to operate, for a PLC I/O circuit In order current two at least Therefore, at another. terminals are I/O with every associated point. In is the Output terminal current.must additional terminal One provide the supply. Most DL205 input and output modules Most DL205 input and output group a common return path. The best indication wiring of I/O common grouping is on the the right. label, such as the one shown to The miniature schematic shows two circuit banks with eight common terminal for each is labeled “CA” and “CB”, respectively. In the wiring label example, the positive terminal of a DC supply connects to the common terminals. Some symbols you will see on the wiring labels, and their meanings are: NOTE: energized. This is especially important in output input current when all inputs are is sometimes necessary on commons. circuits, where heavier gauge wire If there was unlimited space and budget If there was unlimited every I/O point could for I/O terminals, have providing this However, above shows. or even level of flexibility is not practical necessary are in Input or Output points on PLCs groups commons group (or this way, share a common return path. In terminals the four inputs require only five instead of eight. I/O “Common” Concepts Terminal Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–18 Safety Guidelines and Specifications Output Loads Solid State Input Sensors Solid State Field Devices to “SolidState” DCI/O Connecting DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications specifications aremet. auxiliary supplyoranother(+12VDC+24VDC),aslongtheinput thePLCinputpoint,whichsources from circuit, afielddevicehasanopen-collectorNPNtransistoroutput.Itsinkscurrent direction,sotheycanbewiredaseithersourcingorsinking.Inthefollowing either Several DL205DCinputmodulesareflexiblebecausetheydetectcurrentflowin DC circuit,onemustbewiredassourcingandtheothersinking devices canalsobesourcingorsinking. of thefielddeviceswhich of explained to theprevioussectiononSourcingandSinkingconcepts,DCI/Ocircuitswere In connected toasourcinginputoffielddeviceinput. PLC outputpointsinkscurrenttothe commonwhenenergized.Itis outputprovidesapathtogroundwhen itisenergized.Inthefollowingcircuit, DC Several of signal, nottosendDCpoweranactuator. input on a Sometimes anapplicationrequiresconnectingaPLCoutputpointtosolidstate the fielddeviceissourcingcurrent,noadditionalpowersupplyrequired. sources In thenextcircuit,afielddevicehasanopen-collectorPNPtransistoroutput.It PLC DCSinkingOutput current tothePLCinputpoint,whichsinksbackground.Since device. Thistypeofconnectionisusually +DC pwr the DL205DCoutputmodulesaresinkingtype.Thismeansthateach sometimes onlyallowcurrenttoflowoneway. Thisisalsotrueformany Field Device Field Device +V Common (sinking) Output Power (sinking) Output (sourcing) Output have solid-state(transistor)interfaces. Ground Ground Supply – – + + 10–30 VDC current. Thepowersupplycanbethe+24 When connectingtwodevicesinaseries (sourcing) Common Common (sinking) Input Input (sourcing) made tocarry Ground Input PLC DCInput PLC DCInput Field Device In otherwords,field a low . +V -level control Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–19 2 Then pullup supply V R input pull-up. is energized. Field Device R = input Field Device R properly. Input output to the DC output output to the DC pull-up (sinking) Ground P pull-up Input ) when the input (sinking) Ground . In order to do so, you need to input + – pull-up DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. + – Supply input R is connected from the is connected from

ladder logic point-of-view. Your ladder program Your ladder logic point-of-view. – Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, Supply pull-up (sourcing) (in watts), in order to size R – 0.7 pull-up Output Common input input (turn–on) input input (sourcing) R Power Output I pull-up R V supply Common V and the voltage of the external supply to compute R and the voltage of the external = = the circuit below, a R a the circuit below, input sourcing capability needs to be added to the PLC output by using a pull-up PLC output by to be added to the capability needs sourcing nominal input current to the field device (I nominal input current to the field device DO NOT attempt to drive a heavy load (>25 mA) with this pull-up method DO NOT attempt to drive a heavy Using the pull-up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of a sourcing output has the effect Using the pull-up resistor to implement (sinking) +DC pwr +DC pwr pull-up PLC DC Output input R I PLC DC Sourcing Output circuit power input. If this value is not known, it can be calculated as shown (a typical value is 15 mA). If this value is not known, it can be Then use I calculate the power P know the know the In sinking input is connected to the DC output point a PLC sinking the next example device output and field both the PLC because ofThis is a little tricky, a field device. sinking sourcing and one must have one the circuit sinking type. Since input are device, a In resistor. inverting the output point logic. In other words, the field device input is energized inverting the output point logic. In from a when the PLC output is OFF, to you may choose an inverted output. Or, must comprehend this and generate such as in the field device. of the inversion elsewhere, cancel the effect shown below is to Of course, the easiest way to drive a sinking input field device as use a DC sourcing output module. The Darlington NPN stage will have about 1.5 V loads. ON-state saturation, but this is not a problem with low-current solid-state NOTE 1: NOTE 2: It is important to choose the correct value of R Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–20 Safety Guidelines and Specifications Loads For Inductive Surge Suppresion Guidelines Relay Output DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications on theterminalblockof the relayoutput. inductive devicebeconnecteddirectlyacrossthecoil ofthefielddevice.If the suppression valves, etc.)arecontrolled withrelaycontacts,itisrecommendedthat asurge inductiveloaddevices(motors, motorstarters,interposingrelays,solenoids, When release ofenergyisthecausetransientvoltages. inductor that is released voltage isnotzerowhentherelaycontactopens thereisenergystoredinthe relay contactwillopen(or“bounce”)whentheAC sinewaveiszerocrossing.Ifthe i AC-supplied present whentherelaycontactopens(or “bounces”). Whenswitching an When switchingaDC-suppliedinductiveload the fullsupplyvoltageisalways with aDCsupplyvoltage. voltages energizes andde-energizesthecoiluntil“bouncing”stops.Thetransient SPDT simplest touse.TheFormCtype,or typeisnormallyopenandthe throw) Atype,orSPST(singlepole,single Form showntotheright.The arrangements, modules areavailableintwocontact Relay outputsintheDL205output Some applicationsinwhichNOTtouserelays: following applications: D2–08TR, Several outputmodulesintheDL205I/Ofamilyfeaturerelayoutputs:D2–04TRS, when thecorrespondingoutputpointison. when all cases,themoduledrivesrelaycoil completelyisolatedfromeachother.are In modules haverelayswhich relay Other wiper contactineachrelayofthebank. terminals, whichconnectto common the Some relayoutputmodule’s relaysshare normally opencontact. provides anormallyclosedcontactand a stationary contactoneitherside.This a centercontactwhichmovesand de-energized de-energized Inductive loaddevices(deviceswithacoil)generatetransientvoltageswhen S • • • • (single pole,doublethrow)typehas Loads whichmustbeswitchedathighspeedorheavydutycycle Loads thatrequirecurrentsunder10mA some loadsrequiredifferent voltagesthanotherloads) Some outputchannelsneedisolationfromotheroutputs(suchaswhen Cost-sensitive applications deliver Loads thatrequirehighercurrentsthanthesolid-stateoutputscan generated aremuchlargerinamplitudethanthesupply voltage,especially device hasplug-typeconnectors, thesuppressiondevicecanbeinstalled D2–12TR, D2–08CDR,F2–08TRandF2–08TRS.Relaysare nductive loadthereisonechancein60(60Hz)or 50(50Hz)thatthe with arelaycontact.When when thevoltagetoinductorissuddenlyremoved. This contact isclosedit“bounces”,which Relay withFormCcontacts Relay withFormAcontacts best forthe Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–21 –24 VDC –24 VDC V150LA20C V250LA20C Part Number ZL–TD8–24 ZL–TD8–120 P6KE180CAGICT–ND P6KE350CA P6K30CAGICT–ND 1N4004CT–ND provide the best surge and the best surge provide DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 110/120 VAC 110/120 220/240 VAC Inductive Load Voltage 24 VDC VAC 110 VAC 110/120 220/240 VAC 12/24 VDC or VAC 12/24 VDC or VAC Module Relay Contact Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, provide the next best surge and transient provide the next Module Relay Contact +24 VDC AC and DC powered coils, providing the fastest response providing the DC powered coils, AC and +24 VDC MOV MOV Type (TVS, MOV, Diode) (TVS, MOV, Type 8–channel TVS 8–channel TVS TVS TVS TVS Diode –324 VDC –42 VDC figure shows the same circuit with a transorb (TVS) across the coil. Notice that figure shows the same circuit with +24 VDC +24 VDC Vendor / Catalog Vendor This reduced. the voltage spike is significantly Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVS or transorb) Suppressors Voltage Transient transient of suppression smallest overshoot. with the (MOV) Metal Varistors Oxide suppression powered coils. of AC and DC Use for your application the following table to help select a TVS or MOV suppressor based on the inductive load voltage. For example, the waveform in the figure below shows the energy released when waveform in the figure below shows For example, the Notice the large voltage spike. switching a 24 VDC solenoid. opening a contact hh AutomationDirect Voltage Transient Suppressors www.automationdirect.com General Instrument Voltage Transient Suppressors and LiteOn Diodes; from DigiKey Cat- alog; Phone: 1-800-344-4539 Harris Metal Oxide from Newark Varistors; Catalog; Phone: 1-800-463-9275 Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–22 Safety Guidelines and Specifications Contact Life Prolonging Relay DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications PLC RelayOutput However, created atthetimeofopenorclosure,andpresenceairbornecontaminants. Relay contactswearaccordingtotheamountofrelayswitching,spark Now youarereadytocalculatevaluesforRandC,accordingtheformulas: AC, thenconvertthecurrentandvoltagevaluestopeakvalues: contacts the valuesforRCsnubbernetwork,firstdeterminevoltageacross RCnetworkmustbelocatedclosetotherelaymodule outputconnector.The To find starterswillbenefitthemostfromexternalcontactprotection. motor inductive contact cycleslistedinthespecificationtablesforrelaymodules.Highcurrent Adding externalcontactprotectionmayextendrelaylifebeyondthenumber of R minimum=0.5 C minimum=0.001 C ( m • • • F) = Common Output loads suchascontactorsandsolenoids(circuitgivenbelow). Take measurestosuppressinductivevoltage spikesfrominductiveDC draw theleastcurrent. If youhavetheoption,switchloadonoroff atatimewhenitwill Switch therelayonoroff onlywhentheapplicationrequiresit. when open,andthecurrentthroughthem loads suchasclutches,brakes,motors,direct-actingsolenoidvalves,and there aresomestepsyoucantaketohelpprolongthelifeofrelaycontacts: 10 I 2 W C R , 1/2W, toleranceis m F, thevoltageratingofCmustbe R ( W ) = Supply +– " 10 xI 5% V x when closed. Ifthe when , wherex= Common w Input V,non-polarized Inductive FieldDevice 1 + load supplyis 50 V Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–23 5% " , 1/2 W, , 1/2 W, 170 Volts W w = 26 1.29 F, voltage rating F, 169.7 m DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. V 50 10 x 0.707 = 0.05 ) = 1 + Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, 2 W R ( 10 0.707 x 1.414 = 120 x 1.414 = 169.7 Volts x 1.414 = 120 x load is turned off, energy stored in its coil is released in the load is turned off, , where x= = x 1.414, = 0.5 x 1.414 = 0.707 Amperes = 0.5 x 1.414 = x 1.414, rms rms x = V 2 = I I V 10 peak 50 peak 10 x I I V 169.7 DO NOT use this circuit with an AC power supply. DO NOT use this circuit with an field device as possible. Place the diode as close to the inductive 3A voltage rating (PIV) at least 100 PIV, Use a diode with a peak inverse Use a fast-recovery type (such as Schottky forward current or larger. diode such as 1N914, 1N941, etc. type). DO NOT use a small-signal correctly before operation. If installed Be sure the diode is in the circuit when the relay energizes. backwards, it short-circuits the supply 1 + = 1.29 ) = • • • S F) = W m R ( C ( x= If across the load as near to the contact is switching a DC inductive load, add a diode is energized the diode is reverse-biased (high load coil as possible. When the load impedance). When the form At this moment the diode is forward-biased of a negative-going voltage spike. energy to ground. This protects the relay contacts (low impedance) and shunts the occur as the contacts are opening. from the high voltage arc that would in using a noise suppression diode: For best results, follow these guidelines For example, suppose a relay contact drives a load at 120VAC, 1/2 A. Since this Since A. 1/2 a load at 120VAC, relay contact drives suppose a For example, values: calculate the peak source, first has an AC power example Now, finding the values of R and C,: finding the values Now, Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–24 Safety Guidelines and Specifications Restrictions Module Placement Slot Numbering I/O ModulesPosition,Wiring, andSpecification DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications system. The followingtableliststhevalidlocationsforalltypesofmodulesinaDL205 always containsaPLCCPUorotherCPU–slotcontrollerandisnotnumbered. five I/Oslotswitha6-slotbase.Thearenumbered0–4.CPU slot dedicated to modules. You maynoticethebasesreferto3-slot,4-slot, etc.Oneoftheslotsis The DL205baseseachprovidedifferent numbersofslotsforusewiththeI/O * Specialty Modules CPU Interface Ethernet RemoteMaster Serial RemoteI/O Local Expansion Analog InputandOutputModules Relay OutputModules AC OutputModules DC OutputModules AC InputModules DC InputModules CPUs Module/Unit When usedwithH2–ERMEthernetRemote I/Osystem. Filler Simulator BASIC CoProcessor Ethernet Communications Data Communications Counter I/O Counter Interface SDS Profibus DeviceNet WinPLC Ethernet BaseController Remote SlaveUnit Remote Master Base ControllerModule Base ExpansionModule the CPU,soyoualwayshaveonelessI/Oslot.Forexample, CPU Slot lt0So lt2So Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 Local CPUBase CPU SlotOnly Slot 0Only Slot 0Only Slot 0Only Slot 0Only Slot 0Only Slot 0Only n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n I/O Slots Local Expansion CPU SlotOnly Base n n n n n n n n n Remote I/OBase CPU SlotOnly Slot 0Only n n n n n n n n n * * Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–25 Terminal Color Code Red Blue White Status indicators Color Bar Module Type Discrete/Analog Output Discrete/Analog Input Other DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Wire tray area behind terminal cover Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, of the analog modules. If you’re using a DL230 CPU (or a you’re using a DL230 modules. If of the analog (installed) Terminal Cover Terminal to the left can also depend on the type of CPU you are using and the other types of are using and the of CPU you depend on the type can also installed if a module is either an input module, output module, or a specialty module. if a module is either an input module, CPU with firmware earlier than V1.4) you should check the DL205 Analog I/O earlier than V1.4) you should check CPU with firmware In most cases, the analog modules can be placed in any slot. However, the any slot. However, be placed in modules can cases, the analog In most placement modules DL240 related to your particular module. possible placement restrictions Manual for any ordering part number D2–ANLG–M. DL205 Analog I/O Manual by can order the You The input to show the status of the modules provide LED status indicators discrete points. The DL205 family of I/O modules have a color coding scheme to help you quickly have a color coding scheme to help you The DL205 family of I/O modules identify indicator located on the front of each module. The This is done through a color bar color scheme is listed below: Color Coding of I/O Modules Discrete Input Module Status Indicators Special Placement Special for Considerations Modules Analog Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–26 Safety Guidelines and Specifications Connectors Module Wiring theDifferent DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications pre–assembled cableswiththeI/Oconnectorsinstalledandwired. pre–assembled complete listingofallavailableproducts).ZIPLinkscomewithspecial alsohaveDINrailmountedterminalblocks,DINnectors(refertoourcatalogfora We module. block,pressthesqueezetabsandpullterminalblockawayfrom terminal closely, you’llnoticetherearesqueezetabsonthetopandbottom.To removethe Both typesofconnectorscanbeeasilyremoved.Ifyouexaminethe touching activewiring. screws. Therecessedscrewshelpminimizetheriskofsomeoneaccidentally screwterminalconnectors.Othermoduleshaveconnectorswithrecessed normal aretwotypesofmoduleconnectorsfortheDL205I/O.Somemoduleshave There electrical shock,checkallfielddevicepower blockeventhoughthePLCsystemisturnedoff.terminal To minimizetheriskof WARNING: For somemodules,fielddevicepowermaystillbepresentonthe before youremovetheconnector. Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–27 m) m) • • . Other m) m) • • the plastic

we recommend Suggested Torque N 7.81 lb-inch (0.882 N 7.81 lb-inch (0.882 2.65 lb-in (0.3 N 2.65 lb-in (0.3 N DINnector External Fuses (DIN rail mounted Fuses) DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. If the insulation is too thick or stiff If the insulation is too thick or or non-replaceable fuses, Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, acceptable, but it really depends on the thickness acceptable, but it AWG for each module type. When making terminal When making module type. for each AWG Suggested AWG Range Suggested AWG 16* – 24 AWG 16* – 24 AWG 16* – 24 AWG 16* – 24 AWG the size of wire the modules can accept. The table below can accept. The of wire the modules the size cover may not close properly or the connector may pull away cover may not close properly or suggested NOTE: 16 AWG Type TFFN or Type MTW is recommended Type TFFN or Type NOTE: 16 AWG Module type 4 point 8 point 12 point 16 point types of 16 AWG may be be may AWG 16 types of of the wire insulation. and stiffness I/O points are used, then and a majority of the module’s * connections, follow the suggested torque values. torque follow the suggested connections, lists the needed length. possible. wiring close to output wiring where line. using multiple wires for the return add blow fuse, with a lower current external fuses to your I/O wiring. A fast be added to each common, or a fuse rating than the I/O module fuse can with point can a rating of slightly less than the maximum current per output to our catalog for a complete line of be added to each output. Refer DINnectors, DIN rail mounted fuse blocks. terminal temperature especially for high from the module. This applies thermoplastics such as THHN. For modules which have soldered 1. to limit a There is 3. possible wire length. Use the shortest 4.trays for routing where possible. Use wire 5. near high energy wiring. Also, avoid running input running wires Avoid 6. run a long distance , consider minimize voltage drops when wires must To 7. wiring in close proximity to AC wiring where possible. running DC Avoid 8. bends in the wires. creating sharp Avoid 9. a module with a blown fuse, we suggest you reduce the risk of having To 2. a continuous length of wire, do not combine wires to attain a Always use Use the following guidelines when wiring the I/O modules in your system. the I/O modules when wiring following guidelines Use the NOTE: you return your module to us and let us replace your blown fuse(s) since you return your module to us and let us replace your blown disassembling the module will void your warranty. I/O Wiring Checklist Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–28 Safety Guidelines and Specifications Glossary ofSpecificationTermsGlossary Required Base Power Current Maximum Inrush Current Maximum Leakage ON VoltageDrop Required External DC Minimum Load Current Maximum OFF Current Minimum ON Input Current Input Impedance OFF VoltageLevel ON VoltageLevel AC Frequency Peak Voltage Range Output Voltage Range Input Voltage Module Commons Per Per Module Inputs orOutputs DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd.Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications the powerbudgetconfiguration sectioninChapter4–7. between different modules.Theguidelinesforusingmodule powerisexplainedin from thebasepowersupplyisusedbyDL205 input modulesandvaries Power ofinductiveloadsinACcircuits. characteristic transition ofaoutputpoint.Itisgreaterthanthe normalONstatecurrentandis The maximumcurrentusedbyaloadforshort durationuponanOFFtoON is OFF. maximum currentaconnectedmaximum The point toitscommonterminalwhentheoutputis ON atmax.load. Sometimes called“saturationvoltage”,itisthe voltage measuredfromanoutput Some outputmodulesrequireexternalpowerforthecircuitry. The minimumloadcurrentfortheoutputcircuittooperateproperly. The maximumcurrentfortheinputcircuittooperatereliablyinOFFstate. The minimumcurrentfortheinputcircuittooperatereliablyinONstate. Typical operatingcurrentforanactive(ON)input. voltage. Input impedancecanbeusedtocalculateinputcurrentforaparticularoperating The voltagelevelatwhichtheinputpointwillturnOFF. The voltagelevelatwhichtheinputpointwillturnON. AC modulesaredesignedtooperatewithinaspecificfrequencyrange. Maximum voltageallowedfortheinputcircuit. The operatingvoltagerangeoftheoutputcircuit. The operatingvoltagerangeoftheinputcircuit. Number ofcommonspermoduleandtheirelectricalcharacteristics. sinking, currentsourcing,oreither. Indicates numberofinputoroutputpointspermoduleanddesignatescurrent load willreceivewhentheoutputpoint Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–29 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 06/02 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, module. See Appendix E for a list of the weights for the E for a list of the weights module. See Appendix located on either the logic side or the field device side of the input circuit. the logic side or the field device located on either whether the terminal type is a removable or non-removable connector or a type is a removable or non-removable whether the terminal The time the module requires to process an OFF to ON state transition. an OFF to ON to process the module requires The time state transition. an ON to OFF to process the module requires The time Indicates terminal. an input point. These LEDs are indicate the ON/OFF status of The LEDs that electrically of the Indicates the weight various DL205 components. circuit, which stops current flow when current Protective device for an output be replaceable or non–replaceable, or located exceeds the fuse rating. They may externally or internally. Fuses Weight Status Indicators Terminal Type Terminal ON to OFF Response OFF to ON Response Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–30 Safety Guidelines and Specifications D2–08ND3 DC Input DC D2–08ND3 Weight Status Indicator Terminal type ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Base powerrequired Maximum OFFcurrent Minimum ONcurrent Input current Input impedance OFF voltagelevel ON voltagelevel AC frequency Peak voltage Input voltagerange Commons permodule Inputs permodule Points DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 0 2 4 6 8 12–24VDC + 32

0 current 12–24VDC INPUT COM COM + 02 04 055 50 40 30 20 10 06 61412131 122 104 86 68 50 Ambient TemperatureAmbient ( Configuration showniscurrentsinking Internal modulecircuitry Derating Chart Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications C 3 2 1 0 C 7 6 5 4 ° C/ ° V+ F) connected Internally Isolator Optical To LED 2.3 oz.(65g) Logic side Removable 1 to8ms 1 to8ms 50 mAmax 1.5 mA 3.5 mA 8.5 mA@24VDC 4.0 mA@12VDC 2.7 K 3.5 VDCmaximum 9.5 VDCminimum n/a 26.4 VDC 10.2–26.4 VDC 1 (2I/Oterminalpoints) 8 (sink/source) ° ° C F

mA D2–08ND3 4-12mA 10.2-26.4VDC D2–08ND3

@ N12-24 IN

12 C 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 C 7 6 5 4

VDC VDC 7 6 5 4 D2–16ND3-2 DC Input DC D2–16ND3-2 Terminal type ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Base powerrequired Maximum OFFcurrent Minimum ONcurrent Input current Input impedance OFF voltagelevel ON voltagelevel AC frequency Peak voltage Input voltagerange Commons permodule Inputs permodule Weight Status Indicator 24 VDC + INPUT COM Configuration showniscurrentsinking Internal modulecircuitry 24 VDC 24 VDC + + NC 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 V+ CB CA 7 6 5 4 4 7 6 5 Isolator Optical To LED Removable 3 to9ms 3 to9ms 100 mAMax 1.5 mA 3.5 mA 6 mA@24VDC 3.9 K 7 VDCmaximum 19 VDCminimum N/A 30 VDC(10mA) 20–28 VDC 2 (isolated) 16 (sink/source) 2.3 oz.(65g) Logic side second groupof8inputpoints. displays theinputstatusofmodule’s module’s first8inputpoints.PositonB the LEDsdisplayinputstatusof When theABswitchisinAposition, NC D2-16ND3-1 CLASS2 8mA 20-28VDC D2–16ND3–2 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 B A N24 IN 3 2 1 0 CB CA 7 6 5 4 7 6 5 4 VDC 7 6 5 4 Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–31 VDC I CIV D4 D5 D6 D7 A4 A5 A6 A7 CII CIII C B4 B5 B6 B7 C4 C5 C6 C7 ACT I II III IV B0 B1 B2 B3 IN 24 A0 A1 A2 A3 C D0 D1 D2 D3 C C C C0 C1 C2 C3 22–26VDC 4–6mA CLASS2 D2–32ND3 F C ° ° F) ° C/ A0 A4 A1 A5 A2 A6 A3 A7 B0 B4 B1 B5 B2 B6 B3 B7 C0 C4 C1 C5 C2 C6 C3 C7 D0 D4 D1 D5 D2 D6 D3 D7 ° To Logic To COM I Optical Isolator COM II COM III COM IV V+ DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Derating Chart Derating – – – – + + + + Current Flow Current Flow Current Flow Current Flow Ambient Temperature ( Ambient Temperature 50 68 86 104 122 131 10 20 30 40 50 55 Internal module circuitry 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC Configuration shown is current sinking 0 32 COM INPUT Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, 0 32 16 + Points 24 VDC VDC

24

@

A m 0 . 25 mA max 3 to 9 ms 3 to 9 ms 40-pin Connector or ZIPLink sold separately Module Activity LED 2.1 oz. (60 g) 32 (sink/source) points) 4 (8 I/O terminal 20–28 VDC 30 VDC n/a 19 VDC minimum 7 VDC maximum 4.8 K 80mA@24VDC 8 3.5 mA 1.5 mA t curren t npu Status Indicator Weight OFF to ON response ON to OFF response type (removeable) Terminal Minimum ON current Maximum OFF current Base power required Input impedance InputI current AC frequency ON voltage level OFF voltage level Commons per module Commons per Input voltage range Peak voltage Inputs per module Inputs D2–32ND3DC Input Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–32 Safety Guidelines and Specifications DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications D2–32ND3–2 DC Input DC D2–32ND3–2 Weight Base powerrequired Terminal type(removeable) Status Indicators ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse current OFF Max M Min ONcurrent OFF voltagelevel ON voltagelevel Input impedance Max inputcurrent Input current Peak voltage Input voltagerange Commons permodule Inputs permodule ax 5–15VDC + OFF 15VDC 15VDC 15VDC 15VDC INPUT COM curren Configuration showniscurrentsinking Internal modulecircuitry Current Flow Current Flow Current Flow Current Flow + + + + – – – – t COM IV COM III COM II COM I V+ D7 D3 D6 D2 D5 D1 D4 D0 C7 C3 C6 C2 C5 C1 C4 C0 B7 B3 B6 B2 B5 B1 B4 B0 A7 A3 A6 A2 A5 A1 A4 A0 Isolator Optical To Logic sold separately 40-pin ConnectororZIPLink Module activityLED 3 to9ms 3 to9ms 5mA 0 3mA 2VDC 4VDC 1k ohms@5–15VDC 16mA @15.6VDC 14mA @15VDC 11mA @12VDC, 4mA @5VDC, 16VDC 4.50 to15.6VDCminmax 4 (8I/Oterminalpoints) 32 (sink/source) 2.1oz (60g) 5V/25mA max(allpointson) . 5 m A D2–32ND3–2 CLASS2 4–14mA 5–15VDC C3 C2 C1 C0 C C C D3 D2 D1 D0 C A3 A2 A1 A0 N24 IN B3 B2 B1 B0 IV III II I ACT C7 C6 C5 C4 B7 B6 B5 B4 C CIII CII A7 A6 A5 A4 D7 D6 D5 D4 CIV I VDC Points Points 16 32 16 32 0 0 32 32 0 0 Input Voltage: 12VDCand15VDC Derating Chart Input Voltage: 5VDC Derating Chart 02 04 055 50 40 30 20 10 06 61412131 122 104 86 68 50 02 04 055 50 40 30 20 10 06 61412131 122 104 86 68 50 Ambient TemperatureAmbient ( Ambient TemperatureAmbient ( 15VDC ° ° C/ C/ ° ° F) F) ° ° ° 12VDC ° C C F F Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–33 4 5 6 7 VAC 4 5 6 7 C 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 C IN 220 D2–08NA–2 220VAC 10Ć20mA 50/60Hz D2–08NA-2 F C ° ° Removable Logic side 2.5 oz. (70 g) 8 connected) 2 (internally 170–265 VAC 265 VAC 47–63 Hz minimum 150 VAC maximum 40 VAC 18K @ 60 Hz 50Hz 9mA @ 220VAC, 60Hz @ 265VAC, 11mA 60Hz 10mA @ 220VAC, 60Hz 12mA @ 265VAC, 10 mA 2 mA 100 mA Max 5 to 30 ms 10 to 50 ms To LED To Optical Isolator V+ F) Internally connected ° C/ ° C 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 C DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Derating Chart Internal module circuitry Ambient Temperature ( Ambient Temperature 50 68 86 104 122 131 10 20 30 40 50 55 COM COM INPUT 220 VAC 0 Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, 32 220 VAC 8 6 4 2 0 Points Line Terminal type Terminal Status indicator Weight Inputs per module Inputs module Commons per Input voltage range Peak voltage AC frequency ON voltage level OFF voltage level Input impedance Input current Minimum ON current Maximum OFF current Base power required OFF to ON response ON to OFF response D2–08NA–2 AC Input 4 5 6 7 VAC 60Hz

4 5 6 7 C 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 C 100VAC,

IN 110 D2–08NA–1 80Ć132VAC 10Ć20mA 50/60Hz @ D2–08NA-1

F C ° ° 2 mA 50 mA Max 5 to 30 ms 10 to 50 ms Removable Logic side 2.5 oz. (70 g) 8 points) 1 (2 I/O terminal 80–132 VAC 132 VAC 47–63 Hz minimum 75 VAC maximum 20 VAC 12K @ 60 Hz 60Hz 13mA @ 100VAC, 13mA 50Hz @ 100VAC, 11mA 5 mA To LED To Optical Isolator V+ F) Internally connected ° C/ ° C 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 C Derating Chart Internal module circuitry Ambient Temperature ( Ambient Temperature 50 68 86 104 122 131 10 20 30 40 50 55 COM COM INPUT 110 VAC 110 current 0

32 110 VAC 110 8 6 4 2 0 Points Line Terminal type Terminal Status indicator Weight Base power required OFF to ON response ON to OFF response Minimum ON current Maximum OFF current Input impedance Input current Input AC frequency ON voltage level OFF voltage level Commons per module Commons per Input voltage range Peak voltage Inputs per module Inputs D2–08NA-1 AC Input Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–34 Safety Guidelines and Specifications D2–16NA AC Input AC D2–16NA Weight Status indicator Terminal type ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Base powerrequired Maximum OFFcurrent Minimum ONcurrent Input current Input impedance OFF voltagelevel ON voltagelevel AC frequency Peak voltage Input voltagerange Commons permodule Inputs permodule Line Points DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 12 16 0 4 8 110 VAC 25 88 0 2 131 122 104 86 68 50 32 1020304050550 INPUT COM Ambient TemperatureAmbient ( 110 VAC 110 VAC Derating Chart Internal modulecircuitry Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 NC ° C/ CA 7 6 5 4 4 7 6 5 CB ° F) V+ Isolator Optical To LED 2.4 oz.(68g) Logic side Removable 10 to50ms 5 to30ms 100 mAMax 2 mA 5 mA 15mA @132VAC, 60Hz 13mA @100VAC, 60Hz 11mA @100VAC, 50Hz 12K @60Hz 20 VAC maximum 70 VAC minimum 47–63 Hz 132 VAC 80–132 VAC 2 (isolated) 16 ° ° C F second groupof8inputpoints. displays theinputstatusofmodule’s module’s first8inputpoints.PositonB the LEDsdisplayinputstatusof When theABswitchisinAposition, NC 50/60Hz 10-20mA 80-132VAC D2–16NA D2–16NA 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 B A N110 IN 3 2 1 0 CB CA 7 6 5 4 7 6 5 4 VAC 7 6 5 4 F2–08SIM Input Simulator Input F2–08SIM Weight Status indicator Terminal type Base powerrequired Inputs permodule F2–08SIM NSIM IN 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 ' 2.65 oz.(75g) Switch side None 50 mAMax 8 ON 7 6 5 4 Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–35 To LED To 100ms Optical Isolator Other Circuits –– –– 40ms Reg 6A for 100ms, 15A for 10 ms 6A for 100ms, 50mA 60mA Max 1 ms 1 ms Removable Logic Side 2.8 oz. (80 g) 4 (1 per point) 6.3A slow blow (non–replaceable) 800 400 7ms 540 270 0V 8000 Inductive Load 1600 Duration of output in ON state 6.3A Common Output L + 0.1A0.5A1.0A1.5A2.0A3.0A 1400 300 140 600 90 120 70 60 35 – 4.0A 200 – 24VDC Load Current At 40ms duration, loads of 3.0A or greater cannot be used. At 100ms duration, loads of 2.0A or greater cannot be used. how to use the table. Find the load current you Here’s expect to use and the duration that the ouput is ON. The number at the intersection of the row and column represents the switching cycles per minute. For example, a 1A inductive load that is on for 100ms can be switched on and convert this to maximum of 60 times per minute. To a off duty cycle percentage use: (Duration x cycles) / 60. Our example would be (60x.1) / 60 = .1 (10% duty cycle). – + DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Maximum Number of Switching Cycles per Minute VDC 12–24 Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, Max inrush current Max inrush Minimum load Base power required 5v OFF to ON response ON to OFF response type Terminal Status indicators Weight Fuses VDC 1 2 3 0 0 1 2 3 C C C C C +24V L L L L D2–04TD1 OUT 12-24 10.2-26.4VDC 50mA-4A D2–04TD1 Internally connected 0 1 2 3 24V F C ° ° 2A / Pt. C C C C 3A / Pt. 0V 0.1mA @ 40 VDC 4 (current sinking) used) 8 points (only 1st 4 pts. 1 (4 I/O terminal points) 10.2–26.4 VDC NMOS FET (open drain) 40 VDC n/a 0.72 VDC maximum 4A / point 8A / common F) ° C/ ° 4A / Pt. L L L L + + 24VDC Derating Chart 12–24VDC Ambient Temperature ( Ambient Temperature 50 68 86 104 122 131 10 20 30 40 50 55 0 32 4 3 2 1 0 Points Max load current (resistive) Max leakage current Peak voltage AC frequency ON voltage drop Operating voltage Output type Outputs per module Outputs Output Points Consumed Commons per module D2–04TD1 DC Output Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–36 Safety Guidelines and Specifications D2–08TD1 DC Output DC D2–08TD1 Fuses Weight Status indicators Terminal type ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Base powerrequired5v Minimum load Max inrushcurrent Max leakagecurrent Max loadcurrent ON voltagedrop AC frequency Peak voltage Output type Operating voltage Commons permodule Outputs permodule Points DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 0 2 4 6 8

load + 32 12–24VDC 0 L 12–24VDC

+ current L L L L L L L L 02 04 055 50 40 30 20 10 06 61412131 122 104 86 68 50 OUTPUT Ambient Temperature ( COM COM Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications Derating Chart Derating Internal modulecircuitry 5A C 3 2 1 0 Isolator Optical C 7 6 5 4 ° C/ ° F) connected Internally (non–replaceable) Afs blow fast 5A 1 percommon 2.3 oz.(65g) Logic Side Removable 1 ms 1 ms 100mA Max 0.5mA 1A for10ms 0.1mA @40VDC 0.3A /point 1.5 VDCmaximum n/a 40 VDC NPN opencollector 10.2–26.4 VDC 1 (2I/Oterminalpoints) 8 (currentsinking) 2.4A /common

° ° f C F as

/

t point

bl D2–08TD1 0.2mAĆ0.3A 10.2-26.4VDC U 12-24 OUT D2–08TD1 ow L

L C 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 C 7 6 5 4 VDC 7 6 5 4 D2–08TD2 DC Output DC D2–08TD2 Fuse Fuse Weight Status indicators Terminal type ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Max inrushcurrent Max leakagecurrent current output M Max ON voltagedrop AC frequency Peak voltage Operating voltagerange Output voltage Commons permodule Outputs permodule Base powerrequired Points ax ou 0 2 4 6 8 12–24VDC L – OUTPUT (Y0) 32 0 t 12–24VDC + pu V – t COM L L L L L L L L curren 5A Fuse 02 04 055 50 40 30 20 10 06 61412131 122 104 86 68 50 Ambient Temperature ( + Derating Chart Derating t C 3 2 1 0 Internal modulecircuitry Optical Isolator V 7 6 5 4 ° C/ connected Internally ° F) To LED 5A/250V 5A/250V fastblow 2.3 oz.(65g) Logic Side Removable 1ms 1ms 1A for10ms common / 1mA @40VDC 4A 2 point / 3A 0 0 1.5 VDC n/a 40VDC 12–24VDC 10.8–26.4VDC 1 8 (currentsourcing) 5V/100mA max (non–replaceable) . 3A 0.3A ° ° C F

/ po D2–08TD2 0.2mAĆ0.3A 10.2-26.4VDC U 12-24 OUT D2–08TD2

i fast n L t , L 3 2 1 0 C 3 2 1 0 2

blow . V 7 6 5 4 4A

/ common VDC 7 6 5 4 Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–37 4 5 6 7 VDC 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7

CA CB 0 1 2 3 A B 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 D2–16TD2–2 OUT 12-24 10.2-26.4 VDC 0.1A CLASS2 D2-16TD2-2 NC point

/ When the AB switch is in the A position, the LEDs display the output status of the first 8 output points Positon B module’s displays the output status of the mod- second group of 8 output points. ule’s

F C ° ° Derating Chart 1.6A / common Logic Side 2.8 oz. (80 g) none 16 (current sourcing) 16 (current 2 10.2–26.4 VDC NPN open collector 30 VDC N/A 1.0 VDC maximum 0.1A / point 0.1A 0.1mA @ 30 VDC 150 mA for 10 ms 0.2mA 200mA Max 0.5 ms 0.5 ms Removable F) ° 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7 CA CB C/ ° 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 Optical Isolator NC Internal module circuitry DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. + + COM OUTPUT – – 12–24VDC 12–24VDC Ambient Temperature ( Ambient Temperature L current L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L

+ 0 102030405055 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 load

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, 8 4 0 VDC 16 12 12–24 Points Status indicators Weight Fuses Outputs per module Outputs module Commons per Operating voltage Output type Peak voltage AC frequency ON voltage drop Max load currentMax Max leakage current Max inrush current Minimum load Base power required OFF to ON response ON to OFF response type Terminal D2–16TD2–2 DC Output 4 5 6 7 VDC 7 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 C C 0 1 2 3

4V @ 80mA max A B 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 B A D2–16TD1–2 OUT 12-24 10.2-26.4 VDC 0.1A CLASS2 +V D2-16TD1-2  point

When the AB switch is in the A position, the LEDs display the output status of the first 8 output points. Positon B module’s displays the output status of the mod- second group of 8 output points. ule’s /

F C ° ° Derating Chart 1.6A / common 0.2mA 200mA Max 0.5 ms 0.5 ms Removable Logic Side 2.3 oz. (65 g) none 24VDC 16 (current sinking) 16 (current points) 1 (2 I/O terminal 10.2–26.4 VDC NPN open collector 30 VDC N/A 0.5 VDC maximum 0.1A / point 0.1A 0.1mA @ 30 VDC 150mA for 10 ms Internally connected F) C 5 6 7 4 5 6 7 4 C ° C/ ° 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 +V Optical Isolator + Internal module circuitry 24VDC +V COM COM OUTPUT Ambient Temperature ( Ambient Temperature L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L VDC 12–24 current +

24VDC + + 12–24VDC 0 102030405055 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 load

8 4 0 16 12 Weight Fuses External DC required Terminal type Terminal Status indicators Base power required OFF to ON response ON to OFF response Max leakage current Max inrush current Minimum load ON voltage drop Max load currentMax Peak voltage AC frequency Commons per module Commons per Operating voltage Output type Outputs per module Outputs Points D2–16TD1–2 DC Output Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–38 Safety Guidelines and Specifications D2–32TD1 DC Output DC D2–32TD1 FusesF Weight Status indicators Terminal type(removeable) ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Base powerrequired Minimum load Max inrushcurrent current leakage Max leaka Max loadcurrent drop voltage ON ON AC frequency Peak voltage Output type Operating voltage Commons permodule Outputs permodule Points DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 uses 16 32 0 + vo

leakage 32 0 24VDC lt + age 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC + + + + – – – – 12–24 VDC g L OUTPUT 02 04 055 50 40 30 20 10 06 61412131 122 104 86 68 50 e current Ambient TemperatureAmbient ( d COM

rop +V current Current Flow Derating Chart Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications Internal modulecircuitry L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L COM IV COM III COM II COM I V IV V III V II D7 D3 D6 D2 D5 D1 D4 D0 C7 C3 C6 C2 C5 C1 C4 C0 B7 B3 B6 B2 B5 B1 B4 B0 V I A7 A3 A6 A2 A5 A1 A4 A0 Isolator Optical ° C/ ° F) none 2.1 oz.(60g) Module Activity sold separately 40-pin connectororZIPLink 0.5 ms 0.5 ms 350mA Max 0.2mA 150 mAfor10ms [email protected] @30VDC0 0.1A /point maximum VDC 5 0 0 N/A 30 VDC NPN opencollector 12–24 VDC 4 (8I/Oterminalpoints) 32 (currentsinking) . . 5 1mA ° °

C From Logic F VDC

D2–32TD1 @ U 12-24 OUT CLASS2 0.1A 12–24VDC max C3 C2 C1 C0 C C C D3 D2 D1 D0 C A3 A2 A1 A0 B3 B2 B1 B0

II IV III I 30 ACT C7 C6 C5 C4 B7 B6 B5 B4 V V V A7 A6 A5 A4 D7 D6 D5 D4 V

VDC i I II III IV mum VDC D2–32TD2 DC Output DC D2–32TD2 Fuses Weight Terminal type(removeable) Status indicators ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Max inrushcurrent ON voltagedrop Max leakagecurrent Min load Max loadcurrent Peak voltage Operating voltage Commons permodule Outputs permodule Base powerrequired Points 12–24VDC Equivalent InputCircuit 16 32 0 – Current Flow 12–24VDC L 32 12–24VDC Current Flow 0 Current Flow Current Flow 12–24VDC 12–24VDC + + + + + – – – – Com Output V 02 04 055 50 40 30 20 10 06 61412131 122 104 86 68 50 Ambient TemperatureAmbient ( Derating Chart L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L COM IV COM III COM II COM I V IV V III V II C7 C3 C6 C2 C5 C1 C4 C0 D7 D3 D6 D2 D5 D1 D4 D0 B7 B3 B6 B2 B5 B1 B4 B0 V I A7 A3 A6 A2 A5 A1 A4 A0 Internal modulecircuitry Optical Isolator 3 4 ° C/ ° F) 1 2 none 2.1oz. (60g) sold separately 40-pin connectororZIPLink I/O Status:none Module activity:greenLED 0.5ms 0.5ms 150mA @10ms 0.5 [email protected] 0.1mA @30VDC 0.2mA 0.1A /point,0.8Acommon 30VDC 12 to24VDC 4, 8points/common(isolated) 32 (currentsourcing) 5V/350mA max(allpointson) To LED ° ° C F D2–32TD2 U 12-24 OUT CLASS2 0.1A 12–24VDC C3 C2 C1 C0 C C C D3 D2 D1 D0 C A3 A2 A1 A0 B3 B2 B1 B0 II IV III I ACT B7 B6 B5 B4 V C7 C6 C5 C4 V V A7 A6 A5 A4 D7 D6 D5 D4 V I II III IV VDC Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines ow 2–39 bl ) ) 4 5 6 7 )) ow l VAC )) Hz s HHz HzHz 3A 50 . , 60,60 ,50 60 6 C , 60, 4 5 6 7 0.1A) C

VAC VACVAC 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 C L (> VACVAC

L D2–08TA (00 D2–08TA OUT 15-220 15-264VAC 10mA-0.5A 50/60Hz (264 VAC

400mA / Pt. F C ° l.5 °

per common, To LED To Removable Logic Side 2.8 oz. (80 g) 11 per common 6 3A slow blow 8 points) 1 (2 I/O terminal 15–264 VAC SSR (Triac) 264 VAC 47 to 63 Hz (> 0.1A) < l.5 VAC < (< 0.1A) < 3.0 VAC 0.5A / point 4A / common 4mA (2644mA 1.2mA (100 00.9mA (100 9 A (100 10A for 10 ms 10 mA 20 mA / ON pt. 250 mA max 1 ms 1 ms +1/2 cycle 300mA / Pt. Internally F) connected ° C/ Optical Isolator ° C 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 C 500mA / Pt. DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Internal module circuitry 6.3A Derating Chart current

drop e current

Ambient Temperature ( Ambient Temperature 10 20 30 40 50 55 50 68 86 104 122 131 g L L L L L L L L COM COM VAC OUTPUT 110–220 110–220 Line 0 leakage 32

L voltage

Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, VAC 8 6 4 2 0 uses 110–220 110–220 Terminal type Terminal Status indicators Weight Fuses F Outputs per module Outputs module Commons per Operating voltage Output type Peak voltage AC frequency ON voltage dropON Max load current Max leakaMax Max inrush current Minimum load Base power required OFF to ON response ON to OFF response Points D2–08TA AC Output D2–08TA C _ 4 5 6 7 VAC C, C C _ _ _ 0 1 2 3 2 4 7 1 C4–7 All outputs can be 60 5A

. F2–08TA 5 20-125VAC 50-60Hz 1.5A OUT 20-125 3 6 0 C0–3 1 @

t e @ n i e bl id po / rms To LED To

c s i V

F Derating Note: run at the current per point shown. There is no derating for the number of I/O points used. C ° 6 0A ° emova og . . 1.0 A 0.7mA(rms) 15A 10mA 250mA max 0.5mS– 1/2 cycle 0.5mS– 1/2 cycle RemovableR LogicL side 3.5 oz. N/A 8 10 2 (isolated) 24–140 VAC Zero Crossover) with SSR (Triac 140 VAC 47 to 63 Hz 16Vrms@15A 1 1.5A / point @ 30 11 0A / point @ 8A/module @ 60 / common; 4.0A 60 2 7 1 4 F) ° C0–3 5 3 0 6 C/ ° Z C . . C4–7 Internal module circuitry 20–125VAC 20–125VAC L L L L L L L L Derating Chart ors rop t d Ambient Temperature ( Ambient Temperature ca 10 20 30 40 50 55 50 68 86 104 122 131 ype t di

l n age i COM lt Line OUTPUT na 0 i 32 L us t vo VAC a 20–125 0 erm 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 Amps per Point Fuses StatusSt indicators Weight OFF to ON response ON to OFF response TerminalT type Peak one cycle surge current Minimum load Base power required Max leakage current AC frequency ONON voltage drop Max load current Output type Peak voltage Output Points Consumed Output Points Commons per module Operating voltage Outputs per module Outputs F2–08TA AC Output F2–08TA Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–40 Safety Guidelines and Specifications D2–12TA Output AC Max loadcurrent ON voltagedrop AC frequency Peak voltage Output type Operating voltage Commons permodule Output PointsConsumed Outputs permodule DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03

voltage

load Points 12 0 3 6 9

25 88 0 2 131 122 104 86 68 50 32 current 1020304050550

drop Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications Ambient Temperature ( 15–132 VAC 15–132 VAC Derating Chart L L L L L L L L L L L L 300mA /Pt. ° C/ ° 3 2 3 2 1 0 1.8A /common 0.3A /point, < 4.0VAC (<50mA) < l.5VAC (>50mA) 47 to63Hz 132 VAC SSR (Triac) 15–132 VAC 2 (isolated) 16 (4unused,seechartbelow) 12 1 0 NC F)

l.5 NC CA 4 NC 5 5 4 NC NC CB

VAC /

point, ° ° C 250mA /Pt. 250mA F

(>

50mA) ule’s secondgroupof6outputpoints. displays theoutputstatusofmod- module’s first6outputpoints.PositonB the LEDsdisplayoutputstatusof When theABswitchisinAposition, 50/60 Hz 10mA-0.3A 15-132VAC 15-110 OUT D2–12TA D2–12TA 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 B A 3 2 1 0 CB CA 5 4 5 4 VAC Fuses Weight Status indicators Terminal type ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Base powerrequired Minimum load Max inrushcurrent Max leakagecurrent 5 4 15–132 VAC L n isthestartingaddress Yn+7 Yn+6 Yn+1 Yn+0 Yn+5 Yn+4 Yn+3 Yn+2 Line OUTPUT Points COM 3.15A Used? Addresses Used Internal modulecircuitry Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No 5 lwbo replaceable blow slow 15A 3 (2) 1percommon 3.8 oz.(110 g) Logic Side Removable 1 ms+1/2cycle 1 ms 350 mAMax 10 mA 10A for10ms 2mA (132VAC, 60Hz) Order D2–FUSE–1 (5 per pack) per (5 D2–FUSE–1 Order . 15A Yn+17 Yn+16 Yn+15 Yn+14 Yn+13 Yn+12 Yn+11 Yn+10 s Points l ow Isolator Optical bl ow, rep Used? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No To LED l acea bl e Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–41 F e C ° ° bl 2A / Pt. 3A / Pt. 4A / Pt. To LED To acea l F) ° C/ ow, rep ow, ° bl ow l s 3A . 5A for < 10ms 10mA 250mA Max 10 ms 10 ms Removable Logic Side 2.8 oz. (80 g) 1 per point 66 3A slow blow replaceable Order D2–FUSE–3 (5 per pack) Internal module circuitry 6.3A Ambient Temperature ( Ambient Temperature Derating Chart 50 68 86 104 122 131 10 20 30 40 50 55 COM OUTPUT Line 0 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. L 32 5–30 VDC 4 3 2 1 0 5–240 VAC Points Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, Max inrush current Max inrush Minimum load Base power required 5v OFF to ON response ON to OFF response type Terminal Status indicators Weight Fuses 0 1 2 3 NC 0 1 2 3 L L L L C0 C1 C2 C3 NC – – – 4A 50K 50K 100K D2–04TRS OUT RELAY 5Ć240VAC 50/60Hz 4A 5-30VDC 10mA-4A D2–04TRS 3A

point

/ 0 1 2 3

NC Load Current 2A 50K – 8A / module (resistive) 0.1mA @ 264VAC 4 4 (isolated) 8 (only 1st 4pts. are used) 5–30VDC / 5–240VAC form A (SPST) Relay, 30VDC, 264VAC 47–63 Hz 0.72 VDC maximum 4A / point 4A C0 C1 C2 C3 NC 1A 500K 500K 350K 100K 200K 100K (resistive)

L L L L Typical Relay Life (Operations) Typical 5–30 VDC 5–240 VAC current

Voltage & Voltage load Type of Load Type

At 24 VDC, solenoid (inductive) loads over 2A cannot be used. cannot be used. solenoid (inductive) loads over 3A VAC, At 110 solenoid (inductive) loads over 2A cannot be used. At 220 VAC, 24 VDC Resistive24 VDC Solenoid Resistive VAC 110 Solenoid VAC 110 Resistive220 VAC 200K 40K 250K 100K 100K 150K 150K – 50K 100K 220 VAC Solenoid 220 VAC Max load current (resistive)Max Max leakage current Peak voltage AC frequency ON voltage drop Operating voltage Output type Outputs per module Outputs Commons per module Output Points Consumed D2–04TRS Relay Output Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–42 Safety Guidelines and Specifications D2–08TR Relay Output Relay D2–08TR Max inrushcurrent Max leakagecurrent Max current(resistive) ON voltagedrop AC frequency Peak voltage Output type Operating voltage Commons permodule Outputs permodule DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Typical RelayLife(Operations) 220VAC 2VC1 350K 200K 500K 100K 1A 500K 1A 1A 1A 1A 220VAC 110VAC 110VAC 24VDC 24VDC Voltage /Load 5–240 VAC 5–30 VDC Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications Resistive Resistive Resistive oeod1 100K 1A Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid L L L L L L L L Current C 3 2 1 0 Common: Output: 3Afor10ms 0.1mA @265VAC 4A /common 1A /point N/A 47 to60Hz 30VDC /264VAC Relay, formA(SPST) 5–30VDC /5–240VAC 1 (2I/Oterminalpoints) 8 C 7 6 5 4 Closures connected 1 Internally 0A for10ms 5mA-1A 5-30VDC 1A 50/60Hz 5Ć240VAC U RELAY OUT D2–08TR D2–08TR L L C 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 C 7 6 5 4 Fuses Weight Status indicators Terminal type ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Base powerrequired Minimum load 7 6 5 4 Points 0 2 4 6 8 5–240 VAC 5–30 VDC 25 88 0 2 131 122 104 86 68 50 32 1020304050550 L OUTPUT Line COM Ambient Temperature ( Derating Chart 6.3A Internal modulecircuitry 1A /Pt. 1A Order D2–FUSE–3 (5 per pack) per (5 D2–FUSE–3 Order 6.3A slowblow, replaceable 1 3.9 oz.(110 g) Logic Side Removable 10 ms 12 ms 250mA max 5mA @5VDC 0.5A /Pt. ° C/ ° F) To LED ° ° C F Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–43 F C ° ° *5A/pt. 2.5A/pt. F) ° C/ ° *10A/pt. 3.3A/pt. all points Typical Circuit Typical one N/A 12A 10mA @ 12VDC 670mA Max 15 ms (typical) 5 ms (typical) Removable Logic Side 5.5 oz. (156g) NoneN Internal Circuitry Derating Chart NO Ambient Temperature ( Temperature Ambient (*Use separate commons) Common Line L DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0 102030405055 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 12–28VDC 12–250VAC 8 6 4 2 0 Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, uses 4 5 6 7 Number Max leakage current Max leakage current Max inrush Minimum load Base power required 5v OFF to ON response ON to OFF response type Terminal Status indicators Weight FusesF Points On (100% duty cycle) (100% NO 7 NO 4 NO 2 NO 1 C 4-7 0 1 2 3 NO 0 C 0-3 NO 3 NO 5 NO 6 F2–08TR OUT RELAY 12-250VAC 50/60Hz 10A 12-28VDC 10ma-10A 7A C 4–7 NO 1 NO 4 NO 7 NO 2 5A NO 3 8 2 (isolated) 8 10A 12–28VDC, 12–250VAC, 120VDC, 0.5A 8 Form A (SPST normally open) 150VDC, 265VAC 47–63 Hz N/A 10A/common10A/common (subject to derating) (Operations) NO 5 NO 6 C 0–3 NO 0 Load Current Load 1 – – – – – 250K 100K 10M 50mA L L L L L L L L 2 (resistive)

at Room Temperature Typical Relay Life Typical current

Voltage & Voltage Type of Load Type load

24 VDC Resistive24 VDC Solenoid Resistive VAC 110 Solenoid VAC 110 Resistive220 VAC 600K 150K 600K 300K 500K 75K 300K 300K 200K 150K 220 VAC Solenoid 220 VAC of arc suppression techniques described in the 205 User Manual. Since of arc suppression techniques described in the 205 User Manual. built in snubber. these modules have no leakage current, they do not have a load, you can For example, if you place a diode across a 24VDC inductive significantly increase the life of the relay. 2 At 120 VDC 0.5A resistive load, contact life cycle is 200K cycles. 1 those values shown by the use Contact life may be extended beyond Max load current (resistive)Max AC frequency ON voltage drop Output type Peak voltage Commons per module Commons per Output Points Consumed Operating voltage Outputs per module Outputs F2–08TR Relay Output Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–44 Safety Guidelines and Specifications F2–08TRS Relay Output Relay F2–08TRS Max loadcurrent(resistive) ON voltagedrop AC frequency Peak voltage Output type Operating voltage Output PointsConsumed Commons permodule Outputs permodule DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Normallyclosedcontactshave1/2thecurrenthandlingcapabilityofnormally 2 At120VDC0.5Aresistiveload,contactlifecycleis200Kcycles. 1 open contacts. 220 VAC Solenoid 2 A eitv 0K150K 200K 300K 300K 75K 500K 300K 600K 150K 600K 220 VAC Resistive 110 VAC Solenoid 110 VAC Resistive 24 VDCSolenoid 24 VDCResistive

load Type ofLoad Voltage & 12–250VAC 12–250VAC 12–250VAC 12–250VAC normally closed 12–28VDC 12–28VDC 12–28VDC 12–28VDC

current Typical RelayLife L L L L L Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications at RoomTemperature

(resistive) 2 C6 NC 6 NO 4 C4 NO 2 C2 NO 1 C1 NO 6 50mA 10M – – – – – NO 5 NO 3 NO 7 NO 0 NC 7 NC 0 C7 C5 C3 C0 Load Current 1 (Operations) normally closed normally closed 12–250VAC 12–250VAC 12–250VAC 12–250VAC (subject toderating) 7A/point N/A 47–63 Hz 150VDC, 265VAC open) normally (SPST A Form 5, 3, Form C(SPDT) 120VDC, 0.5A 12–28VDC, 12–250VAC, 7A 8 8 (isolated) 8 12–28VDC 12–28VDC 12–28VDC 12–28VDC 5K100K 250K 5A L L L L L L 3 3 7A 10ma-7A 12-28VDC 7A 50/60Hz 12-250VAC NO 6 NO 4 NO 2 NO 1 NC 6 U RELAY OUT F2–08TRS C6 C4 C2 C1 NO 5 NO 3 NC 7 3 2 1 0 NO7 NC 0 NO 0 C7 C5 C3 C0 FusesF Weight Status indicators Terminal type ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Base powerrequired5v Minimum load Max inrushcurrent Max leakagecurrent (100% dutycycle) 7 6 5 4 Points On uses Number 0 2 4 6 8 12–250VAC 12–28VDC 12–250VAC 25 88 0 2 131 122 104 86 68 50 32 12–28VDC 1020304050550 L L L Line Common Common Line Ambient Temperature ( NO NO NC Derating Chart Internal Circuitry Internal Circuitry (Points 0,6,&7only) NoneN 5.5 oz.(156g) Logic Side Removable 5 ms(typical) 15 ms(typical) 670mA Max 10mA @12VDC 12A N/A one (points 1,2,3,4,5) Typical Circuit Typical Circuit 7A/pt. 5A/pt. ° C/ ° F) 6A/pt. 4A/pt. ° ° C F Installation, Wiring Installation and and Specifications Safety Guidelines 2–45 F C ° ° To LED To No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Used? F) ° 1.25A / Pt. C/ ° 0A for 10ms 1.5A / Pt. 1 Points Yn+10 Yn+11 Yn+12 Yn+13 Yn+14 Yn+15 Yes Yn+16 Yn+17 No Output: 3A for 10 ms Output: 3A Common: 5mA @ 5VDC 450mA max 10 ms 10 ms Removable Logic Side 4.6 oz. (130 g) 2 replaceable 4A slow blow, Order D2–FUSE–4 (5 per pack) 0.5A / Pt. 0.75A / Pt. No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Addresses Used Used? 4A Internal module circuitry Derating Chart Ambient Temperature ( Temperature Ambient COM Points OUTPUT Yn+2 Yn+3 Yn+4 Yn+5 Yes Yn+0 Yn+1 Yn+6 Yn+7 No Line n is the starting address L DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0 102030405055 32 50 68 86 104 122 131 5–30 VDC 5–240 VAC 8 4 0 12 Points Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring, and Installation, 4 5 Max inrush current Max inrush Minimum load Base power required OFF to ON response ON to OFF response type Terminal Status indicators Weight Fuses 4 5 4 5 CA CB 0 1 2 3 A B 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 D2–12TR D2–12TR OUT RELAY 5-240VAC 50/60Hz 1.5A 5-30VDC 5mA-1.5A When the AB switch is in the A position, the LEDs display the output status of the first 8 output points. Positon B module’s displays the output status of the mod- second group of 8 output points. ule’s CB NC NC NC 5 4 5 4 CA NC Closures NC 0 1 0 1 2 3 2 3 12 see chart below) 16 (4 unused, 2 (6pts. per common) 5–30VDC / 5–240VAC form A (SPST) Relay, 30VDC / 264VAC 47 to 60 Hz N/A 1.5A / point 3A / common 0.1mA @ 265 VAC Current L L L L L L L L L L L L 5–30 VDC 5–30 VDC 5–240 VAC 5–240 VAC Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid 1A 100K Resistive Resistive Resistive Voltage / Load Voltage 24VDC24VDC110VAC110VAC220VAC 1A 1A 1A 1A 500K 1A 100K 500K 200K 350K 220VAC Typical Relay Life (Operations) Typical Max leakage current AC frequency ON voltage drop Max current (resistive) Output type Peak voltage Outputs Consumed Commons per module Operating voltage Outputs per module Outputs D2–12TR Relay Output Installation, Wiring, Installation and 2–46 Safety Guidelines and Specifications D2–08CDR 4 pt. DC Input / 4pt. Relay Output Relay 4pt. / Input DC pt. 4 D2–08CDR Terminal type Base powerrequired General Specifications Fuse (inputcircuits) ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Maximum OFFcurrent Minimum ONcurrent Maximum Current Input current Input impedance OFF voltagelevel ON voltagelevel AC frequency Peak voltage Input voltagerange Input Commonspermodule Input PointsConsumed Inputs permodule Input Specifications Weight Status Indicators DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 220VAC 2VC1 350K 200K 500K 100K 1A 500K 1A 1A 1A 1A 220VAC 110VAC 110VAC 24VDC 24VDC Voltage /Load Typical RelayLife(Operations) 24VDC +– Resistive Resistive Resistive oeod1 100K 1A Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Installation, Wiring,andSpecifications 5–240 VAC 5–30 VDC L L L L Current CA 3 2 1 0 3.5 oz.(100g) Logic side Removable 200 mAmax None 1 to10ms 1 to10ms 1.5 mA 4.5 mA 8 mA@30VDC 5 mA@24VDC 4.7 K 7 VDCmaximum 19 VDCminimum n/a 30 VDC 20 –28VDC 1 8 (only1st4pts.areused) 4 (sink/source) CB O 3 2 1 Closures 20-28VDC D2-08CDR 5mA-1A 5-30VDC 1A 50/60Hz 5-240VAC OUT D2–08CDR N 24VDC IN/ AB 8mA 3 2 1 0 L L L L CA 3 2 1 0 CB 3 2 1 0 RELAY 3 2 1 0 ON toOFFresponse OFF toONresponse Minimum load Max inrushcurrent Max leakagecurrent Max loadcurrent(resistive) AC frequency Peak voltage Output type Operating voltage Output Commonspermodule Output PointsConsumed Outputs permodule Output Specifications Fuse (outputcircuits) 5–240 VAC 5–30 VDC 24VDC + Points L 0 1 2 3 4 Line OUTPUT COM 25 88 0 122131 104 86 68 50 32 INPUT 1020304050550 COM Ambient Temperature ( Configuration showniscurrentsinking Derating Chart 6.3A Internal modulecircuitry Internal modulecircuitry 10 ms 12 ms 5 mA@VDC 10A for<10ms(common) 3A for<100ms 0.1mA @264VAC 4A /module(resistive) 1A /point 47–63 Hz 30VDC, 264VAC Relay, formA(SPST) 5–30VDC /5–240VAC 1 8 (only1st4pts.areused) 4 Order D2–FUSE–3 (5 per pack) per (5 D2–FUSE–3 Order 1 (6.3Aslowblow, replaceable) ° C/ ° F) V+ Isolator Optical 5mA /Pt. 5mA ° Outputs ° 1A /Pt. 1A C Inputs F To LED To LED 1 3 CPU Specifications and Operations

In This Chapter. . . . — Overview — CPU General Specifications — CPU Base Electrical Specifications — CPU Hardware Features — Using Battery Backup — Selecting the Program Storage Media — CPU Setup — CPU Operation — I/O Response Time — CPU Scan Time Considerations — PLC Numbering Systems — Memory Map — DL230 System V-Memory — DL240 System V-Memory — DL250–1 System V-Memory — DL260 System V-Memory — X Input / Y Output Bit Map — Control Relay Bit Map — Stage Control / Status Bit Map — Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps — GX / GY Global I/O Bit Map CPU Specifications

and Operation 3–2 Overview Features DL240 CPU Features DL230 CPU Features General CPU DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation RS232C/RS422 converterformulti-dropconnections. theDL240ina use as theDL230.Thebottomportalsosupports DL240hastwocommunicationports.Thetopportisthesameconfiguration The V-memory andotherdatawhichisnotintheapplication program. EEPROM thereisalsoRAMontheCPUwhich willstoresystemparameters, stProgram points withremoteI/Oaresupported. available and approximately1.3K of V-memory (dataregisters).Thereare129instructions DL240hasamaximumof3.8Kmemorycomprised2.5Kladder The additional hardware. connect ahandheldprogrammerorpersonalcomputer without needing any The DL230providesonebuilt-inRS232Ccommunicationport,soyoucaneasily V-memory, andotherdatawhichisnotintheapplicationprogram. EEPROM thereisalsoRAMontheCPUwhichwillstoresystemparameters, stProgram instructions 400wordsofV-memoryapproximately It has90differentregisters). (data The DL230has2.4Kwordsofmemorycomprised2.0Kladderand application programorfromanoperatorinterface. also provideextensiveinternaldiagnosticsthatcanbemonitoredfromthe instructions. Alloffer RLLandStageprograminstructions(SeeChapter5).They CPUs. TheDL205CPUsoffer awiderangeofprocessingpowerandprogram 3,4,6,or9slotbases.AllI/OmodulesintheDL205familywillworkwithanyof in DL230,DL240,DL250–1andD2–260 aremodularCPUswhichcanbeinstalled The S S needed tounderstand: This chapterprovidestheinformation that itisset-upandinstalledcorrectly. controlled bytheCPU,soitisimportant system. The CPUistheheartofcontrol install theCPU the stepsrequiredtosetupand different modelsofCPUs the differences betweenthe Almost allsystemoperations are for programdevelopmentandamaximumof256 pointslocalI/Oand896 orage isintheEEPROMwhichinstalledatfactory. Inadditiontothe orage isintheEEPROMwhichinstalledatfactory. Inadditiontothe available forprogramming,andsupportsamaximumof256I/Opoints. Direct NET network.SincetheportisRS232C,youmustusean NET Direct NET protocol,soyoucan CPU Specifications and Operation 3–3 Net slave The DL260 has and MODBUS Direct power. power. DirectNet registers). It also includes an DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU SOFT32 (version 4.0 or later), operator interfaces, SOFT32 (version 4.0 or later), operator Direct , MODBUS RTU Master/Slave connections. Port 2 is also Master/Slave connections. , MODBUS RTU additional instructions to the DL250–1 instruction set includes additional instructions to the DL250–1 DirectNet internal RISC–based microprocessor for greater processing power. The power. microprocessor for greater processing internal RISC–based instructions. It also supports up to 1280 local I/O points by using up to four instructions. It also supports up to -memory (data registers). It supports a maximum of 256 points of local I/O It supports a maximum -memory (data registers). ladder memory and 14.6K of V-memory (data ladder memory and 14.6K of V-memory SOFT32, and operator interfaces, and provides SOFT32, and operator interfaces, expansion bases. It has a maximum of 30.4K of program memory comprised of expansion bases. It has a maximum The DL250–1 replaces the DL250 CPU. It offers all the DL240 features, plus more features, plus all the DL240 The It offers the DL250 CPU. DL250–1 replaces of all the features program It offers I/O Master port. a built–in Remote instructions, It has a expansion I/O. Local addition of supporting CPU with the the DL250 maximum memory and of 7.6K of ladder comprised of program memory of 14.8K V 7.2K of and local expansion bases). In addition, of 768 I/O points (max. of two a maximum It DL250–1 as a Remote master. up to 2048 points if you use the port 2 supports includes an to the DL240 instruction instructions. The additional instructions DL250–1 has 174 set and PID loop control for print function, floating point math, include drum timers, a 4 loops. is ports. The top port a total of two built–in communications The DL250–1 has the exception of port of the DL240/DL250 with identical to the top feature. with port. It will interface The bottom port is a 15–pin RS232C/RS422 Direct RTU Master/Slave connections. RTU features, plus ASCII IN/OUT and expanded all the DL250–1 The DL260 offers MODBUS local 15.8K of for greater processing internal RISC–based microprocessor 231 instructions. The table instructions, trigonometric instructions and support for 16 PID loops. table instructions, trigonometric Thetotal of two built–in communications ports. The top port is identical DL260 has a to a 15–pin RS232C/RS422/RS485 the top port of the DL250–1. The bottom port is port. It will interface with and provides support ASCII IN/OUT instructions. DL260 CPU Features DL250–1 CPU DL250–1 Features CPU Specifications

and Operation 3–4 CPU GeneralSpecifications CPU DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 I/O points) (including localI/Oandexpansion Local ExpansionI/Opoints Local I/Opointsavailable available Total CPUmemoryI/Opoints EEPROM Built-in communicationports Windows Direct Handheld programmer RLL and Boolean execution/K Non-volatile VMemory(words) V-memory (words) Ladder memory(words) Total Programmemory(words) Feature Slots perBase I/O ModulePointDensity I/O pointsperRemotechannel per channel Max NumberofEthernetslaves Ethernet RemoteI/Ochannels channels Ethernet RemoteI/OAnalog points Ethernet RemoteI/ODiscrete Slaves Max NumberofSerialRemote Serial RemoteI/OChannels I/O points) (including localI/Oandexpansion Serial RemoteI/Opoints SOFT32  CPU SpecificationsandOperation PLUS  programmingfor Programming 3/4/6/9 4/8/12/16/32 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 256 256 (X,Y,CR) Standard onCPU One RS–232C Yes Yes Yes 4–6 ms 128 256 2048 2.4K DL230 896 (X,Y,CR) Standard onCPU Two RS–232C Yes Yes Yes 10–12 ms 256 1024 2560 3.8K DL240 3/4/6/9 4/8/12/16/32 896 byCPU) 16,384 (limitedto 16 budget limited bypower V–memory Map into 896 7 Remote/31Slice 2 896 N/A 256 2048 (X,Y,CR) Flash RS–422 One RS–232Cor One RS–232C Yes Yes Yes 1.9ms No 7168 7680 (Flash) 14.8K DL250–1 3/4/6/9 4/8/12/16/32 instructions) bit–of–word V–memory and slaves using expanded H4–EBC 16,384 (16fully 16 budget limited bypower V–memory Map into 2048 7 Remote/31Slice 8 2048 (2 exp.basesmax.) 768 256 (X,Y,CR,GX,GY) 8192 Flash RS–422 orRS–485 One RS–232C, One RS–232C 4.0 orhigher) (requires version Yes Yes Yes 1.9ms No 14592 15872 (Flash) 30.4K DL260 3/4/6/9 4/8/12/16/32 instructions bit–of–word V–memory and slaves using expanded H4–EBC 16,384 (16fully 16 budget limited bypower V–memory Map into 8192 7 Remote/31Slice 8 8192 (4 exp.basesmax.) 1280 256 CPU Specifications and Operation 3–5 Yes, IN/OUT Yes, 16 Loops Yes, Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (optional) Yes DL260 231 2048 144 1024 256 256 Yes / Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Integer,Floating Point, Trigonometric 125 VDC Powered Bases 20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p 300 mA max. non–replaceable 2A @ 250V slow blow fuse; external fus- ing recommended D2–06BDC2–1, D2–09BDC2–1 104–240 VDC +10% –15% 20A 30W Yes, OUT Yes, 4 Loops Yes, Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (optional) Yes DL250–1 174 1024 144 1024 256 128 Yes / Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Integer,Floating Point DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 24 VDC Powered Bases None non–replaceable 3.15A @ 250V slow blow fuse; exter- nal fusing recommended D2–03BDC1–1, D2–04BDC1–1, D2–06BDC1–1, D2–09BDC1–1 10.2–28.8VDC (24VDC) with less than 10% ripple 10A 25 W No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (optional) Yes DL240 129 256 144 512 128 128 Yes / Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Integer at 500 VDC Yes No No (optional) Yes No No No Integer No No No Yes Yes 92 256 112 256 64 64 Yes / No Yes No DL230 AC Powered Bases 100–240 VAC +10% –15% 30 A 80 VA relay field ground, and run secondary, between primary, 1 minute @ 1500 VAC > 10 M 20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p 300 mA max. non–replaceable 2A @ 250V slow blow fuse; external fus- ing recommended D2–03B–1, D2–04B–1, D2–06B–1, D2–09B–1 PLUS Specification Auxiliary 24 VDC Output Fusing (internal to base power supply) Maximum Power WithstandVoltage (dielectric) Insulation Resistance Input Voltage Range Input Voltage Maximum Inrush Current Part Numbers Battery backup System error log User error log Run Time Edits Run Time Internal diagnostics Password security PID Loop Control, Built In Clock/Calendar of Day Time ASCII Table Instructions Table For/Next Loops Math Subroutines Drum Timers Counters Immediate I/O / timed) Interrupt input (hardware Stages in RLL Timers Control relays defined) Special relays (system Feature instructions available Number of 5 for details) (see Chapter CPU Base Electrical Specifications CPU Specifications

and Operation 3–6 CPU Hardware Features CPU DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation BATT PWR DL230 DL250-1 CPU PORT 1 CPU RUN Status Indicators Status Indicators Mode Switch Battery Slot Port 2 Port 1 Port 1 Port 2 DL260 BATT PWR DL240 CPU PORT2 PORT 1 CPU RUN TERM RUN CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Mode Switch Adjustments Analog CPU Specifications and Operation 3–7 effect, all effect, program password is in program password SOFT32 programing package or programing package SOFT32 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Direct Meaning Power good Power failure CPU is in Run Mode CPU is in Stop or program Mode CPU self diagnostics error CPU self diagnostics good CPU battery voltage is low CPU battery voltage is good or disabled CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU changes in the CPU. Unless the mode switch is in the mode switch in the CPU. Unless changes Status ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF CPU Action No RUN mode if no errors are encountered. CPU is forced into the device. by the attached programming/monitoring changes are allowed and the TEST modes are available. Mode RUN, PROGRAM and device. allowed by the programming/monitoring program changes are mode. No changes are allowed by the CPU is forced into the STOP programming/monitoring device. the CPU mode switch in the TERM position and use a programming the CPU mode switch in the TERM modes as well as program access will be allowed through the connected program access will be allowed modes as well as nterface). Programs may be viewed or monitored but no changes may be may be viewed or monitored nterface). Programs device to change operating modes. In this position, you can change device to change operating modes. between Run and Program modes. the switch is in the TERM position and no the switch is in the (DL250–1 and (Run Program) (Terminal) If the CPU is switched to the RUN Mode without a program in the PLC, the If the CPU is switched to the RUN 1. mode switch to select the operating mode. Use the CPU 2. Place CPU BATT Indicator PWR RUN STOP DL260 only Stop Pro- gram) Modeswitch Position RUN TERM The mode switch on the DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs provide positions for provide positions and DL260 CPUs DL240, DL250–1 switch on the The mode enabling program and disabling any be allowed by changes will not mode and STOP position, RUN the TERM programmer, device, (handheld interface operating programming device. or monitoring operator i made. If The which can status indicator LEDs on the CPU front panels have specific functions help in programming and troubleshooting. There CPU mode. are two ways to change the NOTE: can be cleared by cycling the power to the ERROR which PLC will produce a FATAL PLC. Status Indicators Mode Switch Functions CPU Specifications

and Operation 3–8 Ports Communication Potentiometers Analog the Adjusting DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 master interfaces,any handhelds,operator Direct –easily connect –MODBUS RTU slave – –K-sequence Communication Port RS232C, 9600baud 6P6C PhoneJack DL250–1 andDL260 Port 1 Direct 240 SOFT32, NET CPU SpecificationsandOperation 250–1  slave BATT PWR DL230 DirectNet 260 CPU

PORT 1 CPU RUN one. The DL240,DL250–1andDL260CPUshavetwoportswhiletheDL230hasonly clockwise. thevalue,turnpotcounter decrease analog pot,turnthepotclockwise.To To increase are coveredlaterinthischapter. analog channel.Thesetupprocedures setting lowerandupperlimitsforeach V-memorycorresponding locations for output, etc.Eachanalogchannelhas constants, frequencyofpulsetrain potsc These on thefaceplateofDL240CPU. There are 4analogpotentiometers(pots) Turn clockwisetoincreasevalue the valueassociatedwith an beusedtochangetimer DL260 operatorinterfaces,orany Direct –easily connect – –K-sequence Communication Port RS232C, upto19.2Kbaud 6P6C PhoneJack DirectNet Direct operatorinterfaces,etc. Direct –easily connect –K-sequence Communication Port RS232C, 9600baud 6P6C PhoneJack SOFT, handhelds, NET Port 2 SOFT, handhelds, master Port 1  Slave or MODBUSmasterslave interfaces,any handhelds,operator Direct –easily connect –MODBUS RTU Master/Slave – –K-sequence Communication Port baud 38.4K to up RS232C/RS422, 15-pin SVGAConnector Direct DL250–1 andDL260 Port 2 SOFT32, NET  Master/Slave DirectNet Analog Pots CH2 CH1 BATT PWR 0 DL240 Additional DL260Features Port 2 –RS485 support –Extended MODBUSInstructions –ASCII IN/OUTInstructions CPU PORT2 PORT 1 CPU RUN TERM RUN CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 BATT PWR DL240 CPU PORT2 PORT 1 CPU RUN Max TERM RUN CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CPU Specifications and Operation 3–9 master DirectNet DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 12 0V3 5V4 RXD Power (–) connection (GND) 5 TXD Power (+) connection Receive Data (RS232C) 6 Data (RS232C 5V Transmit 0V Power (+) connection Power (–) connection (GND) 12 0V3 5V4 RXD (–) connection (GND) Power 5 TXD (+) connection Power Receive Data (RS232C) 6 Data (RS232C 5V Transmit 0V (+) connection Power (–) connection (GND) Power Port 1 Pin Descriptions (DL250–1 and DL260) Port 1 Pin Descriptions (DL230 and DL240) Port 1 Pin Descriptions SOFT32, D2–HPP, DV–1000, OI panels SOFT32, D2–HPP, SOFT32, D2–HPP, DV1000 or SOFT32, D2–HPP, 1 6 1 6 Direct Direct Net (slave only) 6-pin Female Modular Connector 6-pin Female 6 Pin female modular (RJ12 phone jack) type connector phone jack) modular (RJ12 6 Pin female only) protocol (slave K–sequence RS232C, 9600 baud Connect to 6 Pin female modular (RJ12 phone jack) type connector 6 Pin female modular (RJ12 phone K–sequence protocol (slave only) Direct Fixed station address of 1 Fixed station address stop 8 data bits, one DTE Asynchronous, Half–duplex, Odd parity MODBUS RTU (slave only) MODBUS RTU RS232C, 9600 baud Connect to 8 data bits, one start, one stop Asynchronous, Half–duplex, DTE Odd parity Modular Connector The 5V pins are rated at 200mA maximum, primarilly for use with some The 5V pins are rated at 200mA maximum, primarilly for use S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S The operating parameters for Port 1 on the DL230 and DL240 CPUs are fixed. CPUs are the DL230 and DL240 for Port 1 on parameters The operating NOTE: operator units. interface The are fixed. This operating parameters for Port 1 on the DL250–1 and DL260 CPU applies to the DL250 as well. 260 260 250–1 250–1 240 240 230 230 Port 1 Specifications Port 1 Specifications CPU Specifications 3–10 and Operation Specifications Port 2 Specifications Port 2 DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 240 240 250–1 CPU SpecificationsandOperation 250–1 260 260 15-pin Female D Connector 5 1 DL250 aswell usingAUXfunctionsonaprogrammingdevice.Thisappliestothe configurable 2ontheDL250and Port functions onaprogrammingdevice. The operatingparametersforPort2ontheDL240CPUisconfigurableusingAux 10 6 S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Modular Connector Odd/even/none parity Asynchronous, Half–duplex,DTERemoteI/O 8 databits,onestart,stop Odd ornoparity Asynchronous, Half–duplex,DTE 8 databits,onestart,stop master Connect to Address selectable(1–90) RS232C, Upto19.2Kbaud DirectNet Connects to Address selectable(1–90) Up to38.4Kbaud RS485, non–isolated,distancewithin1000m(DL260only) RS422, non-isolated,distancewithin1000m RS232C, non-isolated,distancewithin15m(approx.50feet) Master/Slave, RemoteI/O,(ASCIIIN/OUTDL260only) Protocol: Ksequence, 15 PinfemaleDtypeconnector K–sequence protocol, 6 Pinfemalemodular(RJ12phonejack)typeconnector 11 15 6-pin Female orMODBUSmaster/slave,(ASCIIdevicesDL260only) Direct 6 1 Direct DL260 CPUsis SOFT32, D2–HPP, DV1000,MMI,or SOFT32, D2–HPP, operatorinterfaces,any Port 2PinDescriptions(DL250–1/DL260) 5CS CleartoSend –(RS–422) (RS–485 DL260) CTS2– CleartoSend +(RS422)(RS–485DL260) 15 CTS2+ ReceiveData+(RS–422)(RS–485DL260) 14 + RXD2 Request toSend–(RS–422)(RS–485DL260) 13 RTS2 – 12 Transmit Data–(RS–422)(RS–485 DL260) TXD2– 10 1RS RequesttoSend +(RS–422)(RS–485DL260) RTS2 + 11 VLogicGround Transmit Data+(RS–422)(RS–485DL260) LogicGround TXD2+ 0V 9 0V 8 ReceiveData –(RS–422)(RS–485DL260) CleartoSend(RS–232C) 7 RXD2– ReadytoSend(RS–232C) CTS2 6 ReceiveData(RS232C) RTS2 5 5 VDC Transmit Data(RS232C) RXD2 4 TXD2 3 5V 2 1 Direct DirectNet Port 2PinDescriptions(DL240only) VPower(–)connection (GND) RequesttoSend 0V Transmit Data(RS232C RTS 6 ReceiveData(RS232C) Power(+)connection(200mAmax.) TXD 5 Power(–)connection (GND) RXD 4 5V 3 0V 2 1 Net (slave), located onthe15pinD-shellconnector. It is Master/Slave,MODBUSRTU DirectNet CPU Specifications and Operation 3–11 V-memory and V-memory DL230 and DL240 SOFT32 to save the program, SOFT32 to save battery, back-up your battery, Direct the retaining clip on the battery door DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. down and swing the battery door open. down and swing the battery door with the (+) side outward. locks securely in place. installed. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU To install the D2–BAT–1 CPU battery in the install the D2–BAT–1 To DL250–1 / DL260 CPUs: (#CR2354) 1. Press 2. battery into the coin–type slot Place the 3. it that battery door making sure Close the 4. Make a note of the date the battery was DL250–1 and DL260 lling a fresh battery if your battery has not been changed recently and if your battery has not been changed lling a fresh battery Do not attempt to recharge the battery or dispose of an old battery by Do not attempt to recharge the battery or dispose of an old battery hen the system power is connected. See CPU Setup, which is discussed Before installing or replacing your CPU Before installing onto the circuit board connector. You clip. Don’t use excessive force. may break the retaining clip. was installed. 2. into the retaining Push the battery 3. date the battery Make a note of the To install the D2–BAT CPU battery in CPU the D2–BAT install To CPUs: DL230 or DL240 1. the battery connector Gently push system parameters. You can do this by using You system parameters. on a personal computer. parameters to hard/floppy disk and system V-memory, WARNING: WARNING: fire. The battery may explode or release hazardous materials. InIn this the DL205 CPUs, the battery can be enabled by setting bit 12 in V7633 On. is less than mode the battery Low LED will come on when the battery voltage 2.5VDC data In this mode the CPU will maintain the (SP43) and error E41 will occur. and V memory when power is removed from the CPU, provided the in C,S,T,CT, mode is battery is good. The use of a battery can also determine which operating entered w later in this chapter. the battery circuit can be disabled by turning off Even if you have installed a battery, installed and select “No Battery” if you have a battery bit 12 in V7633. However, operation,low. the battery LED will not turn on if the battery voltage is An optional lithium battery is available to maintain the system RAM retentive system RAM to maintain the is available lithium battery An optional life CPU battery Typical memory external power. system is without when the DL205 shutdown periods. However, includes PLC runtime and normal is five years, which consider insta than ten days. shutdown for a period of more the system will be NOTE: Enabling the Battery Backup Using Battery Backup Battery Using CPU Specifications 3–12 and Operation Operations EEPROM EEPROM Sizes Built-in EEPROM Selecting theProgramStorageMedia DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 240 CPU SpecificationsandOperation 250–1 260 program. bychangingthejumperposition,youcannotmakechangesto protection Handheld whenyouobtaintheprogramfrom DL240. Instead, if EEPROM intheHandheldProgrammeranddownload theprogramtoaDL230. thantheCPUbeingused.Forexample,you could notinstallaDL240 larger) the EEPROMinstalledinHandheldProgrammer limits oftheDL230,youcanmoveaprogrambetweentwoCPUs.However,the NOTE: details onusingtheseAUXfunctionswiththeHandheld Programmer. EEPROMs, comparethem,etc.SeetheDL205HandheldProgrammerManualfor developed offline program intheHandheldandCPU.Also,youcanerase Programmer. Thisenablesyoutoquicklyandeasilycopyprogramsbetweena There EEPROMs, selectonethatiscompatiblewiththefollowingpartnumbers. thefactorywithEEPROMsalreadyinstalled.However,from ifyouneedextra The DL230andDL240CPUsusedifferent sizesofEEPROMs.TheCPUscome change Jumper2,theCPUwillnotoperateproperly. WARNING: issetatthefactoryto jumper from TheEEPROMcanbeelectrically reprogrammedwithoutbeingremoved program. isnon-volatileandnotdependentonbatterybackuptoretainthe memory The DL230andDL240CPUsprovidebuilt-inEEPROMstorage.Thistype of DL240 DL230 the CPU.You are manyAUXfunctionsspecificallyforusewithanEEPROMintheHandheld Iftheinstructionsaresupportedin CPU Type the programiswithinsizelimitsofDL230, use aDL230chipinthe DoNOTchangeJumper2.Thisisforfactorytestoperations.If you can alsosetJumper3,whichwillwriteprotecttheEEPROM.The Hitachi HN58C256P–20 Hitachi HN58C65P–25 EEPROM PartNumber allow changestoEEPROM.Ifyouselectwrite EEPROM both CPUsandtheprogramsizeiswithin must 32K byte(3Kw) 8K byte(2Kw) protect forEEPROM shown selectswrite Jumper inposition bethesamesize(or Capacity CPU Specifications and Operation 3–13 SOFT32 programming Connect PC to either Port Connect Direct DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. ither port on a DL240 CPU). The handheld CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU a cable. The cable is approximately 6.5 feet (200 cm). a cable. The cable is approximately CPU must reside in first slot! be installed in the first slot in the base (closest to the power supply). to the power in the base (closest in the first slot installed be board with the grooves on the top and bottom of the base. Push the CPU on the top and bottom of the board with the grooves To minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or equipment injury, minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal To can connect the Handheld to e must Retaining Clips Retaining Connect Handheld to either Port Connect If you are using a Personal Computer with the WARNING: WARNING: damage, power before installing or removing any always disconnect the system system component. to the CPU with a handheld programmer The Handheld programmer is connected cable. (You The CPU package, you can use either the top or bottom port. You cannot install the CPU in any other slot. When inserting the CPU into the base, the CPU in any other slot. When cannot install You PC align the Use the backplane connector. base until it is firmly seated in the straight into the secure the CPU to the base. retaining clips to programmer is shipped with 260 250–1 240 230 Installing the CPU Connecting the Programming Devices CPU Setup CPU Specifications 3–14 and Operation AUX 5*—CPUConfiguration AUX 4*—I/OConfiguration AUX 3*—V-Memory Operations AUX 2*—RLLOperations tion FunctionandDescrip- AUX 5C 5B 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 46 45 44 42 41 31 24 23 22 21 Auxiliary Functions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Display ErrorHistory fig. Counter InterfaceCon- Bit Override Test Operations Set RetentiveRanges dress Set CPUNetworkAd- Set Watchdog Timer Initialize Scratchpad Display ScanTime dar Display /ChangeCalen- Modify ProgramName Configure I/O Select Configuration tion Check Power-up I/OConfigura- I/O Diagnostics Show I/OConfiguration Clear VMemory Clear AllLadders Clear LadderRange Change Reference Check Program CPU SpecificationsandOperation needed designed specificallyfortheHandheldProgrammersetup,sothey will not be foraccessingtheAUXFunctions.SomeoftheseFunctionsare procedures Programmer.Handheld Themanualsforthoseproductsprovidestep-by-step You canaccesstheAUXFunctionsfrom AppendixAprovidesadescriptionoftheAUXfunctions. parameters. programmer, etc.Theyaredividedintocategories thataffect different system displaying thescantime,copyingprogramstoEEPROMinhandheld Functions Many CPUsetuptasksinvolvetheuseofAuxiliary(AUX)Functions.TheAUX supported withtheDL205CPUs. supported Note, theHandheldProgrammermayhaveadditionalAUXfunctionsthatarenot list oftheAuxiliaryfunctions 230 X X X X 240 X (or available) perform manydif 250–1 260 with the ferent operations,rangingfromclearingladdermemory, for thedifferent CPUsandtheHandheldProgrammer. Direct – notapplicable AUX 6*—HandheldProgrammerConfiguration AUX FunctionandDescription AUX 8*—PasswordOperations AUX 7*—EEPROMOperations

61 83 82 81 76 75 74 73 72 71 65 62 notsupported supported SOFT32 package.Thefollowingtableshowsa Show RevisionNumbers Lock CPU Unlock CPU Modify Password (CPU andHPP) Show EEPROMType Erase HPPEEPROM PROM) Blank Check(HPPEE- HPP EEPROM Compare CPUto CPU Write HPPEEPROMto HPP EEPROM Copy CPUmemoryto Run SelfDiagnostics Beeper On/Off Direct SOFT32 orfromtheDL205 230 240 250–1 260 HPP – – – – CPU Specifications and Operation 3–15 K–Sequence often referred to as using Handheld Programmer Display 23:08:17 97/05/20 s in a memory area hange the date to the 15th of the month DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Setup menu options Setup menu options CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU automatically correct any discrepancy between the date automatically correct any discrepancy Calendar to set the time and date with the Handheld Programmer. time and date with the Handheld Calendar to set the You may never have to use this feature unless you want to clear any You such as retentive ranges, etc. they will be erased when AUX 54 is used. such as retentive ranges, etc. they will be erased when AUX 54 is enter a new program, you should always clear ladder memory. You can You clear ladder memory. should always program, you enter a new SOFT32 you would use the PLC SOFT32 you would special system setup. You can usually change from program to program special system setup. You that allow you set the date and time. For example, you would use AUX 52, the date and time. For example, that allow you set AUX 23 — Clear Ladder Range AUX 23 — Clear all Ladders AUX 24 — Clear V-Memory AUX 31 — Clear the CPU already shows the date as Thursday). The day of the week can only the CPU already shows the date as S S S Direct Date — Year, Month, Date, Day of Date — Year, week (0 – 6, Sunday thru Saturday) — 24 hour format, Hours, Time Minutes, Seconds The CPU uses the following format to The CPU uses the following format display the date and time. S S the “scratchpad”. In some cases, you may make changes to the system setup that the “scratchpad”. In some cases, For example, if you specify a range of Control will be stored in system memory. changes are stored. Relays (CRs) as retentive, these to the default values. AUX 54 resets the system memory Before you program. clear the complete Function 24 to use AUX memory areas. to clear other other AUX functions can also use You The / Calendar that can be used for and DL260 also have a Clock DL240, DL250–1 there are also AUX functions If you need to use this feature many purposes. available Display/Change With protocol only. andof the week. For example, if you c day the you will also have to change the day of the week and the 15th is on a Thursday, (unless be set using the handheld programmer. The DL205 CPUs maintain system parameter WARNING: you’ll only need to Usually, setup information that is stored in system memory. the old program initialize the system memory if you are changing programs and required a without ever initializing system memory. If you have set special reset all system memory. this AUX function will Remember, parameters operation before Make sure you that you have considered all ramifications of this you select it. You can use the AUX function to change any component of the date or time. can use the AUX function to change You the CPU will not However, 260 250–1 240 230 Initializing System Memory Setting the Clock and Calendar Clearing an Clearing Program Existing CPU Specifications 3–16 and Operation Stages Counters Timers V Memory Control Relays eoyArea Memory Area Network Address Setting theCPU Protection Password Memory Ranges Setting Retentive DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 240 CPU SpecificationsandOperation 250–1 None bydefault CT0 –CT77 None bydefault V2000 –V7777 C300 –C377 Default Range 260 DL230 S0 –S377 CT0 –CT77 T0 –T77 V0 –V7777 C0 –C377 default settingsare: application requiresadditionalretentiverangesornoatall.The ranges aresuitableformanyapplications,butyoucanchangethemifyour DL205CPUsprovidecertainrangesofretentivememorybydefault.Thedefault The settingsfornetworkoperation. communication have thepasswordremoved. willnotbeabletoaccess theCPU.TheCPUmustbereturnedtofactory to you WARNING: functions. For moreinformationonpasswords,seetheappropriate appendixonauxiliary thepasswordprotection. remove youenter thecorrectpassword,youcanchangepasswordtoallzeros Once password hasbeenenteredintotheCPUyoucannot enterallzerostoremoveit. with apasswordof00000000.Allzerosremoves thepasswordprotection.Ifa You canselectan8-digitnumericpassword.TheCPUsareshippedfromthefactory parameters. password beforeyoucanuseaprogramming devicetochangeanysystem “lock” theCPUagainstaccess.Once islockedyoumustenterthe multi–level programunauthorized The DL205CPUsallowyoutouseapasswordhelpminimizetheriskof make sureyouobtaintheoptionalbattery. onconditions.If depending retain thevaluesineventofapowerloss,butonlyforshortperiodtime, WARNING: menus toselecttheretentiveranges. You canuseAUX57tosettheretentiveranges.You canalsouse The parameters.Thedefaultsettingsare: communication the HandheldProgrammertosetnetworkaddressforportand DL240,DL250–1andDL260CPUshavebuiltin The Avail. Range S S S S DirectNet 9600 Baud Odd Parity Hex Mode Station Address1 None bydefault CT0 –CT177 None bydefault V2000 –V7777 C300 –C377 passwords forevenmoresecurity. Onceyouenterapasswordcan Default Range Make sureyouremember yourpassword.Ifyouforgetpassword The DL205CPUsdonotcomewithabattery. Thesupercapacitorwill Manualprovidesadditionalinformationaboutchoosing the DL240 and/or datachanges.TheDL240,DL250–1andDL260offer V0 –V7777 C0 –C377 S0 –S777 CT0 –CT177 T0 –T177 Avail. Range the retentiverangesareimportantforyourapplication, V1400 –V3777 C1000 –C1777 None bydefault CT0 –CT177 None bydefault Default Range DL250–1 V0 –V17777 C0 –C1777 S0 –S1777 CT0 –CT177 T0 –T377 Avail. Range DirectNet V1400 –V3777 C1000 –C1777 Default Range None bydefault CT0 –CT377 None bydefault ports.You canuse Direct DL260 V0 –V37777 C0 –C3777 Avail. Range S0 –S1777 CT0 –CT377 T0 –T377 SOFT32 CPU Specifications and Operation 3–17 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 RUN TERM RUN CPU PORT 1 PORT PORT2 CH4 V7647 V3777 V7646 CPU DL240 PWR BATT L 256 * 256 600–100 500 256 1.95 H CH3 + + + V7645 V3776 V7644 + H = high limit of the range L = low limit of the range H = 600 L = 100 Resolution Resolution Resolution Resolution Example Calculations: CH2 V7643 V3775 V7642 Analog Pots DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU CH1 V7641 V3774 V7640 an be used to change timer an be used how you’re using the values in the are 4 analog potentiometers (pots) potentiometers are 4 analog resolution or, more precise control. more precise resolution or, These analog pots have a resolution of These analog pots have a resolution span 256 pieces. Therefore, if the limits is between the upper and lower have less than or equal to 256, then you better the Use the formula shown to determine smallest be amount of change that can detected. For example, a range of 100 – 600 would result in a resolution of 1.95. Therefore, the smallest increment would be 1.95 units. (The actual result depends on exactly control program). There DL240 CPU. plate of the on the face These pots c of pulse train frequency constants, for an analog output output, value module, etc. Each has corresponding analog channel V-memory and locations for setting lower each analog channel. upper limits for shows the V-memory The table below each analog channel. locations used for Analog Data Analog Data Lower Limit Analog Data Upper Limit The following V-memory locations are the default location for the analog pots. The following V-memory a use can you or, can use the program logic to load the limits into these locations, You programming is 0 – 9999. device to load the values. The range for each limit 260 250–1 240 230 Setting the Analog Potentiometer Ranges CPU Specifications 3–18 and Operation for atimer. SeeChapter5fordetailsonhowtheseinstructionsoperate. followingexampleshowshowyoucouldusetheseanalogpotentiometerstochangethepresetvalue The Turn clockwisetoincreasethetimerpreset. Turn allthewaycounter-clockwisetouselowestvalue Program loadsrangesintoV-memory DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Direct SOFT CH2 CH1 CH2 CH1 SP0 T20 X1 CPU SpecificationsandOperation 100 100 M T20 TMR OUT LD OUT LD 600 600 V3774 V7641 V7640 K600 K100 OUT Y0 Current Current Value Value Y0 Y0 T2 T2 X1 X1 quickly adjustthepresetfrom100to600withCH1analogpot. Use V3774asthepresetfortimer. Thiswillallowyouto Load theupperlimit(600)foranalograngeonCh1intoV7641. Load thelowerlimit(100)foranalograngeonCh1intoV7640. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 0 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 preset = Timing Diagram preset =100 Timing Diagram 1/10 Seconds 1/10 Seconds  300 CPU Specifications and Operation 3–19 NO YES NO YES OK OK? Mode? Power up Fatal error PGM mode RUN Update input configuration Update output Do diagnostics Force CPU into config. and verify Check I/O module Service peripheral Initialize hardware based on retentive Write output data to Write register, turn on LED register, Read input data from Execute ladder program PID Operations (DL250) Update Clock / Calendar Initialize various memory Report the error, set flag, Report the error, CPU Bus Communication Specialty and Remote I/O Specialty and Remote I/O PGM is DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU “scan time” L205 CPUs control all aspects of system operation. The flow all aspects of system operation. L205 CPUs control CPU remains in its current mode. If shows the main tasks of the CPU operating system. In this section, we tasks of the CPU operating system. shows the main how the tasks differ, mode based on the CPU the CPU writes the output results of these two CPU Operating System — the CPU manages CPU Operating control. all aspects of system Modes — The three primary CPU Operating are Program Mode, Run modes of operation Mode. Mode, and Test two important areas we — The CPU Timing and the discuss are the I/O response time CPU scan time. memory map CPU Memory Map — The CPUs system shows the CPU addresses of various inputs, resources, such as timers, counters, and outputs. defined as the average time around the task loop. the task defined as the average time around the inputs, Note that the CPU is always reading even during program mode. This allows programminginput status at any tools to monitor time. The outputs are only updated in Run Mode. In state. program mode, they are in the off In Run Mode, the CPU executes the user ladder program. Immediately afterwards, any PID loops which are configured are executed (DL250 only). Then tasks to the appropriate output points. Error Non-fatal errors are detection has two levels. the reported, but a fatal error occurs, the CPU is forced into program mode and the outputs go off. Achieving the proper control for your equipment or process requires a good requires equipment or process for your the proper control Achieving D how understanding of chart below aspects of CPU operation: will investigate four S S S S the internal At powerup, the CPU initializes starts electronic hardware. Memory initialization settings. In with examining the retentive memory general, the contents of retentive memory is preserved, and non-retentive memory is initialized to zero (unless otherwise specified). the CPU begins After the one-time powerup tasks, The flowchart to the right the cyclical scan activity. shows The and the existence of any errors. CPU Operating System CPU Operation CPU Specifications 3–20 and Operation Operation Run Mode Operation Program Mode DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation changes tominimizetheriskofpersonalinjuryor damagetoequipment. effectivebecome immediately. application shouldmakechangestotheprogram. ChangesduringRunMode WARNING: will turnalltheoutputsoff andentertheProgramMode. newprograminformation. Ifanerrorisfoundinthenewprogram,thenCPU the “bumpless.” You canalsoedittheprogramduringRunMode.TheModeEditsare not Mode. toplacetheCPUinRun Programmer device, suchastheHandheld programming position, youcanusea DL260). Or, Mode operation(DL240,DL250–1and You canusethemodeswitchtoselectRun application programsolutions. execution canaffect theresultsofyour howeachoftheseareas understand several Run Modeoperationcanbedividedinto S S S Run Mode.Someoftheseinclude: You canperformmanyoperationsduring (DL250 onl calculations forconfiguredPIDloops application program,doesPID In RunMode,theCPUexecutes device suchastheHandheldProgrammertoplaceCPUinProgramMode. Mode operation.Or, withtheswitchin You canusethemodeswitchonDL250–1andDL260CPUstoselectProgram memory areas,etc. memory such asthenetworkaddress,retentive m program application program.You alsousethe Modeistoenterorchangean Program the outputmodules.Theprimaryusefor execute In ProgramModetheCPUdoes not Update Variable memorylocations Update timer/counterpresetvalues Monitor andchangeI/Opointstatus key areas.Itisveryimportantyou the applicationprogramorupdate ode tosetupCPUparameters, y), andupdatestheI/Osystem. with themodeswitchinTERM Instead, theCPUmaintainsoutputsintheirlast statewhileitaccepts Only authorized personnel fully familiar withallaspectsofthe fully personnel authorized Only Make sureyouthoroughlyconsidertheimpactofany TERM position,youcanuseaprogramming Read InputsfromSpecialtyI/O Service Peripherals,ForceI/O Solve the Application Program Solve PIDEquations(DL250) Update Clock,SpecialRelays Write OutputstoSpecialtyI/O CPU BusCommunication Download Program X7 X0 _ X17 X10 _ Write Outputs Read Inputs Diagnostics Y7 Y0 _ CPU Specifications and Operation 3–21 ______DL250–1/260 RSSS DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU the CPU has read the inputs. Generally, the Generally, has read the inputs. the CPU after Remote I/O link is managed by the Remote Master, Remote I/O link is managed by the mmediately read the input status directly from I/O modules. the input status directly from I/O mmediately read This type of forcing can temporarily change the status of a Net protocol does not support bit operations. etc. This is also the portion of the Forcing from a peripheral – not a permanent force, good only for one Forcing from a peripheral – not a permanent force, good only for scan (or Bit Override (DL240, DL250–1 and DL260) – holds the I/O point and S. (These CT, C, T, bits are X, Y, other bit) in the current state. Valid memory types are discussed in more detail later in this chapter). For example, it would read a programming device to see if any input, output, For example, it would read a programming bit. For example, you may want to force an input on, even though it is really bit. For example, you may want to force an input on, even though It may appear the Remote I/O point status is updated every scan. This is not status is updated every scan. This is It may appear the Remote I/O point again. A complete list of the Immediate instructions is included in Chapter 5. list of the Immediate instructions again. A complete This is primarily useful during testing situations when you need to force a bit on This is primarily useful during testing situations when you need to force Direct S S The CPU reads the status of all inputs, then stores it in the image register. Input the image register. then stores it in of all inputs, reads the status The CPU location. by a memory with an X followed are designated locations image register application program. when it solves the by the CPU data is used Image register change an input may Of course, CPU scan time is measured in milliseconds. If you have an application that cannot measured in milliseconds. If you CPU scan time is wait These do not use you can use Immediate Instructions. until the next I/O update, the application program. The input image register to solve the status of the Immediate instructions i However, this lengthens the program scan since the CPU has to read the I/O point since the CPU has to read this lengthens the program scan However, status the inputs from the After the CPU reads it reads any input point input modules, modules that are data from any Specialty Interface installed, such as Counter modules, from scan that reads the input status Remote I/O racks. not the CPU. from the input modules, it reads any attached After the CPU reads the inputs peripheral attached devices. This is primarily a communications service for any devices. to be modified. There are two basic types of or other memory type status needs forcing available with the DL205 CPUs. Note: Regular Forcing — discrete off. to change the point status that was stored in the image register. This allows you to during the next This value will be valid until the image register location is written scan. to trigger another event. NOTE: information from the Remote I/O Master module quite true. The CPU will receive may not have received an update from all the every scan, but the Remote Master Remotethe slaves. Remember, Read Inputs from Specialty and Remote I/O Read Inputs Service Peripherals and Force I/O CPU Specifications 3–22 and Operation Registers and Special Special Relays, Update Clock, Communication CPU Bus Bit OverrideOFF DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation Solution Result ofProgram Programmer Force from Input Update Relays, suchasdiagnosticrelays,etc.,thatarealso updatedduringthissegment. locations getupdatedoneveryscan.Also,there areseveraldifferent Special locations calendar timerwhichisaccessibletotheapplication program.SpecialV-memory The DL240,DL250–1andDL260CPUshave aninternalreal-timeclockand segment. these modules.TheCPUperformsbothreadandwriterequestsduringthis (local) base.Thereisaportionoftheexecutioncycleusedtocommunicatewith I/Opoint standard and fromtheCPUoverbusonbackplane.Thisdataismorethan Specialty CPU doesnotupdatetheImageRegisterwhenbitoverrideisenabled. followingdiagramshowsabriefoverviewofthebitoverride feature.Noticethe The application programorfromtheI/Oupdateuntilbitoverrideisremoved. maintain Y0asoff. TheCPUwillneverupdatethepointwithresultsfrom and theCPUwillnotchangestateofY0.IfyouthenforceY0off, theCPUwill status.Now,the ifyouusetheprogrammingdeviceto force Y0on,itwillremainon change enabled theBitOverrideforY0anditwasoff atthetime,thenCPUwouldnot forcing isnotdisabledbecausethebitoverrideenabled.Forexample,if you is There when thebitoverridewasenabled,thenX1wouldalwaysbeevaluatedas“on”. it program, comes on,theCPUwillnotacknowledgechange.So,ifyouusedX1in thetime,then at discrete point by the option point-by-point Bit Override— from within the stateofY0.However, you an advantageavailablewhenyouusethebitoverridefeature.Theregular hold thisinformation.Thisportionoftheexecution cyclemakessurethese Modules, suchastheDataCommunicationsModule,cantransferdatato would alwaysbeevaluatedas“off” inthiscase.Ofcourse,ifX1wason basis byusingAUX59fromthe (DL240,DL250–1andDL260)Bitoverridecanbeenabledona the CPU Direct status. ThistypeofcommunicationscanonlyoccurontheCPU CPU. Forexample,ifyouenable C377 Y128 X128 OFF OFF OFF Image Register(example) SOFT32. Bitoverride will not ...... ON ON ON C2 X2 Y2 ___ DATA changethestateofX1.ThismeansthatevenifX1 OFF ON ON C1 X1 Y1 Data OFF OFF OFF C0 Y0 X0 DCM can stilluseaprogrammingdevicetochange Handheld basically Solution Result ofProgram Programmer Force from Input Update bit overrideforX1,andX1isoff disables anychangestothe Programmer or,Programmer by a ___ Bit OverrideON DCM menu CPU Specifications and Operation 3–23 have been configured Diagnostics Read Inputs Write Outputs Write CPU Bus Communication Solve PID equations (DL250) Write Outputs to Specialty I/O Write Update Clock, Special Relays Update Clock, Special Service Peripherals, Force I/O Service Peripherals, Force Program Application Solve the points that are not used in the Read Inputs from Specialty I/O Read Inputs from Specialty y loops which DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. f, then the output image register will show f, then the output image register will CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU Y0 Y3 END OUT OUT writes the contents of the output image register to the K10 LD X1 X10 ill overwrite any forcing information that was stored. For example, ill overwrite any forcing information pheral devices. If any I/O points or memory data have been forced, pheral devices. If any I/O points or At that point, a new image At that point, a new X5 X0 C0 interval) of each loop is programmable. Please refer to Chapter 8, PID interval) of each loop is programmable. Please refer to Chapter 8, C100 such that Y0 should be turned of xecution, immediately following it. Onl the output image register, so the forced points get updated with the status the output image register, should be off. Of course, you can force output Of course, you can force should be off. If an output point was used in the application program, the results of the If an output point was used in image register, the CPU image register, Theinstruction in the evaluates each CPU this segment program during application define cycle. The instructions of the scan between input conditions the relationship outputs. and the system with the first rung of the The CPU begins evaluating it from left to ladder program, to bottom. It continues, right and from top it encounters the END rung by rung, until coil instruction. complete. for the outputs is are calculated, and then only according to a built-in loop scheduler. The sample time are a built-in loop scheduler. calculated, and then only according to (calculation of PID loop calculation on the overall CPU Loop Operation, for more on the effects scan time. constructed the Once the application program has solved the instruction logic and output The can process up to DL260 CPU can process up to 16 PID loops and the DL250–1 from the ladder 4 PID loops. The loop calculations are run as a separate task program e NOTE: w program solution device, and a rung containing Y0 was if Y0 was forced on by the programming evaluated Thealso relays (C), the stages (S), and the variable memory (V) are internal control updated in this segment. when it recall the CPU may have obtained and stored forcing information may You peri serviced the that Y0 the output image register also contains this information. the output image register also contains there is no application program. In this case, the point remains forced because solution that results from the application program execution. corresponding output points located in the local CPU base or the local expansion CPU also made sure any forcing operation changes were the bases. Remember, stored in specified earlier. 260 250–1 240 230 Write Outputs Write Solve PID Loop Equations Solve Application Program CPU Specifications 3–24 and Operation Diagnostics Remote I/O Specialty and Write Outputsto DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation Remote I/OlinkcommunicationismanagedbytheMaster, nottheCPU. communication during theCPUscan. instruction 55toincreaseordecrease thewatchdogtimervalue.ThereisalsoanRSTWT AUX You canuseAUX53toviewtheminimum,maximum,andcurrentscantime.Use scan, quite NOTE: from theimageregistertoRemoteI/Oracks. installed. Forexample,thisistheportionofscanthatwritesoutputstatus output pointinformationthatisrequiredbyanySpecialtymoduleswhichare After theCPUupdatesoutputsinlocalandexpansionbases,itsends TIMEOUT” TIMEOUT” displays“E003S/W Programmer error. Forexample,theHandheld Mode, turnoff alloutputs,andreportthe exceeded t exceeded the factoryis200mS.Ifthistime scancycle.Thedefaultvalueset from the complete timeallowedfortheCPUto maximum have a“watchdog”timerthatstores the timer control.DL205CPUs watchdog tasks isthescantimecalculationand One ofthemoreimportantdiagnostic DL205 system. codes availablewiththe error various Appendix Bcontainsalistingofthe manydifferenterror conditions. report DL205 CPUsautomaticallydetectand S S S tasks, suchas: performs During thispartofthe scan, the CPU resetting thewatchdogtimer updating specialrelays calculating thescantime true. TheCPUwillsendtheinformationtoRemoteI/OMastermoduleevery but theRemoteMasterwillupdateactualremotemodules ItmayappeartheRemoteI/Opointstatusisupdatedeveryscan.Thisnot all systemdiagnosticsandother the solve applicationsegmentof that canbeusedintheapplicationprogramtoreset thewatchdogtimer he CPUwillentertheProgram when thescanoverrunoccurs. sequence betweenthemasterandslavemodules.Remember, the Read InputsfromSpecialtyI/O Service Peripherals,ForceI/O Solve the Application Program Update Clock,SpecialRelays Write OutputstoSpecialtyI/O Solve PIDLoopEquations CPU BusCommunication Write Outputs Read Inputs Diagnostics during thenext CPU Specifications and Operation 3–25 Solve Program DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Solve Program CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU Outputs CPU Writes Write Outputs Scan Solve Program input point and update a corresponding output point. In the majority of a corresponding output point. input point and update Inputs Read CPU Reads Inputs The point in the scan period when the field input changes states scan period when the field input The point in the delay time to On Input module Off CPU scan time On delay time to Output module Off I/O Response Time S S S S In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following the In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding items. + Output Delay = Response Time Input Delay + Scan Time The senses the input change after the I/O response time is longest when the module Read Inputs portion of the execution cycle. In this case the new input status does not example of the get read until the following scan. The following diagram shows an timing for this situation. following the In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding items. + Output Delay = Response Time Input Delay +(2 x Scan Time) I/O response time is the amount of time required for the control system to sense a control system to required for the amount of time time is the I/O response an change in However, instantaneously. CPU performs this task practically applications, the some are four things that fast update times. There applications do require extremely the I/O response time: can affect The time is shortest when the module senses the input change before I/O response the cycle. In this case the input status is read, Read Inputs portion of the execution the is solved, and the output point gets updated. The following application program diagram timing for this situation. shows an example of the Solve Program Off/On Delay Off/On Output Module Input Module Delay Off/On Field Input Field Scan Normal Maximum I/O Response Normal Minimum I/O Response Is Timing Important Is Timing for Your Application? I/O Response Time I/O Response CPU Specifications 3–26 and Operation Response TimeResponse Improving DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Field Input Scan Field Input Scan Off/On Delay Input Module Off/On Delay Input Module Output Module Output Module Off/On Delay Off/On Delay CPU SpecificationsandOperation Normal Read Program Program Solve Solve Input immediate immediate Therefore, uses theresultstosolve thatoneinstructionwithoutupdatingtheimage register. NOTE: input instruction,theimmediateoutput andallinstructionsinbetween. The instructionexecutiontimeiscalculatedbyadding thetimeforimmediate Input Delay+InstructionExecutionTime +OutputDelay=ResponseTime items. In thiscase,youcancalculatetheresponsetime bysimplyaddingthe following example showsimmediateinputandoutputinstructions,theireffect. I/Oinstructionsareprobablythemostusefultechnique.Thefollowing Immediate areafewthingsyoucando thehelpimprovethroughput. There S S S I/O ResponseTime When the immediate instruction reads the current status fromamodule,it Whentheimmediateinstruction readsthe Immediate Choose modulesthathavefasterresponsetimes ladder programexecutionsegment) Use immediateI/Oinstructions(whichupdatethepointsduring Choose instructionswithfasterexecutiontimes Read Input Inputs Read any regularinstructionsthat followwillstilluseimageregistervalues.Any instructions that follow w Program Program Solve Solve Scan Outputs Scan Write Immediate I/O ResponseTime Output Write ill accessthemoduleagain toupdatethestatus. CPU Reads Inputs Outputs Normal Program Program Write Solve Solve CPU Writes Outputs Program Program Solve Solve CPU Specifications and Operation 3–27 NO YES NO YES OK OK? Mode? Power up Fatal error PGM mode RUN Update input configuration Update output Do diagnostics Force CPU into config. and verify Check I/O module Service peripheral Initialize hardware based on retentive Write output data to Write register, turn on LED register, Read input data from PID Equations (DL250) Execute ladder program Update Clock / Calendar Initialize various memory Report the error, set flag, Report the error, CPU Bus Communication Specialty and Remote I/O Specialty and Remote I/O PGM DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU SOFT32 or Direct affect the scan time. affect med by the operating high rates of speed, then you’ll amount of time to complete. Of all emote I/O because it’s much faster emote I/O because it’s the most control over is the amount probably have to use a High-Speed I/O Counter module. Also, if you have points that need to be located several hundred then you feet from the CPU, need r and cheaper to install a single remote I/O cable than it is to run all those signal wires for each individual I/O point. The following paragraphs provide some general information on how much time some of the segments can require. The scan time covers all the cyclical time covers The scan perfor are tasks that these things are usually However, dictated by the application. For need to count example, if you have a pulses at system. You can use You system. the display the Handheld Programmer to minimum, current scan maximum, and occurred since the times that have Mode to Run Mode previous Program can be very transition. This information important evaluating the when performance a system. of are several there As shown previously, cycle. segments that make up the scan a Each of these segments requires certain really the segments, the only one you have of time it takes to execute the application program. This is because different amounts of instructions take different time need to execute. So, if you think you a faster scan, then you can try to choose faster instructions. choice of I/O modules and system Your configuration, such as expansion or remote I/O, can also CPU Scan Time Considerations CPU Time Scan CPU Specifications 3–28 and Operation Reading Inputs Process Initialization DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation discussed earlier. input NOTE: be calculatedasfollows.WhereNIisthetotalnumberofinputpoints. example,thetimerequired foraDL240toreadtwo8-pointinputmoduleswould For shows typicalupdatetimesrequiredbytheCPU. CPU youareusingandthenumberofinputpointsinbase.Thefollowingtable timerequiredtoreadtheinputstatusformodulesdependsonwhich The for theapplicationprogram. initialization The CPUperformsaninitializationtaskoncethesystempowerison. Per inputpoint Overhead Time Maximum Time Minimum Time Time Time Formula Timing Factors Initialization Example status fromthemodules.Don’tconfusethiswithI/Oresponsetimethatwas + + + ThisinformationprovidestheamountoftimeCPUspendsreading 32 32 228.8 task isperformedonceatpower-up,soitdoesnotaffect thescantime s s ) ) s (12.3 (12.3 3.6 Seconds 1.6 Seconds 64.0 6.0 DL230

DL230 s 16) NI) s 2.0 Seconds 1.0 Seconds 32.0 12.3 DL240 DL240 s s bases) (w/ 2exp. 2.7 Seconds 1.2 Seconds DL250–1 12.6 2.5 DL250–1 s s bases) (w/ 4exp. 3.7 Seconds 1.2 Seconds 12.6 2.5 DL260 DL260 s s CPU Specifications and Operation s s 3–29 s s

DL260 s s s s DL260 0 3.2/9.2 25.0/35.0 3.6/11.5 35.0/44.0 1.82 17.9 2.0 s s s s

s s s DL250–1 s 0 3.2/9.2 25.0/35.0 3.6/11.5 35.0/44.0 DL250–1 1.82 17.9 2.0 s s s s DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. DL240 s s s s DL240 0 23 / 26 52 / 70 26 / 30 60 / 75 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 6.0 67.0 40.0 s s sxNI) DL230 s sx16) (40 DL230 0 22 / 28 24 / 58 N/A N/A (40 ) ) N/A N/A N/A sx2) sxNM) Remote I/O Remote base) would be calculated as follows. Where NM is the number Remote base) would be calculated (67 (67 s ) ) s s Remote I/O Remote etc.) (such as High-Speed Counter, Specialty Modules 780 6 6 the requests for service until the Service Peripherals portion of the scan. The the requests for service until the + + + Rec. Min. / Max. Min. & Max. Send Min. / Max. Rec. Min. / Max. Send Min. / Max. S S Remote Module Time Time Time Formula Example Overhead Per module (with inputs) Per input point During with the associated reads any input points cycle the CPU portion of the this following. these modules depends on which to read any input status from The time required the number of input points. the number of modules, and CPU you are using, Communicationcan occur at any time during the scan, but the CPU only requests “logs” this if there are no peripherals connected. CPU does not spend any time on For example, the time required for a DL240 to read two 8-point input modules For example, the time required a (located in of modules and NI is the total number of input points. of modules and NI is the total number To Log Request (anytime) To Nothing Connected Port 1 Port 2 Service Peripherals Reading Inputs I/O from Specialty CPU Specifications 3–30 and Operation Writing Outputs Registers Relays, Special Calendar, Special Update Clock/ Communication CPU Bus DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation points). modules wouldbecalculatedasfollows(where NOisthetotalnumberofoutput For example,thetimerequiredforaDL240to write datafortwo8-pointoutput The followingtableshowstypicalupdatetimesrequiredbytheCPU. on depends timerequiredtowritetheoutputstatusforlocalandexpansionI/O modules The Modes. Program locationsduringthistime. V-memory The clock,calendar, andspecialrelaysareupdatedloadedinto special concerningtheimpactonscantime. information Iftimingiscriticalinyourapplication,consultthemoduledocumentationforany time. NOTE: and thetypeofrequestbeingprocessed. communications. bus. DuringthisportionofthecycleCPUcompletesanybus Some specialtymodulescanalsocommunicatedirectlywiththeCPUvia to servicetheperipheralsdependsoncontentofrequest. communications During theServicePeripheralsportionofscan,CPUanalyzes Run Mode Mode Program Per outputpoint Overhead Program ModeMax. Run ModeMax. Minimum Timing Factors Time =266.6us Time =33+(16x14.6us) Example Formula To ServiceRequest Time =33+(NOx14.6us) SomespecialtymodulescanhaveaconsiderableimpactontheCPUscan Modes which CPUyouareusingandthenumberofoutputpointsinbase. Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum request andrespondsasappropriate.Theamountoftimerequired The actualtimerequireddependsonthetypeofmodulesinstalled 8.5 66.0 DL230 3.5 Seconds 30 ms 260 s s DL230 s 26.0 20.0 8.0 8.0 DL230 14.6 33.0 s fixed s fixed s s DL240 This updateisperformed 4 Seconds 20 ms 250 s s DL240 s 85.0 60.0 48.0 35.0 DL240 3.0 28.1 s s s s DL250–1 s s 2 Second 410 8 DL250–1 s 26.0 19.0 11.0 11.0 s DL250–1 3.0 28.1 during both s s s s DL260 s s 3.7 Second 410 8 26.0 19.0 11.0 11.0 s DL260 DL260 s Run and s s s s CPU Specifications and Operation 3–31 s s s s DL260 s DL260 1.9 17.7 3.2 26.8 103.0 s s s s s DL250–1 1.9 17.7 3.2 DL250–1 26.8 103.0 s s DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. s s s DL240 DL240 6.0 67.5 46.0 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 422.0 855.0 sxNO) s x 16) (46 s s DL230 (46 ) ) DL230 N/A N/A N/A 600.0 900.0 sxNM) sx2) Remote I/O (67.5 (67.5 rtion of the cycle the CPU writes any output points associated with the points associated writes any output cycle the CPU rtion of the s Remote base) would be calculated as follows. Where NM is the number Remote base) would be calculated ) ) s s depends on many things, such as the number of I/O modules installed, etc. depends on many things, such as the number of I/O modules installed, Remote I/O Remote etc.) (such as High-Speed Counter, Specialty Modules 6 6 877 This total time is the actual time required for the CPU to update these This total time is the actual time + + + S S Remote Module Diagnostic Time Formula Time Example Time Time Minimum Maximum Per output point Overhead Per module (with outputs) During this po During this following. Thedata to these modules depends write any output image register time required to and the number of output are using, the number of modules, on which CPU you points. NOTE: additional time that is required for the CPU to outputs. This does not include any modules. actually service the particular specialty types of system diagnostics. The amount of time The DL205 CPUs perform many required The shows the minimum and maximum times that can be expected. following table For example, the time required for a DL240 to write two 8-point output modules For example, the time required a (located in of modules and NO is the total number of output points. of modules and NO is the total number Diagnostics Writing Outputs to Outputs Writing I/O Specialty CPU Specifications 3–32 and Operation Program Execution Application DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation instructions operate. time. Chapter5providesdetailedinformation on howthesedifferent types of be calculatedasfollows. DL240 runningtheprogramshownwould For example,theexecutiontimefor a total programexecutiontime. instructions inyourprogram to find the You canaddtheexecutiontimesforall execution overhead. instructions used,andtheamountof of program program timerequiredtosolvetheapplication The or memorylocationisupdated. evaluated theappropriateimageregister right andtoptobottom.Aseachrungis The CPUexecutestheprogramleftto top (address0)totheENDinstruction. CPUprocessestheprogramfrom The OA 210.5 instructions includeFOR/NEXT instructions additional instructionsthatcanchangetheway theprogramexecutes.These Program ControlInstructions Appendix C TOTAL 1.4 Time STR X0 Instruction RC 1.0 OR C0 NNX 1.2 ANDN X1 U 07.95 OUT Y0 TNC0 1.6 STRN C100 DK062 LD K10 TNC0 1.6 STRN C101 U 20 21.0 OUT V2002 TNC0 1.6 STRN C102 DK062 LD K50 TNC0 1.6 STRN C103 U 20 21.0 OUT V2006 T 51.4 STR X5 NNX01.2 ANDN X10 U 37.95 OUT Y3 N 16 END depends on can interruptthenormalprogramflowandef provides acompletelistofinstructionexecutiontimes forDL205CPUs. the typeandnumber loops, Subroutines,andInterruptRoutines.These —theDL240,DL250–1andDL260CPUsoffer s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s C101 C100 C103 C102 C0 X5 X0 fect the programexecution X10 X1 OUT LD LD OUT V2006 V2002 K10 K50 OUT OUT END Y3 Y0 CPU Specifications and Operation 3–33 ? ? binary 1011 ASCII 72B 0402 ferent forms? ? hexadecimal ? 3 A ? 49.832 177 ? BCD 7 are more convenient than PLC resources (there’s a PLC resources (there’s 01234567 –961428 X= 1482 X 3A9 1 X 2 X 9 10111213141516 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 access ? –300124 Decimal 1 2 3 4Octal 5 6 1 7 2 8 3 4 5 6 7 10 octal decimal DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 1001011011 representations CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU numbers in their the use of 123456710 12345678 PLC resources, it’s time to PLC resources, it’s count in groups of eight than ten, because eight is an even power of 2. count in groups of eight than ten, our PLC instruction will address group of 8 plus 0 (no individuals). LOGIC PLCs for the first time, LOGIC PLCs for information you LOGIC PLCs. The counting and zeros. So why do we have to deal with numbers in so many dif and zeros. So why do we have to Octal Decimal In the figure below, we have two groups of eight circles. Counting in octal we have we have two groups of eight circles. In the figure below, “20” Don’t say “twenty”, say items, meaning 2 groups of eight, plus 0 individuals “two–zero octal”. This makes a clear distinction between number systems. Numbers have meaning, and some we use numbers to represent a size or others for particular purposes. Sometimes amount locations or addresses, or to time. In of something. Other numbers refer to to numbers to give a particular meaning. science we attach engineering units and configuration. a fixed amount of resources, depending on the model PLCsoffer I/O points, (V-memory), use the word “resources” to include variable memory We PLCs allow you to add I/O points in groups of timers, counters, etc. Most modular easier for of our PLCs are counted in octal. It’s eight. In fact, all the resources computers to of Octal means simply counting in groups to the eight things at a time. In the figure quantity right, there are eight circles. The in decimal is “8”, but in octal it is “10” (8 and “10” 9 are not valid in octal). In octal, means 1 After difference). The CPU instruction set accesses resources of the PLC using octal difference). addresses. they start Octal addresses are the same as octal quantities, except so we don’t skip it. counting at zero. The number zero is significant to a computer, Our circles are in an array of square access a containers to the right. To resource, its location using the octal references shown. If these were counters, “CT14” would access the black circle location. As any good computer does, PLCs store and manipulate numbers in binary form: As any good computer does, PLCs ones If you are a new PLC user or are using If you are a new Direct to study how our please take a moment each find that You’ll PLCs use numbers. own has their PLC manufacturer conventions on a moment to familiarize PLCs. Take numbers are used in yourself with how Direct to all our PLCs. learn here applies PLC Resources PLC Numbering Systems Numbering PLC CPU Specifications 3–34 and Operation Numbers Hexadecimal Decimal Numbers Binary-Coded V–Memory DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation data, etc.Hexadecimalis aconvenientwayforhumanstoviewfullbinary data. The rangeisfrom0000toFFFF(hex).PLCsoften needthisfullrangeforsensor A 4-digithexadecimalnumbercanrepresent digits. To extendourdecimaldigits0through9,weuseAFasshown. binary numbersaresimilarto Hexadecimal data inBCD.SpecialRLLinstructionsconvertfrom BCDtobinary, orvisa–versa. data, numbers,therangeisreducedto09999.Manymath instructionsuseBCD BCD apurebinarysense,16-bitwordrepresentsnumbersfrom0to65535.Instoring In four BCDdigits,witharangeofdecimalnumbersfrom0000to9999. stored asfourbinarybits(anibble).ThispermitseachV-memory locationtostore Binary-Coded using purebinarynumbers.Acompromisesolutionbetweenthetwois aswell(viaoperatorinterfaces).However,decimal computersaremoreefficient in Since humansnaturallycountindecimal,weprefertoenterandviewPLCdata that’s all.Itdoesnotconvertor movethedataonitsown. type V-memory locationandthethingwhichlaterreadsitmustbothusesamedata matter.really Whatmattersis:thesourceormechanismwhichwritesdataintoa hex”? A frequently-askedquestionis“HowdoItellifanumberbinary, octal,BCD,or and hexadecimalnumbers.Alltheseareconvertedstoredasbinaryforus. We useinstructionsorviewingtools time. datais16-bitbinary,V-memory butwe registers, registers, V-memoryEach locationisonedatawordwide,meaning16bits.Forconfiguration V1983 isnotvalid(“9”and“8”areoctaldigits). thing, andarenumberedinoctal.Forexample,V2073isavalidlocation,while configuration Variable memory(called“V-memory”) storesdatafortheladderprogramand word “significant”,referringtotherelativebinaryweightingofbits. (LSB)willbeontheright,andmostsignificantbit(MSB)left.We usethe bit V-memory address V-memory storage Hexadecimal number (i.e., octal,hex,binary, locationisastoragebox... orwhatever).TheV-memory V-memory storage BCD number and The answeristhatweusuallycannottellbylookingatthedata...butitdoesnot values ineach4-bitdigit.Theyarebase-16numbers soweneed16dif V2017 Hexadecimal Decimal (octal) Direct our manualswillshoweachbitofa settings. V-memory locations Decimal (BCD)representation.ABCDdigitrangesfrom0to9,and is SOFT32 andthehandheldprogrammerallowustoenterview 01234567 01234567 1 0 4182 418421 8421 8421 8421 S LSB MSB 0 1 0 7F4 A7 3649 1 0 1 0 0 0 BCD numbers,excepttheyutilizeallpossible rarelyprogramthedataregistersonebitata 0 0 1 that letusworkwith and V-memory addressesarethesame 1 1 0 all 65536valuesin V-memory word.Theleastsignificant 1 1 0 V-memory data 1 1 1 01 21 415 14 13 12 11 10 89ABCDEF 9 8 (binary) 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 binary, 1 1 1 a V-memoryword. 0 decimal, octal, 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 ferent 0 0 1 CPU Specifications and Operation 1 3–35 X7 X17 V40400 _ Y0 Y7 X6 X16 0 X0 _ X5 X10 X17 X15 1 X1 _ X0 X7 X4 X14 2 X2 X3 X13 3 X3 X2 X12 4 X4 X0 X1 X11 10100000010010 5 X5 0 Discrete – On or Off, 1 bit Discrete – On or Off, Locations – 16 bits Word X0 X10 6 X6 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 7 X7 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 8 X10 9 X11 10 X12 16 Discrete (X) Input Points 11 X13 12 ord memory is referred X14 13 X15 status bits and counter status bits. However, you can also access the status bits and counter status bits. However, discrete locations. For example, the following diagram shows how the X discrete locations. For example, the following diagram shows how 14 parts counts, etc. It is important to understand how the system represents It is important to understand how parts counts, etc. X16 discrete memory areas and their corresponding V memory ranges are listed discrete memory areas and their corresponding V memory ranges 15 X17 Bit # As you examine the different memory As you examine the different types, you’ll notice two types of memory in the DL205, discrete and word memory. Discrete memory is one bit that can be W 0. a or 1 either a to and is a 16-bit as V memory (variable) location normally used to manipulate data/numbers, store data/numbers, etc. Some is automatically stored information For example, the timer in V memory. current are stored in V memory. values All memory locations or areas are All memory locations numbered(base 8). For in Octal shows how the example, the diagram for the octal numbering system works octal discrete input points. Notice the system does not contain any numbers with the digits 8 or 9. These in and DL260 CPUs in this the memory area table for the DL230, DL240, DL250–1 chapter. The discrete memory area is for inputs, outputs, control relays, special relays, The discrete memory area is for inputs, outputs, control relays, stages, timer location contains 16 word. Each V-memory bit data types as a V-memory consecutive locations. input points are mapped into V-memory With any PLC system, you generally have many different types of information to of information types many different generally have PLC system, you With any timing status, various output device input device status, This includes process. elements, and to know how the system of data. For example, you need stores the various types etc. The following paragraphs output points, data words, identifies input points, DL205 CPUs. A memory map memory types used in the discuss the various CPUs follows the memory DL230, DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 overview for the descriptions. V–Memory Locations for Discrete Memory Areas Discrete and Word Locations Octal Numbering System Memory Map CPU Specifications 3–36 and Operation (T Datatype) Timer StatusBits Timers and (C DataType) Control Relays (Y DataType) Output Points (X DataType) Input Points DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation energizes. Y0 willbeturnedonwheninputX0 CPUs. Inthisexample,theoutputpoint input pointsavailablewiththeDL205 X datatype.Thereareupto512discrete discreteinputpointsarenotedbyan The output Y12turnson. contact T1turnson.When T1turnson, of 3seconds(K30) timerstatus When t start. When inputX0turnson,timerT1will timer.corresponding thanthepresetvalueofa greater onwhenthecurrentvalue isequalor be timer.specified Thetimerstatusbitwill valueandthepresetofa current reflect therelationshipbetween the have accesstotimerstatusbitsthat ofthe Regardless DL240, D2–250–1andDL260. the numberoftimersforDL230, tables attheendofthissectionprovide themodelofCPUyouareusing.The on amountoftimersavailabledepends The how touseacontrolrelayasaninput. second rungshowsasimpleexample of energize wheninputX10turnson.The thisexample,memorylocationC5will In 16 consecutivediscretelocations. wordlocationwhichhas corresponding discrete memorylocations(C)orthe locations areusedinprogramming the inputs ordiscreteoutputs.These relays canbeprogrammedasdiscrete etc. physically tiedtoswitches,outputcoils, world device,thatis,theycannotbe control relaysdonotrepresentareal used tocontroltheuserprogram.The Control relaysarediscretebitsnormally discrete The will turnonwheninputX1energizes. CPUs. Inthisexample,outputpoint Y1 output pointsavailablewiththeDL205 datatype.Thereareupto512discrete Y They areinternaltotheCPU.Control he timerreachesthepreset output number oftimers,you points arenotedbya X10 X0 C5 X1 X0 T1 M T1 TMR K30 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Y12 Y20 Y10 Y0 C5 Y1 CPU Specifications and Operation 1 3–37 5 Y13 Y14 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y12 Y12 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT K10 K10 K1000 K1345 V1400 4 TMR T1 LD OUT CNT CT3 CNT CT3 V1 K100 3 V1003 K8 1 X0 X1 X0 X0 X0 X1 CT3 V1 K30 V1 K50 V1 K75 00100110100010 0 V1003 K1 V1003 K3 V1003 K5 Word Locations – 16 bits Word DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. f to on, the counter increments by one. (If X1 f to on, the counter increments by CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU Word memory is referred to as V memory (variable) and is a 16-bit location normally used to manipulate data/numbers, store data/numbers, etc. Some information is automatically stored For example, the timer in V memory. current are stored in V memory. values The example shows how a four-digit the BCD constant is loaded into accumulatora and then stored in location. V-memory Eachtransitions from of time contact X0 comes reaches the preset of 10 on, the counter is reset to zero.) When the counter CT3 turns on. When CT3 turns on, output counts (K of 10) counter status contact Y12 turns on. current Just like the timers, the counter in V values are also automatically stored For example, V1000 holds the memory. currentV1001 value for Counter CT0, CT1, holds the current value for Counter etc. These are 4-digit BCD values. The primary reason for this is The example programming flexibility. relational shows how you can use contacts to monitor the counter values. You have access to counter status bits that have access to counter You the reflect the relationship between a current of value and the preset value status bit The counter specified counter. is equal will be on when the current value of a or greater than the preset value corresponding counter. Some information is automatically stored is automatically Some information values such as the current in V memory, For example, V0 with timers. associated 0, V1 for Timer current value holds the 1, etc. holds the value for Timer current BCD values. These are 4-digit The primary for this is reason The example programmingflexibility. can use relational shows how you several time intervals contacts to monitor from a single timer. Word Memory Word (V Data Type) Counter Current Values (V Data Type) Counters and Counter Status Bits (CT Data type) Timer Current Timer Values Type) (V Data CPU Specifications 3–38 and Operation (GX DataType) Remote I/OPoints (SP DataType) Special Relays (S Datatype) Stages DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 CPU SpecificationsandOperation location GX10representsaninputpoint. anoutputpointandmemory represents In thisexample,memorylocationGX0 I/Oisnotusedinthesystem. remote used asnormalcontrolrelays when only to global relays.Theyaregenerallyused Remote I/Opointsarerepresented by that w ms becauseSP5isapre–definedrelay energize In thisexample,controlrelayC10will the specialrelays. Appendix Dprovides status information,etc. operating othersprovide system development, relays. aremanydifferentThere typesofspecial locations withpre-defined functionality. Special relaysarediscretememory pro easily controlstagesthroughoutthe RESETinstructions.Thisallowsyouto or off byotherinstructions,suchastheSET This status bitcanalsobeturnedonor off. If thestageisinactive, stageisactive,thenthestatus bitison. the whether thestageisactiveorinactive.If that canbeusedasaninputtoindicate Each stagealsohasadiscretestatusbit programming.) Stages areusedinRLL detailed descriptionof RLL active stage.(SeeChapter6foramore executed andtheCPUskipstonext stage isoff, orinactive,the logic is not within thatsegmentisexecuted.If the orstage,isactive,the segment, logic segment.Whentheprogram program Eachprogramstagedenotesa flowchart. create astructuredprogram,similarto g ram. ill beonfor50msandoff for50ms. control remoteI/O,buttheycanbe For example,some for 50msandde–energize a completelisting of then thestatusbitis PLUS aid inprogram

programs to programs PLUS SG SG ISG GX10 SP5 X3 S0002 S0001 S0000 Ladder RepresentationLadder SP6: 50msclock SP5: 100msclock SP4: 1secondclock Present Present Locked Start Part Part Part X1 X0 X1 X2 Clamp thepart Check foraPart Wait forStart OUT OUT OUT GX0 C10 Y12 Clamp S500 S400 JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP SET S3 S6 S2 S1 CPU Specifications and Operation 3–39 10 – Up 40 – Interrupt 50 – Pulse Catch 60 – Filtered discrete In. Default Values / Ranges Default Values N/A N/A Default: 0000 Lower Byte Range: Range: 0 – None Upper Byte Range: 14,15: Unused Bits 8 – 11, Bit 12: With Batt. installed: LED 0 = disable BATT LED 1 = enable BATT Bit 13: Power-up in Run 0000 Default: 0000 Default: 0000 Default: 0000 Default: N/A N/A V0 – V2377 V0 – V2377 1 – 16 V0 – V2377 V0 – V2377 location for X, V-memory points used. or C Y, 0,1,2,3,12 Default = 0000 Default: V2320 Range: V0 – V2320 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU (when D2–CTRINT is installed). (when D2–CTRINT is installed). (when D2–CTRINT is installed). (when D2–CTRINT is installed). (when Description of Contents Contains set up information for high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, Contains set up information for high speed counter, pulse train output, and input filter for X3 Not used Fault Message Error Code — stores the 4-digit code used with the FAULT instruction when the instruction is executed. Contains set up information for high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, Contains set up information for high speed counter, pulse train output, and input filter for X0 interrupt, pulse catch, Contains set up information for high speed counter, pulse train output, and input filter for X1 interrupt, pulse catch, Contains set up information for high speed counter, pulse train output, and input filter for X2 Not used interrupt, pulse speed counter, Sets the desired function code for the high Location is also used for setting the catch, pulse train, and input filter. CPU mode change, and power-up with/without battery option, enable/disable in Run Mode option. Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. The default value is Starting location for the multi–step presets be obtained from V2320. Since 2320, which indicates the first value should can range is V2320 – V2377. You there are 24 presets available, the default change the starting point if necessary. The default location for multiple preset values for the UP counter. The default location operator interface parameters Locations for DV–1000 location that contains the value. Sets the V-memory location that contains the message. Sets the V-memory locations to be displayed. (1 – 16) of V-memory Sets the total number to be displayed. location that contains the numbers Sets the V-memory code to be displayed. location that contains the character Sets the V-memory assigned to each key. Contains the function number that can be Power Up mode change preset value password. Reserved for future use. V7620 V7621 V7622 V7623 V7624 V7625 V7626 V7627 System V-memory V7640–V7647 V7751 V7636 V7637 V7635 V7634 V7631–V7632 V7633 V7630 V2320–V2377 V7620–V7627 DL230 V-memory System CPU Specifications 3–40 and Operation DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 V7777 V7776 V7775 V7666–V7774 V7765 V7760–V7764 V7757 V7756 V7755 V7754 V7753 V7752 V-memory System CPU SpecificationsandOperation Program ModetoRuntransition(milliseconds). Scan —storesthemaximumscantimethathasoccurredsincelast Program ModetoRuntransition(milliseconds). Scan —storestheminimumscantimethathasoccurredsincelast Scan —storesthecurrentscantime(milliseconds). Not used last ProgramModetoRuntransition. Scan —storesthetotalnumberofscancyclesthathaveoccurredsince occurs. Module Error—storestheslotnumberanderrorcodewhereanI/O Error code—storestheminorerrorcode. Error code—storesthemajorerrorcode. Error code—storesthefatalerrorcode. I/O ConfigurationError—identifiesthebaseandslotnumber. I/O ConfigurationError—storesthecorrectmoduleIDcode. not matchthecurrentconfiguration. I/O ConfigurationError—storesthemoduleIDcodeforthatdoes Description ofContents N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Default Values /Ranges CPU Specifications and Operation 3–41 00 = 300 01 = 1200 02 = 9600 03 = 19.2K 01 = 2ms 02 = 5ms 03 = 10ms 04 = 20ms 05 = 50ms 06 = 100ms 07 = 500ms Default Values / Ranges Default Values Default: V3630 Range: V0 – V3707 Default: V3710 Range: V0 – V3710 Default: 2 – 9600 baud Lower Byte = Baud Rate Lower Byte Range: Delay Upper Byte = Time Upper Byte Range: N/A N/A N/A Range: 0 – 9999 V0 – V3760 V0 – V3760 1 – 16 V0 – V3760 V0 – V3760 location for X, V-memory points used. or C Y, 0,1,2,3,12 Default=0000 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU Description of Contents Description Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 2. Since there are 24 Starting location for the multi–step presets can change the 3767. You presets available, the default range is V3710– starting point if necessary. you can use AUX 56 (from the Contains the baud rate setting for Port 2. use DirectSOFT to set the port parameters if 9600 Handheld Programmer) or, set a delay time between the baud is unacceptable. Also allows you to and the transmission of data. This is useful for signal assertion of the RTS before data is transmitted. radio modems that require a key-up delay and 9600 baud. Delay (TAD) e.g. a value of 0302 sets 10ms Turnaround Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. Since there are 24 Starting location for the multi–step presets can change the – V3707. You presets available, the default range is V3630 starting point if necessary. Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters Locations for DV–1000 location that contains the value. Sets the V-memory location that contains the message. Sets the V-memory locations to be displayed. Sets the total number (1 – 16) of V-memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed. Sets the V-memory location that contains the character code to be displayed. Sets the V-memory assigned to each key. Contains the function number that can be Power Up Mode. Password. Change Preset Value The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 1 for multiple preset values for UP/DWN The default location or pulse output function. and UP counter 2. for multiple preset values for UP/DWN The default location Not used respectively). analog potentiometer data (channels 1–4, Default locations for V7620 V7621 V7622 V7623 V7624 V7625 V7626 V7627 System V-memory V7632 V7631 V7630 V3774–V3777 V7620–V7627 V3710–V3767 V3770–V3773 V3630–V3707 DL240 V-memory System CPU Specifications 3–42 and Operation DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 V7637 V7636 V7635 V7634 V7633 V7752 V7751 V7747 V7746 V7720–V7722 V7650–V7737 V7646–V7647 V7644–V7645 V7642–V7643 V7640–V7641 V-memory System V7722 V7721 V7720 CPU SpecificationsandOperation I/O configurationError—storesthemoduleIDcodefor modulethatdoesnotmatchthecurrentconfig. that messageisstoredhere. is executed.Ifyou’veusedASCIImessages(DL240only)then thedatalabel(DLBL)referencenumberfor Fault MessageErrorCode—storesthe4-digitcodeused with theFAULT instructionwhenthe Location containsa10mscounter. Thislocationincrementsonceevery 10ms. Location containsthebatteryvoltage,accurateto0.1V. Forexample,avalueof32indicates3.2volts. HiByte-Titled Timer presetblocksize,LoByte-Titled Counterpresetblocksize Title Counterpresetvaluepointer Titled Timer presetvaluepointer Locations forDV–1000operatorinterfaceparameters. Locations reservedforsetupinformationusedwithfutureoptions(remoteI/Oanddatacommunications) Location forsettingthelowerandupperlimitsCH4analogpot. Location forsettingthelowerandupperlimitsCH3analogpot. Location forsettingthelowerandupperlimitsCH2analogpot. Location forsettingthelowerandupperlimitsCH1analogpot. pulse trainoutput,andinputfilterforX3 Contains setupinformationforhighspeedcounter, interrupt,pulsecatch, pulse trainoutput,andinputfilterforX2 Contains setupinformationforhighspeedcounter, interrupt,pulsecatch, pulse trainoutput,andinputfilterforX1 Contains setupinformationforhighspeedcounter, interrupt,pulsecatch, pulse trainoutput,andinputfilterforX0 Contains setupinformationforhighspeedcounter, interrupt,pulsecatch, with/without batteryoption,enable/disableCPUmodechange. catch, pulsetrain,andinputfilter. Locationisalsousedforsettingthe Sets thedesiredfunctioncodeforhighspeedcounter, interrupt,pulse Description ofContents (when D2–CTRINTisinstalled). (when D2–CTRINTisinstalled). (when D2–CTRINTisinstalled). (when D2–CTRINTisinstalled). Default: 0000 (K-sequence only) Bit 14:Modechg.enable 1=enableBATT LED 0=disableBATT LED Bit 12:WithBatt.installed: Bits 8–11, 13,15Unused Upper ByteRange: Lower ByteRange: Default: 0000 1–99 V0–V3760 V0–V3760 Range: 0–9999 Default: 0000 Range: 0–9999 Default: 0000 Range: 0–9999 Default: 0000 Range: 0–9999 Default: 0000 Default: 0000 Default: 0000 Default: 0000 Default Values /Ranges 60 –FilteredDis. 50 –PulseCatch 40 –Interrupt 30 –PulseOut 20 –Up/Dwn. 10 –Up 0 –None CPU Specifications and Operation 3–43 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU . Description of Contents Description Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode Scan — stores the maximum scan time transition (milliseconds). Contains the month. (01 to 12) (00 to 99) Contains the year. Scan — stores the current scan time (milliseconds). that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode Scan — stores the minimum scan time transition (milliseconds). Contains the number of seconds on the clock. (00 to 59). Contains the number of minutes on the clock. (00 to 59). Contains the number of hours on the clock. (00 to 23). Contains the number etc.) Contains the day of the week. (Mon, Tue, etc.). Contains the day of the month (1st, 2nd, Error code — stores the fatal error code. Error code — stores the major error code. Error code — stores the minor error code. Error code — stores an I/O error occurs. the slot number and error code where Module Error — stores since the last Program to Run Mode transition. of scan cycles that have occurred Scan—stores the number I/O Configuration Error — stores the correct module ID code. the correct module Error — stores I/O Configuration — identifies the base and slot number. I/O Configuration Error System V-memory V7776 V7777 V7774 V7775 V7771 V7772 V7773 V7767 V7770 V7765 V7766 V7756 V7757 V7760–V7764 V7754 V7755 V7753 CPU Specifications 3–44 and Operation DL250–1 SystemV-memoryDL250–1 (appliestoDL250) DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 V7630 V7620–V7627 V3770–V3777 V3710–V3767 V3630–V3707 V7636 V7635 V7634 V7633 V7632 V7631 V-memory System V7627 V7626 V7625 V7624 V7623 V7622 V7621 V7620 CPU SpecificationsandOperation pulse trainoutput,andinputfilterforX2 Contains setupinformationforhighspeedcounter, interrupt,pulse catch, pulse trainoutput,andinputfilterforX1 Contains setupinformationforhighspeedcounter, interrupt,pulse catch, pulse trainoutput,andinputfilterforX0 Contains setupinformationforhighspeedcounter, interrupt,pulse catch, with/without batteryoption,enable/disableCPUmodechange. catch, pulsetrain,andinputfilter. Locationisalsousedforsettingthe Sets thedesiredfunctioncodeforhighspeedcounter, interrupt,pulse Reserved starting pointifnecessary. presets available,thedefaultrangeisV3710–3767.You canchangethe Starting locationforthemulti–steppresetschannel2.Sincethereare24 starting pointifnecessary. presets available,thedefaultrangeisV3630–V3707.You canchangethe Starting locationforthemulti–steppresetschannel1.Sincethereare24 Change PresetValue password. Sets thepowerupmode. Contains thefunctionnumberthatcanbeassignedtoeachkey. Sets theV-memory locationthatcontainsthecharactercodetobedisplayed. Sets theV-memory locationthatcontainsthenumberstobedisplayed. Sets thetotalnumber(1–32)ofV-memory locationstobedisplayed. Sets theV-memory locationthatcontainsthemessage. Sets theV-memory locationthatcontainsthevalue. Locations forDV–1000operatorinterfaceparameters Not used The defaultlocationformultiplepresetvaluesUP/DWNandUPcounter2. or pulseoutputfunction. The defaultlocationformultiplepresetvaluesUP/DWNandUPcounter1 Description ofContents (when D2–CTRINTisinstalled). (when D2–CTRINTisinstalled). (when D2–CTRINTisinstalled). Default=0000 0,1,2,3,12 V-memory forX,Y, orC V0 –V3760 V0 –V3760 1 –32 V0 –V3760 V0 –V3760 N/A N/A N/A Default: 1006 Default: 1006 Default: 1006 1=enableBATT LED 0=disableBATT LED Bit 12:WithBatt.installed: Bits 8–11, 13–15Unused Upper ByteRange: 0–None Range: Lower ByteRange: Default: 0060 Range: V0–V3710 Default: V3710 Range: V0–V3710 Default: V3630 Default Values /Ranges 60 –FilteredDis. 50 –PulseCatch 40 –Interrupt 30 –PulseOut 20 –Up/Dwn. 10 –Up CPU Specifications and Operation 3–45 Default Values / Ranges Default Values Default: 1006 V1400–V7340 V10000–V17740 1–4 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. is installed). CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU (when D2–CTRINT (when Description of Contents Description Error code — stores the major error code. Error code — stores the minor error code. Module Error — stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error occurs. Program Mode to Run Scan — stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Mode transition. Port 2 Communication Auto Reset Timer setup Port 2 Communication Auto Reset Timer bases 1 and 2 (DL250–1) Output Hold or reset setting: Expansion This location increments once every 10ms. Location contains a 10ms counter. Reserved instruction when the instruction 4-digit code used with the FAULT Fault Message Error Code — stores the (DL240 only) then the data label (DLBL) reference number for is executed. If you’ve used ASCII messages that message is stored here. ID code for the module that does not match the current I/O configuration Error — stores the module configuration. I/O Configuration Error — stores the correct module ID code. I/O Configuration Error — identifies the base and slot number. Error code — stores the fatal error code. Port 2 Terminate–code setting – Non–procedure communications Termination code setting. communications Termination setting – Non–procedure Port 2 Terminate–code communication data store V–Memory address. Port 2 Store v–mem address – Non–procedure (flag 0) 8–15 Comm time out/response delay time (flag 1) Port 2 Setup area –0–7 Comm protocol (flag2, flag 3) Port 2 Setup area – 0–15 Communication Port 2: Setup completion code for set up information used with future options. Set–up Information – Locations reserved parameters. Locations for DV–1000 operator interface preset value pointer Timer Titled Counter preset value pointer Title Counter preset block size preset block size, LoByte-Titled Timer HiByte-Titled Contains set up information for high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, high speed counter, up information for Contains set for X3 output, and input filter pulse train Beginning address Loop Table Number of Loops Enabled Error Location for Loop Table Error Code – V–memory Reserved start. Setting (AS5A), Nonprocedure communications Port 2 End–code setting setting. communications format Port 2 Data format –Non–procedure code setting. – Non–procedure communications type setting Port 2 Format Type V7720 V7721 V7722 System V-memory V7757 V7760–V7764 V7765 V7754 V7755 V7756 V7752 V7753 V7751 V7741 V7747 V7750 V7740 V7720–V7722 V7657 V7660–V7717 V7654 V7655 V7656 V7652 V7653 V7643–V7647 V7650 V7651 V7641 V7642 V7640 V7637 CPU Specifications 3–46 and Operation DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 C760 toC767 C750 toC757 C743 C741 C740 System CRs V36100–36127 V36000–36027 V7777 V7776 V7775 V7774 V7773 V7772 V7771 V7770 V7767 V7766 V-memory System CPU SpecificationsandOperation C767=slave 7 master, C761=slave1... Communications Ready–ThecorrespondingrelaywillbeONifthesetuptabledataisvalid(C760= C751 =slave1...C757=slave7 Setup Error–ThecorrespondingrelaywillbeONifthesetuptablecontainsanerror(C750=master, Re-start –Turning onthisrelaywillresumeafteracommunicationshang-upanerror. Erase receiveddata–turningonthisflagwillerasetheduringacommunicationerror. Remote I/Osetuptable Completion ofsetups–ladderlogicmustturnthisrelayonwhenithasfinished writingtothe Description ofContents Analog pointermethodforexpansionbase2(DL250–1) Analog pointermethodforexpansionbase1(DL250–1) transition (milliseconds). Scan —storesthemaximumscantimethathasoccurredsincelastProgramModetoRun transition (milliseconds). Scan —storestheminimumscantimethathasoccurredsincelastProgramModetoRun Scan —storesthecurrentscantime(milliseconds). Contains theyear. (00to99) Contains themonth.(01to12) Contains thedayofmonth(1st,2nd,etc.). Contains thedayofweek.(Mon,Tue, etc.) Contains thenumberofhoursonclock.(00to23). Contains thenumberofminutesonclock.(00to59). Contains thenumberofsecondsonclock.(00to59). Communications Port2. Communications The followingsystemcontrolrelaysareusedforKoyoRemoteI/Osetupon Description ofContents . CPU Specifications and Operation 3–47 10 – Up 20 – Up/Dwn. 30 – Pulse Out 40 – Interrupt 50 – Pulse Catch 60 – Filtered Dis. Default Values / Ranges Default Values Default: 1006 Default: Default: V3630 Range: V0 – V3710 Default: V3710 Range: V0 – V3710 Default: 0060 Lower Byte Range: Range: 0 – None Upper Byte Range: 13–15 Unused Bits 8 – 11, Bit 12: With Batt. installed: LED 0 = disable BATT LED 1 = enable BATT 1006 Default: 1006 Default: N/A N/A N/A V0 – V3760 V0 – V3760 1 – 32 V0 – V3760 V0 – V3760 or C for X, Y, V-memory 0,1,2,3,12 Default=0000 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU (when D2–CTRINT is installed). (when (when D2–CTRINT is installed). (when D2–CTRINT is installed). (when Description of Contents Contains set up information for high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, Contains set up information for high speed counter, pulse train output, and input filter for X1 interrupt, pulse catch, Contains set up information for high speed counter, pulse train output, and input filter for X2 Contains set up information for high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, Contains set up information for high speed counter, pulse train output, and input filter for X0 Sets the desired function code for the high speed counter, interrupt, pulse speed counter, Sets the desired function code for the high Location is also used for setting the catch, pulse train, and input filter. CPU mode change. with/without battery option, enable/disable Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 2. Since there are 24 Starting location for the multi–step presets can change the 3767. You presets available, the default range is V3710– starting point if necessary. Reserved Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. Since there are 24 Starting location for the multi–step presets can change the – V3707. You presets available, the default range is V3630 starting point if necessary. Not used operator interface parameters Locations for DV–1000 location that contains the value. Sets the V-memory location that contains the message. Sets the V-memory locations to be displayed. Sets the total number (1 – 32) of V-memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed. Sets the V-memory location that contains the character code to be displayed. Sets the V-memory assigned to each key. Contains the function number that can be Sets the power up mode. password. Change Preset Value The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 1 for multiple preset values for UP/DWN The default location or pulse output function. and UP counter 2. for multiple preset values for UP/DWN The default location V7620 V7621 V7622 V7623 V7624 V7625 V7626 V7627 System V-memory V7635 V7636 V7634 V7632 V7633 V7631 V7630 V7620–V7627 V3710–V3767 V3770–V3777 V3630–V3707 DL260 V-memory System CPU Specifications 3–48 and Operation DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 V7720–V7722 V7660–V7717 V7657 V7656 V7655 V7654 V7653 V7652 V7651 V7650 V7643–V7647 V7642 V7641 V7640 V7637 V7765 V7763–V7764 V7757 V7756 V7755 V7754 V7753 V7752 V7751 V7750 V7747 V7742 V7741 V7740 V-memory System V7722 V7721 V7720 CPU SpecificationsandOperation Mode transition. Scan —storesthetotalnumberofscancyclesthathaveoccurred sincethelastProgramModetoRun Module Error—storestheslotnumberanderrorcodewhere anI/Oerroroccurs. Error code—storestheminorerrorcode. Error code—storesthemajorerrorcode. Error code—storesthefatalerrorcode. I/O ConfigurationError—identifiesthebaseandslotnumber. I/O ConfigurationError—storesthecorrectmoduleIDcode. configuration. I/O configurationError—storesthemoduleIDcodeforthatdoesnotmatchcurrent that messageisstoredhere. is executed.Ifyou’veusedASCIImessages(DL240only)thenthedatalabel(DLBL)referencenumberfor Fault MessageErrorCode—storesthe4-digitcodeusedwithFAULT instructionwhenthe Reserved Location containsa10mscounter. Thislocationincrementsonceevery10ms. Output Holdorresetsetting:Expansionbases3and4 Output Holdorresetsetting:Expansionbases1and2 Port 2CommunicationAutoResetTimer setup HiByte-Titled Timer presetblocksize,LoByte-Titled Counterpresetblocksize Title Counterpresetvaluepointer Titled Timer presetvaluepointer Locations forDV–1000operatorinterfaceparameters. Set–up Information–Locationsreservedforsetupinformationusedwithfutureoptions. Port 2:Setupcompletioncode Port 2Setuparea–0–15Communication(flag2,flag3) Port 2Setuparea–0–7Commprotocol(flag0)8–15timeout/responsedelay1) Port 2Storev–memaddress–Non–procedurecommunicationdatastoreV–Memoryaddress. Port 2Terminate–code setting–Non–procedurecommunicationsTermination codesetting. Port 2FormatType setting–Non–procedurecommunicationstypecodesetting. Port 2Dataformat–Non–procedurecommunicationssetting. Port 2End–codesettingSetting(AS5A),Nonprocedurecommunicationsstart. Reserved Error Code–V–memoryLocationforLoopTable Number ofLoopsEnabled PID LoopTable Beginningaddress pulse trainoutput,andinputfilterforX3 Contains setupinformationforhighspeedcounter, interrupt,pulsecatch, Description ofContents (when D2–CTRINT isinstalled). 1–16 V10000–V35740 V1400–V7340 V400–640 Default: 1006 Default Values /Ranges CPU Specifications and Operation 3–49 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU . Description of Contents Description The following system control relays are used for Koyo Remote I/O setup on The following system control relays Communications Port 2. Description of Contents logic must turn this relay on when it has finished writing to the of setups – ladder Completion Remote I/O setup table will erase the received data during a communication error. Erase received data – turning on this flag an error. on this relay will resume after a communications hang-up on Re-start – Turning will be ON if the setup table contains an error (C750 = master, Setup Error – The corresponding relay C751 = slave 1... C757=slave 7 data isvalid (C760 = Communications Ready – The corresponding relay will be ON if the setup table C761 = slave 1... master, C767=slave 7 Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode Scan — stores the maximum scan time transition (milliseconds). 1 Analog pointer method for expansion base 2 Analog pointer method for expansion base 3 Analog pointer method for expansion base 4 Analog pointer method for expansion base I/O Port 2: Setup register for Koyo Remote Contains the number of seconds on the clock. (00 to 59). on the clock. (00 number of seconds Contains the of minutes on the clock. (00 to 59). Contains the number of hours on the clock. (00 to 23). Contains the number etc.) the week. (Mon, Tue, Contains the day of the month (1st, 2nd, etc.). Contains the day of (01 to 12) Contains the month. (00 to 99) Contains the year. scan time (milliseconds). Scan — stores the current the last Program Mode to Run Mode scan time that has occurred since Scan — stores the minimum transition (milliseconds). C741 C743 C750 to C757 C760 to C767 System CRs C740 V36100–36127 V36200–36227 V36300–36327 V37700–37737 V7775 V7776 V7777 V36000–36027 V7770 V7771 V7772 V7773 V7774 System V-memory V7766 V7767 CPU Specifications 3–50 and Operation Map DL230 Memory and outputpoints asnecessary. –The DL230 systemsarelimitedto256discreteI/Opoints(total)withthepresent systemhardwareavailable.Thesecanbem 1 DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Values Timer Current Timers Special Relays Control Relays Output Points Input Points parameters System Stages Non–volatile Data Words Data Words Bits Counter Status Current Values Counter Counters Timer StatusBits Memory Type CPU SpecificationsandOperation None S0 –S377 None None CT0 –CT77 None CT0 –CT77 T0 –T77 None T0 –T77 SP540 –SP577 SP0 –SP117 C0 –C377 Y0 –Y177 X0 –X177 Discrete Memory Reference (octal) V41140 –V41143 V1000 –V1077 V41100 –V41103 V0 –V77 V41226 –V41227 V41200 –V41204 V40600 –V40617 V40500 –V40507 V40400 –V40407 V7750–V7777 V7620 –V7647 V41000 –V41017 V4000 –V4177 V2000 –V2377 Word Memory Reference (octal) Decimal 128 128 Qty. 256 256 128 256 112 64 48 64 64 64 64 64 1 1 purposes None specific,usedforvarious instructions None specific,usedwithmany instructions None specific,usedwithmany SG C0 S 001 10 K100 V1000 M T0 TMR Symbol 0K100 V0 N CT0 CNT SP0 CT0 Y0 X0 T0 K10 K100 C0 ixed betweeninput S0 CPU Specifications and Operation 3–51 S0 ixed between input C0 K100 K10 T0 X0 Y0 CT0 SP0 CNT CT0 V0 K100 Symbol TMR T0 V1000 K100 S 001 C0 SG None specific, used for various purposes None specific, used with many instructions None specific, used with many instructions DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 1 1 512 106 128 128 128 128 128 256 256 144 128 Qty. 320 320 1024 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU Decimal (octal) Reference Word Memory Word V2000 – V3777 V4000 – V4377 V41000 – V41037 V7620 – V7737 V7746–V7777 V41100 – V41107 V41100 V1000 – V1177 – V41147 V41140 V41200 – V41205 V41226 – V41230 V0 – V177 V40400 – V40423 V40500 – V40523 V40600 – V40617 (octal) Reference Discrete Memory Discrete None None S0 – S777 None T0 – T177 CT0 – CT177 None CT0 – CT177 SP0 – SP137 SP540 – SP617 T0 – T177 None X0 – X477 Y0 – Y477 C0 – C377 Memory Type Memory System parameters Stages Data Words Non–volatile Data Words Counter Status Bits Counter Current Values Counters Timer Status Bits Timer Timer Current Timer Values Timers Special Relays Control Relays Output Points Input Points 1 – The DL240 systems are limited to 256 discrete I/O points (total) with the present system hardware available. These can be m and output points as necessary. and DL240 Memory Map CPU Specifications 3–52 and Operation Map Memory DL250–1 DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Values Timer Current Timers Special Relays Control Relays Output Points Input Points parameters System Stages Data Words Bits Counter Status Current Values Counter Counters Timer StatusBits Memory Type CPU SpecificationsandOperation None S0 –S1777 None CT0 –CT177 None CT0 –CT177 T0 –T377 None T0 –T377 SP0 –SP777 C0 –C1777 Y0 –Y777 X0 –X777 Discrete Memory Reference This memorymapappliestotheDL250aswell. (octal) V41140 –V41147 V1000 –V1177 V41140 –V41147 V41100 –V41117 V0 –V377 V41100 –V41117 V41200 –V41237 V40600 –V40677 V40500 –V40537 V40400 –V40437 V36000–V37777 V7400–V7777 V41000 –V41077 V10000–V17777 V1400 –V7377 Word Memory Reference (octal) Decimal 1024 1024 7168 Qty. 512 512 512 768 128 128 128 256 256 256 purposes None specific,usedforvarious instructions None specific,usedwithmany SG C0 S 001 10 K100 V1000 M T0 TMR Symbol 0K100 V0 N CT0 CNT SP0 CT0 Y0 X0 T0 K10 K100 C0 S0 CPU Specifications and Operation 3–53 S0 GY0 C0 K100 K10 T0 X0 Y0 CT0 SP0 CNT CT0 V0 K100 Symbol TMR T0 V1000 K100 S 001 C0 GX0 SG None specific, used for various purposes None specific, used with many instructions DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 256 256 256 256 256 512 256 Qty. 1.2K 2048 2048 1024 1024 1024 2048 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 14.6K Decimal (octal) Reference Word Memory Word V400 – V777 V1400 – V7377 V10000–V35777 V41000 – V41077 V40000 – V40177 V40200–V40377 V7400–V7777 V36000–V37777 V41100 – V41117 V41100 – V41157 V41140 V1000 – V1377 – V41157 V41140 V41200 – V41237 – V41117 V41100 V0 – V377 V40400 – V40477 V40500 – V40577 V40600 – V40777 (octal) Reference Discrete Memory Discrete None S0 – S1777 GX0 – GX3777 GY0 – GY3777 None T0 – T377 CT0 – CT377 None CT0 – CT377 SP0 – SP777 T0 – T377 None X0 – X1777 Y0 – Y1777 C0 – C3777 Memory Type Memory System parameters Remote Input and Output Points Stages Data Words Counter Status Bits Counter Current Values Counters Timer Status Bits Timer Timer Current Timer Values Timers Special Relays Control Relays Output Points Input Points DL260 Memory Map CPU Specifications 3–54 and Operation DL230, DL240,andDL250–1DL260CPUs.TherangesapplytotheDL250. This table provi X Input/YOutputBitMap DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 S D20/D201/D20Ipt()adOtu Y onsLSB DL240/DL250–1DL260Input(X)andOutput(Y)Points MSB LSB DL230/DL240DL250–1DL260Input(X)andOutput(Y)Points MSB S D201/D20Adtoa nu X n upt()Pit LSB DL250–1/DL260AdditionalInput(X) andOutput(Y)Points MSB 637 617 577 557 537 517 477 457 437 417 377 357 337 317 277 257 237 217 177 157 137 077 057 037 017 777 757 737 717 677 657 117 17 056 036 016 776 756 736 716 676 656 636 616 576 556 536 516 476 456 436 416 376 356 336 316 276 256 236 216 176 156 136 076 116 16 CPU SpecificationsandOperation 715 675 655 635 615 575 555 535 515 475 455 435 415 375 355 335 315 275 255 235 215 175 155 135 075 055 035 015 775 755 735 115 15 des alistingoftheindividualInputpointsassociatedwitheachV-memory addressbitforthe 534 514 474 454 434 414 374 354 334 314 274 254 234 214 174 154 134 074 054 034 014 774 754 734 714 674 654 634 614 574 554 114 14 773 753 733 713 673 653 633 613 573 553 533 513 473 453 433 413 373 353 333 313 273 253 233 213 173 153 133 073 053 033 013 113 13 532 512 472 452 432 412 372 352 332 312 272 252 232 212 172 152 132 072 052 032 012 772 752 732 712 672 652 632 612 572 552 112 12 771 751 731 671 651 631 571 551 531 471 451 431 371 351 331 271 251 231 171 151 131 071 051 031 711 611 511 411 311 211 011 111 11 530 510 470 450 430 410 370 350 330 310 270 250 230 210 170 150 130 070 050 030 010 770 750 730 710 670 650 630 610 570 550 110 10 207 167 147 127 107 067 047 027 007 767 747 727 707 667 647 627 607 567 547 527 507 467 447 427 407 367 347 327 307 267 247 227 7 206 166 146 126 106 066 046 026 006 766 746 726 706 666 646 626 606 566 546 526 506 466 446 426 406 366 346 326 306 266 246 226 6 205 165 145 125 105 065 045 025 005 765 745 725 705 665 645 625 605 565 545 525 505 465 445 425 405 365 345 325 305 265 245 225 5 204 164 144 124 104 064 044 024 004 764 744 724 704 664 644 624 604 564 544 524 504 464 444 424 404 364 344 324 304 264 244 224 4 203 163 143 123 103 063 043 023 003 763 743 723 703 663 643 623 603 563 543 523 503 463 443 423 403 363 343 323 303 263 243 223 3 202 162 142 122 102 062 042 022 002 762 742 722 702 662 642 622 602 562 542 522 502 462 442 422 402 362 342 322 302 262 242 222 2 201 161 141 121 101 061 041 021 001 761 741 721 701 661 641 621 601 561 541 521 501 461 441 421 401 361 341 321 301 261 241 221 1 200 160 140 120 100 060 040 020 000 760 740 720 700 660 640 620 600 560 540 520 500 460 440 420 400 360 340 320 300 260 240 220 0 Address X Input V40410 V40407 V40406 V40405 V40404 V40403 V40402 V40401 V40400 V40437 V40436 V40435 V40434 V40433 V40432 V40431 V40430 V40427 V40426 V40425 V40424 V40423 V40422 V40421 V40420 V40417 V40416 V40415 V40414 V40413 V40412 V40411

Input Y Output Address V40537 V40536 V40535 V40534 V40533 V40532 V40531 V40530 V40527 V40526 V40525 V40524 V40523 V40522 V40521 V40520 V40517 V40516 V40515 V40514 V40513 V40512 V40510 V40507 V40506 V40505 V40504 V40503 V40502 V40501 V40500 V40511

Output CPU Specifications and Operation 3–55 Output

V40570 V40571 V40572 V40573 V40574 V40575 V40576 V40577 V40540 V40541 V40542 V40543 V40544 V40545 V40546 V40547 V40550 V40551 V40552 V40553 V40554 V40555 V40556 V40557 V40560 V40561 V40562 V40563 V40564 V40565 V40566 V40567 Address Y OutputY Input

V40456 V40457 V40460 V40461 V40462 V40463 V40464 V40465 V40466 V40467 V40470 V40471 V40472 V40473 V40474 V40475 V40476 V40477 V40440 V40441 V40442 V40443 V40444 V40445 V40446 V40447 V40450 V40451 V40452 V40453 V40454 V40455 X InputX Address 0 1100 1120 1140 1160 1340 1360 1400 1420 1440 1460 1500 1520 1540 1560 1600 1620 1640 1660 1700 1720 1740 1760 1000 1020 1040 1060 1200 1220 1240 1260 1300 1320 1 1101 1121 1141 1161 1341 1361 1401 1421 1441 1461 1501 1521 1541 1561 1601 1621 1641 1661 1701 1721 1741 1761 1001 1021 1041 1061 1201 1221 1241 1261 1301 1321 2 1102 1122 1142 1162 1342 1362 1402 1422 1442 1462 1502 1522 1542 1562 1602 1622 1642 1662 1702 1722 1742 1762 1002 1022 1042 1062 1202 1222 1242 1262 1302 1322 3 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 1103 1123 1143 1163 1343 1363 1403 1423 1443 1463 1503 1523 1543 1563 1603 1623 1643 1663 1703 1723 1743 1763 1003 1023 1043 1063 1203 1223 1243 1263 1303 1323 4 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 1104 1124 1144 1164 1344 1364 1404 1424 1444 1464 1504 1524 1544 1564 1604 1624 1644 1664 1704 1724 1744 1764 1004 1024 1044 1064 1204 1224 1244 1264 1304 1324 5 1105 1125 1145 1165 1345 1365 1405 1425 1445 1465 1505 1525 1545 1565 1605 1625 1645 1665 1705 1725 1745 1765 1005 1025 1045 1065 1205 1225 1245 1265 1305 1325 6 1106 1126 1146 1166 1346 1366 1406 1426 1446 1466 1506 1526 1546 1566 1606 1626 1646 1666 1706 1726 1746 1766 1006 1026 1046 1066 1206 1226 1246 1266 1306 1326 7 1107 1127 1147 1167 1347 1367 1407 1427 1447 1467 1507 1527 1547 1567 1607 1627 1647 1667 1707 1727 1747 1767 1007 1027 1047 1067 1207 1227 1247 1267 1307 1327 10 1110 1130 1150 1170 1730 1750 1770 1470 1510 1530 1550 1570 1610 1630 1650 1670 1710 1230 1250 1270 1310 1330 1350 1370 1410 1430 1450 1010 1030 1050 1070 1210 11 1111 1511 1611 1711 1311 1411 1011 1131 1151 1171 1211 1731 1751 1771 1471 1531 1551 1571 1631 1651 1671 1231 1251 1271 1331 1351 1371 1431 1451 1031 1051 1071 12 1112 1132 1152 1172 1732 1752 1772 1472 1512 1532 1552 1572 1612 1632 1652 1672 1712 1232 1252 1272 1312 1332 1352 1372 1412 1432 1452 1012 1032 1052 1072 1212 13 1113 1133 1153 1173 1733 1753 1773 1473 1513 1533 1553 1573 1613 1633 1653 1673 1713 1233 1253 1273 1313 1333 1353 1373 1413 1433 1453 1013 1033 1053 1073 1213 14 1114 1134 1154 1174 1734 1754 1774 1474 1514 1534 1554 1574 1614 1634 1654 1674 1714 1234 1254 1274 1314 1334 1354 1374 1414 1434 1454 1014 1034 1054 1074 1214 15 1115 1155 1175 1135 1775 1655 1675 1715 1735 1755 1535 1555 1575 1615 1635 1415 1435 1455 1475 1515 1275 1315 1335 1355 1375 1215 1235 1255 1035 1055 1075 1015 16 1116 1156 1176 1136 1776 1656 1676 1716 1736 1756 1536 1556 1576 1616 1636 1416 1436 1456 1476 1516 1276 1316 1336 1356 1376 1216 1236 1256 1036 1056 1076 1016 17 1117 1137 1157 1177 1757 1777 1677 1717 1737 1637 1657 1577 1617 1517 1537 1557 1457 1477 1377 1417 1437 1337 1357 1257 1277 1317 1217 1237 1077 1017 1037 1057 MSB (Y) Points (cont’d) DL260 Additional Input (X) and Output LSB CPU Specifications 3–56 and Operation This tableprovidesalistingoftheindividualcontrolrelaysassociatedwitheachV-memorybit. address Control RelayBitMap DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 S L3 L4 L5 1/D20CnrlRly C LSB DL230/DL240DL250–1DL260ControlRelays(C) MSB S diinlD201/D20CnrlRly C LSB AdditionalDL250–1 / DL260ControlRelays(C) MSB 777 757 737 717 677 657 637 617 577 557 537 517 477 457 437 417 377 357 337 317 277 257 237 217 177 157 137 077 057 037 017 117 17 376 356 336 316 276 256 236 216 176 156 136 076 056 036 016 776 756 736 716 676 656 636 616 576 556 536 516 476 456 436 416 116 16 CPU SpecificationsandOperation 715 675 655 635 615 575 555 535 515 475 455 435 415 375 355 335 315 275 255 235 215 175 155 135 075 055 035 015 775 755 735 115 15 534 514 474 454 434 414 374 354 334 314 274 254 234 214 174 154 134 074 054 034 014 774 754 734 714 674 654 634 614 574 554 114 14 773 753 733 713 673 653 633 613 573 553 533 513 473 453 433 413 373 353 333 313 273 253 233 213 173 153 133 073 053 033 013 113 13 532 512 472 452 432 412 372 352 332 312 272 252 232 212 172 152 132 072 052 032 012 772 752 732 712 672 652 632 612 572 552 112 12 771 751 731 671 651 631 571 551 531 471 451 431 371 351 331 271 251 231 171 151 131 071 051 031 711 611 511 411 311 211 011 111 11 210 170 150 130 070 050 030 010 770 750 730 710 670 650 630 610 570 550 530 510 470 450 430 410 370 350 330 310 270 250 230 110 10 207 167 147 127 107 067 047 027 007 767 747 727 707 667 647 627 607 567 547 527 507 467 447 427 407 367 347 327 307 267 247 227 7 206 166 146 126 106 066 046 026 006 766 746 726 706 666 646 626 606 566 546 526 506 466 446 426 406 366 346 326 306 266 246 226 6 205 165 145 125 105 065 045 025 005 765 745 725 705 665 645 625 605 565 545 525 505 465 445 425 405 365 345 325 305 265 245 225 5 204 164 144 124 104 064 044 024 004 764 744 724 704 664 644 624 604 564 544 524 504 464 444 424 404 364 344 324 304 264 244 224 4 203 163 143 123 103 063 043 023 003 763 743 723 703 663 643 623 603 563 543 523 503 463 443 423 403 363 343 323 303 263 243 223 3 202 162 142 122 102 062 042 022 002 762 742 722 702 662 642 622 602 562 542 522 502 462 442 422 402 362 342 322 302 262 242 222 2 201 161 141 121 101 061 041 021 001 761 741 721 701 661 641 621 601 561 541 521 501 461 441 421 401 361 341 321 301 261 241 221 1 200 160 140 120 100 060 040 020 000 760 740 720 700 660 640 620 600 560 540 520 500 460 440 420 400 360 340 320 300 260 240 220 0 Address AddressAdd V40637 V40636 V40635 V40634 V40633 V40632 V40631 V40630 V40627 V40626 V40625 V40624 V40623 V40622 V40621 V40620 V40617 V40616 V40615 V40614 V40613 V40612 V40610 V40607 V40606 V40605 V40604 V40603 V40602 V40601 V40600 V40611 ress CPU Specifications and Operation ress 3–57 V40670 V40671 V40672 V40673 V40674 V40675 V40676 V40677 V40640 V40641 V40642 V40643 V40644 V40645 V40646 V40647 V40650 V40651 V40652 V40653 V40654 V40655 V40656 V40657 V40660 V40661 V40662 V40663 V40664 V40665 V40666 V40667 Address Add 0 1100 1120 1140 1160 1340 1360 1400 1420 1440 1460 1500 1520 1540 1560 1600 1620 1640 1660 1700 1720 1740 1760 1000 1020 1040 1060 1200 1220 1240 1260 1300 1320 1 1101 1121 1141 1161 1341 1361 1401 1421 1441 1461 1501 1521 1541 1561 1601 1621 1641 1661 1701 1721 1741 1761 1001 1021 1041 1061 1201 1221 1241 1261 1301 1321 2 1102 1122 1142 1162 1342 1362 1402 1422 1442 1462 1502 1522 1542 1562 1602 1622 1642 1662 1702 1722 1742 1762 1002 1022 1042 1062 1202 1222 1242 1262 1302 1322 3 1103 1123 1143 1163 1343 1363 1403 1423 1443 1463 1503 1523 1543 1563 1603 1623 1643 1663 1703 1723 1743 1763 1003 1023 1043 1063 1203 1223 1243 1263 1303 1323 4 1104 1124 1144 1164 1344 1364 1404 1424 1444 1464 1504 1524 1544 1564 1604 1624 1644 1664 1704 1724 1744 1764 1004 1024 1044 1064 1204 1224 1244 1264 1304 1324 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 5 1105 1125 1145 1165 1345 1365 1405 1425 1445 1465 1505 1525 1545 1565 1605 1625 1645 1665 1705 1725 1745 1765 1005 1025 1045 1065 1205 1225 1245 1265 1305 1325 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 6 1106 1126 1146 1166 1346 1366 1406 1426 1446 1466 1506 1526 1546 1566 1606 1626 1646 1666 1706 1726 1746 1766 1006 1026 1046 1066 1206 1226 1246 1266 1306 1326 7 1107 1127 1147 1167 1347 1367 1407 1427 1447 1467 1507 1527 1547 1567 1607 1627 1647 1667 1707 1727 1747 1767 1007 1027 1047 1067 1207 1227 1247 1267 1307 1327 10 1110 1130 1150 1170 1350 1370 1410 1430 1450 1470 1510 1530 1550 1570 1610 1630 1650 1670 1710 1730 1750 1770 1010 1030 1050 1070 1210 1230 1250 1270 1310 1330 11 1111 1511 1611 1711 1311 1411 1011 1131 1151 1171 1211 1731 1751 1771 1471 1531 1551 1571 1631 1651 1671 1231 1251 1271 1331 1351 1371 1431 1451 1031 1051 1071 12 1112 1132 1152 1172 1732 1752 1772 1472 1512 1532 1552 1572 1612 1632 1652 1672 1712 1232 1252 1272 1312 1332 1352 1372 1412 1432 1452 1012 1032 1052 1072 1212 13 1113 1133 1153 1173 1733 1753 1773 1473 1513 1533 1553 1573 1613 1633 1653 1673 1713 1233 1253 1273 1313 1333 1353 1373 1413 1433 1453 1013 1033 1053 1073 1213 14 1114 1134 1154 1174 1734 1754 1774 1474 1514 1534 1554 1574 1614 1634 1654 1674 1714 1234 1254 1274 1314 1334 1354 1374 1414 1434 1454 1014 1034 1054 1074 1214 15 1115 1155 1175 1135 1775 1655 1675 1715 1735 1755 1535 1555 1575 1615 1635 1415 1435 1455 1475 1515 1275 1315 1335 1355 1375 1215 1235 1255 1035 1055 1075 1015 16 1116 1156 1176 1136 1776 1656 1676 1716 1736 1756 1536 1556 1576 1616 1636 1416 1436 1456 1476 1516 1276 1316 1336 1356 1376 1216 1236 1256 1036 1056 1076 1016 17 1117 1177 1137 1157 1757 1777 1677 1717 1737 1637 1657 1557 1577 1617 1517 1537 1437 1457 1477 1377 1417 1317 1337 1357 1257 1277 1217 1237 1057 1077 1017 1037 MSB DL250–1 / DL260 Control Relays (C) Additional LSB CPU Specifications 3–58 and Operation This portionofthetableshowsadditionalControlRelayspointsavailablewithDL260. DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 S L6 diinlCnrlRly C LSB DL260AdditionalControlRelays(C) MSB 2777 2757 2737 2717 2677 2657 2637 2617 2577 2557 2537 2517 2477 2457 2437 2417 2377 2357 2337 2317 2277 2257 2237 2217 2177 2157 2137 2077 2057 2037 2017 2117 17 2076 2056 2036 2016 2776 2756 2736 2716 2676 2656 2636 2616 2576 2556 2536 2516 2476 2456 2436 2416 2376 2356 2336 2316 2276 2256 2236 2216 2176 2156 2136 2116 16 CPU SpecificationsandOperation 2475 2455 2435 2415 2375 2355 2335 2315 2275 2255 2235 2215 2175 2155 2135 2075 2055 2035 2015 2775 2755 2735 2715 2675 2655 2635 2615 2575 2555 2535 2515 2115 15 2774 2754 2734 2714 2674 2654 2634 2614 2574 2554 2534 2514 2474 2454 2434 2414 2374 2354 2334 2314 2274 2254 2234 2214 2174 2154 2134 2074 2054 2034 2014 2114 14 2773 2753 2733 2713 2673 2653 2633 2613 2573 2553 2533 2513 2473 2453 2433 2413 2373 2353 2333 2313 2273 2253 2233 2213 2173 2153 2133 2073 2053 2033 2013 2113 13 2672 2652 2632 2612 2572 2552 2532 2512 2472 2452 2432 2412 2372 2352 2332 2312 2272 2252 2232 2212 2172 2152 2132 2072 2052 2032 2012 2772 2752 2732 2712 2112 12 2771 2751 2731 2671 2651 2631 2571 2551 2531 2471 2451 2431 2371 2351 2331 2271 2251 2231 2171 2151 2131 2071 2051 2031 2711 2611 2511 2411 2311 2211 2011 2111 11 2310 2270 2250 2230 2210 2170 2150 2130 2070 2050 2030 2010 2770 2750 2730 2710 2670 2650 2630 2610 2570 2550 2530 2510 2470 2450 2430 2410 2370 2350 2330 2110 10 2307 2267 2247 2227 2207 2167 2147 2127 2107 2067 2047 2027 2007 2767 2747 2727 2707 2667 2647 2627 2607 2567 2547 2527 2507 2467 2447 2427 2407 2367 2347 2327 7 2306 2266 2246 2226 2206 2166 2146 2126 2106 2066 2046 2026 2006 2766 2746 2726 2706 2666 2646 2626 2606 2566 2546 2526 2506 2466 2446 2426 2406 2366 2346 2326 6 2305 2265 2245 2225 2205 2165 2145 2125 2105 2065 2045 2025 2005 2765 2745 2725 2705 2665 2645 2625 2605 2565 2545 2525 2505 2465 2445 2425 2405 2365 2345 2325 5 2304 2264 2244 2224 2204 2164 2144 2124 2104 2064 2044 2024 2004 2764 2744 2724 2704 2664 2644 2624 2604 2564 2544 2524 2504 2464 2444 2424 2404 2364 2344 2324 4 2303 2263 2243 2223 2203 2163 2143 2123 2103 2063 2043 2023 2003 2763 2743 2723 2703 2663 2643 2623 2603 2563 2543 2523 2503 2463 2443 2423 2403 2363 2343 2323 3 2302 2262 2242 2222 2202 2162 2142 2122 2102 2062 2042 2022 2002 2762 2742 2722 2702 2662 2642 2622 2602 2562 2542 2522 2502 2462 2442 2422 2402 2362 2342 2322 2 2301 2261 2241 2221 2201 2161 2141 2121 2101 2061 2041 2021 2001 2761 2741 2721 2701 2661 2641 2621 2601 2561 2541 2521 2501 2461 2441 2421 2401 2361 2341 2321 1 2300 2260 2240 2220 2200 2160 2140 2120 2100 2060 2040 2020 2000 2760 2740 2720 2700 2660 2640 2620 2600 2560 2540 2520 2500 2460 2440 2420 2400 2360 2340 2320 0 AddressAdd V40737 V40736 V40735 V40734 V40733 V40732 V40731 V40730 V40727 V40726 V40725 V40724 V40723 V40722 V40721 V40720 V40717 V40716 V40715 V40714 V40713 V40712 V40710 V40707 V40706 V40705 V40704 V40703 V40702 V40701 V40700 V40711 ress CPU Specifications and Operation ress 3–59 V40770 V40771 V40772 V40773 V40774 V40775 V40776 V40777 V40740 V40741 V40742 V40743 V40744 V40745 V40746 V40747 V40750 V40751 V40752 V40753 V40754 V40755 V40756 V40757 V40760 V40761 V40762 V40763 V40764 V40765 V40766 V40767 Address Add 0 3340 3360 3400 3420 3440 3460 3500 3520 3540 3560 3600 3620 3640 3660 3700 3720 3740 3760 3000 3020 3040 3060 3100 3120 3140 3160 3200 3220 3240 3260 3300 3320 1 3341 3361 3401 3421 3441 3461 3501 3521 3541 3561 3601 3621 3641 3661 3701 3721 3741 3761 3001 3021 3041 3061 3101 3121 3141 3161 3201 3221 3241 3261 3301 3321 2 3342 3362 3402 3422 3442 3462 3502 3522 3542 3562 3602 3622 3642 3662 3702 3722 3742 3762 3002 3022 3042 3062 3102 3122 3142 3162 3202 3222 3242 3262 3302 3322 3 3343 3363 3403 3423 3443 3463 3503 3523 3543 3563 3603 3623 3643 3663 3703 3723 3743 3763 3003 3023 3043 3063 3103 3123 3143 3163 3203 3223 3243 3263 3303 3323 4 3344 3364 3404 3424 3444 3464 3504 3524 3544 3564 3604 3624 3644 3664 3704 3724 3744 3764 3004 3024 3044 3064 3104 3124 3144 3164 3204 3224 3244 3264 3304 3324 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 5 3345 3365 3405 3425 3445 3465 3505 3525 3545 3565 3605 3625 3645 3665 3705 3725 3745 3765 3005 3025 3045 3065 3105 3125 3145 3165 3205 3225 3245 3265 3305 3325 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 6 3346 3366 3406 3426 3446 3466 3506 3526 3546 3566 3606 3626 3646 3666 3706 3726 3746 3766 3006 3026 3046 3066 3106 3126 3146 3166 3206 3226 3246 3266 3306 3326 7 3347 3367 3407 3427 3447 3467 3507 3527 3547 3567 3607 3627 3647 3667 3707 3727 3747 3767 3007 3027 3047 3067 3107 3127 3147 3167 3207 3227 3247 3267 3307 3327 10 3110 3350 3370 3410 3430 3450 3470 3510 3530 3550 3570 3610 3630 3650 3670 3710 3730 3750 3770 3010 3030 3050 3070 3130 3150 3170 3210 3230 3250 3270 3310 3330 11 3111 3511 3611 3711 3311 3411 3011 3211 3731 3751 3771 3471 3531 3551 3571 3631 3651 3671 3231 3251 3271 3331 3351 3371 3431 3451 3031 3051 3071 3131 3151 3171 12 3112 3732 3752 3772 3472 3512 3532 3552 3572 3612 3632 3652 3672 3712 3232 3252 3272 3312 3332 3352 3372 3412 3432 3452 3012 3032 3052 3072 3132 3152 3172 3212 13 3113 3733 3753 3773 3473 3513 3533 3553 3573 3613 3633 3653 3673 3713 3233 3253 3273 3313 3333 3353 3373 3413 3433 3453 3013 3033 3053 3073 3133 3153 3173 3213 14 3114 3734 3754 3774 3474 3514 3534 3554 3574 3614 3634 3654 3674 3714 3234 3254 3274 3314 3334 3354 3374 3414 3434 3454 3014 3034 3054 3074 3134 3154 3174 3214 15 3115 3775 3655 3675 3715 3735 3755 3535 3555 3575 3615 3635 3415 3435 3455 3475 3515 3275 3315 3335 3355 3375 3155 3175 3215 3235 3255 3035 3055 3075 3135 3015 16 3116 3776 3656 3676 3716 3736 3756 3536 3556 3576 3616 3636 3416 3436 3456 3476 3516 3276 3316 3336 3356 3376 3156 3176 3216 3236 3256 3036 3056 3076 3136 3016 17 3117 3757 3777 3677 3717 3737 3637 3657 3557 3577 3617 3517 3537 3437 3457 3477 3377 3417 3317 3337 3357 3257 3277 3177 3217 3237 3137 3157 3057 3077 3017 3037 MSB (cont’d) DL260 Additional Control Relays (C) LSB CPU Specifications 3–60 and Operation This This Stage DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 S L3/L4/L5– L6 tg S oto isLSB DL230/DL240/DL250–1 /DL260Stage(S)ControlBits MSB S L4 L5– L6 diinlSae()CnrlBt LSB DL240/DL250–1DL260Additional Stage(S)ControlBits MSB 777 757 737 717 677 657 637 617 577 557 537 517 477 457 437 417 377 357 337 317 277 257 237 217 177 157 137 077 057 037 017 117 17 17 table providesalistingoftheindividualStage 376 356 336 316 276 256 236 216 176 156 136 076 056 036 016 776 756 736 716 676 656 636 616 576 556 536 516 476 456 436 416 116 16 16 CPU SpecificationsandOperation t 715 675 655 635 615 575 555 535 515 475 455 435 415 375 355 335 315 275 255 235 215 175 155 135 075 055 035 015 775 755 735 115 Control/StatusBitMap 15 15 514 474 454 434 414 374 354 334 314 274 254 234 214 174 154 134 074 054 034 014 774 754 734 714 674 654 634 614 574 554 534 114 14 14 773 753 733 713 673 653 633 613 573 553 533 513 473 453 433 413 373 353 333 313 273 253 233 213 173 153 133 073 053 033 013 113 13 13 512 472 452 432 412 372 352 332 312 272 252 232 212 172 152 132 072 052 032 012 772 752 732 712 672 652 632 612 572 552 532 112 12 12 771 751 731 671 651 631 571 551 531 471 451 431 371 351 331 271 251 231 171 151 131 071 051 031 711 611 511 411 311 211 011 111 11 11 230 210 170 150 130 070 050 030 010 770 750 730 710 670 650 630 610 570 550 530 510 470 450 430 410 370 350 330 310 270 250 110 10 10 227 207 167 147 127 107 067 047 027 007 767 747 727 707 667 647 627 607 567 547 527 507 467 447 427 407 367 347 327 307 267 247 t 7 7 controlbitsassociatedw 226 206 166 146 126 106 066 046 026 006 766 746 726 706 666 646 626 606 566 546 526 506 466 446 426 406 366 346 326 306 266 246 6 6 225 205 165 145 125 105 065 045 025 005 765 745 725 705 665 645 625 605 565 545 525 505 465 445 425 405 365 345 325 305 265 245 5 5 224 204 164 144 124 104 064 044 024 004 764 744 724 704 664 644 624 604 564 544 524 504 464 444 424 404 364 344 324 304 264 244 4 4 223 203 163 143 123 103 063 043 023 003 763 743 723 703 663 643 623 603 563 543 523 503 463 443 423 403 363 343 323 303 263 243 3 3 ith eachV-memoryaddress. 222 202 162 142 122 102 062 042 022 002 762 742 722 702 662 642 622 602 562 542 522 502 462 442 422 402 362 342 322 302 262 242 2 2 221 201 161 141 121 101 061 041 021 001 761 741 721 701 661 641 621 601 561 541 521 501 461 441 421 401 361 341 321 301 261 241 1 1 220 200 160 140 120 100 060 040 020 000 760 740 720 700 660 640 620 600 560 540 520 500 460 440 420 400 360 340 320 300 260 240 0 0 AddressAdd AddressAdd V41037 V41036 V41035 V41034 V41033 V41032 V41031 V41030 V41027 V41026 V41025 V41024 V41023 V41022 V41021 V41020 V41017 V41016 V41015 V41014 V41013 V41012 V41010 V41007 V41006 V41005 V41004 V41003 V41002 V41001 V41000 V41011 ress ress CPU Specifications and Operation ress 3–61 V41070 V41071 V41072 V41073 V41074 V41075 V41076 V41077 V41040 V41041 V41042 V41043 V41044 V41045 V41046 V41047 V41050 V41051 V41052 V41053 V41054 V41055 V41056 V41057 V41060 V41061 V41062 V41063 V41064 V41065 V41066 V41067 Address Add 0 1100 1120 1140 1160 1340 1360 1400 1420 1440 1460 1500 1520 1540 1560 1600 1620 1640 1660 1700 1720 1740 1760 1000 1020 1040 1060 1200 1220 1240 1260 1300 1320 1 1101 1121 1141 1161 1341 1361 1401 1421 1441 1461 1501 1521 1541 1561 1601 1621 1641 1661 1701 1721 1741 1761 1001 1021 1041 1061 1201 1221 1241 1261 1301 1321 2 1102 1122 1142 1162 1342 1362 1402 1422 1442 1462 1502 1522 1542 1562 1602 1622 1642 1662 1702 1722 1742 1762 1002 1022 1042 1062 1202 1222 1242 1262 1302 1322 3 1103 1123 1143 1163 1343 1363 1403 1423 1443 1463 1503 1523 1543 1563 1603 1623 1643 1663 1703 1723 1743 1763 1003 1023 1043 1063 1203 1223 1243 1263 1303 1323 4 1104 1124 1144 1164 1344 1364 1404 1424 1444 1464 1504 1524 1544 1564 1604 1624 1644 1664 1704 1724 1744 1764 1004 1024 1044 1064 1204 1224 1244 1264 1304 1324 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 5 1105 1125 1145 1165 1345 1365 1405 1425 1445 1465 1505 1525 1545 1565 1605 1625 1645 1665 1705 1725 1745 1765 1005 1025 1045 1065 1205 1225 1245 1265 1305 1325 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 6 1106 1126 1146 1166 1346 1366 1406 1426 1446 1466 1506 1526 1546 1566 1606 1626 1646 1666 1706 1726 1746 1766 1006 1026 1046 1066 1206 1226 1246 1266 1306 1326 7 1107 1127 1147 1167 1347 1367 1407 1427 1447 1467 1507 1527 1547 1567 1607 1627 1647 1667 1707 1727 1747 1767 1007 1027 1047 1067 1207 1227 1247 1267 1307 1327 10 1110 1130 1150 1170 1350 1370 1410 1430 1450 1470 1510 1530 1550 1570 1610 1630 1650 1670 1710 1730 1750 1770 1010 1030 1050 1070 1210 1230 1250 1270 1310 1330 11 1111 1511 1611 1711 1311 1411 1011 1131 1151 1171 1211 1731 1751 1771 1471 1531 1551 1571 1631 1651 1671 1231 1251 1271 1331 1351 1371 1431 1451 1031 1051 1071 12 1112 1132 1152 1172 1732 1752 1772 1472 1512 1532 1552 1572 1612 1632 1652 1672 1712 1232 1252 1272 1312 1332 1352 1372 1412 1432 1452 1012 1032 1052 1072 1212 13 1113 1133 1153 1173 1733 1753 1773 1473 1513 1533 1553 1573 1613 1633 1653 1673 1713 1233 1253 1273 1313 1333 1353 1373 1413 1433 1453 1013 1033 1053 1073 1213 14 1114 1134 1154 1174 1734 1754 1774 1474 1514 1534 1554 1574 1614 1634 1654 1674 1714 1234 1254 1274 1314 1334 1354 1374 1414 1434 1454 1014 1034 1054 1074 1214 15 1115 1155 1175 1135 1775 1655 1675 1715 1735 1755 1535 1555 1575 1615 1635 1415 1435 1455 1475 1515 1275 1315 1335 1355 1375 1215 1235 1255 1035 1055 1075 1015 16 1116 1156 1176 1136 1776 1656 1676 1716 1736 1756 1536 1556 1576 1616 1636 1416 1436 1456 1476 1516 1276 1316 1336 1356 1376 1216 1236 1256 1036 1056 1076 1016 17 1117 1177 1137 1157 1757 1777 1677 1717 1737 1637 1657 1557 1577 1617 1517 1537 1437 1457 1477 1377 1417 1317 1337 1357 1257 1277 1217 1237 1057 1077 1017 1037 MSB (continued) / DL260 Additional Stage (S) Control Bits DL250–1 LSB CPU Specifications 3–62 and Operation This portionofthetableshowsadditionalTimer contactsavailablewiththeDL250–1andDL260. This address bit. This tableprovidesalistingoftheindividualtimerandcountercontactsassociatedwitheachV-memory Timer andCounterStatusBitMaps This portionofthetableshowsadditionalCounter contactsavailablewiththeDL260. DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 S L5– L6 diinlTmr()Cnat LSB DL250–1/DL260AdditionalTimer (T)Contacts MSB LSB DL240/DL250–1DL260AdditionalTimer (T)andCounter(CT)Contacts MSB LSB DL230/DL240DL250–1DL260Timer (T)andCounter(CT)Contacts MSB S L6 diinlCutr(T otcsLSB DL260AdditionalCounter (CT)Contacts MSB 177 157 137 077 057 037 017 117 377 357 337 317 277 257 237 217 377 357 337 317 277 257 237 217 17 17 17 17 portion ofthetableshowsadditionalTimerand 056 036 016 176 156 136 076 116 16 16 256 236 216 376 356 336 316 276 256 236 216 376 356 336 316 276 16 16 CPU SpecificationsandOperation 175 155 135 075 055 035 015 115 15 15 315 275 255 235 215 375 355 335 315 275 255 235 215 375 355 335 15 15 174 154 134 074 054 034 014 114 14 14 374 354 334 314 274 254 234 214 374 354 334 314 274 254 234 214 14 14 173 153 133 073 053 033 013 113 13 13 373 353 333 313 273 253 233 213 373 353 333 313 273 253 233 213 13 13 172 152 132 072 052 032 012 112 12 12 372 352 332 312 272 252 232 212 372 352 332 312 272 252 232 212 12 12 171 151 131 071 051 031 011 111 11 11 371 351 331 271 251 231 371 351 331 271 251 231 311 211 311 211 11 11 170 150 130 070 050 030 010 110 10 10 370 350 330 310 270 250 230 210 370 350 330 310 270 250 230 210 10 10 147 127 107 067 047 027 007 167 7 7 367 347 327 307 267 247 227 207 367 347 327 307 267 247 227 207 146 126 106 066 046 026 006 166 7 7 6 6 Counter contactsavailablewiththeDL240/250–1/260. 145 125 105 065 045 025 005 165 366 346 326 306 266 246 226 206 366 346 326 306 266 246 226 206 5 5 6 6 144 124 104 064 044 024 004 164 365 345 325 305 265 245 225 205 365 345 325 305 265 245 225 205 4 4 5 5 143 123 103 063 043 023 003 163 3 3 364 344 324 304 264 244 224 204 364 344 324 304 264 244 224 204 4 4 142 122 102 062 042 022 002 162 2 2 363 343 323 303 263 243 223 203 363 343 323 303 263 243 223 203 3 3 141 121 101 061 041 021 001 161 1 1 362 342 322 302 262 242 222 202 362 342 322 302 262 242 222 202 2 2 140 120 100 060 040 020 000 160 0 0 361 341 321 301 261 241 221 201 361 341 321 301 261 241 221 201 1 1 Address Address V41106 V41105 V41104 V41103 V41102 V41101 V41100 V41107 Timer Timer 360 340 320 300 260 240 220 200 360 340 320 300 260 240 220 200 0 0 Address Address Counter Address Address Counter Counter V41157 V41156 V41155 V41154 V41153 V41152 V41151 V41150 V41117 V41116 V41115 V41114 V41113 V41112 V41110 V41111 Timer V41147 V41146 V41145 V41144 V41143 V41142 V41141 V41140 CPU Specifications and Operation ress 3–63 GY V40211 V40224 V40225 V40226 V40227 V40230 V40231 V40232 V40233 V40234 V40235 V40236 V40237 V40200 V40201 V40202 V40203 V40204 V40205 V40206 V40207 V40210 V40212 V40213 V40214 V40215 V40216 V40217 V40220 V40221 V40222 V40223 AddressAdd ress GX V40011 V40036 V40037 V40012 V40013 V40014 V40015 V40016 V40017 V40020 V40021 V40022 V40023 V40024 V40025 V40026 V40027 V40030 V40031 V40032 V40033 V40034 V40035 V40000 V40001 V40002 V40003 V40004 V40005 V40006 V40007 V40010 AddressAdd 0 740 760 240 260 300 320 340 360 400 420 440 460 500 520 540 560 600 620 640 660 700 720 000 020 040 060 100 120 140 160 200 220 1 741 761 241 261 301 321 341 361 401 421 441 461 501 521 541 561 601 621 641 661 701 721 001 021 041 061 101 121 141 161 201 221 with each V-memory address bit. V-memory with each 2 742 762 242 262 302 322 342 362 402 422 442 462 502 522 542 562 602 622 642 662 702 722 002 022 042 062 102 122 142 162 202 222 3 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 743 763 243 263 303 323 343 363 403 423 443 463 503 523 543 563 603 623 643 663 703 723 003 023 043 063 103 123 143 163 203 223 4 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 744 764 244 264 304 324 344 364 404 424 444 464 504 524 544 564 604 624 644 664 704 724 004 024 044 064 104 124 144 164 204 224 5 745 765 245 265 305 325 345 365 405 425 445 465 505 525 545 565 605 625 645 665 705 725 005 025 045 065 105 125 145 165 205 225 6 746 766 246 266 306 326 346 366 406 426 446 466 506 526 546 566 606 626 646 666 706 726 006 026 046 066 106 126 146 166 206 226 7 747 767 247 267 307 327 347 367 407 427 447 467 507 527 547 567 607 627 647 667 707 727 007 027 047 067 107 127 147 167 207 227 10 110 630 650 670 710 730 750 770 370 410 430 450 470 510 530 550 570 610 130 150 170 210 230 250 270 310 330 350 010 030 050 070 11 111 711 411 511 611 211 311 011 631 651 671 731 751 771 371 431 451 471 531 551 571 131 151 171 231 251 271 331 351 031 051 071 12 112 632 652 672 712 732 752 772 372 412 432 452 472 512 532 552 572 612 132 152 172 212 232 252 272 312 332 352 012 032 052 072 13 113 633 653 673 713 733 753 773 373 413 433 453 473 513 533 553 573 613 133 153 173 213 233 253 273 313 333 353 013 033 053 073 14 114 634 654 674 714 734 754 774 374 414 434 454 474 514 534 554 574 614 134 154 174 214 234 254 274 314 334 354 014 034 054 074 15 115 675 715 735 755 775 555 575 615 635 655 435 455 475 515 535 315 335 355 375 415 175 215 235 255 275 055 075 135 155 015 035 16 116 676 716 736 756 776 556 576 616 636 656 436 456 476 516 536 316 336 356 376 416 176 216 236 256 276 056 076 136 156 016 036 table provides a listing of the individual remote I/O points associated I/O points associated the individual remote a listing of table provides 17 117 777 737 757 657 677 717 617 637 537 557 577 477 517 417 437 457 357 377 277 317 337 237 257 157 177 217 077 137 037 057 017 MSB DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points LSB This Remote only) (DL 260 I/O Bit Map CPU Specifications 3–64 and Operation DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 S L6 eoeIO(X n G)Pit LSB DL260RemoteI/O(GX) and(GY)Points MSB 1777 1757 1737 1717 1677 1657 1637 1617 1577 1557 1537 1517 1477 1457 1437 1417 1377 1357 1337 1317 1277 1257 1237 1217 1077 1057 1037 1017 1177 1157 1137 1117 17 1076 1056 1036 1016 1776 1756 1736 1716 1676 1656 1636 1616 1576 1556 1536 1516 1476 1456 1436 1416 1376 1356 1336 1316 1276 1256 1236 1216 1176 1156 1136 1116 16 CPU SpecificationsandOperation 1475 1455 1435 1415 1375 1355 1335 1315 1275 1255 1235 1215 1075 1055 1035 1015 1775 1755 1735 1715 1675 1655 1635 1615 1575 1555 1535 1515 1175 1155 1135 1115 15 1654 1634 1614 1574 1554 1534 1514 1474 1454 1434 1414 1374 1354 1334 1314 1274 1254 1234 1214 1074 1054 1034 1014 1774 1754 1734 1714 1674 1174 1154 1134 1114 14 1773 1753 1733 1713 1673 1653 1633 1613 1573 1553 1533 1513 1473 1453 1433 1413 1373 1353 1333 1313 1273 1253 1233 1213 1073 1053 1033 1013 1173 1153 1133 1113 13 1652 1632 1612 1572 1552 1532 1512 1472 1452 1432 1412 1372 1352 1332 1312 1272 1252 1232 1212 1072 1052 1032 1012 1772 1752 1732 1712 1672 1172 1152 1132 1112 12 1771 1751 1731 1671 1651 1631 1571 1551 1531 1471 1451 1431 1371 1351 1331 1271 1251 1231 1071 1051 1031 1611 1511 1411 1311 1211 1171 1151 1131 1011 1711 1111 11 1770 1750 1730 1710 1670 1650 1630 1610 1570 1550 1530 1510 1470 1450 1430 1410 1370 1350 1330 1310 1270 1250 1230 1210 1070 1050 1030 1010 1170 1150 1130 1110 10 1267 1247 1227 1207 1067 1047 1027 1007 1767 1747 1727 1707 1667 1647 1627 1607 1567 1547 1527 1507 1467 1447 1427 1407 1367 1347 1327 1307 1167 1147 1127 1107 7 1266 1246 1226 1206 1066 1046 1026 1006 1766 1746 1726 1706 1666 1646 1626 1606 1566 1546 1526 1506 1466 1446 1426 1406 1366 1346 1326 1306 1166 1146 1126 1106 6 1265 1245 1225 1205 1065 1045 1025 1005 1765 1745 1725 1705 1665 1645 1625 1605 1565 1545 1525 1505 1465 1445 1425 1405 1365 1345 1325 1305 1165 1145 1125 1105 5 1264 1244 1224 1204 1064 1044 1024 1004 1764 1744 1724 1704 1664 1644 1624 1604 1564 1544 1524 1504 1464 1444 1424 1404 1364 1344 1324 1304 1164 1144 1124 1104 4 1263 1243 1223 1203 1063 1043 1023 1003 1763 1743 1723 1703 1663 1643 1623 1603 1563 1543 1523 1503 1463 1443 1423 1403 1363 1343 1323 1303 1163 1143 1123 1103 3 1262 1242 1222 1202 1062 1042 1022 1002 1762 1742 1722 1702 1662 1642 1622 1602 1562 1542 1522 1502 1462 1442 1422 1402 1362 1342 1322 1302 1162 1142 1122 1102 2 1261 1241 1221 1201 1061 1041 1021 1001 1761 1741 1721 1701 1661 1641 1621 1601 1561 1541 1521 1501 1461 1441 1421 1401 1361 1341 1321 1301 1161 1141 1121 1101 1 1260 1240 1220 1200 1060 1040 1020 1000 1760 1740 1720 1700 1660 1640 1620 1600 1560 1540 1520 1500 1460 1440 1420 1400 1360 1340 1320 1300 1160 1140 1120 1100 0 AddressAdd V40053 V40052 V40051 V40050 V40047 V40046 V40045 V40044 V40043 V40042 V40041 V40040 V40077 V40076 V40075 V40074 V40073 V40072 V40071 V40070 V40067 V40066 V40065 V40064 V40063 V40062 V40061 V40060 V40057 V40056 V40055 V40054 GX ress AddressAdd V40277 V40276 V40275 V40274 V40273 V40272 V40271 V40270 V40267 V40266 V40265 V40264 V40263 V40262 V40261 V40260 V40257 V40256 V40255 V40254 V40253 V40252 V40251 V40250 V40247 V40246 V40245 V40244 V40243 V40242 V40241 V40240 GY ress CPU Specifications and Operation 3–65 GYGY V40311 V40330 V40331 V40332 V40333 V40334 V40335 V40336 V40337 V40300 V40301 V40302 V40303 V40304 V40305 V40306 V40307 V40310 V40312 V40313 V40314 V40315 V40316 V40317 V40320 V40321 V40322 V40323 V40324 V40325 V40326 V40327 Address GXGX V40111 V40116 V40117 V40110 V40112 V40113 V40114 V40115 V40120 V40121 V40122 V40123 V40124 V40125 V40126 V40127 V40130 V40131 V40132 V40133 V40134 V40135 V40136 V40137 V40100 V40101 V40102 V40103 V40104 V40105 V40106 V40107 Address 0 2340 2360 2400 2420 2440 2460 2500 2520 2540 2560 2600 2620 2640 2660 2700 2720 2740 2760 2000 2020 2040 2060 2100 2120 2140 2160 2200 2220 2240 2260 2300 2320 1 2341 2361 2401 2421 2441 2461 2501 2521 2541 2561 2601 2621 2641 2661 2701 2721 2741 2761 2001 2021 2041 2061 2101 2121 2141 2161 2201 2221 2241 2261 2301 2321 2 2342 2362 2402 2422 2442 2462 2502 2522 2542 2562 2602 2622 2642 2662 2702 2722 2742 2762 2002 2022 2042 2062 2102 2122 2142 2162 2202 2222 2242 2262 2302 2322 3 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 2343 2363 2403 2423 2443 2463 2503 2523 2543 2563 2603 2623 2643 2663 2703 2723 2743 2763 2003 2023 2043 2063 2103 2123 2143 2163 2203 2223 2243 2263 2303 2323 4 CPU Specifications and Operation Specifications CPU 2344 2364 2404 2424 2444 2464 2504 2524 2544 2564 2604 2624 2644 2664 2704 2724 2744 2764 2004 2024 2044 2064 2104 2124 2144 2164 2204 2224 2244 2264 2304 2324 5 2345 2365 2405 2425 2445 2465 2505 2525 2545 2565 2605 2625 2645 2665 2705 2725 2745 2765 2005 2025 2045 2065 2105 2125 2145 2165 2205 2225 2245 2265 2305 2325 6 2346 2366 2406 2426 2446 2466 2506 2526 2546 2566 2606 2626 2646 2666 2706 2726 2746 2766 2006 2026 2046 2066 2106 2126 2146 2166 2206 2226 2246 2266 2306 2326 7 2347 2367 2407 2427 2447 2467 2507 2527 2547 2567 2607 2627 2647 2667 2707 2727 2747 2767 2007 2027 2047 2067 2107 2127 2147 2167 2207 2227 2247 2267 2307 2327 10 2110 2730 2750 2770 2470 2510 2530 2550 2570 2610 2630 2650 2670 2710 2230 2250 2270 2310 2330 2350 2370 2410 2430 2450 2010 2030 2050 2070 2130 2150 2170 2210 11 2111 2511 2611 2711 2311 2411 2011 2211 2731 2751 2771 2471 2531 2551 2571 2631 2651 2671 2231 2251 2271 2331 2351 2371 2431 2451 2031 2051 2071 2131 2151 2171 12 2112 2732 2752 2772 2472 2512 2532 2552 2572 2612 2632 2652 2672 2712 2232 2252 2272 2312 2332 2352 2372 2412 2432 2452 2012 2032 2052 2072 2132 2152 2172 2212 13 2113 2733 2753 2773 2473 2513 2533 2553 2573 2613 2633 2653 2673 2713 2233 2253 2273 2313 2333 2353 2373 2413 2433 2453 2013 2033 2053 2073 2133 2153 2173 2213 14 2114 2734 2754 2774 2474 2514 2534 2554 2574 2614 2634 2654 2674 2714 2234 2254 2274 2314 2334 2354 2374 2414 2434 2454 2014 2034 2054 2074 2134 2154 2174 2214 15 2115 2775 2655 2675 2715 2735 2755 2535 2555 2575 2615 2635 2415 2435 2455 2475 2515 2275 2315 2335 2355 2375 2155 2175 2215 2235 2255 2035 2055 2075 2135 2015 16 2116 2776 2656 2676 2716 2736 2756 2536 2556 2576 2616 2636 2416 2436 2456 2476 2516 2276 2316 2336 2356 2376 2156 2176 2216 2236 2256 2036 2056 2076 2136 2016 17 2117 2757 2777 2677 2717 2737 2637 2657 2557 2577 2617 2517 2537 2437 2457 2477 2377 2417 2317 2337 2357 2257 2277 2177 2217 2237 2137 2157 2057 2077 2017 2037 MSB DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points LSB CPU Specifications 3–66 and Operation DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 S L6 eoeIO(X n G)Pit LSB DL260RemoteI/O(GX) and(GY)Points MSB 3777 3757 3737 3717 3677 3657 3637 3617 3577 3557 3537 3517 3477 3457 3437 3417 3377 3357 3337 3317 3277 3257 3237 3217 3177 3157 3137 3077 3057 3037 3017 3117 17 3076 3056 3036 3016 3776 3756 3736 3716 3676 3656 3636 3616 3576 3556 3536 3516 3476 3456 3436 3416 3376 3356 3336 3316 3276 3256 3236 3216 3176 3156 3136 3116 16 CPU SpecificationsandOperation 3475 3455 3435 3415 3375 3355 3335 3315 3275 3255 3235 3215 3175 3155 3135 3075 3055 3035 3015 3775 3755 3735 3715 3675 3655 3635 3615 3575 3555 3535 3515 3115 15 3674 3654 3634 3614 3574 3554 3534 3514 3474 3454 3434 3414 3374 3354 3334 3314 3274 3254 3234 3214 3174 3154 3134 3074 3054 3034 3014 3774 3754 3734 3714 3114 14 3773 3753 3733 3713 3673 3653 3633 3613 3573 3553 3533 3513 3473 3453 3433 3413 3373 3353 3333 3313 3273 3253 3233 3213 3173 3153 3133 3073 3053 3033 3013 3113 13 3672 3652 3632 3612 3572 3552 3532 3512 3472 3452 3432 3412 3372 3352 3332 3312 3272 3252 3232 3212 3172 3152 3132 3072 3052 3032 3012 3772 3752 3732 3712 3112 12 3771 3751 3731 3671 3651 3631 3571 3551 3531 3471 3451 3431 3371 3351 3331 3271 3251 3231 3171 3151 3131 3071 3051 3031 3611 3511 3411 3311 3211 3011 3711 3111 11 3770 3750 3730 3710 3670 3650 3630 3610 3570 3550 3530 3510 3470 3450 3430 3410 3370 3350 3330 3310 3270 3250 3230 3210 3170 3150 3130 3070 3050 3030 3010 3110 10 3307 3267 3247 3227 3207 3167 3147 3127 3107 3067 3047 3027 3007 3767 3747 3727 3707 3667 3647 3627 3607 3567 3547 3527 3507 3467 3447 3427 3407 3367 3347 3327 7 3306 3266 3246 3226 3206 3166 3146 3126 3106 3066 3046 3026 3006 3766 3746 3726 3706 3666 3646 3626 3606 3566 3546 3526 3506 3466 3446 3426 3406 3366 3346 3326 6 3305 3265 3245 3225 3205 3165 3145 3125 3105 3065 3045 3025 3005 3765 3745 3725 3705 3665 3645 3625 3605 3565 3545 3525 3505 3465 3445 3425 3405 3365 3345 3325 5 3304 3264 3244 3224 3204 3164 3144 3124 3104 3064 3044 3024 3004 3764 3744 3724 3704 3664 3644 3624 3604 3564 3544 3524 3504 3464 3444 3424 3404 3364 3344 3324 4 3303 3263 3243 3223 3203 3163 3143 3123 3103 3063 3043 3023 3003 3763 3743 3723 3703 3663 3643 3623 3603 3563 3543 3523 3503 3463 3443 3423 3403 3363 3343 3323 3 3302 3262 3242 3222 3202 3162 3142 3122 3102 3062 3042 3022 3002 3762 3742 3722 3702 3662 3642 3622 3602 3562 3542 3522 3502 3462 3442 3422 3402 3362 3342 3322 2 3301 3261 3241 3221 3201 3161 3141 3121 3101 3061 3041 3021 3001 3761 3741 3721 3701 3661 3641 3621 3601 3561 3541 3521 3501 3461 3441 3421 3401 3361 3341 3321 1 3300 3260 3240 3220 3200 3160 3140 3120 3100 3060 3040 3020 3000 3760 3740 3720 3700 3660 3640 3620 3600 3560 3540 3520 3500 3460 3440 3420 3400 3360 3340 3320 0 Address V40154 V40153 V40152 V40151 V40150 V40147 V40146 V40145 V40144 V40143 V40142 V40141 V40140 V40177 V40176 V40175 V40174 V40173 V40172 V40171 V40170 V40167 V40166 V40165 V40164 V40163 V40162 V40161 V40160 V40157 V40156 V40155 GX Address V40377 V40376 V40375 V40374 V40373 V40372 V40371 V40370 V40367 V40366 V40365 V40364 V40363 V40362 V40361 V40360 V40357 V40356 V40355 V40354 V40353 V40352 V40351 V40350 V40347 V40346 V40345 V40344 V40343 V40342 V40341 V40340 GY 1 4 System Design and Configuration

In This Chapter. . . . — DL205 System Design Strategies — Module Placement — Calculating the Power Budget — Local Expansion I/O — Remote I/O Expansion — Network Connections to MODBUS RTU and DirectNet — Network Slave Operation — Network Master Operation — Network Master Operation (DL260 only) — DL260 Non–Sequence Protocol (ASCII In/Out, PRINT) — DL250–1 Non–Sequence Protocol (PRINT) System Design

and Configuration 4–2 Configurations Networking Configurations I/O System SystemDesignStrategies DL205 DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 System DesignandConfiguration The DL205PLCsoffers thefollowingwaytoaddnetworkingsystem: modules andbases.Localexpansionrequiresusing(–1) AllI/Oconfigurations usethestandardcomplementofDL205I/O configurations. A DL205systemcanbedevelopedusingmanydifferent arrangementsofthese The DL205PLCsoffer thefollowingwaystoaddI/Osystem: DCM DCM ECOM ECOM DL260 CPU DL250–1 CPU DL240 CPU Module/Unit S S S S S S S DL260 CommunicationsPort Port 2canalsobeusedforASCIIIN/OUTcommunications. need toperformoctaldecimalconversions). you toenternativeMODBUSaddressinginyourladderprogramwithno codes thantheDL250–1.(TheDL260MRXandMWXinstructionsallow MODBUS RTU master/slave connectionwithmoreMODBUSfunction connector onPort2thatprovidesabuilt–in Direct connector onPort2thatprovidesabuilt–inMODBUSRTU or DL250–1 CommunicationsPort network. RTU MODBUS a to slave a as connects and DL260 only) system to devices using the the using devices to system only) DL260 and Data CommunicationsModule modules. ECOM the using when PLC other any with communications initiate can PLC Any networks. peer–to–peer high–speed in systems CPU DL405 and only) CPUs DL260 or DL250–1 Ethernet CommunicationsModule CPU. DL260 or DL250–1 a on port bottom the to directly connect may or module, Master Remote a through base CPU local the to connected Remote I/O format. daisy–chain in base CPU and bases expansion the connect cables Expansion base. local CPU the to close located Local ExpansionI/O Local I/O NET master/slaveconnection. – consists of I/O modules located in the same base as the CPU. the as base same the in located modules I/O of consists – – consists of I/O modules located in bases which are serially are which bases in located modules I/O of consists – Master – consists of I/O modules in expansion bases expansion in modules I/O of consists – MODBUS RTU MODBUS RTU Direct Direct Direct Direct Ethernet Ethernet ASCII –TheDL260CPUhasa15–Pin Net Net Net Net – connects a DL205 (DL240, DL250–1 (DL240, DL205 a connects – –TheDL250–1CPUhasa15–Pin – connects DL205 systems (DL240, systems DL205 connects – Slave Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct NET master/slave or master/slave NET MODBUS RTU MODBUS RTU NET protocol, or protocol, NET d RTUMdb Modbus RTU e,K Net Net, Net, K–Sequence Net, K–Sequence Net, K–Sequence Ethernet Ethernet ASCII , K – – Sequence Sequence System Design and Configuration 4–3 * * n n n n n n n n n CPU Slot Only CPU Slot Only Remote I/O Base n n n n n n n n n Base CPU Slot Only Local Expansion DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. I/O Slots n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n System Design and Configuration and Design System Slot 0 Only CPU Slot Only CPU Slot Only CPU Slot Only CPU Slot Only CPU Slot Only CPU Slot Only Slot 0Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot Local CPU Base Local CPU Slot the CPU, so you always have one less I/O slot. For example, you have always have one less I/O slot. For the CPU, so you DeviceNet Profibus SDS Counter Interface Counter I/O Data Communications Ethernet Communications BASIC CoProcessor Simulator Filler Base Expansion Unit Base Controller Module Remote Master Remote Slave Unit Ethernet Base Controller WinPLC When used in H2–ERM Ethernet Remote I/O systems. * Specialty Modules Relay Output Modules Analog Input and Output Modules Local Expansion Serial Remote I/O Ethernet Remote Master CPU Interface Module/Unit CPUs DC Input Modules AC Input Modules DC Output Modules AC Output Modules The following table lists the valid locations for all types of modules in a DL205 The following table lists the valid system. The DL205 bases each provide different numbers of slots for use with the I/O for use with the of slots numbers provide different bases each The DL205 is One of the slots 3-slot, 4-slot, etc. bases refer to may notice the You modules. dedicated to slot numbered 0 – 4. The CPU a 6-slot base. The I/O slots are five I/O slots with a CPU and is not numbered. always contains Module Placement Restrictions Module Placement Module Slot Numbering System Design

and Configuration 4–4 Configuration Automatic I/O Configuration Manual I/O DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 5 4 240 240 5 4 System DesignandConfiguration 250–1 250–1 4 4 260 260 4 4 Both theHandheldProgrammerand showstheI/Onumbering conventionforanexamplesystem. diagram but theremayberestrictionsplacedonsomespecialtymodules.Thefollowing theI/Omodule.Thediscreteinputandoutputmodulescanbemixedinanyorder, for The addressesareassignedingroupsof8,or16dependingonthenumberpoints addressesuseoctalnumbering,startingatX0andY0inthe slot next to the CPU. I/O applications, youwillneverhavetochangetheconfiguration. This appliestomoduleslocatedinlocalandexpansionI/Obases.Formost powerup,andestablishthecorrectI/Oconfigurationaddresses. modules)at DL205CPUs automaticallydetectanyinstalledI/Omodules(includingspecialty The With examine theinstalledmodulesanddetermineI/Oconfigurationaddressing. Programmer allow youtoautomaticallyconfiguretheI/O.Forexample,withHandheld damage toequipment. damage cause configuration you toassignduplicateI/Oaddresses.You mustalwayscorrectanyI/O modules WARNING: will beassignedandtheuppereightaddresses will beunused. Y50are and you canonlyassignaddressesthatareamultiple of20(octal).Forexample,X30 configuration,however,Manual configuration, theaddressesareassignedon8-pointboundaries. automatic In Use example, manually modifyanautoconfigurationtomatcharbitraryI/Onumbering.For address assignmentsforanyI/Oslot(s)inlocalorexpansionbases.You can It mayneverbecomenecessary, butDL250–1andDL260CPUsallowmanualI/O Direct Manual Automatic Direct unpredictable machineoperationthatcanresultin ariskofpersonalinjuryor may change.ThisisbecausetheD two adjacentinputmodulescanhavestartingaddressesatX20andX200. SOFT32 PLCConfigureI/Omenuoptiontoassignmanualaddress. SOFT32, thePLCConfigureI/Omenuoptionwouldbeused. If youmanuallyconfigureanI/Oslot,theaddressing fortheother not validaddresses.You canstilluse8pointmodules,but16addresses AUX 46executesanautomaticconfiguration,whichallowstheCPUto errors beforeyouplacetheCPUinRUNmode.Uncorrected errorscan 8pt. Input 8pt. Input X0–X7 X0–X7 Slot 0 Slot 0 16pt. Output 16pt. Output assumes thatallmodulesareatleast16points,so Y0–Y17 Y0–Y17 Slot 1 Slot 1 Direct L250–1 andDL260CPUsdonotallow SOFT32 provideAUXfunctionsthat X100–X117 16pt. Input 16pt. Input X10–X27 Slot 2 Slot 2 8pt. Input 8pt. Input X20–X27 X30–X37 Slot 3 Slot 3 System Design and Configuration 4–5 the CPU in DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. detect the change and print a message detect the change SOFT32 screen (use AUX 44 on the HPP to SOFT32 screen System Design and Configuration and Design System Direct changes by changing all of the manually configured addresses back to addresses of the manually configured by changing all changes Verify the I/O configuration being selected will work properly with the the I/O configuration Verify You should always correct any I/O configuration errors before you place should You error code E252 will be generated. You can use AUX 42 to determine the can use AUX will be generated. You error code E252 module in a slot that previously held an input module, the CPU will not go into previously held an input module, module in a slot that Soft32 or AUX 45 to select the new configuration, or, keep the existing new configuration, or, Soft32 or AUX 45 to select the After a manual configuration, the system will automatically retain the new I/O new the retain will automatically the system manual configuration, After a manual (overwrite) any can remove addressescycle. You a power through configuration automatic. check the I/O configuration on can also be set to automatically The DL205 CPUs power-up. changes that may have this feature you can detect any By selecting occurred if someone places an was disconnected. For example, while the power output RUN check will mode and the configuration on or the Handheld Programmer enable the configuration check). enable the configuration at configuration check a change in the PLC/Setup/I/O If the system detects power-up, the change occurred. exact base and slot location where When to use the new I/O a configuration error is generated, you may actually want configuration. changed an I/O module to For example, you may have intentionally PLC/Diagnostics/I/O Diagnostics in can use use with a program change. You Direct configuration stored in memory. the CPU into RUN mode. Uncorrected errors can cause unpredictable machine the CPU into RUN mode. Uncorrected operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. WARNING: CPU placing program. Always correct any I/O configuration errors before can cause unpredictable machine operation that RUN mode. Uncorrected errors or damage to equipment. can result in a risk of personal injury WARNING: WARNING: Power–On I/O Configuration Check Removing a Removing Manual Configuration System Design

and Configuration 4–6 for EachModule I/O PointsRequired DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 System DesignandConfiguration F2–04RTD F2–4AD2DA F2–02DAS–2 F2–02DAS–1 F2–08DA–2 F2–08DA–1 F2–02DA–2(L) F2–02DA–1(L) F2–08AD–1 F2–04AD–2(L) F2–04AD–1(L) Analog Modules D2–08CDR Combination Modules D2–12TR F2–08TR F2–08TRS D2–08TR D2–04TRS Relay OutputModules D2–12TA F2–08TA D2–08TA AC OutputModules D2–32TD1(–2) D2–16TD2–2 D2–16TD1–2 D2–08TD1 D2–04TD1 DC OutputModules D2–16NA D2–08NA–2 D2–08NA–1 AC InputModules D2–32ND3(–2) D2–16ND3–2 D2–08ND3 DC InputModules F2–04THM specialty modules,suchasanalog,counterinterface,etc.. typeofmodulerequiresacertainnumberI/Opoints.Thisisalsotrue forthe Each Note 1: –12pt.modulesconsume16points.Thefirst6pointsareassigned, twoareskipped,andthenthenext6 Y16–Y17 wouldbeunused. points are assigned.Forexample,aD2–12TA installedinslot0woulduse Y0–Y5,andY10–Y15.Y6–Y7, and 32 Input 32 Input 16 Input&Output 32 Output 32 Output 16 Output 16 Output 16 Output 16 Output 16 Input 16 Input 16 Input points areusedforeachtype) 8 In,Out(Onlythefirstfour 16 Output(Seenote1) 8 Output 8 Output 8 Output points areused) 8 Output(Onlythefirstfour 16 Output(Seenote1) 8 Output 8 Output 32 Output 16 Output 16 Output 8 Output points areused) 8 Output(Onlythefirstfour 16 Input 8 Input 8 Input 32 Input 16 Input 8 Input Number ofI/OPts.

Required D2–08SIM F2–SDS–1 H2–PBC F2–DEVNETS–1 D2–CTRINT H2–CTRIO F2–CP128 D2–RSSS D2–RMSM H2–EBC(–F) H2–ERM(–F) D2–DCM H2–ECOM(–F) Specialty Modules,etc. D2–CM D2–EM 8 Input None None None 8 Output 8 Input None None None None None None None None Number ofI/OPts.Required None None System Design and Configuration 4–7 Auxiliary 24VDC Current Supplied for the two voltages 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA None None None None 300 mA 300 mA available DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. System Design and Configuration and Design System 24V Power Source mentioned in the table is a 24V Power Source mentioned in 5V Current Supplied 2600 mA 2600 mA 2600 mA 2600 mA 2600 mA 2600 mA 2600 mA 2600 mA 2600 mA 2600 mA important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget. If you important to calculate extremely It is Bases power available with each base. The following chart will help you calculate each base. The following chart power available with from the power supply. We have provided a chart to help you easily see the have provided a chart to help We from the power supply. for you system. The Auxiliary D2–09BDC2–1 D2–03B–1 D2–04B–1 D2–06B–1 D2–09B–1 D2–03BDC1–1 D2–04BDC1–1 D2–06BDC1–1 D2–09BDC1–1 D2–06BDC2–1 thewhich may budget, the system may operate in an unpredictable manner power or equipment damage. result in a risk of personal injury Use shown on the next page to calculate the power budget the power requirements for the external 24VDC your system. If an External 24VDC power supply is required, budget is not from the base power supply may be used as long as the power exceeded. supplied from the DL205 base. Use these currents when calculating the power supplied from the DL205 base. budget strip allowing you to connect to devices or DL205 connection at the base terminal modules that require 24VDC. WARNING: WARNING: amount of current The following chart shows the When using in the you will be of I/O modules the types and quantity you determine is a limited amount of power is important to remember there DL205 system it available amount of the At the end of this section you you need with your I/O selections. amount of power and a worksheet for your own example of power budgeting will also find an calculations. If available from the power supply, exceeds the maximum power the I/O you choose I/O bases. use local expansion bases or remote you may need to Managing your Power Resource Module Power Requirements CPU Power Specifications CalculatingBudget Power the System Design

and Configuration 4–8 DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 System DesignandConfiguration F2–02DAS–2 F2–02DAS–1 F2–08DA–2 F2–08DA–1 F2–02DA–2(L) F2–02DA–1(L) F2–08AD–2 F2–08AD–1 F2–04AD–2(L) F2–04AD–1(L) Analog Modules D2–12TR F2–08TR F2–08TRS D2–08TR D2–04TRS Relay OutputModules D2–12TA F2–08TA D2–08TA AC OutputModules D2–32TD1(–2) D2–16TD2–2 D2–16TD1–2 D2–08TD1(–2) D2–04TD1 DC OutputModules D2–16NA D2–08NA–2 D2–08NA–1 AC InputModules D2–32ND3(–2) D2–16ND3–2 D2–08ND3 DC InputModules D2–260 D2–250–1 D2–240 D2–230 CPUs F2–04THM F2–04RTD F2–4AD2DA Required 5VDC BasePower 100 90 60 100 100 60 30 40 40 60 50 60 50 450 670 670 250 250 350 250 250 350 200 200 100 60 100 100 50 25 100 50 330 330 120 120 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Required External Power 18–26.4 VDC@60mAmax 0 18–26.4VDC @80mA;add20mA /loop 21.6–26.4 VDC@60mAperchannel 18–30VDC @50mAperchannel 18–30 VDC@80mAmax 18–30VDC @50mAperchannel 18–30 VDC@60mAmax;(–L)10–15VDC70mA 18–30VDC @60mA; 18–26.4 VDC@80mAmax 18–26.4 VDC@80mAmax 18–26.4 VDC@80mAmax;(–L)10–15VDC90mA 18–30 VDC@80mAmax;(–L)10–15VDC90mA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80 (L) 10–15VDC@70mA(add20mA/loop) D2–08SIM D2–CTRINT D2–RSSS D2–RMSM D2–DCM H2–CTRIO H2–EBC–F H2–EBC H2–ERM–F H2–ERM H2–ECOM–F H2–ECOM H2–PBC Specialty Modules,etc. D2–08CDR Modules Combination F2–SDS–1 F2–DEVNETS–1 F2–CP128 D2–EM D2–CM (add20mA/loop) 50 50 150 200 300 400 450 320 450 320 450 320 530 200 Required 5VDC BasePower 160 160 235 130 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Required External Power 0 0 0 0 0 System Design and Configuration 4–9 300 140 160 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 80 + 60 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 from the row labeled

300 – 140 = Auxiliary Power Source (mA) 24 VDC Output ” 1520 2600 + 200 + 250 + 100 + 250 + 330 + 100 + 100 + 100 + 50 + 40 Handheld or the DV–1000 are not power requirements, such as the DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. . ” ”. 2600–1520=1080 System Design and Configuration and Design System 5 VDC (mA) external is greater than the power available from the Total power required Total ”. Place the difference in the row labeled ”. Place the difference important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed D2–16NA D2–16NA F2–04AD–1 F2–02DA–1 D2–08TA D2–08TD1 D2–08TR D2–HPP Module Type Module D2–09B–1 D2–260 D2–16ND3–2 Total power required Total components. First, enter the amount of power supplied by the base. components. First, enter the amount extremely It is “Total Power Required” “Total Available Base Power Available “ “Remaining Power Available base, the power budget will be exceeded. It will be unsafe to use this base, the power budget will be exceeded. It will be unsafe to configuration and you will need to restructure your I/O configuration. system CPU, any I/O modules, and any other Next, list the requirements for the Programmer or the DV–1000 operator devices, such as the Handheld even though the interface. Remember, Also, installed in the base, they still obtain their power from the system. make sure you obtain any 24VDC power required by the analog modules. labeled “ 1. budget table to fill in the power requirements for all the Use the power 2. 0 and put the total in the row Add the current columns starting with Slot 3.“ Subtract the row labeled 4. If Total Power Required Total Remaining Power Available Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Other Handheld Prog Base # 0 Available Base Power CPU Slot Slot 0 the power budget, the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or equipment damage. The following example shows how to calculate the power budget for the DL205 budget for the the power how to calculate example shows The following system. WARNING: WARNING: Power Budget Calculation Example System Design 4–10 and Configuration Worksheet Calculation Power Budget DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 System DesignandConfiguration calculations. This blankchartisprovidedforyoutocopyanduseinyourpowerbudget WARNING: result inariskofpersonal injuryorequipmentdamage. powerbudget,thesystemmayoperate inanunpredictablemannerwhichmay the Remaining PowerAvailable Total PowerRequired Other Slot 7 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 CPU Slot Base Power Available 0 Base # .If 4. Subtracttherow labeled “ 3. AddthecurrentcolumnsstartingwithSlot0andputtotalinrow 2. Usethepowerbudgettabletofill inthepowerrequirementsforall 1. labeled “ requirements, interface.Also,makesureyouobtainanyexternalpower operator other devices,suchastheHandheldProgrammerorDV–1000 system components.ThisincludestheCPU,anyI/Omodules,and configuration andyouwillneed torestructureyourI/Oconfiguration. configuration base, thepowerbudgetwillbeexceeded.It beunsafetousethis PowerAvailable“Remaining “ Available BasePower “Total PowerRequired” It is extremely Total powerrequired Module Type such asthe24VDCpowerrequiredbyanalogmodules. importanttocalculatethe powerbudget.Ifyouexceed ”. Placethedifference intherowlabeled Total powerrequired isgreaterthanthepoweravailablefrom 5 VDC(mA) ”. ” . ” 24 VDCOutput(mA) Power Source Auxiliary

from therowlabeled System Design and Configuration 4–11 DL230 s m e t tems DL240 DL250 These CPUs do not sup- portport local expansion sys- local expansion sys 3 2 512 768 512 DL250–1 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 30m (98ft.) 5 4 1024 1280 1024 DL260 System Design and Configuration and Design System D2–CM has established communication with PLC D2–CM has not established communication with PLC Hardware watch–dog failure I/O module failure (ON 500ms / OFF 500ms) No D2–CM error Meaning Power good Power failure ON OFF ON ON/OFF OFF Status ON OFF SOFT32 PLC Configure I/O menu option to view the local expansion I/O menu option to view SOFT32 PLC Configure which the D2–EM expansion module attaches. All local and local expansion expansion module attaches. All which the D2–EM Direct D2–CM Indicators PWR (Green)(Green) RUN (Green)(Green) DIAG (Red)(Red) The D2–CM module is placed in the CPU slot of each expansion base. The rotary switch is used to select the The expansion base number. expansion base I/O addressing (Xs and Ys) is based on the numerical order selection of the rotary switch and by the CPU is recognized Duplicate on power–up. expansion base numbers will not be recognized by the CPU. The which status indicator LEDs on the D2–CM front panels have specific functions can help in programming and troubleshooting. Use local expansion when you need more I/O points, a greater power budget than power budget I/O points, a greater you need more expansion when Use local the the location away from I/O base at a when placing an base provides or local CPU CPUEach local expansion base requires the expansion cable limits. base, but within The local CPU base requires the module in the CPU slot. the D2–CM controller D2–EMin the system expansion base. All bases expansion module, as well as each must the a connector on the right side of (–1) bases. These bases have be the new base to on every CPU scan. I/O points are updated Use manual allows also This menu I/O addressing configuration. system automatic addresses to be assigned if necessary. 4 260 Maximum number of expansion bases I/O (includes CPU base and expansion bases) Total Maximum inputs Maximum outputs length Maximum expansion system cable Total number of local / expansion bases per system Total 4 250–1 5 240 5 230 D2–CM Local Expansion Module Local Expansion I/O Expansion Local System Design 4–12 and Configuration Cable Local Expansion D2–EXCBL–1 Expansion Module D2–EM Local DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 System DesignandConfiguration Do notuseEthernethubs already that youpurchaseacommerciallymanufacturedcablewithRJ45connectors expansion modulestogether. Iflongercablelengths arerequired,werecommend category5straight–throughD2–EXCBL–1(1m) The in orderfortheACTIVEindicatortofunctionnormally. WARNING: can helpinprogrammingandtroubleshooting. statusindicatorLEDsontheD2–EMfrontpanelshavespecificfunctionswhich The another. RJ45ports(labelledAandB)canbeusedtoconnectoneexpansionbase the D2–EXCBL–1 expansion system.Thebasesareconnectedinadaisy–chainfashionusingthe in theOFFposition.TheCPUbasecanbelocatedatanyposition expansion system system expansion The D2–EMexpansionunitisattachedtotherightsideofeachbasein (Green) ACTIVE D2–EM Indicator 8-pin RJ45Connector use thewiresconnected topins3and6asshownabove. cables willworkinplace oftheD2–EXCBL–1.TheD2–EMmodulesonly Note: 18 2 attached. Themaximumtotal should havetheTERM(termination)switchplacedinONposition.The must bethenew(–1)bases).TheD2–EMsoneachendofexpansion (8P8C) 456 34 Commercially available Patch (Straight–through)Category5,UTP units betweentheendmostbasesshouldhaveTERMswitchplaced system,

Connect ordisconnecttheexpansioncableswithpowerOFF (category 5straight–throughcablewithRJ45connectors).Eitherof 7 including thelocalCPUbase.(Allbasesinexpansion OFF ON Status to connectthelocalexpansionnetworktogether. J5RJ45 RJ45 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GRN GRN/WHT expansion systemcablelengthis30m(98ft.). D2–EM isnotcommunicatingwithother D2–EM iscommunicatingwithother Meaning D2–EXCBL–1 Cable is usedtoconnecttheD2–EM GRN/WHT GRN 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 System Design and Configuration 4–13 Do not use Note: Ethernet hubs to connect the local expansion system together. Use D2–EXCBL–1 (1m) (Category 5 straight– through cable) to con- nect the D2–EMs to- gether. 30m (98ft.) max. cable length DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. D2–EM Termination D2–EM Switch Settings System Design and Configuration and Design System up to five total bases ( one CPU base + four total bases ( one up to five No specialty in the modules can be located local expansion local expansion (refer to the Module Placement Table earlier in this chapter for earlier in Placement Table (refer to the Module I/O addressing #1 I/O addressing #2 I/O addressing #3 I/O addressing #5 I/O addressing #4 The CPU base can be located at any base position in the expansion system. bases. All discrete and analog modules are supported in the expansion Specialty modules are not supported in the expansion bases. however, The D2–CMs do not have to be in successive numerical order, order. the numerical rotary selection determines the X and Y addressing Do The CPU will recognize the local and expansion I/O on power–up. not duplicate numerial selections. be in The TERM (termination) switch on the two endmost D2–EMs must OFF the ON position. The other D2–EMs in between should be in the position. Use the D2–EXCBL–1 or equivalent cable to connect the D2–EMs of the RJ45 ports (labelled A and B) on the D2–EM can Either together. be used to connect one base to another. S S S S S expansion bases restrictions). The D2–260 supports example I/O points. An of 1280 total up to a maximum bases) and local expansion points are expansion I/O All local and is shown below. system local expansion CPU scan. updated on every D2–260 CPU D2–CM Expansion Base Number Selection DL260 Local System Expansion System Design 4–14 and Configuration Expansion System DL250–1 Local DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Base NumberSelection D2–CM Expansion System DesignandConfiguration CPU D2–250–1 restrictions). bases expansion updated oneveryCPUscan. local expansionsystemisshownbelow. AlllocalandexpansionI/Opointsare localexpansionbases) anduptoamaximumof768totalI/Opoints.Anexample two D2–250–1supportslocalexpansionuptothreetotalbases(oneCPUbase+ The the CPU.(Seechapter3InitializationProcesstimingspecifications) base. bases, NOTE: S S S S S Expansion basesthatpowerupaftertheCPUbasewillnotberecognizedby WhenapplyingpowertotheCPU(DL250–1/260)andlocalexpansion make suretheexpansionbasespowerupatsametimeorbeforeCPU be usedtoconnectone base toanother. together. Either oftheRJ45ports(labelledAandB)onD2–EM can Use theD2–EXCBL–1orequivalentcabletoconnect theD2–EMs position. the ONposition.TheotherD2–EMsinbetween should beintheOFF The TERM(termination)switchonthetwoendmost D2–EMsmustbein not duplicatenumerialselections. The CPUwillrecognizethelocalandexpansion I/Oonpower–up.Do the numericalrotaryselectiondeterminesX and Yaddressingorder. The D2–CMsdonothavetobeinsuccessivenumerical order, however, Specialty modulesarenotsupportedintheexpansion bases. All discreteandanalogmodulesaresupportedintheexpansionbases. system. The CPUbasecanbelocatedatanypositionintheexpansion I/O addressing#2 I/O addressing#1 I/O addressing#3 (refer totheModulePlacementTable earlierinthischapterfor Nospecialtymodulescanbelocatedinthe Switch Settings D2–EM Termination 30m (98ft.)max.cablelength gether. nect theD2–EMsto- through cable)tocon- (Category 5straight– Use D2–EXCBL–1(1m) together. expansion system connect thelocal Ethernet hubsto Note: Do notuse System Design and Configuration 4–15 7 7 15 15 Slot 7 6 6 14 14 Slot 6 You must consider You 5 5 13 13 Slot 5 4 4 12 12 Slot 4 3 3 11 11 Slot 3 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 2 2 10 10 Slot 2 of the process to continue until the operator of the process to continue until the System Design and Configuration and Design System devices in one or all expansion bases at the devices in one or depend on your application. depend on your application. 1 9 1 9 Slot 1 0 8 0 8 Slot 0 D2–CM Expansion Base Hold Output Bit Bit are reserved for the expansion base Output Hold option. The bit are reserved for the expansion base mode when an expansion base communications failure occurs. If failure occurs. base communications an expansion mode when shut down all at once. In a way, it is the equivalent of an “E–STOP”. it is the On In a way, shut down all at once. Register Bit = 0Bit = 1 (Default) Output Off Output Hold V–memory it will turn off in response to an error. The setting does not have to be the The setting does not have to be in response to an error. it will turn off V7742 V7741 Theexpansion determine the and V7742 registers V7741 in V–memory bit settings RUN the CPU will exit failure. The to a communications response bases’ outputs mode STOP to the the module will hold their last the outputs on the corresponding Output Hold bit is ON, (default), the outputs on the error occurs. If OFF state when a communication module un modules on an expansion base. same for all the The of the output mode will selection the all the consequences of turning off same time vs. letting the system run “steady state” while unresponsive to input the system run “steady state” same time vs. letting no harm if the typically suffer a conveyor system would changes. For example, system were the the such as waste water treatment, holding hand, for a continuous process other state last state would allow the current can intervene manually. V7741 and V7742 definitions are as follows: WARNING: Selecting “HOLD LAST STATE” means that outputs on the “HOLD LAST STATE” Selecting WARNING: expansion in the event of a bases will not be under program control communications failure. Consider the consequences to process operation carefully before selecting this mode. Exp. Base 2 Exp. Base 3 Exp. Base 4 Expansion Base No. Exp. Base 1 Expansion Base Expansion Hold Option Output System Design 4–16 and Configuration Direct Check using Configuration I/O Enabling DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 SOFT32 System DesignandConfiguration Config Check. To displaytheI/OConfigCheckwindow, use Checkcanalsobe used withmanualaddressing. Configuration This willpreventanyautomaticaddressingre–assignmentsbytheCPU.TheI/O addressingcanbeusedtomanua Manual check. Configuration RUN mode.Thisisnotdesirable,andcanbepreventedbyenablingtheI/O assi would I/O Configurationcheckisdisabledandautomaticaddressingused,theCPU the I/OConfigurationCheckwillprevent the expansion theI/Oconfiguration,CPUwillnotenterRUNmode.Forexample,iflocal in expansionI/Oconfigurationbeforeenteringthe and Enabling the I/OConfigCheckwillforceCPU,atpowerup,toexaminelocal gn addressesfromexpansionbase#1to#2andpossiblyenterthe base #1doesnotpowerupwiththeCPUandotherexpansionbases, the CPUfromentering lly assignaddressestotheI/Omodules. Direct SOFT32>PLC menu>Setup>I/O RUN mode.Ifthereisachange Save toDisk Select “Yes”, then the RUN mode.Ifthe the System Design and Configuration 4–17 8 1 7 31 2048 DL260 1 7 8 31 2048 DL250–1 limited by total references available 7 2 31 none 2048 DL240 – 3050 ft. (1000m) Total distance – 3050 ft. (1000m) Total Or DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. none none none none none none DL230 – 31 Bases per channel (SM–Net) – 7 Bases per channel (RM–Net) System Design and Configuration and Design System : The CPU’s comm port 2 features a built-in comm port : The CPU’s that has a sufficient number of sensors and other number a sufficient that has Remote I/O Remote R M ong distance away (up to 1000 meters, or 3050 feet) ong distance away : Remote I/O requires a remote master module : Remote I/O requires CPU Base Remote I/O channel. You may also use up to 7 D2–RMSM remote may also use up to 7 D2–RMSM You Remote I/O channel. can use either or base as described above (you masters in the local both methods). DL240 CPUs CPU updates the installed in the local base. The (D2–RMSM) to be to remote master handles all communication then the remote master, to the remote slave I/O base by communicating and from the remote installed in each remote base. module (D2–RSSS) CPU DL250–1 and D2–260 S S 250–1 and DL260 CPU Only RM–Net from I/O are: The methods of adding remote more central location of the CPU. the locations, therefore it does not CPU memory Remote I/O points map into different Refer to the DL205 Remote I/O manual for reduce the number of local I/O points. and numbering. Configuring the built-in remote details on remote I/O configuration section. I/O channel is described in the following with seven The following figure shows 1 CPU base, and one remote I/O channel remote adding the first remote I/O channel bases. If the CPU is a DL250–1 or DL260, built-in remote does not require installing a remote master module (use the CPU’s I/O channel). field devices located a relative l relative a located field devices Remote useful for a system I/O is Maximum number of remote I/O bases per channel Maximum number of remote I/O bases (SM–NET) Maximum number of Remote Masters supported in Maximum number of Remote Masters Remote Master) the local CPU base (1 channel per CPU built-in Remote I/O channels channel Maximum I/O points supported by each Maximum Remote I/O points supported per channel Maximum number of remote I/O bases (RM–NET) 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 5 230 How to Add How to Remote I/O Channels Remote I/O Expansion System Design 4–18 and Configuration DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 I/O Channel CPU’s Remote Configuring the 230 5 240 5 System DesignandConfiguration 250–1 4 260 4 choices asindicatedbelowonthispage.To configuretheportin Programmer,Handheld useAUX56andfollowtheprompts,makingsame DL260’s Port2iscapableofseveralprotocols.To configuretheportusing You mayrecallfromtheCPUspecificationsinChapter3thatDL250–1and channel). use RemoteMastermodulesinthelocalCPUbase(2048I/Opointsoneach points withuptosevenremotebasescontainingamaximumof2048I/O communicate as aRM–NetRemoteMastermodule,theD2–RMSM.Specifically, itcan DL250–1andDL260CPU’s built-inremoteI/Ochannelhasthesamecapability The Remote SlavesforremoteI/OinanyDL205system. theD2–REMIO–MmanualexclusivelywhenusingregularRemoteMastersand use which youwillneedinconfiguringtheRemoteslaveunitsonnetwork.You can I/O channel.AdditionalinformationisintheRemotemanual,D2–REMIO–M, This sectiondescribeshowtoconfiguretheDL250–1andDL260’s built-inremote choose thePLCmenu,thenSetup,SetupSecondaryCommPort... S S S S S per channel,atamaximumdistanceof1000meters.Ifrequired,youcanstill “M–NET” ontheHPP),andthenyou’llseedialogboxshownbelow. Protocol: to matchthebaudrateselection fortheCPU’s Port2. must configurethebaud rateontheRemoteSlaves(viaDIPswitches) you experiencedataerrorsornoiseproblemson thelink.Important:You 38400 initiallyastheremoteI/Obaudrate,andrevert to19200baudif Baud Rate: remote slaves. DL250–1 orDL260themaster. Stationnumbers1–7arereservedfor Station Number: Master(s) inthesystem. table isseparateandindependentfromthe foranyRemote location ofaRemoteI/Oconfigurationtable(V37700 isthedefault).This Memory Address: Port: Fromtheportnumberlistboxattop,choose“Port2”. to theCPU,andclickClose. Then click the button indi Clickthecheckboxtoleftof“RemoteI/O”(called Thebaudrates19200and38400areavailable. Choose Choose“0”asthestationnumber, whichmakesthe ChooseaV-memory addresstouseasthestarting cated tosendthePort2 configuration Direct SOFT32, System Design and Configuration 4–19 Internal 150 ohm resistor Internal 150 ohm resistor connector termination Port 2 to the T 1 2 3 T 1 2 3 (end of chain) Remote I/O Slave connection. A Jumper as close as possible Add series external resistor DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. a 3-wire, half-duplex type. Since Port 2 of a 3-wire, half-duplex the signal ground System Design and Configuration and Design System T 1 2 3 at the last slave to connect the required internal termination the termination resistor TXD+ / RXD+ TXD– / RXD– Signal GND ermination resistors at Cable: Use Belden 9841 or equivalent The resistance values should connect the cable shield wire to Connect shield to signal ground . For cable impedances greater 150 ohms, add a series resistor at the Termination Resistor Pin 7Pin 9Pin 10Pin 13 Signal GND Pin 6 TXD+ TXD– RXD+ RXD– DL250–1 / DL260 CPU Port 2 Remote I/O Master Remote I/O Slave The link. the Remote I/O all devices on between to make the connections next step is The 2 on the DL250–1 of the Port location connector , as is on the 15-pin and DL260 pictured to the right. at Port 2 to match the cables rated impedance. be between 100 and 500 ohms. Ideally, the two t two the Ideally, the the cables opposite ends and rated will all three impedance cable’s match than last slave as shown to the right. If less than 150 ohms, parallel a matching resistance pins 1 and 2 instead. across the slave’s Remember to size The twisted/shielded pair connects to the DL250–1 or DL260 Port 2 as shown. Be The twisted/shielded pair connects sure to resistor must be added externally to the CPU, the full duplex–capable port, we must jumper DL250–1 and DL260 CPU is a 5-wire as shown below (converts it to 3-wire, its transmit and receive lines together half-duplex). S S S S S Now remote slaves on the DL250–1 or DL260 to the we are ready to discuss wiring the link is remote base(s). The remote I/O pins. Its purpose is to minimize electrical reflections that occur over long cables. Be pins. Its purpose is to minimize electrical reflections that occur over add the jumper sureto resistor. RXD+ RXD– 7 0V TXD+ TXD– System Design 4–20 and Configuration Remote I/OTable Configuring the I/O Slaves Remote Configure DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 System DesignandConfiguration example foroneslave. followingpagegivesashortprogram The input oroutputpoints. constant to l place inthetable.UseregularLD shown totheright,loadanaddress UsetheLDAinstructionas powerup. thistable (onlyonce)at configure A portionoftheladderprogrammust words ofdataand16“0000”. table containing4reservedwords,12 system willhavearemoteconfiguration filled withzeros.Forexample,a3–slave then theremainderoftablemustbe fewerthansevenremoteslavebases, has tableis32wordslong.Ifyoursystem The Numberofslave’s outputpoints 4. Startingaddressofoutputsinslave 3. Numberofslave’s inputpoints 2. Startingaddressofslave’s inputdata 1. in eachblockwiththesemeanings: interpretingthefourdatawords powerup, The CPUreadsdatafromthetableafter four tablelocationsarereserved. system, asshowntotheright.Thefirst which correspondtoeachslavein the tableconsistsofblocksfourwords The setup. addressweselectedinthePort2 memory for thebuilt-inremoteI/Ochannelis The beginningoftheconfigurationtable slaves. FullinstructionsforthesestepsareintheRemoteI/Omanual. usethefollowingchecklisttocompleteconfigurationofremote slave(s), After configuringtheDL250–1orDL260CPU’s Port2andwiringittotheremote S S master (address0)ontheremotelink. remote link Select astationaddressforeachslave,from1to7.Eachdeviceonthe Set thebaudratetomatchCPU’s Port2setting. oad thenumberofslave’s must haveauniquestationaddress.Therecanbeonlyone Memory Addr. Pointer Direct Reserved Slave 1 Slave 7 SP0 SOFT32 V37707 V37706 V37705 V37704 V37700 V37703 V37702 V37701 V37737 V37736 V37735 V37734 Remote I/Odata V37705 OUT K16 LD V37704 OUT O40000 LDA 37700 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 System Design and Configuration 4–21 16 16 8 8 40502 _____ 40403 ______Slave 1 Output Slave 1 Input ______Y040 Y050 LD K16 OUT V37707 LDA O40403 OUT V37704 LD K16 OUT V37705 LDA O40502 OUT V37706 Total Input Points Total Total Output Points Output Total V-Memory Address:V V-Memory V-Memory Address:V V-Memory 8 8 Y040 SOFT32 X060 No. Inputs No.Outputs (Choose 1–7) ______SP0 1 Direct INPUT OUTPUT X070 X060 ______DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Remote Slave Worksheet System Design and Configuration and Design System Module Name Addr. Input Output Addr. 08ND3S 08ND3S 08TD1 08TD1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remote Base Address Slot Input Bit Start Address: Input Output Bit Start Address: Number O O 8 16 O O 8 16 V40502 the address values by using the station address=1. The baud rates on the master and slave will be 38.4KB. master and slave rates on the The baud station address=1. I I 8 16 V40403 V40502 X70-X77 Y40-Y47 Y50-Y57 I I 8 16 Consider the simple system featuring Remote I/O shown below. The DL250–1 or The DL250–1 below. I/O shown featuring Remote the simple system Consider which we will to one slave base, connects Remote I/O channel built-in DL260’s assign a the simply by choosing type of I/O point, I/O points as any map the remote can We addresses we have plenty of standard I/O Since appropriateV-memory. range of Y points start at the next X and Y), we will have the remote I/O available (X and addresses base points (X60 and Y40, respectively). after the main Using the Remote Slave Worksheet our shown above can help organize our system data in preparation for writing ladder program (a blank full-page copy of this Remote I/O worksheet is in the Manual). The four key parameters we I/O need to place in our Remote configuration table are in the lower right can corner You of the worksheet. determine memory map given at the end of Chapter 3, CPU Specifications and Operation. The required to transfer program segment our worksheet results to the Remote I/O configuration table is shown to the right. Rememberto use the LDA or LD instructions appropriately. The next page covers the remainder of the required to get this remote I/O program link up and running. V40403 X60-X67 Remote Slave I 16 D2 RSSS Slave X0-X17 X20-X37 X40-X57 Y0-Y17 Y20-Y37 V40400 V40401 V40402 V40500 V40501 Port 2 Main CPU as Master Base with DL260 CPU Remote I/O Setup Program System Design 4–22 and Configuration Test Program Remote I/O DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 System DesignandConfiguration our examplesystem. slave numbers2–7,whichdonotexist in The exampletotherightfillszerosfor fills theremainderoftablewithzeros. previous We continueoursetupprogramfromthe information. anynon-zeronumberas interpret slave because theCPUwill tryto necessary ofthetablewithzeros.This is remainder for fewerthan7slaves,wemustfillthe When configuringaRemoteI/Ochannel should turnon. activate itsfirstinput.Thenoutput mode, wecangototheremotebaseand output. AfterplacingthePLCinRUN input oftheremotebasewithfirst shown totheright.Itconnectsfirst check operation. Asimplequick program setup wecan verifytheremoteI/Olinkand Now program. BesuretoincludethiscontactafteranyRemoteI/O setup communications. specifying aremoteI/Osystem.AtthatmomenttheCPUbegins This particularcontactindicatestotheCPUladderprogramhasfinished thelastrunginexampleprogram On can bedonewithonerungofladder, page byaddingasegmentwhich above, wesetaspecialrelaycontactC740. Direct Direct X60 SOFT32 SOFT32 V37736 OUTD V37710 OUTD K0 LD C740 OUT SET Y40 System Design and Configuration 4–23 PORT 2 RS–422 Slave Termination Resistor on last slave only (DL250–1, DL260) multi–drop net- The DL260 supports Net networking ports for either networking Note: RS–485 working. See the Network Master Operation (DL260 0nly) section later in this chapter for details. 15 CTS– 70V 12 RTS– 14 CTS+ 9 TXD+ 10 TXD– 13 RXD+ 6 RXD– 11 RTS+ The recommended cable for RS422 is Belden 9729 or equivalent. Direct the appropriate data. For details on the appropriate data. DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 12 0V3 5V4 RXD Power (–) connection (GND) 5 TXD Power (+) conection Receive Data (RS232C) 6 RTS Data (RS232C Transmit 0V Request to Send Power (–) connection (GND) Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL240 only) and NET manual, part number DA–DNET–M. NET manual, part System Design and Configuration and Design System R Direct RS–232 Master RXD TXD ). Use termination resistors at both ends of RS–422 network ). Use termination resistors at both NET. This will allow you to connect the DL205 PLC system This will allow you to connect NET. NET, order our NET, Direct 0V Signal GND RXD TXD Direct 1 3 4 the MODBUS commands to read or write the MODBUS commands NET network. MODBUS hosts system on the network must be capable of hosts system on the network NET network. MODBUS section describes how to configure the CPU’s built-in configure the CPU’s how to section describes 12 5V3 TXD24 RXD2 Data (RS232C) Transmit VDC 5 5 RTS2 Data (RS232C) Receive 6 CTS2 Ready to Send (RS–232C) RXD2–7 Clear to Send (RS–232C) – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260) Receive Data 8 0V9 0V TXD2+ Ground Logic DL260) Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 Transmit Ground Logic 12 0V3 5V4 RXD Power (–) connection (GND) 5 TXD Power (+) conection Receive Data (RS232C) 6 Data (RS232C 5V Transmit 0V Power (+) conection Power (–) connection (GND) 11 + RTS2 Request to Send + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260) 10 TXD2 – Data – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260) Transmit 12 – RTS2 13 to Send – (RS–422)(RS–485 DL260) Request RXD2 +14 Receive Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260) CTS2 +15 Clear to Send + (RS422) (RS–485 DL260) CTS2 – Clear to Send – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260) Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL250–1 / DL260) Port 1 Pinouts (DL250–1 / DL260) RXD+ RXD– TXD+ TXD– GND Signal This issuing MODBUS or or to other devices on a protocol, networks using the RTU directly to MODBUS Direct MODBUS Protocol reference please refer to the Gould the MODBUS protocol, is available, the event a more recent version J). In Rev. Guide (P1–MBUS–300 the documentation. For more MODBUS supplier before ordering check with your details on You will need to determine whether the network connection is a 3-wire RS–232 type, whether the network connection will need to determine You for shorter the RS–232 signals are used type. Normally, or a 5-wire RS–422 between two devices. RS–422 max), for communications distances (15 meters (1000 meters max.), and for multi-drop networks signals are for longer distances (fromto 247 devices 2 rating of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms). wiring, matching the impedance PORT 1: DL250–1, DL260 (slave only) PORT 2: DL240 (slave only) PC/PLC Master PC/PLC 11 15 4 4 260 260 6 10 4 4 250–1 250–1 5 1 4 5 RS–422 Network 240 240 RS–232C 6-pin Female Multi–drop D Connector DTE Device 15-pin Female Point-to-point Modular Connector 5 5 230 230 For MODBUS RTU Configuring Port 2 For DirectNet Network to MODBUS Connections System Design 4–24 and Configuration DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Configuration MODBUS Port 230 5 240 5 System DesignandConfiguration 250–1 4 260 4 In S S S S S S S Direct S RTS OnDelayTime: response beforelogginganerror. Timeout: Station Number: after sendingthedata. RTS OffDelayTime: sending thedata. S Parity: Stop Bits: details. network tothesamevalue.Referappropriate productmanualfor network. Important:You mustconfigurethebaudratesofalldeviceson to lowerbaudratesifyouexperiencedataerrors ornoiseproblemsonthe 9600, 19200,and38400baud.Chooseahigher baudrateinitially, reverting Baud Rate: logic usestheportagain. port asamaster.Thereafter, theportrevertsbacktoslavemode untilladder DL250–1 orDL260executesladderlogicnetwork instructionswhichusethe number. Atpowerup,theportisautomaticallyaslave,unlessanduntil mode willaccessonlyslaves1to90.Eachslavemusthaveaunique the DL250–1andDL260WXRXnetworkinstructionsusedinMaster “1”. ThepossiblerangeforMODBUSslavenumbersisfrom1to247,but SOFT32, choosethePLCmenu,thenSetup,“SecondaryCommPort”. the HPP, andselect“MBUS”), andthenyou’llseethedialogboxbelow. Protocol: Port: Choosenone,even,or odd parityforerrorchecking. Fromtheportnumberlistboxattop,choose“Port2”. amountoftimetheportwillwaitafteritsendsamessagetoget Choose1or2stopbits foruseintheprotocol. Theavailablebaudratesinclude300,600,900, 2400,4800, the CPU,andclickClose. Then Clickthecheckboxtoleftof“MODBUS”(useAUX56on FormakingtheCPUportaMODBUS click thebuttonindicated tosendthePortconfiguration TheamountoftimebetweenraisingtheRTS lineand TheamountoftimebetweenresettingtheRTS line R master, choose feature Suppression port theEcho does notsup- The DL250–1 System Design and Configuration 4–25 NET master, choose NET master, Direct DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. NET slaves is from 1 to 90 (each slave System Design and Configuration and Design System DIrect The amount of time between resetting the RTS line the RTS The amount of time between resetting The amount of time between raising the RTS line and the RTS The amount of time between raising For making the CPU port a click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to Click the check box to the left of “DirectNET” (use AUX 56 on (use AUX left of “DirectNET” check box to the Click the The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol. amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a amount of time the port will wait From the port number list box, choose “Port 2 ”. box, choose “Port port number list From the Choose hex or ASCII formats. Then the CPU, and click Close. Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking. Port: Protocol: below. the dialog box then you’ll see “DNET”), and then select the HPP, SOFT32, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then “Secondary Comm Port”. then “Secondary menu, then Setup, choose the PLC SOFT32, S Timeout: response before logging an error. RTS On Delay Time: sending the data. RTS Off Delay Time: after sending the data. Station Number: S “1”. The allowable range for a slave, must have a unique number). At powerup, the port is automatically unless and until the DL250–1 or DL260 executes ladder logic instructions the port reverts back Thereafter, which attempt to use the port as a master. to slave mode until ladder logic uses the port again. Baud Rate: reverting 9600, 19200, and 38400 baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, on the to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise problems must configure the baud rates of all devices on the network. Important: You network to the same value. Stop Bits: Parity: Format: Direct S S S S S S S S In 4 260 4 250–1 NET Port 4 240 5 230 Direct Configuration System Design 4–26 and Configuration Type andAddress... Requires theData If Your HostSoftware MODBUS Address Determining the SlaveOperation Network Codes Supported MODBUS Function DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 5 5 240 240 4 5 250–1 System DesignandConfiguration 250–1 4 4 260 4 260 4 support theMODBUSfunctioncodesdescribedbelow.support whether MODBUSfunction The or slave MODBUS either applicableaccess DL205 CPU and system. No CPU ladder logic is required to support DL250–1 or DL260 comprehends. The The comprehends. DL260 or DL250–1 function code andMODBUS MODBUS address to specify PLC a memory location the a send must software host The slave. a as DL260 or DL250–1 the with communicate to protocol RTU MODBUS the use must host MODBUS A DL260). (DL250–1, slave specify aPLCmemorylocation.Theseare: aretypicallytwowaysthatmosthostsoftwareconventionsallowyouto There a as configured have you that port CPU a with communicate can network a on devices other how describes section This you areusing.ThePLCmemorytypessplitinto twocategoriesforthispurpose. actualequationusedtocalculatetheaddressdependsontypeofPLCdata The butnotallpackagesallowyou todoitthisway.method, MODBUS a hostsoftwarepackagesallowyou to specifytheMODBUSdatatypeand Many equation usedforeachgroupofdata. MODBUSaddress(ifrequired).Thetablebelowshowstheexact appropriate eithercase,youbasically convertthePLCoctaladdresstodecimalandadd In Function Code Function S S S S MODBUS 03, 04 to accessasingledatapointorgroupofthem.TheDL250–1andDL260 By specifyingaMODBUSaddressonly. By specifyingtheMODBUSdatatypeandaddress Word –V, Timer currentvalue,Counter value Discrete –X,SP, Y, C,S,T(contacts), CT(contacts) 16 06 15 05 02 01 ddress thatcorrespondstothePLCmemorylocation. Thisistheeasiest Read agroupofinputs Read agroupofcoils Write avalueintogroupofregisters (slave only) Write avalueintosingleregister Read avaluefromoneormoreregisters Set /Resetagroupofcoils Set /Resetasinglecoil(slaveonly) code determines Direct NET slave operation. slave NET Direct Function Direct NET slave (DL240/250–1/260) or MODBUS or (DL240/250–1/260) slave NET whether theaccessisareadorwrite,and NET host uses normal I/O addresses to addresses I/O normal uses host NET X, SP Y, C,T, CT V V V Y, C,T, CT Y, C,T, CT DL205 DataTypes Available System Design and Configuration 4–27 MODBUS MODBUS Data Type Data Type Holding Register Holding Register Holding Register Input Input Coil Coil Coil Coil Coil Input Register Input Register Holding Register Input Input Coil Coil Coil Coil Coil Input Register Input Register Holding Register MODBUS MODBUS 0 – 255 0 – 127 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 512 –768 639 – 3839 512 – 639 Address Range Address Range Address 3480 – 3735 2048 – 2303 3984 – 4063 2048 –3072 2560 3280 – – 3167 2048 3535 –3072 2560 –6144 4095 –6400 6399 –5120 6271 – 6143 2048 –3072 2367 3280 – – 3167 2048 3471 –3072 2367 –6144 3551 –6400 6271 –5120 6527 – 5631 1024 – 2047 4096 – 8191 V4070 – V4095 System Design and Configuration and Design System (Octal) (Octal) PLC Range PLC Range T0 – T377 T0 – T177 X0 – X777 Y0 – Y777 S0 – S1777 V0 – V377 X0 – X477 Y0 – Y477 S0 – S777 C0 – C1777 C0 – C377 SP0 – SP137 SP0 – SP137 CT0 – CT177 CT0 – CT177 V7400 – V7777 V4000 – V4377 V7620V7746 – – V7737 V7777 SP320 – SP717 V1000 –V1400 V1177 V10000 – – V7377 V17777 SP540 – SP617 V0 – V377 V1000 –V2000 – V3777 V1177 QTY QTY (Dec.) (Dec.) Convert PLC Addr. to Dec. + Start of Range + Data Type to Dec. Convert PLC Addr. Convert PLC Addr. to Dec. + Start of Range + Data Type Start of Range to Dec. + PLC Addr. Convert

256 128 3072 4096 256 512 512 512 1024 256 128 1024 128 128 1024 256 106 320 144 320 256 128 128 512 Convert PLC Addr. to Dec. + Data Type Convert PLC Addr. Convert PLC Addr. to Dec. + Data Type to Dec. + Convert PLC Addr.

DL205 Memory Type DL205 Memory DL250–1 Memory Type Counter Current Values (V) Counter Current Values user data (V) V Memory, system (V) V Memory, Counter Contacts (CT) Stage Status Bits (S) .... Data Types For Word (V) Current Values Timer Special Relays (SP) Outputs (Y) Control Relays (C) Contacts (T) Timer For Discrete Data Types .... For Discrete Data Types Inputs (X) Counter Current Values (V) Counter Current Values user data (V) V Memory, user data (V) V Memory, non–volatile system (V) V Memory, Timer Contacts (T) Timer (CT) Counter Contacts (S) Stage Status Bits .... Data Types For Word (V) Current Values Timer Inputs (X) Special Relays (SP) Outputs (Y) Control Relays (C) For Discrete Data Types .... Data Types For Discrete System Design 4–28 and Configuration Example 4:C54 Current Value Example 3:T10 Example 2:Y20 Example 1:V2100 DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 System DesignandConfiguration for hostswhichrequirethisformat. followingexamplesshowhowtogeneratetheMODBUSaddress anddatatype The 4. Use the Use MODBUS data type from the table. 4. Addthestartingaddressforrange 3. ConvertC54intodecimal(44). 2. Find ControlRelaysinthetable. 1. C54. Find theMODBUSaddressforControlRelay the Use MODBUS data type from the table. 3. ConvertT10intodecimal(8). 2. FindTimer CurrentValues inthetable. 1. current valuefromTimer T10. Find theMODBUSaddresstoobtain the Use MODBUS data type from the table. 4. Addthestartingaddressforrange 3. ConvertY20intodecimal(16). 2. FindYoutputsinthetable. 1. Find theMODBUSaddressforoutputY20. the Use MODBUS data type from the table. 3. ConvertV2100intodecimal(1089). 2. FindVmemoryinthetable. 1. location V2100. Find theMODBUSaddressforUser V (3072). (2049). PLC Addr.PLC (Dec)+StartAddr. +DataType Addr. (Dec)+StartAddr.PLC + 44 +3073Coil= C54 =44decimal 16 +2049Coil= Y20 =16decimal 8 +InputReg.= TA10 =8decimal PLC Address(Dec.)+DataType 1088 + V2100 =1088decimal PLC Address(Dec.)+DataType Hold. Reg.= InputReg.8 HoldingReg.1089 Coil3117 Coil2065 Data Type System Design and Configuration 4–29 Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Data Type 1 – 2048 Address 2049 – 3072 3073 – 5120 6145 – 6400 6401 – 6656 5121 – 6144 11000–12048 10001–10999 12049 – 13072 13073 – 13584 (584/984 Mode) DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. System Design and Configuration and Design System ––– ––– ––– 1 – 2048 Address (484 Mode) 2049 – 3072 3073 – 5120 6145 – 6400 6401 – 6656 5121 – 6144 1001 – 1999 addressing modes may be available in your host software addressing modes Discrete Data Types This is because the 584/984 mode allows access to a higher number of 584/984 mode allows access to This is because the (Octal) T0 – T377 X0 – X1777 Y0 – Y1777 S0 – S1777 C0 – C3777 PLC Range SP0– SP777 SP0– CT0 – CT377 GY0– GY3777 GX0–GX1746 GX1747 – GX3777 GX1747 484 Mode 584/984 Mode Discrete – X, GX, SP, Y, CR, S, T, C (contacts) CR, S, T, Y, Discrete – X, GX, SP, Counter current value current value, Timer – V, Word address ranges as well. This means an address alone can actually describe the type alone can actually means an address as well. This address ranges locations within each data type. If your software only supports 484 mode, then there data type. If your software only supports locations within each S S S S Some host software packages do not allow you to specify the MODBUS data type and MODBUS data you to specify the do not allow software packages Some host another step to method requires This only. an address Instead, you specify address. the data also separates MODBUS Basically, it is not difficult. the address, but determine types by One important thing to the offset”. This is often referred to as “adding of data and location. remember two different here is that package. These are: Wehost software allows 584/984 addressing mode if the recommend that you use the you to choose. memory to The actual equation used memory locations that will be unavailable. may be some PLC The PLC memory the type of PLC data you are using. the address depends on calculate two categories for this purpose. types are split into In either case, you basically convert the PLC octal address to decimal and add the In either case, you basically convert (as required). The following tables show the exact appropriate MODBUS starting address range used for each group of data. Memory Type Stage Status Bits (S) Global Outputs (GY) Outputs (Y) Control Relays (CR) (T) Contacts Timer Counter Contacts (CT) Global Inputs (GX) Inputs (X) Special Relays (SP) If the Host Software If the Host an Address Requires ONLY System Design 4–30 and Configuration DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 System DesignandConfiguration modbus_conversion.xls automated MODBUS/Koyoaddressconversionutility,an For 2. downloadthefile theaddressesshownabovemightnotpertaintoyourparticularCPU. RefertoyourPLCusermanualforthecorrectmemorymappingsizeofPLC.Some 1. The DL250–1/260willsupport * MODBUS:Function04(NewFeature) entered fortheinstructiontoworkproperlywiththismode. function 04,put V Memory(DataWords) (Counters) Memory V V Memory(Timers) Registers the number’4’intomostsignificantposition(4xxx).Fourdigitsmustbe RX LDA LD LD O4000 K4128 K101 Y0 fromthe V10000 –V17777 V2000 –V7377 V1747 –V1777 V1400 –V1746 V1200 –V1377 V1000 –V1177 function 04 PLC Range V0 –V377 (Octal) www.automationdirect.com Word DataTypes (30001 range). word willcausetheRXtousefunction04 value of 4 in the RX/WXinstructioncanallow.that The is duetothe128maximumnumberofBytes Maximumconstantpossi The readinputregister Input/Holding (484Mode)* 3769/4769 3641/4641 3513/4513 3001/4001 the mostsignificantpositionof ––– ––– ––– (Address 30001) website. (584/984 Mode)* Input/Holding 31000/41000 30769/40769 30641/40641 30513/40513 30001/40001 ble is4128.This 44097 41025 . To use System Design and Configuration 4–31 3117 2065 41089 3009 C54 = 44 decimal 44 + 3072 + 1 = Y20 = 16 decimal 16 + 2048 + 1 = PLC Address (Dec.) + Mode Address = 8 decimal TA10 8 + 3001 = PLC Address (Dec.) + Mode Address (Dec.) + Mode PLC Address 1088 decimal V2100 = = 1088 + 40001 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Address + Mode PLC Addr. PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Address + Mode PLC Addr. System Design and Configuration and Design System (3072). (1). mode (3001). (2048). (1). mode (40001). Find the MODBUS address for Control Relay C54. 1. Find Control Relays in the table. 2. Convert C54 into decimal (44). 3. the starting address for the range Add 4. the MODBUS address for the mode Add Find the MODBUS address to obtain the Find the MODBUS address to obtain T10. current value from Timer 1. in the table. Current Values Find Timer 2. Convert T10 into decimal (8). 3. Add the MODBUS starting address for the Find the MODBUS address for output Y20. Find the MODBUS address for output 1. in the table. Find Y outputs 2. Convert Y20 into decimal (16). 3. Add the starting address for the range 4.mode Add the MODBUS address for the Find the MODBUS address for User V for User MODBUS address Find the location V2100. 1. in the table. Find V memory 2. Convert V2100 into decimal (1088). 3. Add starting address for the the MODBUS Example 4: C54 584/984 Mode Example 3: T10 Current Value 484 Mode Example 2: Y20 584/984 Mode Example 1: V2100 Example Mode 584/984 Slave Network 1 Slave #3 (write) (read) Master Network WX WX RX Slave #2 Master Slave #1 MODBUS RTU Protocol, or DirectNET and the RX instruction initiates Net are single master/multiple slave networks. The master is the only slave networks. The Net are single master/multiple he read or write operation onto NET network as a master. For MODBUS networks, it uses the MODBUS RTU MODBUS the uses it networks, MODBUS For master. a as NET network Direct Direct The step-by-step procedure will provide you the information necessary to following set up your ladder program to receive data from a network slave. When using the DL250–1 or DL260 CPU When using the DL250–1 or DL260 asRLL you use simple the master station, The instructions to initiate the requests. write WX instruction initiates network operations, Before network read operations. executing either the WX or RX commands, we will need to load data related to t accumulator stack. When the CPU’s the uses the instruction executes, it RX WXor informationthe stack combined with on data in the instruction box to completely port. define the task, which goes to the This section describes how the DL250–1 and DL260 can communicate on a MODBUS a on communicate can DL260 and DL250–1 the how describes Thissection MODBUS Both or network. the on slaves the all by interpreted be must which protocol, and member of the network that can initiate requests on the network. This section teaches section memberThis initiate requests on the network. of the network that can you how to design the required ladder logic for network master operation. 4 260 4 250–1 System Design and Configuration and Design System 5 240 5 230 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Network Operation Master

System Design

and Configuration 4–32 Bytes toTransfer Load Numberof Step 2: Port #andSlave Identify Master Step 1: BCD (01to90). contains theslaveaddressnumberin CPU, portnumber2.Thelowerbyte ofthebottomportDL250–1/260 use The “F1”intheupperbyteindicates ofthewordisshowntoright. format Direct Thefollowingtableshowsthebyterangesforvarioustypesof increments. data typebecausetheV-memory locations canonlybeaccessedin2-byte inputlocations.However,X if you example,theDL205Inputpointscanbeaccessed For numberofbytes specifiedalsodependsonthetypeofdatayouwanttoobtain. The bytes. BCD format(decimal),from1to128 instruction. Thevaluetobeloadedisin slave inthesubsequent WX or RX be transferredbetweenthemasterand determines The secondLoad(LD)instruction slaves, or90 instruction address oftheslavestation.This network master(DL250–1/260)andthe the communicationsportnumberon The firstLoad(LD)instructionidentifies Diagnostic Status(5word R/W) Scratch PadMemory bits, T/Cstagebits I/O, internalrelays,shift register T /Caccumulator Data registers Diagnostic Status Scratch PadMemory (Y, C,Stage,T/C bits) Outputs Inputs (X,SP) T /Ccurrentvalue V memory LOGIC DL 205/405Memory DL305 Memory can addressupto90MODBUS the numberofbyteswhichwill  products. Direct NET slaves.The only wantX0–X27,you’llhavetousetheXinput System DesignandConfiguration Bits perunit Bits perunit DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 F 16 16 16 16 8 1 8 8 8 8 8 Internal port (hex) port Internal 1 1 CPU bottom port (BCD) port bottom CPU by V-memory locationsoras 0 KF101 LD 2 Bytes Bytes # ofbytestotransfer 1 K128 LD Slave addressSlave (BCD) 10 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 8 (BCD) 4–33

System Design and Configuration 0 0 GY600 GY160 GY400 MODBUS base addr. (octal) LD KF101 LD K128 LDA O40600 RX Y0 0 C160 CT600 SR400 address LDA O40600 PLC base 0 Starting of address master transfer area V40600 V40601 6 0 SP116 MSBMSB LSB LSB 15 15 4 Shift Registers Control Relays PLC Memory Type TMR/CNT Status Bits V0 GY0 V100 GY200 MODBUS base addr. NET slaves – specify the same address in the WX and RX S0 specified from its memory area specified from its R400 R600 R401, IO 000 address Direct native I/O address instruction as the slave’s in the MODBUS DL405 or DL205 slaves – specify the same address native I/O address WX and RX instruction as the slave’s MODBUS 305 slaves – use the following table to convert DL305 addresses to MODBUS addresses PLC base address of the memory area to be of the memory area address the slave, and RX to read from the Since V memory words are always 16 bits, you may not always use the whole Since V memory words are always you will only get 24 bits of data. In this case, only the 8 least significant bits of you will only get 24 bits of data. In S S S NOTE: 3 bytes and you are reading Y outputs from the word. For example, if you only specify slave, The remaining 8 bits are not affected. the last word location will be modified. The last instruction in our sequence is the WX to WX or RX instruction itself. Use write to are slave. All four of our instructions shown to the right. In the last instruction, you must specify the starting address and a valid data type for the slave. The third instruction in the RX or WX instruction in The third Address (LDA) is a Load sequence is to load the Its purpose instruction. starting transferred. number, Entered as an octal converts it to hex and the LDA instruction in the accumulator. places the result the DL250–1/260 For a WX instruction, number of bytes CPU sends the previously LDA address specified. beginning at the the DL250–1/260 For an RX instruction, CPU bytes previously reads the number of the slave, placing the specified from area received data into its memory beginning at the LDA address specified. DL305 Series CPU Memory Type–to–MODBUS Cross Reference Cross DL305 Series CPU Memory Type–to–MODBUS I/O Points System Design and Configuration and Design System Data Registers PLC Memory type TMR/CNT Current Values Stage Status Bits (D3–330P only) DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Step 4: Specify Slave Memory Area Step 3: Master Specify Area Memory

System Design

and Configuration 4–34 Write Interlocks Multiple Readand Ladder Program from a Communications If you’reusingRLL C0 isreset. task, thesecondroutineisexecutedand the porthasfinishedcommunication instruction isexecuted,C0set.When In theexampletoright,afterRX onlyhandleonetransactionatatime. can firstroutine.Thisisbecauseeachport the interlocks, are executed.Ifyoudon’tuse the the routinestomakesureall theRLLprogram,youhavetointerlock in If youareusingmultiplereadsandwrites boxes sincetheerrorbitisresetwhenanRXorWXinstructionexecuted. ofthisbitis Use The “PortCommunicationError”bitturnsonwhenthePLChasdetectedanerror. off theprogramcaninitiatenextnetworkrequest. “PortBusy”bitisonwhilethePLCcommunicateswithslave.When is The shows and theotherindicates”PortCommunicationError”(SP117). Theexampleabove (see AppendixDforcommportspecialrelays).Oneindicates“Portbusy”(SP116), The portwhichcanbeamasterhastwoSpecialRelaycontactsassociatedwithit before startingthenexttransaction. wait forthecommunicationstofinish last Typically networkcommunicationswill time. allowing execution andswitchfromstageto separate Programing, longer than1scan.Theprogrammust the useofthesecontactsforanetworkmasterthatonlyreadsdevice(RX). only oneofthemtobeactiveat a program stagetoensureproper then theCPUwillonlyexecute you canputeachroutinein a optional. Whenused,itshouldbeaheadofanynetworkinstruction Port CommunicationError PLUS Stage System DesignandConfiguration DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 SP116 SP116 SP116 SP117 Interlocking Port Busy Relay C100 C100 Interlocking Relay Y0 WX O40400 LDA K0003 LD KF101 LD Y0 RX O40600 LDA K0003 LD KF101 LD Y0 RX O40600 LDA K0003 LD KF101 LD C100 C100 RST SET SET Y1 4–35

System Design and Configuration Available Slave #3 DL205 Data Types Y, C, T, CT C, T, Y, X, SP CT C, T, Y, CT C, T, Y, V V V V V Slave #2 whether the access is a read or a write, and whether the access is a read or a Master Function Slave #1 MODBUS RTU Protocol code determines Read a group of coils Read a group of inputs Set / Reset a single coil (slave only) Set / Reset a group of coils Read a value from one or more registers a value into a single register Write (slave only) Read Exception Status Diagnostics a value into a group of registers Write 16 01 02 05 15 06 07 08 The master is the only member of the network that can initiate requests on only member of the network that The master is the 03, 04 MODBUS Function Code The MODBUS function This section describes how the DL260 can communicate on a MODBUS RTU network RTU MODBUS a on communicate can DL260 the how describes Thissection as a using master the MRX and MWX read/write instructions. These instructions allow youto enter native MODBUS addressing in your ladder logic program with needno to slave is a single master/multiple MODBUS conversions. decimal to octal perform for network. logic ladder required the design to how you teaches section the network. This network master operation. whether DL260 supports the to access a single data point or a group of them. The below. MODBUS function codes described 4 260 4 260 5 5 250–1 250–1 System Design and Configuration and Design System 5 5 240 240 5 5 230 230 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. MODBUS Function Codes Supported Network only) (DL260 Operation Master RTU MODBUS

System Design

and Configuration 4–36 Configuration MODBUS Port 230 5 240 5 250–1 5 260 4 In S S S S S S S S S S Direct HPP, andselect“MBUS”), andthenyou’llseethedialogboxbelow. Protocol: RTS OnDelayTime: response beforelogginganerror. Timeout: Port: Station Number: after sendingthedata. RTS OffDelayTime: sending thedata. wiring configurationused onport2. Echo Suppression: Parity: Stop Bits: details. network tothesamevalue.Referappropriate productmanualfor network. Important:You mustconfigurethebaudratesofalldeviceson to lowerbaudratesifyouexperiencedataerrors ornoiseproblemsonthe 9600, 19200,and38400baud.Chooseahigher baudrateinitially, reverting Baud Rate: back toslavemodeuntilladderlogicusestheport again. instructions whichusetheportasamaster.Thereafter, theportreverts slave, unlessanduntiltheDL260executesladderlogicMWX/MRXnetwork slave musthaveauniquenumber. Atpowerup, theportisautomaticallya “1”. ThepossiblerangeforMODBUSslavenumbersisfrom1to247.Each SOFT32, choosethePLCmenu,thenSetup,“SecondaryCommPort”. Fromtheportnumberlistboxattop,choose“Port2”. Choosenone,even,oroddparityforerrorchecking. the CPU,andclickClose. Then amountoftimetheportwillwaitafteritsendsamessagetoget Clickthecheckboxtoleftof“MODBUS”(useAUX56on Choose1or2stopbitsforuseintheprotocol. Theavailablebaudratesinclude300,600,900, 2400,4800, click thebuttonindicated tosendthePortconfiguration FormakingtheCPUportaMODBUS Select theappropriateradio buttonbasedonthe TheamountoftimebetweenraisingtheRTS lineand TheamountoftimebetweenresettingtheRTS line System DesignandConfiguration DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 R master, choose 4–37

System Design and Configuration RTS– Signal GND TXD+ / RXD+ TXD– / RXD– CTS– RTS+ CTS+ 15 11 RXD– TXD– RXD+ 10 6 7 TXD+ TXD– / RXD– 1 DL260 CPU Port 2 5 12 5V3 TXD24 RXD2 Data (RS232C) Transmit VDC 5 5 RTS2 Data (RS232C) Receive 6 CTS2 Ready to Send (RS–232C) RXD2–7 Clear to Send (RS–232C) – (RS–422 / RS485) Receive Data 8 0V9 0V TXD2+ Ground Logic Data + (RS–422 / RS–485) Transmit Ground Logic 0V 11 + RTS2 Request to Send + (RS–422 / RS–485) 10 TXD2 – Data – (RS–422 / RS–485) Transmit 12 – RTS2 13 Request to Send – (RS–422 / RS–485) RXD2 +14 Receive Data + (RS–422 / RS–485) CTS2 +15 Clear to Send + (RS422 / RS–485) CTS2 – to Send – (RS–422 / RS–485) Clear Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL260 only) TXD+ / RXD+ Signal GND 11 15 Cable: Use Belden 9841 or equivalent Connect shield to signal ground 7 10 6 Termination Resistor 2 3 4 5 RTS– CTS– 1 4 5 RTS+ CTS+ TXD RXD RTS CTS TXD– / RXD– RTS CTS 15 11 RXD– Signal GND Signal TXD– Normally, the RS–232 signals are used for shorter distances (15 meters max), for the RS–232 Normally, communications between two devices. RS–485 signals are for longer distances (1000 meters max.), and for multi-drop (1000 meters longer distances signals are for RS–485 wiring, RS–485 network both ends of resistors at Use termination networks. and 500 ohms). (between 100 rating of the cable the impedance matching RXD+ OR Loop Back 10 6 7 Signal GND 4 260 TXD+ / RXD+ TXD+ 1 5 DL260 CPU Port 2 5 System Design and Configuration and Design System 250–1 GND RXD TXD CTS RTS 0V 5 240 5 230 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. RS–485 Network RS–232 Network

System Design

and Configuration 4–38 (MRX) Read fromNetwork MODBUS 230 5 240 5 250–1 5 260 4 of elementstotransfer, MODBUSdataformatandtheExceptionResponseBuffer. Function addresses withinthemaster. Theinstructionallowstheusertospecify MODBUS read ablockofdatafromconnectedslavedeviceandtowritetheintoV–memory MODBUSReadfromNetwork(MRX)instructionisusedbytheDL260networkmaster to The S S S S S S S S the ExceptionResponsewillbeplaced.See tableonthefollowingpage. Exception ResponseBuffer: be used MODBUS DataFormat: input registerwillberead.Seethetableonfollowing page. Number ofElements: page. the masterwheredatawillbeplaced.See tableonthefollowing Start MasterMemoryAddress: of thedatatoberead.Seetableonfollowingpage. Start SlaveMemoryAddress: the MRXinstruction: Function Code: Slave Address: Port Number: Code, slavestationaddress,startingmasterandmemoryaddresses,number 07 –ReadExceptionstatus 04 –Readinputregisters 03 –Readholdingregisters 02 –Readagroupofinputs 01 –Readagroupofcoils mustbeDL260Port2(K2) specifyaslavestationaddress(0–247) ThefollowingMODBUSfunctioncodesaresupportedby specifies howmanycoils,inputs,holdingregisters or specifies MODBUS584/984or484dataformat to specifies themastermemoryaddresswhere specifiesthestartingslavememoryaddress System DesignandConfiguration specifies thestartingmemoryaddressin DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 4–39

System Design and Configuration Slave Address Range(s) Slave Address 1–999 1–65535 1001–1999 or 10001–19999 (5 digit) (6 digit) 100001–165535 4001–4999 or 40001–49999 (5 digit) (6 digit) 4000001–465535 3001–3999 30001–39999 (5 digit) or 3000001–365535 (6 digit) n/a 0–377 0–377 0–777 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–3777 Bits: 1–2000 DL260 Range DL260 Range DL260 Range Registers: 1–125 all (see page 3–53) all (see page 3–53) all (see page 3–53) MODBUS Data Format MODBUS 484 Mode 584/984 Mode 484 Mode 584/984 Mode 484 Mode 584/984 484 Mode 584/984 Mode 484 and 584/984 Mode T V X Y S V V K C CT SP GX GY MRX Slave Address Ranges MRX Slave Function Code Function

Number of Elements Operand Data Type V–memory Constant Exception Response Buffer Operand Data Type V–memory Control Relays Stage Bits Bits Timer Counter Bits Special Relays V–memory Global Inputs Global Outputs 04 – Read Input Register 04 – Read Input Register 07 – Read Exception Status MRX Master Memory Address Ranges Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs 01 – Read Coil 01 – Read Coil 02 – Read Input Status 02 – Read Input Status Register 03 – Read Holding Register 03 – Read Holding System Design and Configuration and Design System DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. MRX Exception Response Buffer MRX Number of Elements MRX Master Memory Addresses MRX Slave MRX Slave Memory Address

System Design

and Configuration 4–40 (MWX) Write toNetwork MODBUS 230 5 240 5 250–1 5 260 4 transfer, MODBUSdataformatandtheExceptionResponseBuffer. station address,startingmasterandslavememoryaddresses,numberofelementsto thenetwork.Theinstructionallowsuser on network masters’s (DL260)memorytoMODBUSaddresseswithinaslavedevice MODBUS WriteThe toNetwork(MWX)instructionisusedwriteablockofdatafromthe S S S S S S S S the ExceptionResponsewillbeplaced Exception ResponseBuffer: be used MODBUS DataFormat: is selected. will bewrittento.Thisfieldisonlyactivewheneither functioncode15or16 Number ofElements: in themasterthatistowrittenslave. Start MasterMemoryAddress: where thedatawillbewritten. Start SlaveMemoryAddress: the MWXinstruction: Function Code: Slave Address: Port Number: 16 –PresetMultipleRegisters 15 –ForceMultipleCoils 06 –PresetSingleRegister 05 –ForceSinglecoil mustbeDL260Port2(K2) specifyaslavestationaddress(0–247) ThefollowingMODBUSfunctioncodesaresupportedby specifies howmanyconsecutivecoilsorregisters specifies MODBUS584/984or484dataformat to specifies themastermemoryaddresswhere specifiesthestartingslavememoryaddress System DesignandConfiguration specifies thestartingaddressofdata to specifytheMODBUSFunctionCode,slave DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 4–41

System Design and Configuration Slave Address Range(s) Slave Address 1–999 1–65535 4001–4999 or 40001–49999 (5 digit) (6 digit) 400001–465535 1–999 1–65535 4001–4999 40001–49999 (5 digit) or 4000001–465535 (6 digit) 0–377 0–377 0–777 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–3777 Bits: 1–2000 DL260 Range DL260 Range DL260 Range Registers: 1–125 all (see page 3–53) all (see page 3–53) all (see page 3–53) MODBUS Data Format MODBUS 484 Mode 584/984 Mode 484 Mode 584/984 Mode 484 585/984 Mode 484 Mode 584/984 Mode T V X Y S V V K C MWX Slave Address Ranges MWX CT SP GX GY Function Code Function V–memory Constant Exception Response Buffer Operand Data Type V–memory Timer Bits Timer Counter Bits Special Relays V–memory Global Inputs Global Outputs Number of Elements Operand Data Type 16 – Preset Multiple Registers MWX Master Memory Address Ranges Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs Control Relays Stage Bits 05 – Force Single Coil 05 – Force Single Coil 05 – Force Single Register 06 – Preset Single Register 06 – Preset Single Coils 15 – Force Multiple Coils 15 – Force Multiple Registers 16 – Preset Multiple System Design and Configuration and Design System DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. MWX Exception Response Buffer MWX Number of Elements MWX Master Memory Addresses MWX Slave MWX Slave Memory Address

System Design

and Configuration 4–42 Write Interlocks Multiple Readand Direct Example in MRX /MWX SOFT32 task, thesecondroutineisexecutedandC100reset.Ifyou’reusingRLL instruction can onlyhandleonetransactionatatime.Intheexamplebelow, aftertheMRX interlocks, the routinestomakesureallareexecuted.Ifyoudon’tuse youareusingmultiplereadsandwritesintheRLLprogram,havetointerlock If the nexttransaction. CPU scan.Theprogrammustwaitforthecommunicationstofinishbeforestarting instruction isexecuted.Typically networkcommunicationswilllastlongerthan1 any networkinstructionboxessincetheerrorbitisresetwhenanMRXorMWX detectedanerroranduseofthisbitisoptional.Whenused,itshouldbeahead has next networkrequest.The“PortCommunicationError”bitturnsonwhenthePLC PLC communicateswiththeslave.Whenbitisoff theprogramcaninitiate Error” (SP117).Communication ”Port indicates The“PortBusy”bitisonwhilethe comm portspecialrelays).Oneindicates“Portbusy”(SP116), andtheother DL260 active atatime. executionandswitchfromstagetoallowingonlyoneofthembe proper Stage port2hastwoSpecialRelaycontactsassociatedwithit(seeAppendixDfor Programing, youcanputeachroutineinaseparateprogramstagetoensure then theCPUwillonlyexecutefirstroutine.Thisisbecauseeachport is executed,C100set.Whentheporthasfinishedcommunication System DesignandConfiguration DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 PLUS 4–43

System Design and Configuration System Design and Configuration and Design System DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev.

System Design

and Configuration 4–44 DL260 Non–SequenceProtocol(ASCIIIn/OutandPRINT) DL260 Configuration MODBUS Port 230 5 240 5 250–1 5 260 4 either readorwriterawASCIIstringsusingtheinstructions. Configuring In In/Out instructionsandthePRINTinstructioninchapter5. S S S S S S S S S S S Direct Protocol: RTS OnDelayTime: response beforelogginganerror. Timeout: Port: location fortheportsetup parameterslistedbelow. Memory Address: wiring configurationused onport2. Echo Suppression: match theparityspecifiedforconnecteddevices. Parity: specified fortheconnecteddevices. Stop Bits: details. network tothesamevalue.Referappropriate productmanualfor network. Important:You mustconfigurethebaudratesofalldeviceson to lowerbaudratesifyouexperiencedataerrors ornoiseproblemsonthe 9600, 19200,and38400baud.Chooseahigher baudrateinitially, reverting Baud Rate: specified fortheconnecteddevices. Data Bits: after sendingthedata. RTS OffDelayTime: sending thedata. SOFT32, choosethePLCmenu,thenSetup,“SecondaryCommPort”. Fromtheportnumberlistboxattop,choose“Port2”. port 2ontheDL260forNon–SequenceallowsCPUtouse Choosenone,even,oroddparityforerrorchecking. Besureto amountoftimetheportwillwaitafteritsendsamessagetoget Clickthecheckboxtoleftof“Non–Sequence”. Selecteither7–bitsor8–bitstomatchthenumberofdatabits Choose1or2stopbitstomatchthenumberof stopbits Theavailablebaudratesinclude300,600,900, 2400,4800, ChooseaV-memory address touseasthestarting Select theappropriateradio buttonbasedonthe TheamountoftimebetweenraisingtheRTS lineand TheamountoftimebetweenresettingtheRTS line System DesignandConfiguration DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Seethe ASCII 4–45

System Design and Configuration ASCII ASCII Device Signal GND TXD+ / RXD+ TXD– / RXD– 12 5V3 TXD24 RXD2 Data (RS232C) Transmit VDC 5 5 RTS2 Data (RS232C) Receive 6 CTS2 Ready to Send (RS–232C) RXD2–7 Clear to Send (RS–232C) / RS485) Receive Data – (RS–422 8 0V9 0V TXD2+ Logic Ground Data + (RS–422 / RS–485) Transmit Logic Ground 11 + RTS2 Request to Send + (RS–422 / RS–485) 10 TXD2 – Data – (RS–422 / RS–485) Transmit 12 – RTS2 13 / RS–485) Request to Send – (RS–422 RXD2 +14 Receive Data + (RS–422 / RS–485) CTS2 +15 Clear to Send + (RS422 / RS–485) CTS2 – to Send – (RS–422 / RS–485) Clear Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL260 only) Choose this selection if you have port 2 wired for you have port 2 this selection if Choose Cable: Use Belden 9841 or equivalent Choose this selection if you have Port 2 RTS signal if you have Port 2 RTS Choose this selection 11 15 Connect shield to signal ground click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to to send the Port configuration click the button indicated 7 CPU Port 2 CPU 10 6 Termination Resistor 2 3 4 5 RTS– CTS– 1 4 5 Then the CPU, and click Close. the CPU, and click both ends of RS–485 network wiring, matching the impedance rating of network wiring, matching the both ends of RS–485 RTS+ CTS+ DL260 CPU Port 2 TXD RXD RTS CTS TXD– / RXD– RTS CTS Xon/Xoff Flow Control: Flow Control: Xon/Xoff Hardware Flow Control (Xon/Xoff) with RTS and CTS signal connected and CTS RTS with Flow Control (Xon/Xoff) Hardware all devices. between RTS Flow Control: wired between all devcies. wired between all 15 11 RXD– S S Signal GND Signal RS–232 signals are used for shorter distances (15 meters max) and limited to RS–232 signals are used for shorter distances (15 meters max) communications between two devices. RS–485 signals are for long distances (1000 meters max.). Use termination are for long distances (1000 RS–485 signals resistors at 100 and 500 ohms). the cable (between TXD– RXD+ OR Loop Back on each device 10 6 7 Signal GND TXD+ / RXD+ TXD+ 1 5 System Design and Configuration and Design System GND RXD TXD CTS RTS 0V ASCII Device DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. RS–232 Network RS–485 Network

System Design

and Configuration 4–46 DL250–1 Non–SequenceProtocol(PRINT) DL250–1 Configuration MODBUS Port 230 5 240 5 250–1 4 260 5 In DL250–1. PRINT port2 Configuring S S S S S S S S Direct Protocol: match theparityspecified fortheconnecteddevice. Parity: specified fortheconnecteddevice. Stop Bits: details. network tothesamevalue.Referappropriate productmanualfor network. Important:You mustconfigurethebaudratesofalldeviceson to lowerbaudratesifyouexperiencedataerrors ornoiseproblemsonthe 9600, 19200,and38400baud.Chooseahigher baudrateinitially, reverting Baud Rate: specified fortheconnecteddevice. Data Bits: location fortheportsetupparameterslistedbelow. Memory Address: described below. Matchthesettingstoconnected device. Use ForPrintingOnly: Port: instruction toprinttheembeddedtextortext/datavariablemessageport2on SOFT32, choosethePLCmenu,thenSetup,“SecondaryCommPort”. See thePRINTinstructioninchapter5 Fromtheportnumberlistboxattop,choose“Port2”. Choosenone,even,or odd parityforerrorchecking.Besureto the CPU,andclickClose. Then Clickthecheckboxtoleftof“Non–Sequence”. Selecteither7–bitsor8–bitstomatchthenumber ofdatabits Choose1or2stopbitstomatchthenumberof stopbits Theavailablebaudratesinclude300,600,900, 2400,4800, on theDL250–1forNon–SequenceenablesCPU to click thebuttonindicated tosendthePortconfiguration ChooseaV-memory addresstouseasthestarting Checktheboxtoenableportsettings System DesignandConfiguration DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 . use 4–47 the

System Design and Configuration Master PORT 2 Termination Resistor at both ends of network 15 CTS– 70V 12 RTS– 14 CTS+ 9 TXD+ 10 TXD– 13 RXD+ 6 RXD– 11 RTS+ 12 5V3 TXD24 RXD2 Data (RS232C) Transmit VDC 5 5 RTS2 Receive Data (RS232C) 6 CTS2 Ready to Send (RS–232C) RXD2–7 Clear to Send (RS–232C) Receive Data – (RS–422) 8 0V9 0V TXD2+ Logic Ground + (RS–422) Data Transmit Logic Ground 11 + RTS2 Request to Send + (RS–422) 10 TXD2 – (RS–422) Data – Transmit 12 – RTS2 13 Request to Send – (RS–422) RXD2 +14 Receive Data + (RS–422) CTS2 +15 Clear to Send + (RS422) CTS2 – Clear to Send – (RS–422) Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL250–1) 11 15 Master PORT 2 7 10 6 2 3 4 5 1 4 5 both ends of RS–422 network wiring, matching the impedance rating of the impedance wiring, matching of RS–422 network both ends TXD RXD RTS CTS RTS CTS The recommended cable The recommended for RS422 is Belden 9729 or equivalent. Signal GND Signal RXD+ RXD– TXD+ TXD– GND Signal RS–232 signals are used for shorter distances (15 meters max.) and limited to limited and distances (15 meters max.) RS–232 signals are used for shorter communications between two devices. RS–422 signals are for long distances (1000 meters max.). Use termination (1000 meters long distances signals are for RS–422 resistors at and 500 ohms). (between 100 the cable OR Loop Back on each device System Design and Configuration and Design System CTS RTS GND RXD TXD ASCII Slave Device ASCII Slave Device DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. RS–232 Network RS–422 Network

System Design

and Configuration 4–48 1 5 Standard RLL Instructions

In This Chapter. . . . — Introduction — Using Boolean Instructions — Boolean Instructions — Comparative Boolean Instructions — Immediate Instructions — Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions — Accumulator / Stack Load and Output Data Instructions — Accumulator Logical Instructions — Math Instructions — Transcendental Instructions — Bit Operation Instructions — Number Conversion Instructions — Table Instructions — Clock / Calendar Instructions — CPU Control Instructions — Program Control Instructions — Interrupt Instructions — Intelligent I/O Instructions — Network Instructions — Message Instructions — MODBUS RTU Instructions — ASCII Instructions Standard RLL

Instructions 5–2 Introduction C BinaryCoded Decimal Tens Complement AddtoTop ofTable BCDCPL ASCIItoHex BCD ATT Arc Tangent Real ArcSineReal ATH And Stack ATANR ASINR AndPositiveDifferential AndNotImmediate ANDS ANDPD AndifNotEqual ANDNI AndNegativeDifferential ANDNE AndNotBit–of–Word AndNot ANDND ANDNB AndImmediate AndMove ANDN AndFormatted ANDMOV AndifEqual ANDI AndDouble ANDF AndBit–of–Word ANDE ANDD Andforcontactsorboxes AndStore ANDB ASCIIIN AND STR ASCIIFind AND ASCIIExtract AIN AddTop ofStack AFIND AddReal AEX AddFormatted ADDS AddDoubleBCD ADDR ADDF AddBinaryTop ofStack ADDD AddBinaryDouble AddBinary ADDBS AddBCD ADDBD ASCIIClearBuffer ADDB ADD ArcCosineReal ASCIIConstant ACRB ACOSR ACON DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Standard RLLInstructions Instruction This operations.ThereareseveralinstructionsthatnotavailableinalloftheCPUs. of to quicklyfindtheinstructionyouneed. The DL205CPUsoffer awidevarietyofins The chapter showsyouhowtousethese S S find thepagethatdiscussesinstruction. If youknowtheindividualinstructionname,usefollowingtableto the instructionsinthatcategory. etc.) usetheheaderattopofpagetofindpagesthatdiscuss If youknowtheinstructioncategory(Boolean,ComparativeBoolean, 5–133 5–131 5–166 5–137 5–122 5–121 5–74 5–23 5–35 5–29 5–23 5–15 5–14, 5–32 5–171 5–35 5–73 5–29 5–72 5–15 5–16 5–14, 5–212 5–216 5–219 5–113 5–90 5–109 5–89 5–117 5–102 5–101 5–88 5–228 5–122 5–199 Page 5–32, 5–71 M Compare BinarytoReal Block(Stage) CMP BlockEnd(Stage) BTOR BlockCall(Stage) BLK Binary BEND BCALL BIN N EnableInterrupts End Encode ENI END EventDrum Timed Drum ENCO DataLabel EDRUM DivideTop of Stack DRUM DivideRealNumber DLBL DivideFormatted DIVS DivideDouble DIVR DivideBinaryTop ofStack DIVF DivideBinary DIVD Divide DIVBS DisableInterrupts DIVB DegreeRealConversion DIV Decode DISI DecrementBinary DEGR Decrement DECO Date DECB Converge(Stage) DEC ConvergeJump(Stage) DATE CosineReal CVJMP Counter CV ASCIICompare COSR CompareStack CNT CompareRealNumber CMPV CompareFormatted CMPS CompareDouble CMPR CMPF CMPD individual instructions.There tructions to perform many different t tructions toperformmanydifferent Instruction 5–83 5–134 7–27 7–27 7–27 5–130 Page 5–188 5–177 5–128 6–16 6–14 5–199 5–116 5–99 5–112 5–98 5–120 5–106 5–97 5–188 5–136 5–129 5–108 5–100 5–175 7–25 7–25 5–121 5–46 5–220 5–86 5–87 5–85 5–84 are twoways ypes Standard RLL Instructions 5–3 5–31, 5–75 5–127 5–24 5–25 5–148 5–38 5–178 5–34 5–22 5–78 5–17, 5–65 5–18 5–66 5–67 5–36 5–37 5–69 5–69 5–68 5–26 5–20 5–70 5–201 5–226 5–136 5–191 5–157 5–163 5–126 Page 7–24 5–177 5–19 5–12, 5–19 5–36 5–16 5–13 5–76 5–28 5–77 5–34 5–171 5–12, 5–31 5–13 5–22 5–28 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard Instruction ROTRRSTRSTB Rotate Right RSTBIT Reset RSTI Reset Bit–of–Word Reset Bit RSTWT Reset Immediate Timer Dog Reset Watch ORNIORPDORS Or Not Immediate OUT Or Positive Differential OUTB Or Stack OUTD Out OUTF Out Bit–of–Word OUTI Out Double OUTIF Out Formatted OUTL Out Immediate OUTM Out Immediate Formatted OUTX Out Least PAUSE Out Most PD Out Indexed Pause POPPRINTPRINTV Positive Differential Pop RADR Print ASCII Out from V–Memory RDRFB Radian Real Conversion RFTROTL Read from Intelligent Module Remove from Bottom of Table of Table from Top Remove Rotate Left NJMPNOPNOT(Stage) Not Jump OR No Operation OR OUT Not OR OUTI Or Out OR STR Or Immediate Or Out ORB Or Store ORDORE Bit–of–Word Or ORF Double Or ORI Or if Equal ORMOV Or Formatted ORN Or Move Immediate Or ORNBORND Or Not ORNE Or Not Bit–of–Word Differential Or Negative Or if Not Equal 5–180 5–145 5–205 5–208 5–94 5–105 5–119 5–95 5–111 5–96 5–115 5–199 5–59 5–60 5–64 5–62 5–145 5–63 6–20 6–22 5–185 5–185 5–144 5–187 5–132 5–188 5–188 7–24 7–24 5–179 5–58 5–39 5–40 5–61 5–197 5–152 5–150 5–151 5–173 5–180 5–179 5–141 5–182 5–138 5–100 5–107 Page Instruction NCONNEXT Numeric Constant Next (For/Next) MULFMULRMULS Multiply Formatted Multiply Real of Stack Multiply Top MULBMULBSMULD Multiply Binary of Stack Multiply Binary Top Multiply Double MWXMUL to MODBUS Network Write Multiply MOVMOVMCMRX Move Move Memory Cartridge Read from MODBUS Network MDRMWMLR Masked Drum Event Word MLS Reset Master Line Master Line Set LDLBLLDSXMDRMD Load Label Load Indexed from Constant Masked Drum Event Discrete LDFLDRLDX Load Formatted Load Real Number Load Indexed LDIFLDALDD Immediate Formatted Load Load Address Load Double LDLDI Load Load Immediate ISGJMPLBL Initial Stage Jump Label INVIRTIRTC Invert Interrupt Return Interrupt Return Conditional INCINCBINT Increment Increment Binary Interrupt GRAYGTSHTA Gray Code Subroutine Goto Hex to ASCII FINDBFORGOTO Find Block For/Next Goto/Label FILLFIND Fill Find FAULTFDGT Fault Than Find Greater Standard RLL

Instructions 5–4 TP StorePositiveDifferential StoreNegativeDifferential StoreNotImmediate STRPD STRND StoreifNotEqual STRNI StoreNegativeDifferential Store NotBit–of–WordSTRNE StoreNot STRND StoreImmediate STRNB StoreifEqual STRN StoreBit–of–Word STRI Store STRE Stop ShiftRegister STRB STR STOP SquareRootReal SineReal SR ShiftRight SQRTR ShiftLeft SINR Stage SHFR StageCounter SHFL SGCNT SetImmediate Shuffle Digits SG SFLDGT SetBit SetBit–of–Word SETI Set SETBIT Segment SETB Subroutine(GotoSubroutine) ReadfromNetwork SET SEG RealtoBinary SBR SubroutineReturnConditional SubroutineReturn RX RTOB RTC RT DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Standard RLLInstructions Instruction Page 5–21 5–21 5–33 5–27 5–21 5–11 5–10, 5–30 5–33 5–27 5–11 5–10, 5–30 5–178 5–52 5–122 5–121 5–125 5–124 5–48 7–23 5–142 5–38 5–148 5–25 5–24 5–140 5–182 5–193 5–135 5–182 5–182 MAAccumulatingTimer FastTimer Timer TMRA Time TMRF Tangent Real TMR TIME ASCIISwapBytes SwapTable Data TANR Sum SWAPB SubtractRealNumber SWAP SubtractTop ofStack SUM SubtractFormatted SUBR SubtractDouble SUBS SubtractBinaryTopSUBF ofStack SUBD SubtractBinaryDouble SubtractBinary SUBBS Subtract SUBBD SourcetoTable SUBB SUB STT OSExclusiveOrStack ExclusiveOrMove ExclusiveOrFormatted XORS ExclusiveOrDouble XORMOV ExclusiveOr Write toNetwork XORF Write toIntelligent Module XORD XOR WX ASCIIPrinttoV–Memory UpDownCounter WT Table toDestination VPRINT TableUDC ShiftRight Table ShiftLeft TTD TSHFR FastAccumulatingTimer TSHFL TMRAF Instruction 5–44 5–42 5–42 5–176 5–121 5–227 5–174 5–123 5–93 5–114 5–110 5–92 5–118 5–104 5–103 5–91 5–160 Page 5–82 5–171 5–81 5–80 5–79 5–195 5–192 5–221 5–50 5–154 5–169 5–169 5–44 Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–5 STRN X0 OUT Y0 END STR X0 OUT Y0 END Boolean Instructions Boolean Y0 Y0 Y0 END OUT END OUT OUT END Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. that contain both contacts and coils. The boolean that contain both contacts and coils. UT instruction. The following example shows how to UT instruction. The following example ows the use of graphic symbols to build the program, you symbols to build the program, ows the use of graphic to know the mnemonics of the instructions. However, it may of the instructions. However, to know the mnemonics are typically very simple instructions designed to join input and simple instructions designed to are typically very SOFT32 Example Handheld Mnemonics SOFT32 Example Handheld Mnemonics have package all the Output or, O the Output or, All programs must have and END statement Direct Direct some point, especially if you ever have to troubleshoot the program with a if you ever have to troubleshoot some point, especially SOFT32 X0 X0 X0 DL205 programs require an END statement as the last instruction. This tells the DL205 programs require an END Normally closed contacts are also very common. This is accomplished with the Normally closed contacts are also very common. This is accomplished The following example shows a simple rung with a STRN instruction. Store Not or, normally closed contact. You will use a contact to start rungs will use a contact to You instruction performs this function. The output point is STR instruction, Store or, represented by output coil. enter a single contact and a single Do you ever wonder why so many PLC manufacturers always quote the scan time quote the always so many PLC manufacturers wonder why Do you ever programs utilize many boolean program?It is because most all for a 1K boolean instructions. These combinations. Since the in various series and parallel output contacts Direct don’t absolutely helpful at Handheld Programmer. are used to build simple show how these instructions The following paragraphs ladder programs. All any instructions placed after the END Normally, CPU it is the end of the program. statementThere are exceptions to this such as interrupt will not be executed. at the end of this chapter discussed this in detail. routines, etc. The instruction set Normally Closed Contact Simple Rungs END Statement Using Boolean Instructions Boolean Using Standard RLL

Instructions 5–6 Parallel Elements Midline Outputs inSeries Contacts DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions are STRX0,ANDX1,followedbyOUTY0. example Use theANDinstructiontojointwoormorecontactsinseries.Thefollowing The instructionswouldbeSTRX0,ORX1,followedbyOUTY0. this. Thefollowingexampleshowstwocontactsinparallelandasingleoutputcoil. You mayalsohavetojoincontactsinparallel.TheORinstructionallowsyoudo AND instructiontocontinuearungwithmoreconditionaloutputs. conditional onothercontacts.Thefollowingexampleshowshowyoucanusethe Sometimes itisnecessarytousemidlineoutputsgetadditionalthatare X0 X0 X0 X1 shows twocontactsinseriesandasingleoutputcoil.Theinstructionsused X1 X1 Direct Direct Direct OT2EapeHandheld Mnemonics SOFT32 Example HandheldMnemonics SOFT32 Example OT2EapeHandheld Mnemonics SOFT32 Example X2 X3 OUT END OUT END OUT END OUT OUT Y0 Y0 Y0 Y2 Y1 END OUT Y2 AND X3 OUT Y1 AND X2 OUT Y0 AND X1 STR X0 END OUT Y0 AND X1 STR X0 END OUT Y0 OR X1 STR X0 Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–7 STR X0 STR X1 OR X2 ANDSTR OUT Y0 END STR X0 AND X1 STR X2 AND X3 ORSTR OUT Y0 END Handheld Mnemonics Y0 OUT END Boolean Instructions Boolean Y0 Y0 END OUT OUT END Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. X5 X4 SOFT32 Example Direct SOFT32 Example Mnemonics Handheld X1 X2 X2 X3 X6 necessary to join several groups of series elements in parallel. The elements in parallel. groups of series to join several necessary Direct X3 X1 stack. Any other STR instructions on the boolean stack are pushed down a stack. Any other STR instructions on the boolean stack are pushed are limits to how many elements you can include in a rung. This is because the are limits to how many elements you can include in a rung. This is because X2 X0 X0 X0 X1 There logic elements. DL205 CPUs use an 8-level boolean stack to evaluate the various logic for the rung. The boolean stack is a temporary storage area that solves the Each time you enter a STR instruction, the the top of the instruction is placed on boolean the boolean stack level. The ANDSTR, and ORSTR instructions combine levels of when they are encountered. Since the boolean stack is only eight levels, an error will levels of the occur if the CPU encounters a rung that uses more than the eight boolean stack. You can combine the various types of series and parallel branches to solve most any can combine the various types of series and parallel branches to You example shows a simple combination network. application problem. The following You can also join one or more parallel branches in series. The And Store (ANDSTR) branches in series. The And can also join one or more parallel You shows a simple network this operation. The following example instruction allows parallel contacts. with contact branches in series with Quite often it is a Or shows example operation. The following allows this (ORSTR) instruction Store joined in parallel. of series elements consisting simple network Boolean Stack Combination Networks Joining Parallel Branches in Series Joining Series Joining in Branches Parallel Standard RLL

Instructions 5–8 Boolean Comparative DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 ANDSTR STRX2 ORSTR STRX1 STR X0 STR 8 3 2 1 8 3 STRX0 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 STRX0 1 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions X1 OR(X2ANDX3) X0 AND(NOTX5ORX4)[X1(X2X3)] X0 S S STR The followingexampleshowshowthebooleanstackisusedtosolvelogic. The equal to,nottoorgreaterthan,and lessthan. evaluation oftwo4-digitvaluesusingbooleancontacts. Thevalidevaluationsare: quickly andeasilycomparetwonumbers.The ComparativeBooleanprovides The DL205CPUsprovideComparativeBoolean instructionsthatallowyouto STR energize. value 1234,Y3will constant the in VmemorylocationV1400isequalto In thefollowingexamplewhenvalue X5 X2 S S X1 8 7 6 5 4 3 STRX0 2 STRX1 1 AND X4 8 3 STRX0 2 1 AND ORSTR OR X4 AND[X1OR(X2X3)] X3 AND S S X4 6 5 4 STRX0 3 STRX1 2 STRX2 1 8 7 ANDSTR OUT Y0 ORNOT X5 8 3 2 1 10 K1234 V1400 STR X0 NOT X5ORX4AND[X1(X2X3)] Output AND X3 6 5 4 STRX0 3 STRX1 2 ANDX3 X2 1 8 7 S S OUT Y3 Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–9 X0 X1 X0 X1 longer to execute _ Y30 Y37 I/O Point X0 Changes _ Y20 Y27 _ any regular instructions that any regular instructions Y10 Y17 ON Boolean Instructions Boolean OFF OFF OFF _ Y0 Y7 _ X30 X37 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard instead reads the instead reads DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. _ X20 X27 _ X10 X17 e CPU reads the inputs from Immediate instruction does Immediate image use the input not but register, module status from the immediately. the local base and stores the the image status in an input register. Th _ X0 X7 age register. Therefore, Therefore, age register. X0 OFF Y0 X1 OFF X2 ON Diagnostics Read Inputs ...... Write Outputs Write Input Image Register I X0 OFF X128 function is not normally done until the read inputs or the write outputs done until the read inputs function is not normally Write Outputs to Specialty I/O Write Solve the Application Program Solve the Read Inputs from Specialty I/O CPU Scan CPU Even though the immediate input instruction reads the most current status immediate input instruction reads Even though the portion of the CPU cycle. The immediate instructions take cycle. The immediate instructions portion of the CPU will still use the image register values. Any immediate instructions that follow register values. Any immediate will still use the image the module, it only uses the results to solve that one instruction. It does not use uses the results to solve that one the module, it only NOTE: from the the im new status to update The DL205 CPUs usually can complete an operation cycle in a matter of cycle in a an operation can complete CPUs usually The DL205 wait a few not be able to you may in some applications However, milliseconds. Immediate CPUs offer The DL205 I/O update occurs. until the next milliseconds directly that allow reading instructions are special boolean outputs which input and of the program execution portion writing directly to outputs during from inputs and or output is normally done during the input may recall that this the CPU cycle. You update follow will output instruction access the module again to update the status. The immediate and update the image register. will write the status to the module because the program execution is interrupted while the CPU reads or writes the execution is interrupted while because the program module. This cycle. portion of the CPU Immediate Boolean Immediate Standard RLL 5–10 Instructions (STR) Store Boolean Instructions (STRN) Store Not DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 4 4 240 240 4 4 250–1 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 4 260 4 260 4 Direct Direct In thefollowingStoreNotexample,wheninputX1 isoff outputY2willenergize. In thefollowingStore Global Global Special Relay Counter Timer Stage Control Relays Outputs Inputs DataTypeOperand memory location. memory the associatedimageregisterpoint or the contactwillbeoppositestateof anormallyclosedcontact.Statusof with rung oranadditionalbranchina The location. memory associated imageregisterpointor contact willbethesamestateas opencontact.Statusofthe normally or anadditionalbranchinarungwith The Storeinstructionbeginsanewrung SOFT32 SOFT32

X1 X1 Store Notinstructionbeginsa new GY GX SP CT C A S Y X T

example, wheninputX1ison,outputY2willenergize. 0–117, 540–577 DL230 Range 0–377 0–377 0–177 0–177 0–77 0–77 aaa – – OUT OUT Y2 Y2 0–137 540–617 DL240 Range 0–177 0–177 0–777 0–377 0–177 0–177 aaa Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld – – STRN OUT OUT STR DL250–1 Range 0–137 540–717 2 1 2 1 0–1777 0–1777 0–177 0–377 0–777 0–777 aaa – – ENT ENT ENT ENT Aaaa Aaaa 0–137 540–717 DL260 Range 0–3777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–1777 0–377 0–377 aaa Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–11 bb BCD, 0 to 15 BCD, 0 to 15 DL260 Range Aaaa.bb Aaaa.bb -memory location V1400 aaa 0 0 All ( See p. 3–53) All ( See p. 3–53) Boolean Instructions Boolean 0 0 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 4 4 bb BCD, 0 to 15 BCD, 0 to 15 1 1 Y2 Y2 OUT OUT DL250–1 Range V V Status of the Status of ord example, when bit 12 of V ENT ENT aaa branch in a rung branch in All (See p 3–52) All (See p.3–52 ) 2 2 ENT ENT Bit-of-W

B A PB 1 2 B 2 1 B open contact. open contact. additional branch in a rung with additional branch K K SHFT SHFT will be opposite the state of the bit will be opposite the Store Not instruction begins a new

B1400.12 B1400.12 STR OUT OUT STRN Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT32 In the following Store Not Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location example, when bit 12 of V-memory In the following Store Not Bit-of-Word output Y2 will energize. V1400 is off, In the following Store with a normally The an rung or a Status of the normally closed contact. contact referenced memory in the associated location. The a begins instruction Store Bit-of-Word new or an rung additional is on, output Y2 will energize. contact will be the same state as the bit state as the will be the same contact referenced memory in the associated location. DirectSOFT32 4 4 260 260 4 4 250–1 250–1 5 5 240 240 5 5 230 230 Store Not Bit-of-Word (STRNB) Store Bit-of-Word Store Bit-of-Word (STRB) Standard RLL 5–12 Instructions (OR) Or (ORN) Or Not DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 4 4 240 240 4 4 250–1 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 4 260 4 260 4 Direct Direct energize. In thefollowingOrNotexample,wheninputX1 isonorX2off, outputY5 will In thefollowingOrexample,wheninputX1orX2ison,outputY5willenergize. Global Global Special Relay Counter Timer Stage Control Relays Outputs Inputs DataTypeOperand The OrNot The Or memory location. memory the associatedimageregisterpoint or the contactwillbeoppositestateof contactinarung.Thestatusof another closedcontactinparallelwith normally location. memory associated imageregisterpointor contact willbethesamestateas contact inarung.Thestatusofthe open contactinparallelwithanother SOFT32 SOFT32 X2 X1 X2 X1

instruction logicallyorsanormally

instruction logicallyors a GY GX SP CT C A S Y X T 0–117, 540–577 DL230 Range 0–377 0–377 0–177 0–177 0–77 0–77 aaa – – OUT OUT Y5 Y5 0–137 540–617 DL240 Range 0–177 0–177 0–777 0–377 0–177 0–177 aaa Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld – – ORN OUT STR OUT STR OR DL250–1 Range 0–137 540–717 5 2 1 5 2 1 0–1777 0–1777 0–177 0–377 0–777 0–777 aaa – – Aaaa Aaaa ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT 0–137 540–717 DL260 Range 0–3777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–1777 0–377 0–377 aaa Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–13 output bb 0 BCD 0 BCD, 0 to 15 0 0 V1400 is off, DL260 Range 4 4 Aaaa.bb Aaaa.bb aaa All (See p. 3–53) All (See p. 3–53) Boolean Instructions Boolean 1 1 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. V V bb BCD when input X1 or bit 7 of V1400 is on, output when input X1 or bit 7 of V1400 is BCD, 0 to 15 ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT Y7 Y7 OUT OUT B 1 7 7 1 7 7 B DL250–1 Range aaa K K SHFT SHFT All (See p.3–52) All (See p. 3–52) it-of-Word example, when input X1 or bit 7 of of example, when input X1 or bit 7 it-of-Word OR STR STR OUT OUT ORN Bit-of-Word instruction Bit-of-Word B A PB Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Or Bit-of-Word example, Or Bit-of-Word

a normally closed contact in a normally closed the contact will be opposite the the contact will be Bit-of-Word instruction logically instruction Bit-of-Word

X1 X1 B1400.7 B1400.7 The Or in parallel open contact ors a normally rung. Status of contact in a with another thesame state as the contact will be the the associated memory bit referenced in location. state of the bit referenced in the state of the bit associated memory location. The Or Not The Or logically ors contact in a rung. parallel with another Status of Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer Y7 will energize. Y5 will energize. In the following Or B In the following DirectSOFT32 DirectSOFT32 4 260 4 260 4 4 250–1 250–1 5 5 240 240 5 5 230 230 Or Not Bit-of-Word (ORNB) Or Bit-of-Word (ORB) Standard RLL 5–14 Instructions (AND) And (ANDN) And Not DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 4 4 240 240 4 4 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 250–1 4 4 260 260 4 4 Direct Direct energize. In thefollowingAndNotexample,wheninputX1 isonandX2off outputY5will thefollowingAndexample,wheninputX1 In Global Global Special Relay Counter Timer Stage Control Relays Outputs Inputs DataTypeOperand memory location. memory the associatedimageregisterpoint or the contactwillbeoppositestateof contactinarung.Thestatusof another closedcontactinserieswith normally The AndNotinstructionlogicallyandsa The And memory location. memory associated imageregisterpointor contactwillbethesamestateas the contactinarung.Thestatusof another opencontactinserieswith normally SOFT32 SOFT32 X1 X1

instruction logicallyands a X2 X2 GY GX SP CT C A S Y X T 0–117, 540–577 DL230 Range 0–377 0–377 0–177 0–177 0–77 0–77 aaa – – OUT OUT Y5 Y5 0–137 540–617 DL240 Range 0–177 0–177 0–777 0–377 0–177 0–177 aaa Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld – – ANDN OUT OUT AND STR STR and X2areonoutput DL250–1 Range 0–137 540–717 5 2 1 5 2 1 0–1777 0–1777 0–177 0–377 0–777 0–777 aaa – – ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT Y5 will energize. Y5 will Aaaa Aaaa 0–137 540–717 DL260 Range 0–3777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–1777 0–377 0–377 aaa Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–15 bb BCD BCD, 0 to 15 Aaaa.bb Aaaa.bb DL260 Range aaa 0 0 All (See p. 3–53) All (See p. 3–53) Boolean Instructions Boolean 0 0 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. bb 4 4 BCD BCD, 0 to 15 1 1 Y5 Y5 OUT OUT ord example, when input X1 is on and bit 4 of V1400 DL250–1 Range V V aaa All (See p.3–52) All (See p. 3–52) ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT B A PB 1 5 5 4 4 B B 1 B1400.4 B1400.4 another contact in a rung. The another contact Bit-of-Word instruction logically instruction Bit-of-Word

K K ands a normally closed contact in closed contact ands a normally SHFT SHFT X1 X1 STR OUT OUT STR AND ANDN Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes is off output Y5 will energize. is off In the following And Not Bit-of-W In the following And Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 and bit 4 of V1400 is on example, In the following And Bit-of-Word output Y5 will energize. The And Not Bit-of-Word instruction Bit-of-Word The And Not logically series with will be opposite the status of the contact bit referenced in the state of the associated memory location. The And contact in series normally open ands a rung. The status contact in a with another of state as the will be the same the contact the associated memory bit referenced in location. DirectSOFT32 DirectSOFT32 4 4 260 260 4 4 250–1 250–1 5 5 240 240 5 5 230 230 And Not Bit-of-Word (ANDNB) And Bit-of-Word (ANDB) Standard RLL 5–16 Instructions (AND STR) And Store (OR STR) Or Store DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 4 4 240 240 4 4 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 250–1 4 4 260 260 4 4 Direct Direct have beenandedwiththebranchconsistingofcontactX1. In thefollowing thefollowing In ored withthebranchconsistingofX3andX4. instruction. mustbeginwiththe branches Store ofarunginparallel.Both branches OrStore The instruction. mustbeginwiththe branches Store two branchesofarunginseries.Both The AndStore SOFT SOFT X3 X1 X1

instruction logicallyorstwo

And Storeexample,thebranchconsistingofcontactsX2,X3,andX4

X4 X2 X2

Or Store instruction logicallyands X4 X3

example, the branch consistingofX1andX2havebeen the example, OUT OUT Y5 Y5 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld ANDST ORST OUT AND AND AND OUT STR STR STR STR OR ENT ENT À 4 2 4 3 2 5 3 1 5 1 Á À ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT Á OUT OUT Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–17 aaa 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–3777 0–3777 DL260 Range OUT Aaaa ENT ENT ENT – – aaa 0–777 0–777 0–1777 5 1 2 DL250–1 Range Boolean Instructions Boolean Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. STR OUT OUT – – Handheld Programmer Keystrokes aaa 0–177 0–177 0–377 DL240 Range Y10 Y10 OUT OUT Y2 Y5 OUT OUT – – aaa 0–177 0–177 0–377 DL230 Range example the program contains two Out instructions using the Out instructions using example the program contains two example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 and Y5 will energize. example, when input X1 is on, output

Y X C A GX GY instruction reflects the status of reflects the status instruction

logic referencing Y10. X1 will override the Y10 output being controlled by X0. logic referencing Y10. X1 will override since only the last Out instruction in Out instruction since only the last X1 X0 X1 SOFT the program will control the physical the program will output point. The Out the outputs the discrete and rung (on/off) image to the specified state (on/off) registermemory location. point or referencing the Multiple Out instructions location should not be same discrete used Outputs Control Relays Global Global Operand Data Type Inputs Direct In the following Out samecontrolled by the last location (Y10). The physical output of Y10 is ultimately rung of same location should not be used avoid this situation, multiple outputs using the To an output controlled by multiple inputs see the in programming. If you need to have OROUT instruction on page 5–19. In the following Out 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 4 230 Out (OUT) Standard RLL 5–18 Instructions (OUTB) Out Bit-of-Word DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 250–1 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 4 260 4 DirectSOFT32 The Out location mustnotbeusedinprogramming. state controlledbyX0.To avoidthissituation,multipleoutputsusingthesame ultimately using thesamebitinmemoryword.Thefinalstate3 of V1400 is The followingOut 6 ofV1401willturnon. thefollowingOut In control thestatusofbit. lastOutinstructionintheprogramwill the generally shouldnotbeusedsinceonly referencing Multiple OutBit-of-Word instructions bit inthereferencedmemory location. the discrete(on/off) statetothespecified statusoftherung(on/off)the andoutputs Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld OUT OUT STR X1 X1 X0 SHFT SHFT

K K Bit-of-Word instruction reflects controlled bythelastrungoflogicreferencingit.X1willoverride the samebitofword B 6 B 3 1 PB A B

Bit-of-Word examplecontainstwoOutBit-of-Word instructions

Bit-of-W ENT ENT ENT All (Seep.3–52) All (Seep.3–52) aaa ord example,wheninputX1ison,bit3ofV1400and V V V1400 DL250–1 Range V1400 B1400.3 B1401.6 OUT OUT OUT OUT 1 1 K3 K3 BCD, 0to15 BCD 4 4 bb 0 0 All (Seep.3–53) All (Seep.3–53) 1 0 aaa Aaaa.bb DL260 Range OUT BCD, 0to15 BCD bb Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–19 ENT ENT 2 2 aaa 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–3777 0–3777 ENT DL260 Range T ENT ENT A aaa A ENT ENT OR OUT 2 1 O – – aaa ENT ENT ENT ENT 0–777 0–777 0–1777 DL250–1 Range Boolean Instructions Boolean 1 5 5 4 N 3 3 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. OUT STR SHFT – – Handheld Programmer Keystrokes aaa 0–177 0–177 0–377 STR STR INST# INST# Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DL240 Range Y2 OUT rung is any Y2 Y2 – – OR OUT OR OUT aaa 0–177 0–177 0–377 DL230 Range X Y C A GX GY If the status of X4 X1 X1 contacts controlling the output are contacts controlling SOFT32 The Or Out instruction has been Out instruction The Or than 1 rung of to used more designed a single output. logic to control discrete referencing Or Out instructions Multiple thesince same output coil may be used, all ored together. on, the output will also be on. on, the output will Control Relays Global Global Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs irect In the following example when X1 is off, Y2 will energize. This is because the Not In the following example when X1 is off, instruction inverts the status of the rung at the Not instruction. The Not instruction inverts the status of The Not instruction inverts the the rung at the point of the instruction. In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize. In the following example, when X1 DirectSOFT32 D 4 4 260 260 4 4 250–1 250–1 5 4 240 240 5 4 230 230 Not (NOT) Or Out (OR OUT) Standard RLL 5–20 Instructions (PD) Differential Positive DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 4 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 Direct support theSTRNDinstruction. support immediately beforethePDinstruction.TheDL250–1andDL260CPUs instruction NOTE: energize foronescan. In thefollowingexample,everytimeX1ismakesanoff toontransition,C0will Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Control Relays Outputs Inputs DataTypeOperand CPU scan. transition, input logicproducesanoff toon typically The PositiveDifferentialinstruction is SHFT STR SOFT32 X1 C0 To generatea“one–shot”pulseonanon–to–off transition,placeaNOT P known asaoneshot.Whenthe the outputwillenergizeforone SHFT 1 C A Y X ENT D DL230 Range 0–377 0–177 0–177 aaa 0 OUT LD V3000 V2000 ENT PD C0 DL240 Range 0–377 0–177 0–177 aaa DL250–1 Range 0–1777 0–777 0–777 aaa A aaa PD DL260 Range 0–3777 0–1777 0–1777 aaa Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–21 D D ENT ENT Aaaa Aaaa 4 4 P N ENT ENT 1 1 Y Y SHFT SHFT Boolean Instructions Boolean aaa 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–3777 X X Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard STR STR OUT OUT DL260 Range DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Y4 Y4 OUT OUT – – aaa 0–777 0–777 0–377 0–177 0–1777 0–1777 DL250–1 Range the contact remains the contact remains an additional branch an additional an additional branch T X Y S C A CT GX GY Thereafter, Thereafter, Thereafter, new rung or new rung or new rung X1 X1 Inputs Outputs Control Relays Stage Timer Counter Global Global Operand Data Type In the following example, each time X1 is makes an On-to-Off transition, Y4 will In the following example, each time X1 is makes an On-to-Off energize for one scan. In the following example, each time X1 is makes an Off-to-On transition, Y4 will In the following example, each time X1 is makes an Off-to-On energize for one scan. in a rung with a normally open contact. with a normally in a rung one CPU scan closes for The contact of the associated image when the state register makes an Off-to-On point transition. transition Off-to-On open until the next the contact represents (the symbol inside the function is sometimes transition). This called a “one-shot”. The Store Negative Differential instruction begins a contact. in a rung with a normally closed scan The contact closes for one CPU image when the state of the associated register point makes an On-to-Off transition. transition open until the next On-to-Off (the symbol inside the contact represents the transition). The Store Positive Differential instruction Positive Differential The Store begins a DirectSOFT32 DirectSOFT32 4 4 260 260 4 4 250–1 250–1 5 5 240 240 5 5 230 230 Store Negative Differential (STRND) Store Positive Differential (STRPD) Standard RLL 5–22 Instructions (ORPD) Differential Or Positive (ORND) Differential Or Negative DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 5 5 240 240 5 5 250–1 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 4 260 4 260 4 DirectSOFT32 DirectSOFT32 another On-to-Offanother transition. Thereafter,scan. itremainsopen until On-to-Off i associated status ofthecontactwillbeopenuntil parallel logically orsanormallyopencontactin another Off-to-Ontransition. another Thereafter,scan. itremainsopen until Off-to-On i associated status ofthecontactwillbeopenuntil parallel logically orsanormallyopencontactin The Or when X2transitionsfromOntoOff. thefollowingexample,Y5willenergizewheneverX1 In when X2transitionsfromOff toOn. thefollowingexample,Y5willenergizewheneverX1 In The Or Global Global Counter Timer Stage Control Relays Outputs Inputs DataTypeOperand X2 X1 X2 X1

with anothercontactinarung.The with anothercontactinarung.The Negative Differential instruction Positive Differentialinstruction transition, closingit transition, closingit mage registerpointmakesan mage registerpointmakesan GY GX CT C A S Y X T DL250–1 Range 0–1777 0–1777 0–177 0–377 0–777 0–777 aaa for oneCPU for oneCPU – – OUT OUT Y5 Y5 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld OUT STR OUT STR OR OR X X DL260 Range 0–3777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–1777 0–377 0–377 aaa SHFT SHFT Y X 2 Y X 2 is on,orforoneCPUscan is on,orforoneCPUscan ENT ENT P 5 1 N 5 1 Aaaa Aaaa ENT ENT ENT ENT D D Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–23 Aaaa Aaaa D D ENT ENT ENT ENT 5 1 5 1 P N ENT ENT 2 2 X Y X(IN) SHFT SHFT Y(OUT) Boolean Instructions Boolean aaa X 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–3777 STR STR OUT AND OUT AND X(IN) Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL260 Range Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Y5 Y5 OUT OUT – – for one CPU for one CPU aaa 0–777 0–777 0–377 0–177 0–1777 0–1777 DL250–1 Range T X Y S A C CT GX GY X2 X2 mage register point makes an mage register point mage register point makes an mage register point transition, closing it transition, closing transition, closing it Positive Differential instruction Differential Positive Negative Differential instruction Negative Differential

with another contact in a rung. The contact in a with another with another contact in a rung. The with another contact X1 X1 Global Global Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs Control Relays Stage Timer Counter scan. Thereafter, it remains open until it remains open scan. Thereafter, anothertransition. Off-to-On logically ands a normally open contact in ands a normally logically parallel be open until the the contact will status of associated i Off-to-On In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2 transitions from On to Off. In on and example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is the following to On. X2 transitions from Off The And normally open contact in logically ands a parallel will be open until the status of the contact associated i On-to-Off until open it remains scan. Thereafter, transition. another On-to-Off The And DirectSOFT32 DirectSOFT32 4 260 4 260 4 4 250–1 250–1 5 5 240 240 5 5 230 230 And Negative Differential (ANDND) And Positive Differential (ANDPD) Standard RLL 5–24 Instructions (SET) Set (RST) Reset DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 4 4 240 240 4 4 250–1 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 4 260 4 260 4 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct Direct STR SET RST STR de–energized. In thefollowingexamplewhenX1ison,Y5 throughY22willberesetor In thefollowingexamplewhenX1ison,Y5throughY22willenergize. NOTE: * Timer andcounteroperanddatatypesarenotvalidusingtheSetinstruction. Global Global Counter* Timer* Stage Control Relays Outputs Inputs Operand DataType for theinputtoremainon. isresetitnotnecessary point/location locations.Oncethe points/memory or arangeofimageregisters imageregisterpoint/memorylocation an The Resetinstructionresetsorturnsoff The Set Set instructiontoremainon. necessary not is resetusingtheResetinstruction.It point/location is locations.Oncethe points/memory a consecutiverangeofimageregister image registerpoint/memorylocation or SOFT SOFT X1 X1 You cannotsetinputs(X’s) thatareassignedtoinputmodules

instruction setsorturnsonan 5 1 5 1 ENT ENT for theinputcontrolling GY GX CT set itwillremainonuntil C A S Y X T 2 2 DL230 Range 0–377 0–177 0–177 0–377 2 0–77 0–77 aaa 2 – – 5Y22 Y5 Y22 Y5 ENT ENT RST SET DL240 Range 0–377 0–177 0–177 0–177 0–177 0–777 aaa – – DL250–1 Range A aaa A aaa 0–1777 0–1777 0–777 0–777 0–177 0–377 aaa – – RST SET memory range Optional memory range Optional aaa aaa DL260 Range 0–3777 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–3777 0–1777 0–377 0–377 aaa Standard Standard RLL Instructions 5–25 bb BCD BCD, 0 to 15 DL260 Range SET RST A aaa.bb A Aaaa.bb aaa 0 All (See p. 3–53) All (See p. 3–53) 0 Boolean Instructions Boolean 0 0 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. bb BCD 4 4 BCD, 0 to 15 1 1 SET RST B1400.1 V1400.1 DL250–1 Range V aaa V All (See p.3–52) All (See p. 3–52) ENT ENT ENT ENT memory location. Once memory B A PB reset it is not necessary for reset it is not necessary 1 B 1 2 B 1 bit in a V Bit-of-Word instruction sets or sets instruction Bit-of-Word

K K SHFT SHFT X2 X1 Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer SET STR In the following example when X2 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is reset to the off state. turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is reset to the off In the following example when X2 In the following example when X1 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is set to the on state. In the following example when X1 turns on a a turns on instruction resets The Reset Bit-of-Word location. a bit in a V memory or turns off Once the bit is on. the input to remain The Set the it is reset will remain on until bit is set it instruction. It Reset Bit-of-Word using the for the input controlling is not necessary to remain instruction the Set Bit-of-Word on. STR RST Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT32 DirectSOFT32 4 4 260 260 4 4 250–1 250–1 5 5 240 240 5 5 230 230 Reset Bit-of-Word (RSTB) Set Bit-of-Word (SETB) Standard RLL 5–26 Instructions (PAUSE) Pause DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 4 250–1 Boolean Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 4 260 4 module. Theexecutionoftheladderprogramwillnotbeaffected. thefollowingexample,whenX1isON,Y10–Y17willbeturnedOFFatoutput In Direct output module. Pause outputs intherangespecified update theimageregisterhowever ladder programwillcontinuetorun and output The Pauseinstructiondisables the Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Outputs DataTypeOperand INST# STR SOFT X1 update onarangeofoutputs.The instruction willbeturnedoff at the 9 6 1 A Y ENT 0 1 Y17 Y10 PAUSE ENT DL230 Range 0–177 aaa ENT DL240 Range 1 0–177 aaa 0 DL250–1 Range 0–777 1 aaa Y aaa PAUSE 7 ENT aaa DL260 Range 0–1777 aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–27 All bbb 0–FFFF All V mem. 5060, Y3 (See page 3–53) (See page 3–53) DL260 Range 0 –– –– All aaa 0 B bbb B bbb A A (See page 3–53) 0 0 A A V aaa V aaa 0 0 All bbb ENT ENT A 0–FFFF A All V mem. Comparative Boolean Comparative (See page 3–52) (See page 3–52) 2 3 0 2 C D C A Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. DL250–1 Range 3 6 –– –– ENT All aaa ENT D G (See page 3–52) 3 4 9 4 0 3 E J D E A D 4 5 SHFT All E bbb SHFT F 0–FFFF All V mem. (See page 3–51) (See page 3–51) STR OUT OUT $ GX STRN SP GX Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DL240 Range –– –– All aaa (See page 3–51) Y3 Y3 OUT OUT Bbbb.

–– All bbb 0–FFFF (See page 3–50) The Store If Equal instruction begins a instruction begins The Store If Equal rung a in branch new rung or additional open comparative with a normally will be on when contact. The contact . =Bbbb Vaaa The Not Equal instruction begins Store If a branch in a rung new rung or additional with a normally closed comparative contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa In the value in V memory location V2000 = 4933 , Y3 will the following example, when energize. In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 will energize. DL230 Range –– –– All aaa (See page 3–50) 4 4 260 260 V P K B 4 4 250–1 250–1 4 4 240 240 SOFT32 SOFT32 V2000 K5060 V2000 K4933 4 4 Pointer Constant V memory Operand Data Type 230 230 Store If Not Equal (STRNE) Store If Equal Store If (STRE) Comparative Boolean Direct Direct Standard RLL 5–28 Instructions Direct (ORE) Or IfEqual (ORNE) Or IfNotEqual DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Direct 230 230 Constant Pointer V memory Type Data Operand 4 4 20 K2500 V2002 K3916 V2000 20 K2345 V2002 K4500 V2000 SOFT32 SOFT 240 240 4 4 Comparative Boolean Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 250–1 4 4 B K P V 260 260 4 4 (See page3–50) aaa All –– –– DL230 Range V2002 In thefollowingexample,whenvalueinVmemorylocationV2000=3916or V2002 =2345,Y3willenergize. In thefollowingexample,whenvalueinVmemorylocationV2000=4500or contact willbeonwhenVaaa =Bbbb. parallel withanothercontact.The opencomparativecontactin normally The OrIfEqualinstructionconnectsa contact willbeonwhenVaaa parallel withanothercontact.The normallyclosedcomparativecontactin a OrIfNotEqualinstructionconnects The (See page3–50) 0–FFFF bbb All –– 2500,Y3willenergize. OUT OUT Y3 Y3 (See page3–51) aaa All –– –– DL240 Range Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld GX C R D $ GX C Q E $ ORN OUT OUT STR STR OR 4 2 2 3 (See page3–51) (See page3–51) All Vmem. F J D F SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 0–FFFF bbb 5 9 3 5 All Bbbb. D A E B E D E E A E 3 0 1 3 0 4 4 4 4 4 (See page3–52) A G F A ENT ENT 0 6 5 0 aaa All –– –– DL250–1 Range C C C C ENT ENT ENT ENT 2 2 2 2 (See page3–52) (See page3–52) A A A A All Vmem. 0–FFFF 0 0 0 0 bbb All aaa V aaa V A A A A 0 0 0 0 (See page3–53) C A C A B bbb B bbb 2 2 0 0 aaa All –– –– DL260 Range (See page3–53) (See page3–53) All Vmem. 0–FFFF bbb All Standard RLL Instructions 5–29 All bbb 0–FFFF All V mem. (See page 3–53) (See page 3–53) B bbb B bbb DL260 Range –– –– All aaa 0 0 2 2 V aaa V aaa A C A C (See page 3–53) 0 0 0 0 A A A A All bbb 0 0 0 0 0–FFFF All V mem. Comparative Boolean Comparative A A A A (See page 3–52) (See page 3–52) 2 2 2 2 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard ENT ENT ENT ENT C C C C DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. DL250–1 Range –– –– All aaa 0 5 0 0 ENT ENT A F A A (See page 3–52) 4 4 4 4 4 3 0 3 5 0 D E A E E D E F E A All 5 0 3 5 bbb 0–FFFF SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT A D F F All V mem. (See page 3–51) (See page 3–51) 2 2 Bbbb 2 5 STR STR OUT OUT AND ANDN GX $ F V C GX $ C W C DL240 Range –– –– All aaa (See page 3–51) Not Equal instruction connects Not Equal instruction Y3 Y3 OUT OUT 2500, Y3 will energize. –– All bbb 0–FFFF (See page 3–50) The And If comparative contact in a normally closed contact. The contact series with another Vaaa will be on when The And If Equal instruction connects a If Equal instruction The And in normally comparative contact open The contact another contact. series with = Bbbb. when Vaaa will be on In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 = 2550 and In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 V2002 In the following example, when the value in V memory location V2000 = 5000 and In the following example, when the V2002 = 2345, Y3 will energize. DL230 Range –– –– All aaa V2002 K2500 V2002 K2345 (See page 3–50) 4 4 260 260 V P K B 4 4 250–1 250–1 4 4 240 240 SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V2000 K2550 V2000 K5000 4 4 Pointer Constant Operand Data Type V memory 230 230 And If Not Equal (ANDNE) And If Equal (ANDE) Direct Direct Standard RLL 5–30 Instructions Direct Direct (STR) Store (STRN) Store Not DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 Counter Timer Constant Pointer V memory Type Data Operand 4 4 20 K4050 V2000 20 K1000 V2000 SOFT32 SOFT32 240 240 4 4 Comparative Boolean Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 250–1 4 4 CT B K P V T 260 260 4 4 (See page3–50) 0–77 0–77 aaa All –– –– DL230 Range energize. thefollowingexample,whenvalueinVmemorylocationV2000<4050,Y3will In will energize. In thefollowingexample,whenvalueinVmemorylocationV2000 on whenAaaa

programs butcan be programs : Thediscrete status (CTaaa): Specifies 0–177 0–177 orV41140–41147 aaa –– –– –– DL240 Range 1000–1177 2000–3777 2000–3777 0–9999 bbb –– 0–177 orV41140–V41147 0–177 aaa –– –– –– DL250–1 Range counter instruction. current valuearenotspecifiedin the The counterdiscretestatusbitand the 1000–1177 10000–17777 10000–17777 1400–7377 1400–7377 0–9999 bbb –– Preset SGCNT Counter # B bbb 0–377 0–377 orV41100–41157 aaa –– –– –– Taaa CT DL260 Range 1000–1377 10000–37777 10000–37777 1400–7377 1400–7377 0–9999 bbb –– Standard RLL Instructions 5–49 2 2 C C ENT MLR MLR T T 7 H SHFT SHFT MLR ENT T 2 2 ENT ENT C C 5 ENT SHFT F 5 4 ENT ENT SHFT SHFT Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard Counting diagram Counting E F Counting diagram Counting 0 2 2 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A C C 2 3 D C 1 Timer, Counter and Shift Register Shift and Counter Timer, SHFT SHFT B STR STR OUT OUT GX $ GX $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) 12340 12340 STR RST OUT GX $ S Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) Y3 Y5 X1 Y4 X1 Y10 CT7 RST Value Value Current Current ENT Y3 Y4 Y5 2 7 Y10 OUT OUT OUT OUT RST K3 K10 C H CT7 counts. Although this is not shown in the example, when the counter is reset counts. Although this is not shown SGCNT CT2 SGCNT CT7 CNT MLR MLR T GY T CNT ENT In stage counter CT7 to on transition, off X1 makes an example, when the following will bit CT7 3, the counter status value reaches the current by one. When increment until the will remain on status bit CT7 Y10. The counter on and energize will turn counter is reset, the When the counter RST instruction. is reset using the counter be 0. The current value for and the counter current value will off status bit will turn be held in V memory location V1007. counter CT7 will In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will off makes an In the following example, when X1 increment by one. Comparative contacts are and Y5 at used to energize Y3, Y4, different value and the current status bit will turn off using the Reset instruction, the counter will location V1007. be 0. The current value for counter CT2 will be held in V memory SHFT SHFT SHFT GY 6 2 0 2 ENT ENT ENT ENT SHFT A C G C 6 1 1 3 1 3 ENT SHFT SHFT SHFT D B G B D B 1 RST RST X1 X1 C5 CT7 S B S SOFT CT2 K3 CT2 K1 CT2 K2 SOFT 2 7 STR STR STR STR OUT SHFT SHFT GX C $ $ H $ $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Stage Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts Stage Counter Using Example Status Discrete Bits Direct Standard RLL 5–50 Instructions (UDC) Up DownCounter DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 values Countercurrent status bits Counter discrete (preset only) Constants (preset only) Pointers preset values V memoryfor Counters DataTypeOperand 240 4 250–1 Timer, CounterandShiftRegister Standard RLLInstructions 4 260 4 V /CT* CT/V A/B CT K P V (i.e., TA2). CurrentvaluesmayalsobeaccessedbytheV-memory location. NOTE: status bitforcounter2wouldbeCT2. preset value.Forexamplethediscrete on ifvalueisequaltoorgreaterthan the associated CTmemorylocation. It will be bit isaccessedbyreferencingthe Discrete StatusBit location V1005andV1006. current location + 1000.Forexample,thecounter The V-memorylocation isthecounter associated VorCTmemory locations*. word valueaccessedbyreferencingthe Current Values DL260). (Pointer (P)forDL240,DL250–1and or twoconsecutiveVmemorylocations. Preset Value the counternumber. Reference Counter Instruction Specification active countinputtofunction. being usedmustbeoff inorderfor the is0–99999999.Thecountinputnot range when theResetinputison.Thecount the Downinput.Thecounterisresetto0 counts off toontransitionoftheUpinputand This Up/DownCountercountsuponeach 0–77 0–77 orV41140–41143 aaa –– –– –– DL230 Range 1000–1077 Thecurrentvalueofacountercanbeaccessed by usingtheCTA data type down oneachoff toontransitionof value forCT5residesinVmemory 0–99999999 2000–2377 bbb –– –– (Bbbb): Constantvalue(K) : Currentcountisadouble : Thediscrete status (CTaaa): Specifies 0–177 0–177 orV41140–41147 aaa –– –– –– DL240 Range 1000–1177 0–99999999 2000–3777 2000–3777 bbb –– 0–177 orV41140–V41147 0–177 aaa available counterisCT3. used intheprogram,next counter locations.IfUDCCT1is UDC usestwoconsecutive current value.Thismeansthe V memorylocationsforthe8digit Caution :TheUDCusestwo –– –– –– DL250–1 Range counter instruction. current valuearenotspecifiedinthe The counterdiscretestatusbitandthe 1000–1177 Reset Down Up 10000–17777 10000–17777 0–99999999 1400–7377 1400–7377 UDC bbb –– B bbb Taaa CT 0–377 0–377 orV41100–41157 aaa –– –– –– DL260 Range 1000–1377 Counter # Preset 10000–37777 10000–37777 0–99999999 1400–7377 1400–7377 bbb –– Standard RLL Instructions 5–51 ferent 2 ENT C 2 MLR T C MLR SHFT T 2 ENT ENT ENT SHFT C the counter will decrement by one will decrement the counter Counting Diagram Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 4 2 0 3 Counting Diagram Counting ENT ENT SHFT E A D C DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 2 1 1 ENT SHFT X3 are off X3 are off C B B Timer, Counter and Shift Register Shift and Counter Timer, 3 STR OUT OUT $ GX GX D Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) 12340 121230 If X1 and If X1 and STR OUT GX $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) Y4 X2 X2 X3 X3 X1 Y3 X1 CT2 Value Value Current Current one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 and Y4 at dif one. Comparative contacts are used Y3 Y4 2 Y10 OUT OUT OUT ENT K3 C V2000 will increment by one. will increment When the reset (X3) turns on, the counter status bit will turn off, the current the counter status bit will turn off, When the reset (X3) turns on, the 2 0 2 UDC CT2 UDC CT2 MLR C A T C 0 when3, of the preset value value reaches on. When the count to from off X2 toggles the status bit turns on, the counter the reset X3 will turn on. When status bit counter value will be 0. and the current will turn off In the following example if X2 and X3 are off ,when X1 toggles from off to on the from off ,when X1 toggles off if X2 and X3 are example In the following counter counts. contacts will turn off. value will be 0, and the comparative In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will off makes an In the following example, when X1 increment by SHFT A 0 2 2 2 ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT C A C C 3 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 SHFT C B C D D B C D D ISG ISG AND X2 X3 X1 X1 X2 X3 CT2 V U U SOFT SOFT CTA2 K1 CTA2 K2 STR STR STR STR STR STR STR SHFT SHFT SHFT $ $ $ $ $ $ $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Up / Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts Up / Down Counter Up / Down Using Example Status Discrete Bits Direct Direct Standard RLL 5–52 Instructions (SR) Shift Register DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 4 Timer, CounterandShiftRegister Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 Control Relay DataTypeOperand control relays. depends onthenumberofavailablecontrolrelays.Theminimumblocksizeis8 bits, tobeshiftedfromrightleft.Themaximumsizeoftheshiftregisterblock bits tobeshiftedfromleftright.FromC17C0woulddefineablockofsixteen entryintheFromandTothe fields.FromC0toC17woulddefineablockofsixteen t into register With eachoff toontransitionoftheclockinput,bitswhichmakeupshift Direct S S S The ShiftRegisterhasthreecontacts. an 8bitboundary. an 8of bit boundaryandendattheof register relays. Thecontrolranges in the shift apredefinednumberofcontrol through The ShiftRegister Inputs onSuccessiveScans SOFT X3 X2 X1 all zeros. Reset —resetstheShiftRegisterto on eachlowtohightransition Clock —shiftsthebitsoneposition 0) thatwillentertheregister Data —determinesthevalue(1or he startingbitpositionin aaCokReset Clock Data A/B C 001 010 110 010 010 110 block areshiftedbyonebitpositionandthestatusofdatainputisplaced block muststartatthebeginning Reset Input Clock Input Data Input 0–377 aaa niae n–indicatesoff – indicateson DL230 Range

instruction shiftsdata 0–377 bbb SR From To the shiftregister. Thedirectionoftheshiftdependson 0–377 aaa C17 C0 0C17 C0 DL240 Range Shift RegisterBits 0–377 bbb Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld $ $ $ SHFT STR STR STR 0–1777 B S aaa RST DL250–1 Range 1 RESET CLOCK DATA H D C B SHFT 7 3 2 1 0–1777 bbb R ENT ENT ENT ENT ORN From A SR To B SHFT 0–3777 aaa aaa bbb DL260 Range 0–3777 A bbb 0 Standard RLL Instructions 5–53 The accumulator is reset to The accumulator V1410 V1400 V1410 8935 8935 8935 V1400 5026 5026 5026 Accumulator/Stack Load Accumulator/Stack Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard V1411 0000 V1401 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 6739 6739 6739 Unused accumulator bits are set to zero Acc. Acc. s complement number. s complement number. V1400 V1410 V1400 V1410 LDD OUTD LD OUT Copy data from V1400 to the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Copy data from V1400 and V1401 to the accumulator Copy data from the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1410 Copy data from the accumulator to V1410 and V1411 example, you have to use the accumulator to perform math operations to use the accumulator to perform example, you have BCD number, or a 32-bit a 2’ or BCD number, the accumulator is 32 bits and V memory locations are 16 bits the Load Double the accumulator is 32 bits and V memory BCD constants to copy data either to the accumulator from a Vmemory address BCD constants to copy data either X1 X1 Since and8 thereof) use two consecutive V memory locations or Out Double (or variations digit example if you wanted to copy For or address to the accumulator. from a Vmemory and V1401 to Vmemory location V1410 and data from Vmemory location V1400 this function would be as follows: way to perform the most efficient V1411 The accumulator in the DL205 series CPUs is a 32 bit register which is used as a which is is a 32 bit register series CPUs in the DL205 The accumulator temporarymanipulated in some for data that is being copied or storage location For manner. use up to an Since there are 32 bits, you can etc. multiply, such as add, subtract, 8-digit CPU scan. 0 at the end of every a are used to copy data from instructions and their variations The Load and Out V data from the accumulator to to copy or, to the accumulator, location V-memory to location V1400 from V-memory following example copies data The memory. Vmemory location V1410. Copying Data to the Accumulator Using the Accumulator AccumulatorInstructions Data and Output Load / Stack Standard RLL 5–54 Instructions Accumulator Data the Changing DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 X1 X1 Accumulator/Stack Load Standard RLLInstructions accumulator toV1410andV1411 Output thevaluein accumulator toV1410 Output thelower16bitsof accumulator 2bitstotheright Rotate thedatain into theaccumulator thevalue67053101 Load 4 bits(K4)totheright Shift thedatainaccumulator accumulator thevalue4935into Load LDD OUT SHFR LD OUTD ROTR V1410. value is clearedfromtheaccumulator. ThefollowingexampleloadstheconstantBCD manipulated thatmanipulatedataalsousetheaccumulator.Instructions Theresultofthe the valuetoV1410andV1411. following examplerotatesthevalue67053101twobitstorightandoutputs The locationsor 8 digitBCDconstantstomanipulatedataintheaccumulator.memory ofthedatamanipulationinstructions Some K67053101 V1410 K4935 V1410 K4 K2 4935 intotheaccumulator, shiftsthe datarigh Acc. Acc. data residesintheaccumulator. Thedatathatwasbeingmanipulated Acc. Acc. 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 00000100000000000000000000000000 0000000000000000 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 00000100000000000101100111000001 0110011100000101 will besetto0 The upper16bitsoftheaccumulator 59C1 V1411 Constant 6705 use 32bits.TheytwoconsecutiveV 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0000010010010011 0100100100110101 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 3101 0100110001000000 0011000100000001 t 4bits,andoutputstheresultto Constant 0493 4935 S V1410 8C40 S V1410 S S Shifted outof accumulator Standard RLL Instructions 5–55 Bucket Bucket Bucket Accumulator Stack Accumulator Stack Accumulator Stack 00003245 00005151 00003245 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX executed. Every time a value is executed. Every Level 1 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 1 Level 2 Accumulator/Stack Load Accumulator/Stack without the use of an Out instruction without the use of Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard deep (eight 32 bit registers). If there is a deep (eight 32 bit DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. which was in the accumulator is cleared and the 5151 3245 6363 5151 3245 XXXX 5151 6363 3245 eight levels Constant Constant Constant 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 XXXX Acc. Acc. Acc. Acc. Acc. Acc. Current Acc. value Current Acc. value Current Acc. value Previous Acc. value Previous Acc. value Previous Acc. value location when a new value is placed onto the stack, the value in new value is placed onto the stack, location when a Every Load instruction thereafter Every Load instruction stack when the next load instruction is load instruction is stack when the next that was on top of the stack is in the accumulator. The values in the stack are The values in the that was on top of the stack is in the accumulator. K6363 K3245 K5151 The upward through the stack into the accumulator. POP instruction rotates values When a POP is executed the value value shifted up one position in the stack. places a value into the accumulator and the value that was in the accumulator is that was in the accumulator the accumulator and the value places a value into nullifies the previous load accumulator stack. The Out instruction placed onto the was in the accumulator onto the does not place the value that instruction and accumulator The parameter more than one that require used for instructions stack is accumulator is used stack The accumulator to defined functionality. function or for user execute a Out the the use of is executed without type instruction than one Load when more into the places a value in the scan load instruction The first type instruction. accumulator. value in the eighth the stack and cannot be recovered. is pushed off the eighth location placed onto the accumulator stack the other values in the stack are pushed down accumulator stack the other values placed onto the one location. The accumulator is LD LD LD Load the value 6363 into the pushing the value 5151 accumulator, to the 1st stack location and the value 3245 to the 2nd stack location Load the value 5151 into the value 1234 pushing the accumulator, onto the stack Load the value 3245 into the accumulator X1 Using the Stack Accumulator Standard RLL 5–56 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 X1 Accumulator/Stack Load Standard RLLInstructions V1402 Copy datafromtheaccumulatorto V1401 Copy datafromtheaccumulatorto V1400 Copy datafromtheaccumulatorto up onelocation accumulator andmovestackvalues POP the1stvalueonstackinto up onelocation accumulator andmovestackvalues POP the1stvalueonstackinto up onelocation accumulator andmovestackvalues POP the1stvalueonstackinto POP POP POP OUT OUT OUT V1402 V1401 V1400 Previous Acc.value Previous Acc.value Previous Acc.value Current Acc.value Current Acc.value Current Acc.value Acc. Acc. Acc. Acc. Acc. Acc. XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 0000 0000 V1400 V1400 V1400 3792 4545 7930 XXXX 3792 4545 4545 7930 3792 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 00007930 00007930 00003792 Accumulator Stack Accumulator Stack Accumulator Stack Standard RLL Instructions 5–57 2635 Accumulator 2635 ficult to understand Accumulator 400 which is the HEX 400 which is the S S 0000 2000 Octal is converted to Hexadecimal 400 and loaded into the accumulator 2635 2635 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX The CPU copies the data is viewed as HEX. Use the is viewed as HEX. V3100 V3101 V2000 V2001 V2002 V2003 V2004 V2005 S S S S the value V3000 2635 2635 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 0400 2000 0400 Accumulator/Stack Load Accumulator/Stack Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard V2000 V2001 V2002 V2003 V2004 V2005 V3101 V3100 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0000 Unused accumulator bits are set to zero Acc. V3000 -memory location V2000. -memory location 0400 V3000 0400 will reference a V-memory location will reference a V-memory the Octal address V the Octal address known as indirect addressing). Pointers allow instructions to obtain data instructions Pointers allow indirect addressing). known as can be useful in ladder logic programming, but can be dif programming, in ladder logic can be useful 3000 is the pointer location. V3000 contains 3000 is the pointer location which V3100 P3000 In the DL205 V-memory addressing is in octal. However the value in the in is in octal. However the value addressing In the DL205 V-memory V3000 (P3000) contains the value 400 HEX 400 HEX. = 2000 Octal which contains the value 2635 Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V3100 Load the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with Hexadecimal equivalent to Octal 2000 (400)) Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V3000 Address instruction to move a address into the pointer location. This instruction to move a address into the pointer Address instruction OUT LD Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V3100. V3000 (P3000) contains the value 400 Hex. 400 Hex. = 2000 Octal which contains the value 2635. Load performs conversion for you. the Octal to Hexadecimal equivalent of equivalent of the lower word of the accumulator. from V2000 into The for the LDA (load address) following example is similar to the one above, except the Octal address to the Hex equivalent. instruction which automatically converts NOTE: pointer in a Load instruction. V-memory uses a pointer operand The following example location Many of the DL205 series instructions will allow Vmemory pointers as a operand. pointers as a allow Vmemory instructions will the DL205 series Many of Pointers or implement in your application if you do not have prior experience with pointers experience with not have prior if you do in your application or implement (commonly value. referenced by the pointer from Vmemory locations P 3000 P V 3100 V 3000 O 2000 OUT OUT LD LDA X1 X1 Using Pointers Standard RLL 5–58 Instructions (LD) Load DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 4 Accumulator/Stack Load Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 SP76 Discrete BitFlags Constant Pointer V memory DataTypeOperand Direct accumulator andoutputtoV2010. accumulator In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,valueinV2000willbeloadedinto instruction ontotheaccumulatorstack. NOTE: Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld set to0. The upper16bitsoftheaccumulatorare into thelower16bitsofaccumulator. a Vmemorylocationor4digitconstant, that l Loadinstructionis The GX C $ SHFT OUT STR 2 SOFT32 X1 oads thevalue(Aaaa),whichiseither ANDST A L A K P V Two consecutiveLoadinstructionswillplacethevalueoffirstload 0 B A D SHFT All (Seepage3–50) 0 3 1 (See page3–50) DL230 Range on whenthevalueloadedintoaccumulatorbyanyinstructioniszero. Description All Vmem. 0–FFFF V2010 16 bitsoftheaccumulatorto Copy thevalueinlower accumulator the lower16bitsof Load thevalueinV2000into aaa V A ENT AND 0 OUT LD C V2010 V2000 ENT a 16bitinstruction 2 A All (Seepage3–51) 0 (See page3–51) DL240 Range All Vmem. 0–FFFF B aaa 1 A 0 ENT All (Seepage3–52) DL250–1 Range (See page3–52) All Vmem. 0–FFFF bits aresettozero The unusedaccumulator aaa Acc. 0000 LD All (Seepage3–53) (See page3–53) A aaa DL260 Range 8935 8935 All Vmem 8935 0–FFFF V2000 aaa V2010 Standard RLL Instructions 5–59 V2010 V2000 5026 5026 5026 aaa 0–FFFF All V mem DL260 Range A aaa A (See page 3–53) V2011 All (See page 3–53) V2001 6739 6739 6739 LDD Acc. aaa 0–FFFF Accumulator/Stack Load Accumulator/Stack All V mem. Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range All (See page 3–52) DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. aaa 0–FFFF All V mem. DL240 Range (See page 3–51) All (See page 3–51) V2010 V2000 ENT ENT OUTD LDD 3 0 0 ENT aaa D A A Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the 32 bit accumulator Copy the value in the 32 bit accumulator to V2010 and V2011 0–FFFF All V mem. Description is zero. on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction DL230 Range (See page 3–50) 3 0 1 1 3 All (See page 3–50) D A D B B 0 0 Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load consecutive Load Two is either two consecutive V memory two consecutive either is K V P A SHFT L A A ANDST X1 SOFT32 2 2 STR OUT SHFT C GX C $ The Load Double instruction is a 32 bit Double instruction The Load value (Aaaa), that loads the instruction which value, into or an 8 digit constant locations the accumulator. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes NOTE: stack. instruction onto the accumulator In 32 bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be the following example, when X1 is on, the output to V2010 and V2011. loaded into the accumulator and Direct Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP76 Operand Data Type V memory Pointer 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 4 230 Load Double (LDD) Standard RLL 5–60 Instructions D (LDF) Formatted Load DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 irect Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld C GX $ 230 SHFT SHFT 5 OUT STR 2 SOFT32 C0 240 ANDST 4 A C L SHFT 0 2 Accumulator/Stack Load Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 F B D SHFT 5 1 3 260 4 the accumulatortoY20–Y26 specified numberofbitsin Copy thevaluefrom into theaccumulator consecutive bits(C10–C16) Load thestatusof7 H A F C 2 7 5 0 UFY20 OUTF C10 LDF SP76 Discrete BitFlags Constant Global I/O Special Relays Counter Bits Timer Bits Stage Bits Control Relays Outputs Inputs Type Data Operand bits ofthe be loadedintotheaccumulatorusingLoadFormattedinstruction.Thelower6 thefollowingexample,whenC0ison,binarypatternofC10–C16(7bits)will In instruction ontotheaccumulatorstack. NOTE: A The instructionrequires The locationsintotheaccumulator.memory 1–32 consecutivebitsfromdiscrete The LoadFormattedinstructionloads are settozero. Unused loaded. (Aaaa) ENT K7 K7 0 H ENT Two consecutiveLoadinstructionswillplacethevalueoffirstload 7 and thenumberofbits(Kbbb)to be GX/GY SP CT accumulator areoutputtoY20–Y26usingtheOutFormattedinstruction. C A K S Y X T ENT on whenthevalueloadedintoaccumulatorbyanyinstructioniszero. Description Acc. 0–137 540–617 accumulator bitlocations 0–177 0–177 0–777 0–377 0–177 0–177 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0000000000000000 aaa –– –– DL240 Range a startinglocation 1–32 bbb –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– The unusedaccumulatorbitsaresettozero 0–1777 0–1777 0–777 0–177 0–377 0–777 0–777 C10 aaa Y20 oainConstant Location oainConstant Location –– –– DL250–1 Range K7 K7 1–32 bbb –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0000000000001110 D A aaa LDF 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–1777 0–777 0–377 0–377 aaa –– OFF OFF C16 Y26 DL260 Range K OFF OFF C15 Y25 bbb OFF OFF C14 Y24 C13 Y23 1–32 ON ON bbb –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– C12 Y22 ON ON Y21 C11 ON ON OFF OFF C10 Y20 Standard RLL Instructions 5–61 aaa V2000 All V memory 4100 DL260 Range Hexadecimal 4100 4100 (See page 3–53) O aaa LDA 0000 0 Acc. aaa The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Accumulator/Stack Load Accumulator/Stack All V memory Octal (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard ENT 4040 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0 A 0 aaa A All V memory DL240 Range (See page 3–51) X1 is on, the octal number 40400 will be converted to X1 is on, the octal number 40400 0 ENT A 0 2 V2000 O 40400 A C OUT LDA 0 0 aaa AND ENT A A V Load The HEX equivalent to the octal number into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Copy the value in lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2000 All V memory DL230 Range Description is zero. on when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction (See page 3–50) 3 4 1 SHFT D E B O 0 Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load consecutive Load Two the HEX value into the accumulator. the HEX L A ANDST SOFT32 X1 4 Direct STR OUT SHFT E GX $ The Load Address instruction is a 16 bit Address instruction The Load octal value or It converts any instruction. value and to the HEX equivalent address loads useful when an address This instruction is parameter all addresses is required since are in octal. for the DL205 system Handheld Programmer Keystrokes NOTE: stack. instruction onto the accumulator In the following example when accumulator using the Load Address instruction. a HEX 4100 and loaded into the The accumulator is copied to V2000 using the Out value in the lower 16 bits of the instruction. Discrete Bit Flags SP76 Operand Data Type Octal Address 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 4 230 LoadAddress (LDA) Standard RLL 5–62 Instructions (LDX) Indexed Accumulator Load DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld GX $ 230 SHFT SHFT 5 OUT STR X1 240 ANDST ANDST 5 L L Accumulator/Stack Load Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 D D B PREV 3 3 1 260 4 to V1500 16 bitsoftheaccumulator Copy thevalueinlower the addresstobeoffset Load theaccumulatorwith Move theoffset tothestack. bits oftheaccumulator octal 25intothelower16 Load TheHEXequivalentto X A PREV ENT SET 0 LDA OUT LDX 16 bitsoftheaccumulatoraresetto0. 16bitsoftheaccumulator.lower Theupper address+offset)(source isloadedintothe as HEX.Thevalueintheoffsetaddress interprets interprets in thefirststacklocation.Thisinstruction memory) (V instruction thatspecifiesasourceaddress Load AccumulatorIndexedisa16bit V1500 usingtheOutinstruction. Indexed instruction.Thevalueinthelower16bitsofaccumulatorisoutput to loadedintothelower16bitsofaccumulatorusingLoadAccumulator is 2345) added to the value in the 1st. l Accumulator Indexedinstructionisexecuted).VmemorylocationV1410willbe loaded intotheaccumulator(thisvaluewillbeplacedonstackwhenLoad In thefollowingexamplewhenX1ison,HEXequivalentforoctal25willbe instruction ontotheaccumulatorstack. NOTE: PREV V1500 V1410 address toaHEXandloadthevalueintoaccumulator. Helpful Hint:—TheLoadAddressinstructioncanbeusedtoconvertanoctal O 25 Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand B B C Two consecutiveLoadinstructionswillplacethevalueoffirstload 1 2 1 the valueinfirststacklocation F E F which willbeoffset bythevalue 5 4 5 A P V A B ENT 0 1 V 1410 All Vmem(Seep.3–52) A A DL250–1 Range All (Seep.3–52) 0 0 Octal bitsaresettozero The unusedaccumulator bitsaresettozero The unusedaccumulator aaa 2 Octal ENT ENT Acc. Acc. HEX ValueHEX in1st evel ofthestackandvalueinthislocation(V1435= 5 + stack location 0000 0000 1 is 2345 The valueinV1435 5 = V 0015 Hexadecimal 2345 1435 0015 2345 All Vmem(Seep.3–53) V1500 Octal All (Seep.3–53) DL260 Range aaa Level 1 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 00000015 LDX Accumulator Stack aaa A Standard RLL Instructions 5–63 octal to HEX aaa 1–FFFF Accumulator Stack DL260 Range aaa 00000001 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX K Value in 1st. level of stack is Value The value is 1 used as offset. LDSX Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 be used to convert be used to convert aaa Accumulator/Stack Load Accumulator/Stack 1–FFFF Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard Constant DL250–1 Range 0001 0002 Hexadecimal 0001 0002 V2000 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. K 2323 2323 0000 0000 0000 Acc. Acc. The unused accumulator bits are set to zero The unused accumulator bits are set to zero aaa Acc. 1–FFFF The unused accumulator bits are set to zero DL240 Range the accumulator. The LDSX instruction interprets the value The LDSX the accumulator. constant(s) are located in the program and loads the constant constant(s) are located in the program K Offset 0 Offset 1 Offset 2 Offset — The Load Address instruction can — The Load Address ted by the offset in the stack, into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator. in ted by the offset loaded into END Hint: K1 K2 Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load consecutive Load Two K3333 K2323 K4549 V2000 value will be placed into the first level of the accumulator stack when the LDSX value will be placed into the first level NCON NCON NCON LD LDSX OUT Constant Operand Data Type Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2000 The stack as in the first level of the accumulator LDSX instruction uses the value within the Data Label which numerical or ASCII constant to determine an offset Area be will value. the accumulator stack as a HEX in the first level of Helpful The from Data Accumulator Indexed Load instruction. The is a 16 bit Constants Label Area specifies a Data instruction or ASCII where numerical (DLBL) This value will be constants are stored. 16 bits. loaded into the lower and load the value into the accumulator. and load the value Load the offset value of 1 (K1) into the lower 16 Load the offset bits of the accumulator. Move the offset to the stack. Move the offset Load the accumulator with the data label number NOTE: stack. instruction onto the accumulator into the accumulator. of 1 is loaded offset the on, Inis the following example when X1 This instruction specifies the Data Label (DLBL K2) instruction is executed. The LDSX where the numerical value, indica 4 260 X1 4 250–1 4 S S S 240 5 230 DLBL K2 Load Accumulator from Indexed Data Constants (LDSX) Standard RLL 5–64 Instructions (LDR) Load RealNumber DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Accumulator/Stack Load Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 binary number. could performrealmath onit,orconvertittoa the Vdatatype,asshown totheright.Nextwe thatnumber.retreive JustusetheLoadReal with V1400andV1401.Supposethatnowwewantto in previousexampleabove storedarealnumber The locationsinmemory,number sotheycanbereadwiththeproper instructions later. difficult todecipher. Justlikeallothernumber types,youmustkeeptrackofreal stored realnumberinhex,binary, orevenBCD,thenumbershownwillbevery locations, V-memory These These stores itinV1400andV1401. the rightis5.3million.TheOUTDinstruction canuseexponentialnotation. Thenumberto you For verylargenumbersorsmallnumbers, negative Pi, shownintheexampletoright.To enter number directly, by using the l Direct into theaccumulator. V-memory locations,oran8-digitconstant real numbercontainedintwoconsecutive The LoadRealNumberinstructionloadsa $ GX SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT Real Constant Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand OUT STR ANDST ANDST N N N D E L L SOFT32 TMR TMR TMR real numbersareintheIEEE32-bitfloatingpoint format, so t 3 4 entry. You canenteraconstantsuchas numbers, useaminus(–)afterthe“R”. ANDST B C C C L N D D SHFT TMR 1 2 2 2 3 3 R A P V allows youto V O O O B D S INST# INST# INST# ENT AND RST 1 3 regardless ofhowbigorsmallthenumbermaybe! All Vmem(Seep.3–52) All Vmem(Seep.3–52) eading “R”toindicatea ANDST C N N N L X –3.402823E+038 to SHFT + –3.402823E+038 ENT TMR TMR TMR SET DL250–1 Range 2 aaa A K JMP enter real 0 A E C D C C B 4 2 0 3 2 1 2 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld A F D D ENT ENT ENT numbers 0 5 3 3 All Vmem(Seep.3–53) All Vmem(Seep.3–53) –3.402823E+038 to + –3.402823E+038 E C D real ENT DL260 Range 4 3 2 aaa J D D 3 9 3 ENT ENT ENT LDR OUTD LDR LDR LDR V1400 V1400 R5.3E6 R3.14159 aaa A hey occupytwo Ifyouviewa Standard RLL Instructions 5–65 aaa All V mem. DL260 Range A aaa A (See page 3–53) All (See page 3–53) OUT V2010 V2000 8935 8935 8935 aaa Accumulator/Stack Load Accumulator/Stack All V mem. Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range All (See page 3–52) ENT 0000 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Acc. 0 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero A 1 B aaa All V mem. DL240 Range 0 (See page 3–51) All (See page 3–51) A 2 the lower 16 bits of the lower ENT C V2010 V2000 0 OUT LD AND ENT A V aaa Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 All V mem. Description the accumulator by any instruction is zero. on when the value loaded into DL230 Range 3 0 1 (See page 3–50) All (See page 3–50) SHFT B D A 0 V P A L A ANDST SOFT32 X1 2 STR OUT Direct SHFT $ C GX The Out instruction is a 16 bit instruction instruction is a The Out in value the that copies V memory to a specified the accumulator (Aaaa). location Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 lower 16 the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of to V2010 using the Out instruction. bits of the accumulator are copied Operand Data Type V memory Pointer Discrete Bit Flags SP76 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 4 230 Out (OUT) Standard RLL 5–66 Instructions (OUTD) Out Double DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 4 Accumulator/Stack Load Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 Pointer V memory DataTypeOperand accumulator isoutputtoV2010andV2011accumulator usingtheOutDoubleinstruction. loaded intotheaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.Thevaluein thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,32bitvalueinV2000andV2001willbe In Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld (Aaaa). locations ataspecifiedstartinglocation toaccumulator twoconse instruction thatcopiesthe value in the The OutDoubleinstructionisa32bit C GX C $ Direct SHFT OUT STR 2 2 X1 SOFT32 ANDST A A L SHFT A P V 0 0 B D A D B All (Seepage3–50) (See page3–50) 1 1 3 0 3 DL230 Range All Vmem. V2001 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV2000and V2011 accumulator toV2010and Copy thevaluein aaa A A D ENT 3 0 0 OUTD LDD V2010 V2000 ENT ENT cutive Vmemory All (Seepage3–51) (See page3–51) DL240 Range All Vmem. aaa All (Seepage3–52) DL250–1 Range (See page3–52) Acc. All Vmem. aaa 6739 6739 6739 V2001 V2011 OUTD 5026 5026 5026 V2000 All (Seepage3–53) V2010 (See page3–53) A aaa DL260 Range All Vmem. aaa Standard RLL Instructions Y20 C10 OFF OFF 5–67 ON ON C11 Y21 ON ON Y22 C12 –– –– –– –– bbb ON ON 1–32 Y23 C13 Y24 C14 OFF OFF bbb Y25 C15 OFF OFF K DL260 Range Y26 C16 OFF OFF –– aaa 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–3777 OUTF aaa A 0000000000001110 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 –– –– –– –– bbb 1–32 K7 K7 Accumulator/Stack Load Accumulator/Stack Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. DL250–1 Range –– –– Location Constant Location Constant Y20 aaa C10 0–777 0–777 0–1777 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero –– –– –– –– bbb 1–32 DL240 Range –– –– aaa 0000000000000000 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 Accumulator 0–377 0–177 0–177 ENT K X Y C A accumulator are output to Y20–Y26 using the Out Formatted instruction. accumulator are output to Y20–Y26

GX/GY 7 ENT H 0 K7 K7 The Out Formatted instruction outputs Formatted instruction The Out to the from the accumulator 1–32 bits locations. The discrete memory specified instruction a starting location requires (Aaaa) for the destination and the number be output. of bits (Kbbb) to ENT In (7 bits) will the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C16 the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7 be loaded into the accumulator using bits of the A Control Relays Global I/O Constant Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs OUTF Y20 LDF C10 7 5 0 2 A H C F Load the status of 7 consecutive bits (C10–C16) into the accumulator Copy the value of the specified number of bits from the accumulator to Y20–Y26 4 260 3 1 5 SHFT D B F 4 250–1 0 2 4 SHFT A L C ANDST 240 SOFT32 C0 2 5 STR OUT Direct 230 SHFT SHFT GX C $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Out Formatted (OUTF) Standard RLL 5–68 Instructions (OUTX) Out Indexed DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct $ GX 230 SHFT SHFT 5 OUT STR X1 SOFT32 240 ANDST ANDST 5 L L SHFT Accumulator/Stack Load Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 X D D B SET 3 3 1 260 4 (V1500 +25) offset address1525 level ofthestackto Copy thevalueinfirst the finaldestinationaddress instruction, whichdetermines offset fortheOutIndexed of theaccumulator. Thisisthe octal 25intothelower16bits Load TheHEXequivalentto the value3544 Load theaccumulatorwith A ENT 0 LDA OUTX LD from thefirstlevel from instruction. It The OutIndexedinstructionisa16bit accumulator stacktoV1525. accumulator Indexedinstructionoutputs the Out instruction places thevalueoffirstloadinstructionontostack.TheLoadAddress Address instructionisexecuted.Remember, two consecutiveLoadinstructions location (V1525).Thevalue3544willbeplacedontothestackwhenLoad accumulator. Thisisthevaluethatwillbeoutputtospecifiedoffset Vmemory thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,constantvalue3544loadedinto In aresettozero. accumulator HEX number. Theupper16 bits of the interprets theoffsetinstruction valueasa the accumulator(Vmemory+offset).This to asourceaddressoffset bythevaluein B PREV V1500 K3544 O 25 Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand 1 F C D 5 3 2 A F F converts octal25toHEX15andplacesthevalueinaccumulator. The 0 5 5 copies a16bitor4digitvalue A P V A E ENT oftheaccumulatorstack 0 4 V+ All Vmem(Seep.3–52) All Vmem(Seep.3–52) E 1500 ENT the finaldestination. address ofV1500toyield added tothebase to 25octal,whichis The hex15converts DL250–1 Range 4 Octal bitsaresettozero The unusedaccumulator bitsaresettozero The unusedaccumulator aaa 2 Octal ENT Acc. Acc. 5 0000 0000 2 Octal 5 value 3544whichresidesinthefirstlevelof = V 1525 0015 3544 3544 3544 0015 Constant All Vmem(Seep.3–53) All Vmem(Seep.3–53) Octal V1525 HEX DL260 Range aaa Level 1 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 OUTX A XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 00003544 aaa Accumulator Stack Standard RLL Instructions 5–69 V1500 V1500 V1400 V1400 8935 8935 8900 8935 8935 0035 A aaa A aaa 0000 0000 OUTM OUTL Acc. Acc. The unused accumulator bits are set to zero The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Accumulator/Stack Load Accumulator/Stack Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard ENT ENT ENT ENT DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0 0 0 0 A A A A 0 0 0 0 of the low A A A A Copy the value in the upper 8 bits of the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500. Copy the value in the lower 8 bits of the accumulator to V1500. Load the value in V1400 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Load the value in V1400 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator 4 5 4 5 E F E F aaa 1 1 DL260 Range 1 1 V1400 V1500 V1400 V1500 B B B B the low byte the low byte All V mem (See p. 3–53) All V mem (See p. 3–53) LD OUTM LD OUTL ENT ENT V P A 1 3 3 1 ORST B D M B D L ANDST (i.e., it copies (i.e., it copies the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are copied to V1500 using the Out Most the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are copied to V1500 using the SHFT L SHFT ANDST L ANDST SOFT32 X1 X1 STR OUT STR OUT Direct SHFT $ GX Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer SHFT $ GX Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be lower using the Load instruction. The value in the upper 8 16 bits of the accumulator bits of instruction. The the value in Out Most instruction copies the upper eight bits of the lower sixteen bits bits of of the accumulator to the upper eight location (i.e., it the specified V-memory of the copies the high byte of the low word accumulator). In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the when X1 is on, the value In the following example, lower lower 8 instruction. The value in the of the accumulator using the Load 16 bits the Out Least instruction. are copied to V1500 using bits of the accumulator Thein the value instruction copies Out Least the to the bits of the accumulator lower eight V-memory bits of the specified lower eight location word of the accumulator). DirectSOFT32 4 4 260 260 5 5 250–1 250–1 5 5 240 240 5 5 230 230 Out Most (OUTM) Out Least (OUTL) Standard RLL 5–70 Instructions (POP) Pop DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes 4 GX GX GX $ SHFT SHFT SHFT OUT OUT OUT STR C0 240 4 P P P CV CV CV Accumulator/Stack Load Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 260 4 the accumulatortoV2002 Copy thevalueinlower16bitsof the accumulatortoV2001 Copy thevalueinlower16bitsof up onelocation accumulator andmovestackvalues Pop the1st.valueonstackinto up onelocation accumulator andmovestackvalues Pop the1st.valueonstackinto up onelocation accumulator andmovestackvalues Pop the1st.valueonstackinto the accumulatortoV2000 Copy thevalueinlower16bitsof V O V O V O C INST# INST# INST# POP POP OUT OUT AND AND AND POP OUT 2 locations foreachOutDoubleneedtobeallocated. than 16bits(4digits)theOutDoubleinstructionwouldbeusedand2Vmemory and outputsthevaluetoV2002.Pleasenoteifinstackweregreater outputs Out instruction.ThenextPopmovesthevalue3792intoaccumulatorand into theexample,whenC0ison,value4545thatwasontopofstackmoved In V2002 V2001 V2000 value inthestackuponelevel. bits) totheaccumulatorandshiftseach firstleveloftheaccumulatorstack(32 the Popinstructionmovesthevaluefrom The SP63 Discrete BitFlags P C P C P A C CV CV CV 2 2 0 2 the accumulatorusingPopinstructionThevalueisoutputtoV2000 A A A ENT ENT ENT ENT the valuetoV2001.ThelastPopmoves7930intoaccumulator 0 0 0 A A A 0 0 0 C B A on whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description 0 2 1 Previous Acc.value Previous Acc.value Previous Acc.value Current Acc.value Current Acc.value Current Acc.value Acc. Acc. Acc. Acc. Acc. Acc. ENT ENT ENT XXXX 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 V2002 V2001 V2000 7930 3792 4545 XXXX 4545 7930 3792 3792 4545 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 1 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 00007930 00003792 00007930 Accumulator Stack Accumulator Stack Accumulator Stack POP Standard RLL Instructions 5–71 aaa All V mem. DL260 Range (See page 3–53) All (See page 3–53) V2000 V2010 A aaa A 287A 2838 AND aaa All V mem. 0010100001111010 0010100000111000 0010100001111010 0110101000111000 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range All (See page 3–52) Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Accumulator Logical Instructions Logical Accumulator aaa All V mem. DL240 Range (See page 3–51) All (See page 3–51) The upper 16 bits of the accumulator will be set to 0 ENT ENT ENT aaa 00000100000000000000000000000000 0000000000000000 All V mem. 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 0 0 6 Description Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero DL230 Range (See page 3–50) A G A All (See page 3–50) Acc. Acc. Acc. 0 0 1 memory location (Aaaa). The memory location 6A38 A A B V P A AND (V2006) The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same The status flags are only valid until 0 0 0 A A A 2 2 2 V memory Pointer Discrete Bit Flags SP63 Operand Data Type. The bit instruction And instruction is a 16 the value in the lower that logically ands accumulator with a 16 bits of the specified V The the accumulator. result resides in discrete if the result status flag indicates of the And is zero. C C C NOTE: flags is executed. is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 accumulator the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is anded using with of the in V2006 using the And instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits the value accumulator to V2010 using the Out instruction. is output V2010 V2000 V2006 AND AND ENT V V OUT LD AND 4 260 1 3 AND the value in the accumulator with the value in V2006 Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Copy the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 SHFT SHFT B D 4 250–1 L ANDST 4 SOFT32 240 X1 Direct STR OUT AND 4 SHFT GX V $ 230 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes And (AND) Accumulator Instructions Logical Standard RLL 5–72 Instructions (ANDD) And Double DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld $ GX V 230 SHFT 4 AND OUT STR Direct X1 240 SOFT32 ANDST 4 L SHFT SHFT Accumualtor LogicalInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 D D D B V2011 accumulator toV2010and Copy thevaluein V2001 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV2000and 36476A38 theconstantvalue accumulator with AND thevaluein 3 3 3 1 260 4 OUTD ANDD LDD D ENT K36476A38 3 V2010 V2000 the accumulatorisoutputtoV2010andV2011 usingtheOut Doubleinstruction. isaccumulator into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.Thevaluein the followingexample,when In flags isexecuted. NOTE: C SHFT (the mostsignificantbitison). Double iszerooranegativenumber And status flagsindicateiftheresultof resides intheaccumulator. Discrete constant value(Aaaa).Theresult withan8digit(max.) accumulator logically andsthevaluein AndDoubleisa32bitinstructionthat The SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Constant DataTypeOperand 2 A K C JMP 0 2 The statusflagsareonlyvaliduntilanotherinstructionthatusesthesame AND 36476A38 K B D A 1 3 0 Acc. Acc. Acc. anded with36476A38usingtheAnddoubleinstruction.Thevaluein A G A DL230 Range 0 6 0 Will beonistheresultinaccumulatornegative Will beoniftheresultinaccumulatoriszero Description 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0000010000000000 0001010001000110 0011011001000111 0010100001111010 0101010001111110 0101010001111110 0–FFFF aaa E A ENT 4 0 H ENT 7 1446 547E X1 ison,thevalueinV2000andV2001willbeloaded V2011 V2001 G 6 DL240 Range 0–FFFF aaa SHFT A 0 SHFT DL250–1 Range 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0010100000111000 0110101000111000 0010100001111010 0–FFFF aaa D 3 ANDD I 8 2838 287A aaa K V2010 V2000 ENT DL260 Range 0–FFFF aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–73 C10 OFF C20 OFF 1000 ON C11 C21 OFF ON C12 C22 OFF ON C13 ON C23 bbb K K4 K4 ANDF aaa A –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– bbb 1–32 0000000000001000 0000000000001110 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Location Constant Location Constant C20 C10 ENT Acc. Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL260 Range 4 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. –– aaa E 0–377 0–377 0–777, 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 320–717 Accumulator Logical Instructions Logical Accumulator 0 –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– ENT bbb 1–32 A The unused accumulator bits are set to zero 1 4 Y20 ENT OFF B E Y21 OFF DL250–1 Range 4 –– –– aaa NEXT Y22 E 0–777 0–777 0–377 0–177 OFF 0–777, 0–1777 0–1777 320–717 ON Y23 0000000000000000 0000000000001110 0000000000000000 Description Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative Accumulator 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 0 value in the accumulator value in NEXT A T S K X Y C Acc. CT SP A/B he bit pattern from Y20–Y23 using the And Formatted instruction. The he bit pattern from Y20–Y23 using GX/GY ANDed. Discrete status flags ANDed. Discrete binary bits) into the accumulator. The accumulator contents is logically binary bits) into the accumulator. 2 0 NEXT A C location (Aaaa) and number of bits location (Aaaa) and AND (Y20–Y23) Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until 2 NEXT PREV C Stage Bits Bits Timer Counter Bits Global I/O Special Relays Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs Control Relays NEXT PREV In the following example, when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads In the following example, when C10–C13 (4 ANDed with t the accumulator’sOut Formatted instruction outputs lower four bits to C20–C23. NOTE: and a specified range of discrete memory range of specified a and a requires The instruction bits (1–32). starting be (Kbbb) to is zero or a negative indicate if the result number bit =1). (the most significant The And Formatted instruction logically Formatted instruction The And binary ANDs the K4 K4 K4 5 ENT F 4 260 ANDF Y20 OUTF C20 LDF C10 5 5 3 1 Load the status of 4 consecutive bits (C10–C13) into the accumulator Copy the value in the lower 4 bits in accumulator to C20–C23 And the binary bit pattern (Y20–Y23) with the value in the accumulator F F B D 4 250–1 5 SHFT SHFT L ANDST 240 X1 5 STR OUT AND 230 SHFT GX V $ irectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes And Formatted (ANDF) D Standard RLL 5–74 Instructions D (ANDS) And withStack DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld irectSOFT32 GX V $ SHFT 230 OUT AND STR 5 X1 240 ANDST L SHFT SHFT 5 Accumualtor LogicalInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 D S D B RST V1501 accumulator toV1500and Copy thevaluein V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and accumulator stack thefirstlevelof accumulator with AND thevaluein 1 3 3 260 4 OUTD ANDS LDD D ENT ENT 3 V1500 V1400 B is on). negative number(themostsignificantbit result oftheAndwithStackiszeroora level. Discretestatusflagsindicateif the stackand allvaluesaremovedupone the of theaccumulatorstackisremovedfrom accumulator.the The accumulator stack. accumulator the accumulatorwithfirstlevelof instruction thatlogicallyandsthevaluein The AndwithStackinstructionisa32bit resides intheaccumulator. The32bitvalueisthenoutputtoV1500andV1501. anded withthebinaryvalueinfirstleveloraccumulatorstack.Theresult thefollowingexamplewhenX1ison,binaryvalueinaccumulatorwillbe In NOTE: SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags 1 F B AND (topofstack) 5 1 Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. A E 36476A38 0 4 Acc. Acc. Acc. A A 0 0 Will beonistheresultinaccumulatornegative Will beoniftheresultinaccumulatoriszero Description 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0011011001000111 0000010000000000 0001010001000110 0010100001111010 0101010001111110 0101010001111110

The resultresidesin value inthefirstlevel A ENT 0 ENT 1446 547E V1501 V1401 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0110101000111000 0010100000111000 0010100001111010 ANDS 2838 287A V1500 V1400 Standard RLL Instructions 5–75 aaa All V mem. DL260 Range (See page 3–53) All (See page 3–53) V2000 V2010 A aaa A 287A 6A7A OR aaa All V mem. 0010100001111010 0010100001111010 0110101000111000 0110101001111010 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range All (See page 3–52) Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Accumulator Logical Instructions Logical Accumulator aaa All V mem. DL240 Range (See page 3–51) ower 16 All (See page 3–51) The upper 16 bits of the accumulator will be set to 0 ENT ENT ENT aaa 0000000000000000 00000100000000000000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 All V mem. 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 0 0 6 Description Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero DL230 Range (See page 3–50) A G A All (See page 3–50) Acc. Acc. Acc. 0 0 1 6A38 A A B V P A OR (V2006) The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same The status flags are only valid until 0 0 0 flag indicates if the result of the Or flag indicates if the the accumulator with a specified V with a specified the accumulator using the Or instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are using the Or instruction. The value A A A 2 2 2 Discrete Bit Flags SP63 Operand Data Type. V memory Pointer The Or instruction is a 16 bit instruction is a 16 The Or instruction l the in value the ors that logically bits of memory result (Aaaa). The location The discrete resides in the accumulator. status is zero. C C C NOTE: flags is executed. is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 accumulator the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is ored with using V2006 output to V2010 using the Out instruction. V2000 V2006 V2010 AND AND ENT V V LD OR OUT 4 260 1 3 Or the value in the accumulator with the value in V2006 Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 SHFT SHFT B D 4 250–1 L ANDST 4 240 SOFT32 X1 OR STR Direct OUT 4 SHFT GX Q $ 230 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Or (OR) Standard RLL 5–76 Instructions (ORD) Or Double DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld $ GX Q Direct 230 SHFT 4 OUT STR OR X1 SOFT32 240 ANDST 4 L SHFT SHFT Accumualtor LogicalInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 D D D B V2011 accumulator toV2010and Copy thevaluein V2001 intoaccumulator Load thevalueinV2000and 36476A38 theconstantvalue accumulator with OR thevaluein 3 3 3 1 260 4 OUTD ORD LDD D ENT K36476A38 3 V2010 V2000 accumulator isoutputtoV2010andV2011accumulator usingtheOutDoubleinstruction. isaccumulator into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.Thevaluein the followingexample,when In flags isexecuted. NOTE: C SHFT significant bitison). zero oranegativenumber(themost indicate iftheresultofOrDoubleis accumulator. Discretestatusflags constant value.Theresultresidesinthe value (Aaaa),oran8digit(max.) thevalueinaccumulatorwith ors OrDoubleisa32bitinstructionthat The SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Constant DataTypeOperand 2 A K C JMP 0 2 The statusflagsareonlyvaliduntilanotherinstructionthatusesthesame OR 36476A38 K B D A 1 3 0 Acc. Acc. Acc. ored with36476A38usingtheOrDoubleinstruction.Thevaluein A G A DL230 Range 0 6 0 Will beonistheresultinaccumulatornegative Will beoniftheresultinaccumulatoriszero Description 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0011011001000111 0000010000000000 0111011001111111 0010100001111010 0101010001111110 0101010001111110 0–FFFF aaa E A ENT 4 0 H ENT 7 767F 547E X1 ison,thevalueinV2000andV2001willbeloaded V2011 V2001 G 6 DL240 Range 0–FFFF aaa SHFT A 0 SHFT DL250–1 Range 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0110101000111000 0110101001111010 0010100001111010 0–FFFF aaa D 3 ORD I 8 6A7A 287A aaa K V2010 V2000 ENT DL260 Range 0–FFFF aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–77 C10 OFF C20 OFF ON C11 ON 1000 C21 ON C12 ON C22 C13 OFF ON C23 bbb K K4 K4 ORF aaa A –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– bbb 1–32 Location Constant 0000000000001110 0000000000000110 C20 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Location Constant C10 ENT Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 4 DL260 Range DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. E –– aaa 0–377 0–377 0–777, 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 320–717 Accumulator Logical Instructions Logical Accumulator 0 ENT A The unused accumulator bits are set to zero –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– bbb 1–32 1 4 ENT Y20 OFF B E Y21 OFF 4 requires a starting requires DL250–1 Range NEXT E Y22 OFF –– –– aaa 0–777 0–777 0–377 0–177 0–137, 0–1777 0–1777 320–717 ON Y23 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0 Description Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 NEXT A Acc. Acc. T S K X Y C CT SP GY GX/ A/B binary bits) into the accumulator. The Or Formatted instruction logically binary bits) into the accumulator. 2 0 NEXT A C the result is zero or negative (the the result is zero OR (Y20–Y23) 2 Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until NEXT PREV C Stage Bits Bits Timer Counter Bits Special Relays Global I/O Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs Control Relays NEXT PREV In the following example, when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads In the following example, when C10–C13 (4 with Y20–Y23 bit pattern. The Out Formatted ORs the accumulator contents instruction outputs the accumulator’s lower four bits to C20–C23. NOTE: The Or Formatted instruction logically Formatted instruction The Or the accumulator binary value in ORs the of discrete bits range and a specified (1–32). The instruction location (Aaaa) and the number of bits location (Aaaa) Discrete status flags (Kbbb) to be ORed. indicate if bit =1). most significant K4 K4 K4 5 ENT F 4 260 ORF Y20 OUTF C20 LDF C10 1 5 5 3 Load the status of 4 consecutive bits (C10–C13) into the accumulator Copy the specified number of bits from the accumulator to C20–C23 Or the binary bit pattern (Y20–Y23) with the value in the accumulator F F B D 4 250–1 SHFT SHFT L ANDST 5 240 X1 OR STR OUT 5 SHFT GX Q $ 230 irectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Or Formatted (ORF) D Standard RLL 5–78 Instructions D (ORS) Or withStack DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld irectSOFT32 230 GX Q $ SHFT 5 OUT STR OR X1 240 5 ANDST L SHFT SHFT Accumualtor LogicalInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 D S D B RST V1501 accumulator toV1500and Copy thevaluein V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and accumulator stack in thefirstlevelof accumulator withthevalue OR thevaluein 1 3 3 260 4 OUTD ORS LDD D ENT ENT 3 V1500 V1400 is on). negative number(themostsignificantbit result oftheOrwithStackiszeroora level. Discretestatusflagsindicateif the stackand allvaluesaremovedupone the of theaccumulatorstackisremovedfrom the accumulator.the stack.Theresultresidesin accumulator the accumulatorwithfirstlevelof instruction thatlogicallyorsthevaluein The OrwithStackinstructionisa32bit accumulator. ored withthebinaryvalueinfirstlevelofstack.Theresultresides thefollowingexamplewhenX1ison,binaryvalueinaccumulatorwillbe In B SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags 1 F B 5 1 Or (Top ofstack) 36476A38 A E 0 4 Acc. Acc. Acc. A A

The valueinthefirstlevel The Will beonistheresultinaccumulatornegative Will beoniftheresultinaccumulatoriszero Description 0 0 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0011011001000111 0000010000000000 0111011001111111 0010100001111010 0101010001111110 0101010001111110 A ENT 0 ENT 767F 547E V1501 V1401 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0110101000111000 0110101001111010 0010100001111010 ORS 6A7A 287A V1500 V1400 Standard RLL Instructions 5–79 aaa All V mem. DL260 Range (See page 3–53) All (See page 3–53) V2000 V2010 A aaa A 247A 4E42 XOR aaa All V mem. 0010010001111010 0010010001111010 0100111001000010 0110101000111000 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range All (See page 3–52) Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Accumulator Logical Instructions Logical Accumulator ENT aaa All V mem. DL240 Range 6 (See page 3–51) ENT All (See page 3–51) G 0 0 A A The upper 16 bits of the accumulator will be set to 0 0 0 ENT A A aaa 0000000000000000 00000100000000000000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 All V mem. 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 Description Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero 0 2 0 DL230 Range (See page 3–50) All (See page 3–50) A C A Acc. Acc. Acc. 2 1 6A38 AND V P A C V B V2006 using the Exclusive Or instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of V2006 using the Exclusive Or instruction. XOR (V2006) (Aaaa). The result resides in the (Aaaa). The result The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same The status flags are only valid until 0 AND ENT SHFT V A 1 2 Discrete Bit Flags SP63 Operand Data Type. V memory Pointer in the accumulator. The discrete status The discrete in the accumulator. is XOR the the result of flag indicates if zero. The Exclusive Or instruction is a 16 bit Or instruction The Exclusive instructionexclusive or performs an that 16 bits of the in the lower of the value accumulator V memory and a specified location SHFT NOTE: flags is executed. is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 accumulator the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is exclusive using ored with using the Out instruction. the accumulator are output to V2010 B C V2000 V2006 V2010 OR SET AND X Q V LD XOR OUT 4 260 3 XOR the value in the accumulator with the value in V2006 Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Copy the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 SHFT SHFT SHFT D 4 250–1 SET 4 L X ANDST 240 SOFT32 X1 4 STR OUT 230 Direct SHFT SHFT GX $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Exclusive Or Exclusive (XOR) Standard RLL 5–80 Instructions (XORD) Double Exclusive Or DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld $ GX D 230 SHFT SHFT Direct 4 OUT STR 3 X1 SOFT32 240 ANDST 4 G X L SHFT SET 6 Accumualtor LogicalInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 V2001 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV2000and and V2011 accumulator toV2010 Copy thevaluein 36476A38 theconstantvalue accumulator with XORD thevaluein D E Q D B OR OUTD XORD LDD 1 3 4 3 260 4 K36476A38 V2010 V2000 H D SHFT ENT 3 7 Double instruction. instruction. isexclusivelyoredwith36476A38 usingtheExclusiveOrDouble accumulator into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.Thevaluein the followingexample,when In flags isexecuted. NOTE: C G D most significantbitison). Double is indicate iftheresultofExclusiveOr accumulator. Discretestatusflags result residesinthe The constant. value (Aaaa),whichisa8digit(max.) of thevalueinaccumulatorand the thatperformsanexclusiveor instruction The ExclusiveORDoubleisa32bit SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Constant DataTypeOperand 2 3 6 A C SHFT XORD 36476A38 0 2 The statusflagsareonlyvaliduntilanotherinstructionthatusesthesame zero oranegativenumber(the K B A A SHFT The valueintheaccumulatorisoutputtoV2010andV2011 usingtheOut 0 1 0 Acc. Acc. Acc. A K A SHFT JMP DL230 Range 0 0 Will beonistheresultinaccumulatornegative Will beoniftheresultinaccumulatoriszero Description 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0011011001000111 0000010000000000 0110001000111001 0010100001111010 0101010001111110 0101010001111110 0–FFFF aaa D A ENT 3 0 I ENT 8 6239 547E X1 ison,thevalueinV2000andV2001willbeloaded V2011 V2001 ENT DL240 Range 0–FFFF aaa DL250–1 Range 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0110101000111000 0100001001000010 0010100001111010 0–FFFF aaa XORD 4242 287A aaa K V2010 V2000 DL260 Range 0–FFFF aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–81 C10 OFF C20 OFF 1000 ON C11 ON C21 ON C12 ON C22 C13 OFF ON C23 bbb K K4 K4 XORF aaa A –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– bbb 1–32 0000000000001110 0000000000000110 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Location Constant Location Constant C20 C10 ENT Acc. Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL260 Range 4 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. E –– aaa 0–377 0–377 0–777, 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 320–717 Accumulator Logical Instructions Logical Accumulator ENT 4 0 ENT –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– A E bbb 1–32 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero 1 4 Y20 B E OFF Y21 OFF DL250–1 Range 0 –– –– NEXT aaa A Y22 0–777 0–777 0–377 0–177 OFF 0–137, 0–1777 0–1777 320–717 ON Y23 0000000000000000 0000000000000110 2 0 0000000000000000 Description Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero Will be on is the result in the accumulator is negative Accumulator 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 NEXT C A ill be logically Exclusive Ored with the bit pattern from Y20–Y23 using ill be logically Exclusive Ored with T K X Y S C Acc. CT SP A/B GX/GY 2 he accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value in the he accumulator using the Load Formatted NEXT NEXT C Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until XORF (Y20–Y23) NEXT PREV 5 Timer Bits Timer Counter Bits Special Relays Global I/O Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs Control Relays Stage Bits PREV F In of C10–C13 (4 bits) will be the following example, when X1 is on, the binary pattern loaded into t accumulator w The value in the lower 4 bits of the the Exclusive Or Formatted instruction. accumulator output to C20–C23 using the Out Formatted instruction. are NOTE: The (Bbbb) to (Aaaa) and the number of bits requires a starting location instruction if the result of the Exclusive Or Discrete status flags indicate be exclusive ORed. Formatted (the most significant bit =1). is zero or negative The Exclusive Or Formatted instruction Or Formatted The Exclusive performs OR of the binary an exclusive specified and a the accumulator value in bits (1–32). discrete memory range of K4 K4 K4 5 ENT SHFT F 4 260 XORF Y20 OUTF C20 LDF C10 3 5 1 OR Q F B D Load the status of 4 consecutive bits (C10–C13) into the accumulator Copy the specified number of bits from the accumulator to C20–C23 Exclusive Or the binary bit pattern (Y20–Y23) with the value in the accumulator. 4 250–1 SET SHFT X L ANDST 5 240 X1 STR OUT 5 SHFT SHFT GX $ 230 irectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Exclusive Or Exclusive Formatted (XORF) D Standard RLL 5–82 Instructions D (XORS) Stack Exclusive Orwith DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld irectSOFT32 GX $ SHFT SHFT 230 OUT STR 5 X1 240 ANDST X L SHFT 5 SET Accumualtor LogicalInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 D Q D B V1501 accumulator toV1500and Copy thevaluein accumulator stack level ofthe the valueinfirst in theaccumulatorwith Exclusive ORthevalue V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and OR 1 3 3 260 4 OUTD XORS LDD D SHFT ENT 3 V1500 V1400 B S significant bitison). zero oranegativenumber(themost result oftheExclusiveOrwithStackis level. Discretestatusflagsindicateif the stackand allvaluesaremovedupone the of theaccumulatorstackisremovedfrom the accumulator.the stack.Theresultresidesin accumulator withthefirstlevelof accumulator exclusive orofthevaluein a 32bitinstructionthatperforms an ExclusiveOrwithStackinstruction isThe result willresideintheaccumulator. exclusive oredwiththebinaryvalueinfirstlevelofaccumulatorstack.The thefollowingexamplewhenX1ison,binaryvalueinaccumulatorwillbe In NOTE: RST SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags 1 XOR (1stlevelofstack) F B ENT 5 1 Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. A E 36476A38 0 4 Acc. Acc. Acc. A A

The valueinthefirstlevel The 0 0 Will beonistheresultinaccumulatornegative Will beoniftheresultinaccumulatoriszero Description 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0000010000000000 0110001000111001 0011011001000111 0010100001111010 0101010001111110 0101010001111110 A ENT 0 ENT 6239 547E V1501 V1401 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0100001001000010 0110101000111000 0010100001111010 XORS 4242 287A V1500 V1400 Standard RLL Instructions 5–83 aaa All V mem. DL260 Range (See page 3–53) All (See page 3–53) A aaa A with V2000 CMP Compared Constant 4526 4526 8945 ENT ENT aaa All V mem. 6 0 (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range G A All (See page 3–52) 0000 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 2 0 Acc. DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. C A The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Accumulator Logical Instructions Logical Accumulator 5 0 F A aaa All V mem. 2 4 DL240 Range ENT ENT (See page 3–51) E C All (See page 3–51) 0 0 JMP K A A C30 OUT 6 3 CV K4526 V2000 SHFT P G D aaa LD CMP All V mem. 2 Description value. On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value. On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value. DL230 Range ENT STRN ORST (See page 3–50) M SP C Compare the value in the accumulator with the value in V2000 Load the constant value 4526 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator All (See page 3–50) 1 3 that compares the value in the the value in that compares SHFT SHFT SHFT B D V P A The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same The status flags are only valid until 2 L C ANDST SP60 SOFT32 X1 STR STR OUT Discrete Bit Flags SP60 SP61 SP62 Operand Data Type. V memory Pointer SHFT SHFT Direct $ $ GX lower with the of the accumulator 16 bits location a specified V memory value in status flag (Aaaa). The corresponding indicating the result of will be turned on the comparison. The compare instruction is a 16 bit 16 a is instruction The compare instruction Handheld Programmer Keystrokes NOTE: flags is executed. is on, the constant 4526 will be loaded into the In the following example when X1 using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator accumulator with the value in V2000 using the Compare instruction. is compared The turned on indicating the result of the corresponding discrete status flag will be comparison. example, if the value in the accumulator is less than the value In this SP60 will turn on energizing C30. specified in the Compare instruction, 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 4 230 Compare (CMP) Standard RLL 5–84 Instructions (CMPD) Compare Double DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 4 Accumualtor LogicalInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 the valuespecifiedinCompareinstruction,SP60willturnonenergizingC30. result of instruction. Thecorrespondingdiscretestatusflagwillbeturnedonindicatingthe iscomparedwiththevalueinV2010 andV2011accumulator usingtheCMPD into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.Thevaluein thefollowingexamplewhenX1ison,valueinV2000andV2001willbe loaded In flags isexecuted. NOTE: Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld the comparison. will beturnedonindicatingtheresultof constant. Thecorrespondingstatusflag locationsoran8–digit(max.) memory (Aaaa), value intheaccumulatorwith value 32–bit instructionthatcomparesthe The CompareDoubleinstructionisa Direct SP62 SP61 SP60 Discrete BitFlags Constant Pointer V memory DataType.Operand GX $ $ SHFT SHFT OUT STR STR X1 SOFT32 SP60 ANDST C L The statusflagsareonlyvaliduntilanotherinstructionthatusesthesame 2 the comparison.Inthisexample,ifvalueinaccumulatorislessthan which iseithertwoconsecutiveV A K P V D B SHFT SHFT SHFT 3 1 All (Seepage3–50) in V2010andV2011 accumulator withthevalue Compare thevaluein V2001 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV2000and (See page3–50) C SP M D ORST STRN DL230 Range 1–FFFFFFFF ENT value. On whenthevalueinaccumulatorisgreaterthaninstruction On whenthevalueinaccumulatorisequaltoinstructionvalue. On whenthevalueinaccumulatorislessthaninstructionvalue. Description All Vmem. CMPD LDD 2 3 aaa V2010 D G P V2000 CV 3 6 OUT C30 C A A D 2 0 0 3 All (Seepage3–51) A (See page3–51) ENT ENT DL240 Range 1–FFFFFFFF All Vmem. 0 aaa A C 0 2 A A Acc. 0 0 6739 4526 4526 All (Seepage3–52) B DL250–1 Range (See page3–52) ENT V2001 1–FFFFFFFF V2011 1 All Vmem. aaa Compared A with 0 5026 7299 7299 CMPD V2000 V2010 ENT A aaa All (Seepage3–53) (See page3–53) DL260 Range 1–FFFFFFFF All Vmem. aaa Standard RLL Instructions C10 OFF 5–85 ON C11 ON C12 C13 OFF bbb K K4 0006 E CMPF aaa A with Compared –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– bbb 1–32 Location Constant 0000 C10 Acc. Y20 OFF Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL260 Range ON Y21 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. –– aaa 0–377 0–377 0–777, 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 320–717 ON Y22 Accumulator Logical Instructions Logical Accumulator ON Y23 –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– bbb 1–32 DL250–1 Range –– –– aaa 0–777 0–777 0–377 0–177 0–137, 0–1777 0–1777 320–717 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value. Description value. On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value. On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction T S K X Y C CT SP A/B GX/GY Load the value of the specified discrete locations (C10–C13) into the accumulator Compare the value in the accumulator with the value of the specified discrete location (Y20–Y23) and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be bits (Kbbb) to and the number of Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until Y20 C10 C30 OUT K4 K4 SP62 Control Relays Stage Bits Bits Timer Counter Bits Global I/O Special Relays Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP60 SP61 Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs NOTE: is on the Load Formatted instruction loads the In the following example, when X1 The CMPF instruction into the accumulator. binary value (6) from C10–C13 compares hex). The the value in the accumulator to the value in Y20–Y23 (E corresponding indicating the result of the discrete status flag will be turned on comparison. is less than the value In this example, if the value in the accumulator C30. specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on energizing The Compare Formatted compares the Formatted The Compare with a specified the accumulator value in of discrete locations number (1–32). The location starting requires a instruction (Aaaa) compared. corresponding status flag The will result of the be turned on indicating the comparison. CMPF LDF 4 260 4 250–1 5 SP60 240 X1 5 230 Compare Formatted (CMPF) DirectSOFT32 Standard RLL 5–86 Instructions (CMPS) Stack Compare with DirectSOFT32 DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld 230 GX $ $ SHFT SHFT SHFT 5 OUT STR STR X1 240 SP60 5 ANDST ANDST C L L PREV 2 Accumualtor LogicalInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 G D D B NEXT SHFT 6 3 3 1 260 4 A M D D NEXT ORST ENT 0 3 3 CMPS LDD LDD first leveloftheaccumulatorstack. in theaccumulatorwithvalue the instructionthatcomparesthevalue 32-bit The ComparewithStackinstructionisa the valueinstack,SP60willturnon,energizingC30. result of instruction. Thecorrespondingdiscretestatusflagwillbeturnedonindicatingthe withthevalue compared when thesecondLoadinstructionisexecuted.Thevalueinaccumulator loaded intotheaccumulatorfromV1400andV1401isplacedontopofstack intotheaccumul loaded accumulator usingtheLoadDoubleinstruction.ThevalueinV1410andV1411the is thefollowingexample whenX1ison,thevalueinV1400andV1401loadedinto In NOTE: Thisdoesnotaffectcomparison. thevalueinaccumulator. The correspondingstatusflagwillbeturnedonindicatingtheresultof the P NEXT SP62 SP61 SP60 Discrete BitFlags ENT V1410 V1400 CV OUT C30 S B B SHFT RST Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. 1 1 the comparison.Inthisexample,ifvalueinaccumulatorislessthan accumulator stack in thefirstlevelof accumulator withthevalue Compare thevaluein V1411 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1410and V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and C E E ENT 2 4 4 D B A On whenthevalueinaccumulatorisgreaterthaninstructionvalue. On whenthevalueinaccumulatorisequaltoinstructionvalue. On whenthevalueinaccumulatorislessthaninstructionvalue. Description 3 1 0 A A A 0 0 0 ator usingtheLoadDoubleinstruction.Thevaluethatwas in thefirstleveloraccumulatorstackusingCMPS ENT ENT ENT Acc. Acc. 5500 6500 5500 6500 V1411 V1401 Compared Top of Stack with 3544 3544 3544 3544 V1410 V1400 CMPS Standard RLL Instructions 5–87 0000 0000 A aaa A 40E0 40D0 CMPR Acc. CMPR Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard aaa DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) All (See p. 3–53) + –3.402823E+038 –3.402823E+038 to Accumulator Logical Instructions Logical Accumulator Load the real number representation for decimal 7 into the accumulator. Compare the value with the real number representation for decimal 6. C1 aaa OUT R7.0 R6.0 All (See p. 3–52) All (See p. 3–52) DL250–1 Range + –3.402823E+038 –3.402823E+038 to decimal into the accumulator. The CMPR instruction compares The CMPR instruction decimal into the accumulator. LDR CMPR Description value. On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value. On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value. specified by a pointer (P) is not valid. On anytime the V-memory On when a real number instruction is executed and a non–real number was encountered. V P A R Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until SP62 X1 Discrete Bit Flags SP60 SP61 SP62 SP71 SP75 Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer Constant In the following example when X1 is on, the LDR instruction loads the real number In the following example when X1 7 representation for the for decimal 6. Since 7 > 6, the accumulator contents with the real representation corresponding relay SP62). discrete status flag is turned on (special NOTE: The Compare Real Number instruction Real Number The Compare comparesthe in number value a real accumulator consecutive V with two memory a real containing locations number. corresponding status flag will The the result of the be turned on indicating comparison.being Both numbers compared are 32 bits long. DirectSOFT32 4 260 4 250–1 5 240 5 230 Compare Real Compare Number (CMPR) Standard RLL 5–88 Instructions (ADD) Add Math Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 4 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 the accumulatoriscopiedtoV2010usingOutinstruction. accumulator usingtheLoadinstruction.The value inthelower16bitsof accumulator In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,valueinV2000willbeloadedinto flags isexecuted. NOTE: Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct the BCDvalue. NOTE: accumulator. (Aaaa) only. Theresultresidesin the BCD valueinaVmemorylocation BCD valueintheaccumulatorwitha Add isa16bitinstructionthatadds a GX $ SP75 SP70 SP67 SP66 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Pointer V memory DataType.Operand SHFT SHFT OUT STR X1 SOFT32 ANDST A L The statusflagsareonlyvaliduntilanotherinstructionthatusesthesame 0 A constant(K)cannotbeusedfor A P V with thevalueinV2006 16 bitsoftheaccumulator Add thevalueinlower accumulator the lower16bitsof Load thevalueinV2000into V2010 16 bitsoftheaccumulatorto Copy thevalueinlower D D B SHFT are addedtothevalueinV2006usingAddinstruction.The 3 3 1 ADD LD OUT All (Seepage3–50) V D (See page3–50) V2006 V2000 V2010 ENT AND DL230 Range On whenaBCDinstructionisexecutedandNON–BCDnumberwasencountered. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whenthe32bitadditioninstructionresultsinacarry. On whenthe16bitadditioninstructionresultsinacarry. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description All Vmem. 3 aaa C C 2 2 A C A 2 0 0 bits aresettozero The unusedaccumulator All (Seepage3–51) B A A (See page3–51) DL240 Range 1 0 0 All Vmem. + aaa 004935 0000 A A A 0 0 0 Acc. G ENT ENT 6 7435 4935 7435 2500 V2000 All (Seepage3–52) V2010 ENT DL250–1 Range (See page3–52) All Vmem. aaa (V2006) (Accumulator) ADD A aaa All (Seepage3–53) (See page3–53) DL260 Range All Vmem. aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–89 aaa All V mem. 0–99999999 DL260 Range (See page 3–53) All (See page 3–53) A aaa A ADDD (Accumulator) (V2006 and V2007) Math Instructions Math ENT ENT aaa All V mem. V2010 0 6 0–99999999 V2000 ENT (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range G A All (See page 3–52) 5026 9072 9072 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 0 1 A A B DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. V2011 V2001 0 0 0 6739 6739 5026 8739 8739 2000 4046 A A A + aaa Acc. 0 2 2 All V mem. 0–99999999 DL240 Range (See page 3–51) A C C All (See page 3–51) X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 2 AND C V 3 SHFT D aaa 3 3 All V mem. 0–99999999 Description accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry. On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. was encountered. On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number DL230 Range ENT V2010 V2000 V2006 D D (See page 3–50) All (See page 3–50) 1 3 3 3 OUTD LDD ADDD B D D D Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator Add the value in the accumulator with the value in V2006 and V2007 K V P A 0 The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same The status flags are only valid until SHFT L A ANDST SOFT32 X1 STR OUT SHFT SHFT $ GX Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP66 SP67 SP70 SP75 Operand Data Type. V memory Pointer Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Add Double is a 32 bit instruction that is a 32 bit Add Double accumulator BCD value in the adds the withwhich is either value (Aaaa), a BCD locations or V memory two consecutive BCD constant. The an 8–digit (max.) the accumulator. result resides in Inthe following example, when NOTE: flags is executed. Load Double instruction. The value in the into the accumulator using the accumulator with the value in V2006 and V2007 using the Add Double is added using the is copied to V2010 and V2011 instruction. The value in the accumulator Out Double instruction. 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 4 230 Add Double (ADDD) Standard RLL 5–90 Instructions (ADDR) Add Real DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 X1 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 to V1400andV1401. Copy theresultinaccumulator into theaccumulator therealnumber7.0 Load format. which isinrealnumber the accumulatorcontents, Add therealnumber15.0to 260 4 ADDR LDR OUTD V1400 R15.0 R7.0 floating pointformat. mustconformtotheIEEE numbers result residesintheaccumulator. Both consecutive two real constantoranumberoccupying intheaccumulatorwitheithera number The AddRealinstructionaddsareal conversion conversion NOTE: NOTE: SP75 SP74 SP73 SP72 SP71 SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Constant Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand The current HPPdoesnotsupportrealnumber entrywithautomatic The Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. to the32-bitIEEEformat. You mustuse Sign Bit R A P V Acc. V-memory locations.The encountered. On whenarealnumberinstructionisexecutedandnon-realwas On anytimeafloatingpointmathoperationresultsinanunderflowerror. on whenasignedadditionorsubtractionresultsinincorrectsignbit. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisaninvalidfloatingpointnumber. On anytimetheV-memory specifiedbyapointer(P)isnotvalid. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description 0100000110110000 8421842184218421 All Vmem(Seep.3–52) Implies 2(exp4) 128 +21=131 131 –127=4 –3.402823E+038 to + –3.402823E+038 Exponent (8bits) DL250–1 Range All (Seep.3–52) +15 aaa 22 7 (decimal) Acc. + All Vmem(Seep.3–53) –3.402823E+038 to + –3.402823E+038 100000 4170 41B0 0000 40E0 40E0 41B0 All (Seep.3–53) DL260 Range 1.011 x2(exp4)=10110. binary=22decimal V1401 aaa Real Value 0000 0000 0000 8421842184218421 0000000000000000 Direct V1400 Mantissa (23bits) SOFT32 forthisfeature. ADDR (ADDR) (Accumulator) (Hex number) A aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–91 aaa All V mem. DL260 Range (See page 3–53) All (See page 3–53) A aaa A ENT SUB 6 (Accumulator) (V2006) Math Instructions Math G aaa All V mem. 0 (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range 592 V2010 883 475 883 A V2000 All (See page 3–52) 1 0 2 0 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 ENT ENT A DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Acc. 000 475 0 2 0 A C A 02 aaa 0 1 All V mem. AND DL240 Range A V B (See page 3–51) All (See page 3–51) The unused accumulator bits are set to zero 0 0 SHFT A A 2 2 C C aaa 1 All V mem. Description accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow. On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. was encountered. On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number AND ENT DL230 Range B V V2010 V2000 V2006 (See page 3–50) All (See page 3–50) 3 1 OUT LD SUB ISG SHFT B D U Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Subtract the value in V2006 from the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator V P A A constant (K) cannot be used for A constant (K) cannot the accumulator using the Subtract instruction. The value in the accumulator the accumulator using the Subtract The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same The status flags are only valid until RST L S ANDST SOFT32 X1 STR OUT SHFT SHFT $ GX Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP64 SP65 SP70 SP75 Operand Data Type. V memory Pointer Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct Subtract is a 16 bit instruction that is a 16 bit Subtract (Aaaa) in a V the BCD value subtracts memory value in from the BCD location The the accumulator. 16 bits of the lower the accumulator. result resides in NOTE: the BCD value. In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 The value in V2006 is subtracted from the accumulator using the Load instruction. value in instruction. is copied to V2010 using the Out NOTE: flags is executed. 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 4 230 Subtract (SUB) Standard RLL 5–92 Instructions (SUBD) Double Subtract DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 4 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 is copiedtoV2010andV2011 usingtheOutDoubleinstruction. V2007 is into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.ThevalueinV2006and the followingexample,when In flags isexecuted. NOTE: The resultresidesintheaccumulator. theBCDvalueinaccumulator.from locations oran8-digit(max.)constant, either twoconsecutiveVmemory subtracts Subtract D Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct SP75 SP70 SP65 SP64 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Constant Pointer V memory DataType.Operand GX $ SHFT SHFT OUT STR X1 SOFT32 ANDST S L SHFT RST The statusflagsareonlyvaliduntilanotherinstructionthatusesthesame subtracted fromthevalueinaccumulator. Thevalueintheaccumulator the BCDvalue(Aaaa),whichis A K P V the accumulator subtracted fromthevaluein The inV2006andV2007is V2001 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV2000and V2011 accumulator toV2010and Copy thevaluein ouble isa32bitinstructionthat D D B SHFT SUBD LDD OUTD 3 3 1 All (Seepage3–50) (See page3–50) V2006 V2000 V2010 U D DL230 Range ENT On whenaBCDinstructionisexecutedandNON–BCDnumberwasencountered. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whenthe32bitsubtractioninstructionresultsinaborrow. On whenthe16bitsubtractioninstructionresultsinaborrow. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description 0–99999999 ISG All Vmem. 3 aaa C B 2 1 A D C 0 3 2 X1 ison,thevalueinV2000andV2001willbeloaded All (Seepage3–51) (See page3–51) B A DL240 Range 0–99999999 All Vmem. 1 0 ACC. aaa C A A 0 0039 0106 0039 2 0 0 V2001 1 V2011 0 72375 67 A A ENT 0 0 6 0 0 3 3 All (Seepage3–52) A DL250–1 Range (See page3–52) ENT V2000 899 274 899 V2010 0–99999999 2 0 All Vmem. 7 aaa G 4 6 (Accumulator) (V2006 andV2007) SUBD ENT A aaa All (Seepage3–53) (See page3–53) DL260 Range 0–99999999 All Vmem. aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–93 A aaa A (Hex number) (Accumulator) (SUBR) SUBR SOFT32 for this feature. Math Instructions Math Mantissa (23 bits) V1400 Direct 8421842184218421 0000000000000000 0000 0000 0000 Real Value Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard aaa DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. V1401 1.11 x 2 (exp 2) = 111. binary= 7 decimal x 2 (exp 2) = 111. 1.11 DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) 40E0 41B0 41B0 0000 4170 0000 40E0 + –3.402823E+038 –3.402823E+038 to All V mem (See p. 3–53) + Acc. (decimal) 7 22 aaa -15 All (See p. 3–52) DL250–1 Range Exponent (8 bits) 128 + 1 = 129 + –3.402823E+038 –3.402823E+038 to 129 – 127 = 2 Implies 2 (exp 2) Implies All V mem (See p. 3–52) 8421842184218421 0100000011100000 Description accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. specified by a pointer (P) is not valid. On anytime the V-memory point number. On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating sign bit. on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect error. On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow number was On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real encountered. V-memory locations. The V-memory Acc. V P A R Sign Bit to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use to the 32-bit IEEE format. You The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until number in the accumulator from either in the accumulator number Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 SP71 SP72 SP73 SP74 SP75 Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer Constant NOTE: conversion NOTE: The Subtract Real instruction subtracts a subtracts Real instruction The Subtract real occupying or a real number a real constant two consecutive result resides in the accumulator. Both the accumulator. result resides in numbers to the IEEE must conform floating point format. R22.0 R15.0 V1400 OUTD LDR SUBR SOFT32 Display 4 260 Subtract the real number 15.0 from the accululator contents, which is in real number format. Load 22.0 the real number into the accumulator. Copy the result in the accumulator to V1400 and V1401. Direct 4 250–1 X1 5 240 5 230 Subtract Real (SUBR) Standard RLL 5–94 Instructions (MUL) Multiply DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 4 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 using theOutDoubleinstruction. in theaccumulator. Thevalueintheaccumulator iscopiedtoV2010and V2011 accumulator In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,valueinV2000willbeloadedinto flags isexecuted. NOTE: (max.) (max.) either aVmemorylocationor4–digit multiplies Multiply isa16bitinstructionthat Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct the accumulator. result lower 16bitsoftheaccumulatorThe SP75 SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Constant Pointer V memory DataType.Operand GX $ SHFT SHFT OUT STR X1 SOFT32 ANDST M L SHFT ORST can beupto8digitsandresidesin constant, bytheBCDvaluein The statusflagsareonlyvaliduntilanotherinstructionthatusesthesame the BCDvalue(Aaaa),whichis A K P V accumulator multiplied bythevaluein The valueinV2006is accumulator the lower16bitsof Load thevalueinV2000into V2011 accumulator toV2010and Copy thevaluein D U D B ISG using theLoadinstruction.ThevalueinV2006ismultipliedby MUL LD OUTD 3 3 1 All (Seepage3–50) ANDST L V2006 V2000 V2010 DL230 Range ENT On whenaBCDinstructionisexecutedandNON–BCDnumberwasencountered. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description 1–9999 aaa –– C C 2 2 A C A 0 0 2 bits aresettozero The unusedaccumulator All (Seepage3–51) B A A (See page3–51) DL240 Range Acc. All Vmem. 1 0 0 1–9999 aaa 0 0002 0002 A A A 0 0 0 0 V2011 0 G ENT ENT 0 6 5 5 1 1 All (Seepage3–52) V2000 000 000 000 V2010 0 DL250–1 Range (See page3–52) ENT All Vmem. 0 25 1–9999 aaa 0 (V2006) (Accumulator) MUL A aaa All (Seepage3–53) (See page3–53) DL260 Range All Vmem. 1–9999 aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–95 ENT 4 E SHFT A aaa A (Accumulator) (Accumulator) 4 2 8 MULD E 7 Math Instructions Math 6 V1500 356 678 356 V1400 1 5 B 5 1 1 4 6 3 ENT –– G aaa Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard V1403 2 234 V1401 DL260 Range 2469 1 1 2469 0 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. SHFT A All V mem (See p. 3–53) Acc. 0 2 ENT ENT A C 0 4 2 1 A E C B 0 0 1 –– ENT aaa A B A DL250–1 Range 2 4 4 All V mem (See p. 3–52) PREV SHFT E C E Output the number to V1400 and V1401 using the OUTD instruction. Load the constant K2 into the accumulator. Multiply the accumulator contents (2) by the 8-digit number in V1400 and V1401. Move the result in the accumulator to V1402 and V1403 using the OUTD instruction. Convert the value to BCD format. It will occupy eight BCD digits (32 bits). Load the hex equivalent of 12345678 decimal into the accumulator. Description accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. was encountered. On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number 1 1 3 ENT PREV B D B V P A 3 3 K2 ENT V1400 V1400 V1402 D D L ANDST Kbc614e Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until BCD OUTD LD MULD OUTD LDD 1 3 2 3 3 3 ISG B D C D D U D 1 Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 SP75 Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer NOTE: is on, the constant Kbc614e hex will be loaded In the following example, when X1 When converted to BCD the number is ”12345678”. That into the accumulator. numberis loading the constant K2 into the stored in V1400 and V1401. After we multiply it times 12345678, which is 24691356. accumulator, Multiply Double is a 32 bit instruction that Double is a 32 bit Multiply value in the the 8-digit BCD multiplies accumulator BCD value in by the 8-digit locations consecutive V-memory the two 8 instruction. The lower specified in the results reside in the digits of the digits of the result Upper accumulator. stack. reside in the accumulator ORST SHFT SHFT L B L M ANDST ANDST SOFT32 Display X1 STR OUT OUT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ GX GX 4 260 4 250–1 5 240 5 230 Multiply Double (MULD) Standard RLL 5–96 Instructions (MULR) Real Multiply DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 X1 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 Direct to V1400andV1401. Copy theresultinaccumulator into theaccumulator. Load therealnumber7.0 15.0 contents bytherealnumber Multiply theaccumulator 260 4 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 MULR LDR OUTD R 15.0 V1400 R 7.0 floating pointformat. mustconformtotheIEEE numbers result residesintheaccumulator. Both consecutive two realconstantoranumberoccupying a real The MultiplyRealinstructionmultipliesa conversion conversion NOTE: NOTE: SP75 SP74 SP73 SP72 SP71 SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Real Constant Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand number intheaccumulatorwitheither The current HPPdoesnotsupportrealnumber entrywithautomatic The Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. to the32-bitIEEEformat. You mustuse Sign Bit R A P V Acc. V-memory locations.The encountered. On whenarealnumberinstructionisexecutedandnon-realwas On anytimeafloatingpointmathoperationresultsinanunderflowerror. on whenasignedadditionorsubtractionresultsinincorrectsignbit. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisavalidfloatingpointnumber. On anytimetheV-memory specifiedbyapointer(P)isnotvalid. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description 0100001011010010 8421842184218421 Implies 2(exp6) 128 +41=133 All Vmem(Seep.3–52) All Vmem(Seep.3–52) 133 –127=6 Exponent (8bits) –3.402823E+038 to + –3.402823E+038 DL250–1 Range 105 x15 aaa 7 (decimal) Acc. + 1.101001 x2(exp6)=1101001. binary=105decimal 100000 4170 42D2 0000 40E0 40E0 42D2 All Vmem(Seep.3–53) All Vmem(Seep.3–53) –3.402823E+038 to + –3.402823E+038 V1401 DL260 Range Real Value aaa 0000 0000 0000 8421842184218421 0000000000000000 Direct V1400 Mantissa (23bits) SOFT32 forthisfeature. MULR (MULR) (Accumulator) (Hex number) A aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–97 000 aaa 1–9999 All V mem. DL260 Range (See page 3–53) All (See page 3–53) A aaa A First stack location contains the remainder 0000 0 DIV (Accumulator) (V2006) Math Instructions Math aaa 1–9999 50 All V mem. ENT (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range V2010 100 100 000 V2000 All (See page 3–52) 5 5 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 6 ENT ENT G DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Acc. 000 000 0 0 0 A A A 0 aaa 1–9999 0 0 1 All V mem. DL240 Range The unused accumulator bits are set to zero A A B (See page 3–51) All (See page 3–51) 2 0 0 A C A 2 2 C C –– aaa 1–9999 Description can work with. On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. was encountered. On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number AND AND ENT DL230 Range V V V2010 V2000 V2006 All (See page 3–50) 3 8 1 OUT LD DIV using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator will be divided using the Load instruction. The value SHFT B D I Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 Load the value in V2000 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator The value in the accumulator is divided by the value in V2006 K V P A 3 The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same The status flags are only valid until L D ANDST SOFT32 X1 STR OUT SHFT SHFT $ GX Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP53 SP63 SP70 SP75 Operand Data Type. V memory Pointer Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct Divide is a 16 bit instruction that divides a 16 bit instruction Divide is by a value in the accumulator the BCD is either a V (Aaaa), which BCD value memory (max.) or a 4-digit location part of the quotient constant. The first the accumulator and resides in the remainderfirst stack resides in the location. In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 accumulator Divide instruction. The value in the accumulator is by the value in V2006 using the copied to V2010 using the Out instruction. NOTE: flags is executed. 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 4 230 Divide (DIV) Standard RLL 5–98 Instructions (DIVD) Divide Double DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 location. theremainder r and the quotientresidesinaccumulator parameterinthebox.)Thefirstpartof the locations. (You cannotuseaconstantas obtained from obtained by aBCDvalue(Aaaa),whichmustbe divides theBCD Divide Doubleisa32bitinstructionthat and V1501usingtheOutDoubleinstruction. resides inthefirststacklocation.ThevalueaccumulatoriscopiedtoV1500 instruction. isdividedbythevalueinV1420and V1421usingtheDivideDouble accumulator into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.Thevaluein the followingexample,when In NOTE: Direct Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes SP75 SP70 SP63 SP53 Discrete BitFlags Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand GX $ SHFT SHFT OUT STR X1 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 ANDST D L Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. SHFT 3 V1420 andV1421 is dividedbythevaluein The valueintheaccumulator V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and The firstpartofthequotientresides D I D B and V1501 accumulator toV1500 Copy thevaluein DIVD LDD OUTD twoconsecutiveVmemory 3 8 3 1 A P V value intheaccumulator V1420 V1400 V1500 V D On whenaBCDinstructionisexecutedandNON–BCDnumberwasencountered. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. On whenthevalueofoperandislargerthanaccumulatorcanworkwith. Description ENT AND 3 esides inthefirststack All Vmem(Seep.3–52) DL250–1 Range B 1 aaa –– F B B 1 5 1 X1 ison,thevalueinV1400andV1401willbeloaded bits aresettozero The unusedaccumulator A E E 0 4 4 Acc. A C A 2 0 0 All Vmem(Seep.3–53) 0 0 0003 0003 0150 V1401 A A DL260 Range 1 0 0050 000 V1501 ENT 0 0 in theaccumulatoranremainder 00000 50 aaa –– ENT ENT 0 0 0 V1400 000 000 000 V1500 DIVD (V1421 andV1420) (Accumulator) A aaa 000 0000 theremainder First stacklocationcontains 000 Standard RLL Instructions 5–99 A aaa A (Hex number) (Accumulator) (DIVR) DIVR SOFT32 for this feature. Math Instructions Math Mantissa (23 bits) V1400 Direct 8421842184218421 0000000000000000 0000 0000 0000 1.1 x 2 (exp 0) = 1.1 binary= 1.5 decimal Real Value Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard aaa DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. V1401 DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) 3FC0 4170 4170 0000 4120 0000 3FC0 + –3.402823E+038 –3.402823E+038 to All V mem (See p. 3–53) ÷ Acc. 5 (decimal) . 1 15 10 aaa ÷ All (See p. 3–52) DL250–1 Range Exponent (8 bits) + –3.402823E+038 –3.402823E+038 to 127 – 127 = 0 Implies 2 (exp 0) Implies All V mem (See p. 3–52) 8421842184218421 0011111111000000 Description accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. specified by a pointer (P) is not valid. On anytime the V-memory point number. On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating sign bit. on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect error. On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow number was On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real encountered. 64 + 32 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 127 Acc. V P A R accumulator by either a real accumulator Sign Bit to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use to the 32-bit IEEE format. You The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 SP71 SP72 SP73 SP74 SP75 Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer Constant NOTE: conversion NOTE: constant or a real number occupying two or a real number constant locations. The V-memory consecutive Both the accumulator. result resides in IEEE the to numbers must conform floating point format. The Divide Real instruction divides a real Real instruction The Divide number in the R15.0 R10.0 V1400 OUTD LDR DIVR 4 260 Divide the accumulator contents by the real number 10.0. Load the real number 15.0 into the accumulator. Copy the result in the accumulator to V1400 and V1401. SOFT32 Display 4 250–1 Direct X1 5 240 5 230 Divide Real (DIVR) Standard RLL 5–100 Instructions (INC) Increment (DEC) Decrement DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 5 5 240 240 5 5 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 250–1 4 4 260 260 4 4 by “1”eachtimetheinstructionisexecuted. by valueinaspecifiedVmemorylocation BCD The Incrementinstructionincrementsa closure. NOTE: time thatC5isclosed(true). In thefollowingdecrementexample,valueinV1400isdecreasedbyoneeach that C5isclosed(true). thefollowingincrement In NOTE: “1”eachtime by valueinaspecifiedVmemorylocation BCD The Decrementinstructiondecrements a Direct Direct SP75 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes $ SHFT $ SHFT STR STR C5 C5 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 I D Useapulsedcontactclosure toINC/DECthevalueinV–memoryonceper Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. 8 3 N NEXT E NEXT V1400 by“1”. Decrement thevaluein TMR DEC V1400 by“1”. Increment thevaluein INC 4 A P V the instructionisexecuted. V1400 V1400 C NEXT C NEXT on whenaBCDinstructionisexecutedandNON–BCDnumberwasencountered. on whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description 2 2 All Vmem(Seep.3–52) DL250–1 Range All (Seep.3–52) NEXT NEXT aaa example, the NEXT B NEXT B 1 1 F F E E 5 5 4 4 A A All Vmem(Seep.3–53) ENT value inV1400increasesbyoneeachtime ENT 0 0 All (Seep.3–53) 8934 8935 8936 8935 DL260 Range V1400 V1400 V1400 V1400 A A aaa 0 0 ENT ENT DEC INC aaa A aaa A Standard RLL Instructions 5–101 A aaa A ADDB (Accumulator) (V1420) ENT Math Instructions Math 0 A V1500 2C4 CC 9 A05 CC9 V1400 0 1 1 0 1 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 2 aaa ENT ENT C 0–FFFF DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Acc. DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) 0 4 0 000 A05 All V mem (See p. 3–53) A E A 0 + 0 0 1 A B A The unused accumulator bits are set to zero 4 5 E F aaa 0–FFFF 1 1 1 B B B All (See p. 3–52) DL250–1 Range the accumulator with the accumulator All V mem (See p. 3–52) the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator will be the Load instruction. The binary value 3 Description accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry. On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. sign bit. On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect ENT D V1500 V1400 V1420 complement binary value complement bits of K V P A 3 1 3 3 OUTD LD ADDB B D D D Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Load the value in V1400 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator The binary value in the accumulator is added to the binary value in V1420 the binary value in V1420 using the Add Binary instruction. The value in the Add Binary instruction. The value in the binary value in V1420 using the 0 Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until SHFT L A ANDST SOFT32 Display X1 STR OUT SHFT SHFT $ GX Direct Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP66 SP67 SP70 SP73 Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer Handheld Programmer Keystrokes accumulator to V1500 and V1501 using the Out instruction. is copied NOTE: is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 accumulator using added to Addthat adds bit instruction Binary is a 16 the 2’s unsigned in 16 the lower an unsigned 2’s complement binary value complement binary an unsigned 2’s is either a V memory (Aaaa), which constant. The result location or a 16-bit 32 bits (unsigned 2’s can be up to complement)in the and resides accumulator. 4 260 4 250–1 5 240 5 230 Add Binary (ADDB) Standard RLL 5–102 Instructions (ADDBD) Add BinaryDouble DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 260 4 accumulator. constant. Theresultresidesin the unsigned 2’s complementbinary V consecutive value (Aaaa),whichiseither two binary valueintheaccumulatorwith the that addstheunsigned2’s complement Add BinaryDoubleisa32bitinstruction V1501 usingtheOutDoubleinstruction. Binary Doubleinstruction.ThevalueintheaccumulatoriscopiedtoV1500and accumulator isaddedwiththebinaryvalueinV1420andV1421usingAdd into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.Thebinaryvaluein the followingexample,when In NOTE: Direct Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld SP73 SP70 SP67 SP66 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Constant Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand GX $ SHFT SHFT OUT STR X1 SOFT32 Display ANDST A L SHFT Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. 0 and V1501 accumulator toV1500 Copy thevaluein V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and value inV1420andV1421 accumulator isaddedwiththe The binaryvalueinthe D D D B OUTD ADDBD LDD 3 3 1 3 A K P V memory locationsor32-bit V1500 V1420 V1400 D D On whenasignedadditionorsubtractionresultsinincorrectsignbit. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whenthe32bitadditioninstructionresultsinacarry. On whenthe16bitadditioninstructionresultsinacarry. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description ENT All Vmem(Seep.3–53) 3 3 All (See3–53) DL260 Range 0–FFFFFFFF B B aaa 1 1 F D B 5 1 3 X1 ison,thevalueinV1400andV1401willbeloaded A E 0 4 Acc. A B A + 1 0 0 1000 0 1000 0000 1 V1401 0 C010 000 0 V1501 E A ENT 0 4 0 0 C ENT C C 0 0 2 V1400 A A A11 A V1500 11 01 0 A 0 1 ADDBD (V1421 and V1420) and (V1421 (Accumulator) ENT A aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–103 ENT A aaa A 0 A SUBB 2 Math Instructions Math C (Accumulator) (V1420) 4 E V1500 619 A0B 024 619 V1400 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 1 1 0 0 1 0 aaa ENT B 0–FFFF DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) Acc. 0 All V mem (See p. 3–53) ENT 000 024 A 0 3 0 0 A D A The unused accumulator bits are set to zero 1 4 0 E B A aaa 0–FFFF 1 1 5 B B F All (See p. 3–52) DL250–1 Range All V mem (See p. 3–52) 1 ISG Description accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow. On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. ENT U B V1500 V1400 V1420 K V P A 3 1 OUT LD SUBB SHFT B D Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500 Load the value in V1400 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator The binary value in V1420 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator RST Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until SHFT L S ANDST SOFT32 Display X1 STR OUT SHFT SHFT $ GX Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP64 SP65 SP70 Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct NOTE: is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 accumulator the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is subtracted using from the Subtract Binary instruction. The the binary value in the accumulator using to V1500 using the Out instruction. value in the accumulator is copied Subtract Binary is a 16 bit instruction that Binary is a 16 bit Subtract 2–s complement the unsigned subtracts is either a V (Aaaa), which binary value memory 2’s or a 16-bit location binary the from value, complement binary result The value in the accumulator. resides in the accumulator. 4 260 4 250–1 5 240 5 230 Subtract Binary (SUBB) Standard RLL 5–104 Instructions (SUBBD) Double Binary Subtract DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 260 4 resides intheaccumulator. val binary binaryconstant,fromthe complement locations ora32-bitunsigned2’s either twoconsecutiveVmemory binaryvalue(Aaaa),which iscomplement thatsubtractstheunsigned2’sinstruction Subtract BinaryDoubleisa32 bit V1501 usingtheOutDoubleinstruction. Binary Doubleinstruction.ThevalueintheaccumulatoriscopiedtoV1500and V1421issubtractedfromthebinaryvalueinaccumulatorusingSubtract and into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.ThebinaryvalueinV1420 the followingexample,when In NOTE: Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct SP70 SP65 SP64 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Constant Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand GX $ SHFT SHFT OUT STR X1 SOFT32 Display ANDST S L SHFT Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. RST ue intheaccumulatorTheresult and V1501 accumulator toV1500 Copy thevaluein V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and binary valueintheaccumulator V1421 issubtractedfromthe The binaryvalueinV1420and D D B SHFT OUTD SUBBD LDD 3 1 3 A K P V V1500 V1420 V1400 U D ENT On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whenthe32bitsubtractioninstructionresultsinaborrow. On whenthe16bitsubtractioninstructionresultsinaborrow. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description ISG 3 All (Seep.3–53) All (Seep.3–53) DL260 Range 0–FFFFFFFF B B aaa 1 1 F B B 5 1 1 X1 ison,thevalueinV1400andV1401willbeloaded Acc. A D E 0 4 3 0005 0006 0005 0 0 V1401 A A 0 1A01 000 00 V1501 0 0 600FF B A ENT E E 0 1 0 V1400 6 0 6 V1500 E FE FF F ENT 4 E (V1421 and V1420) and (V1421 (Accumulator) C 2 SUBBD A 0 A aaa ENT Standard RLL Instructions 5–105 A aaa A MULB (Accumulator) (V1420) ENT Math Instructions Math 2E 0 V1500 C2E 02E A01 A V1400 C C 0 0 0 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 2 aaa ENT ENT C 0–FFFF DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) V1501 000 A01 4 0 0 All V mem (See p. 3–53) 0001 0001 C E A A 0 0 0 1 Acc. The unused accumulator bits are set to zero B A A 5 4 F E aaa 0–FFFF 1 1 1 B B B All (See p. 3–52) DL250–1 Range All V mem (See p. 3–52) 1 Description accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. ENT L V1400 V1420 V1500 K V P A 3 1 3 LD MULB OUTD ISG B D U D Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Load the value in V1400 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator The binary value in V1420 is multiplied by the binary value in the accumulator Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until ORST value in the accumulator The result value in the accumulator SHFT L M ANDST SOFT32 Display X1 STR OUT SHFT SHFT $ GX Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 Operand Data Type Vmemory Pointer Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct NOTE: is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 accumulator the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is multiplied by using the Binary instruction. The value in binary value in the accumulator using the Multiply using the Out instruction. the accumulator is copied to V1500 Multiply Binary is a 16 bit instruction that Binary is a 16 bit Multiply complement 2’s the unsigned multiplies is either a V (Aaaa), which binary value 2’s memory or a 16-bit unsigned location complement constant, by the16-bit binary binary bits and resides in the can be up to 32 accumulator. 4 260 4 250–1 5 240 5 230 Multiply Binary (MULB) Standard RLL 5–106 Instructions (DIVB) Divide Binary DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 location. theremainder r and of thequotientresidesinaccumulator complement locationora16-bitunsigned memory 2’s binary value(Aaaa),whichiseitheraV binary valueintheaccumulatorbya divides theunsigned2’s complement Divide Binaryisa16bitinstructionthat the accumulatoriscopiedtoV1500usingOutinstruction. divided by the binary value in usingtheLoadinstruction.Thebinary valueintheaccumulator accumulator is In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,valueinV1400willbeloadedinto NOTE: Direct Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes SP70 SP63 SP53 Discrete BitFlags Constant Constant Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand GX $ SHFT SHFT OUT STR X1 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 ANDST D L SHFT Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. 3 the binaryvalueinV1420 accumulator isdividedby The binaryvalueinthe lower 16bitsoftheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400into bits oftheaccumulatortoV1500 Copy thevalueinlower16 D I D B binary constant.Thefirstpart DIVB LD OUT 3 3 8 1 K A K P V V V1420 V1400 V1500 ENT AND On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. On whenthevalueofoperandislargerthanaccumulatorcanworkwith. Description esides inthefirststack All Vmem(Seep.3–52) DL250–1 Range All (Seep.3–52) B B B 0–FFFF 1 1 1 0–FFFF aaa F E V1420 usingtheDivideBinaryinstruction.Thevaluein 5 4 bits aresettozero The unusedaccumulator A B A 1 0 0 0 0 A01 000 A E A All Vmem(Seep.3–53) Acc. 0 4 0 All (Seep.3–53) DL260 Range C 0–FFFF F 0 F 0 0 ENT ENT aaa 2 V1400 A01 320 320 V1500 050 A 0 (V1420) (Accumulator) ENT 000 0000 theremainder First stacklocationcontains DIVB A aaa 000 Standard RLL Instructions 5–107 aaa All V mem. DL260 Range (See page 3–53) All (See page 3–53) A aaa INCB Math Instructions Math ENT aaa All V mem. 0 (See page 3–52) DL250–1 Range A All (See page 3–52) Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 V2000 V2000 A DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 4A3C 4A3D 0 A aaa All V mem. 2 DL240 Range (See page 3–51) C All (See page 3–51) ENT 5 1 F B –– aaa 2 2 Description accumulator to be zero. on when the result of the instruction causes the value in the DL230 Range C C V2000 All (See page 3–50) INCB TMR SHFT N V P A Increment the binary value in the accumulator by“1” 8 The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same The status flags are only valid until I SOFT32 C5 STR SHFT $ Discrete Bit Flags SP63 Operand Data Type. V memory Pointer The Increment Binary instruction Binary The Increment increments V value in a specified a binary memory time the by “1” each location is executed. instruction Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes NOTE: flags is executed. In binary value in V2000 is increased by 1. the following example when C5 is on, the 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 4 230 Increment Binary Increment (INCB) Standard RLL 5–108 Instructions (DECB) Decrement Binary DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 4 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 In thefollowingexamplewhenC5ison,valueinV2000decreasedby1. flags isexecuted. NOTE: Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct instruction isexecuted. locationby“1”eachtimethe memory adecrements The DecrementBinaryinstruction SP63 Discrete BitFlags Pointer V memory DataType.Operand $ SHFT STR C5 SOFT32 D The statusflagsareonlyvaliduntilanotherinstructionthatusesthesame 3 in theaccumulatorby“1” Decrement thebinaryvalue A P V E SHFT DECB 4 binary valueinaspecifiedV All (Seepage3–50) V2000 C C DL230 Range on whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description 2 2 aaa –– B F 1 5 ENT All (Seepage3–51) C (See page3–51) DL240 Range All Vmem. 2 aaa A 0 4A3B 4A3C A V2000 V2000 0 All (Seepage3–52) A DL250–1 Range (See page3–52) 0 All Vmem. aaa ENT DECB aaa A All (Seepage3–53) (See page3–53) DL260 Range All Vmem. aaa Standard RLL Instructions C0 ON 5–109 C1 ON C2 OFF C3 OFF bbb K ADDF aaa A X0 OFF ON Y10 Math Instructions Math (Accumulator) (C0-C3) X1 OFF Y11 OFF 3 X2 OFF 11 Y12 OFF ENT X3 ON Y13 OFF Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 4 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– 00008 bbb 1–32 E 000 0000 0 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero + DL260 Range 0 Acc. A –– aaa 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 NEXT 0–137 320–717 ENT ENT NEXT T X Y S K A C CT SP GX/GY Description accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry. when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. was encountered. On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number 4 4 NEXT E E by discrete locations C0–C3 is added to the value in the accumulator by discrete locations C0–C3 is added NEXT discrete bits. The specified range bits. The specified discrete Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until 0 0 Copy the lower 4 bits of the accumulator to discrete locations Y10–Y14 Add the value in the accumulator with the value represented by discrete location C0–C3 Load the value represented by discrete locations X0–X3 into the accumulator A A 5 1 Stage Bits Bits Timer Counter Bits Special Relays Global I/O Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP66 SP67 SP70 SP75 Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs Control Relays NOTE: X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations In the following example, when using the Load Formatted instruction. The X0–X3 is loaded into the accumulator value formed The value in the lower four bits of the using the Add Formatted instruction. accumulator to Y10–Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction. is copied Add Formatted is a 32 bit instruction that is a 32 bit Add Formatted the accumulator BCD value in adds the a which is BCD value (Aaaa) with the range of bits. to 32 consecutive (Kbbb) can be 1 in the accumulator. The result resides F B K4 K4 K5 3 5 ENT F D 4 260 OUTF Y10 LDF X0 ADDF C0 3 3 5 6 D F G D 5 250–1 0 5 SHFT A L ANDST 240 X6 SOFT32 Display 5 STR OUT 230 SHFT SHFT GX $ Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Add Formatted (ADDF) Standard RLL 5–110 Instructions (SUBF) Formatted Subtract DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Direct Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes GX $ 230 SHFT SHFT 5 OUT STR SOFT32 Display SOFT32 X6 240 ANDST 5 S L SHFT RST Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 F D G SHFT 5 3 6 UFY10 OUTF C0 SUBF X0 LDF 260 4 U F ENT ISG 5 K4 K4 K4 accumulator. bi consecutive specified range(Kbbb)canbe 1 to 32 BCD valueintheaccumulator. The which isarangeofdiscretebits,fromthe that subtractstheBCDvalue(Aaaa), Subtract Formattedisa32bitinstruction bits oftheaccumulatoriscopiedtoY10–Y13usingOutFormattedinstruction. usingtheSubtractFormattedinstruction. Thevalueinthelowerfour accumulator value formedbydiscretelocationC0–C3issubtractedfromthein X0–X3 isloadedintotheaccumulatorusingLoadFormattedinstruction.The In thefollowingexample,whenX6ison,valueformedbydiscretelocations NOTE: B B SP75 SP70 SP65 SP64 SP63 Discrete BitFlags Constant Global I/O Special Relays Counter Bits Timer Bits Stage Bits Control Relays Outputs Inputs DataTypeOperand 1 1 A F A into theaccumulator by discretelocationsX0–X3 Load thevaluerepresented locations Y10–Y13 accumulator todiscrete Copy thelower4bitsof the valueinaccumulator represented byC0–C3from Subtract thevalue Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. 0 0 5 ts. Theresultresidesinthe E E NEXT 4 4 On whenaBCDinstructionisexecutedandNON–BCDnumberwasencountered. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whenthe32bitsubtractioninstructionresultsinaborrow. On whenthe16bitsubtractioninstructionresultsinaborrow. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description GX/GY SP CT C A K S Y X T NEXT ENT ENT 0–137 320–717 NEXT 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–1777 0–377 0–377 aaa –– ACC. NEXT DL260 Range bits aresettozero The unusedaccumulator 000 000 0000 A 0 1–32 00009 bbb –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– 0 OFF Y13 ON X3 E OFF Y12 OFF 01 X2 4 8 OFF Y11 OFF X1 ENT (C0-C3) (Accumulator) Y10 ON ON X0 UFA aaa SUBF K bbb ON C3 OFF C2 OFF C1 OFF C0 Standard RLL Instructions 5–111 C0 OFF C1 ON C2 OFF C3 OFF the lower four bits bbb K ue in MULF aaa A Math Instructions Math X0 ON Y10 OFF (Accumulator) (C0-C3) The val X1 ON ON Y11 2 ENT X2 06 OFF ON Y12 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard X3 OFF 4 Y13 OFF 0 E DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– bbb 1–16 00003 0000 0 000 0 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero DL260 Range A Acc. –– aaa 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 NEXT 0–137 320–717 ENT ENT NEXT T K X Y S C CT SP A/B GX/GY 4 4 Description accumulator On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. was On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number encountered. NEXT E E ts. The result resides in the ts. The result resides using the Multiply Formatted instruction. NEXT 0 0 Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until A A Multiply the value in the accumulator with the value represented by discrete locations C0–C3 Copy the lower 4 bits of the accumulator to discrete locations Y10–Y13 Load the value represented by discrete locations X0–X3 into the accumulator 5 1 Control Relays Stage Bits Bits Timer Counter Bits Special Relays Global I/O Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 SP75 Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs F B NOTE: X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations In the following example, when using the Load Formatted instruction. The X0–X3 is loaded into the accumulator C0–C3 is multiplied by the value in the value formed by discrete locations accumulator of the accumulator is copied to Y10–Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction. of the accumulator is copied to Y10–Y13 Multiply Formatted is a 16 bit instruction Formatted is a Multiply value in the the BCD that multiplies accumulator value (Aaaa) by the BCD bits. The a range of discrete which is 16 to 1 (Kbbb) can be specified range consecutive bi accumulator. 5 K4 K4 K4 ENT F L ANDST 4 260 OUTF Y10 LDF X0 MULF C0 3 5 6 ISG U F G D 5 250–1 ORST SHFT M L ANDST 5 240 X6 SOFT32 Display STR OUT SHFT SHFT 5 GX $ 230 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct Multiply Formatted (MULF) Standard RLL 5–112 Instructions (DIVF) Divide Formatted DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Direct Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes 230 GX $ 5 SHFT SHFT OUT STR SOFT32 Display SOFT32 X6 240 5 ANDST D L SHFT 3 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 D G F I 5 8 6 3 UFY10 OUTF C0 DIVF X0 LDF 260 4 V F ENT AND K4 K4 K4 5 Divide accumulator iscopiedtoY10–Y13usingtheOut Formattedinstruction. accumulator using theDivideFormattedinstruction.Thevalueinlowerfourbitsof in value X0–X3 isloadedintotheaccumulatorusingLoadFormattedinstruction.The In thefollowingexample,whenX6ison,valueformedbydiscretelocations NOTE: the firststacklocation. accumulator part ofthequotientresidesin the can be1to16consecutivebits.Thefirst discrete bits.Thespecifiedrange(Kbbb) by theBCDvalue(Aaaa),arangeof divides theBCD B F SP75 SP70 SP63 SP53 Discrete BitFlags Constant Global I/O Special Relays Counter Bits Timer Bits Stage Bits Control Relays Outputs Inputs DataTypeOperand 1 5 into theaccumulator by discretelocationsX0–X3 Load thevaluerepresented locations Y10–Y13 accumulator todiscrete Copy thelower4bitsof location C0–C3 represented bydiscrete accumulator withthevalue Divide thevaluein A A Formatted is a16 Formatted Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. 0 0 the accumulatorisdividedbyvalueformeddiscretelocationC0–C3 NEXT and theremainderresidesin E E value intheaccumulator NEXT On whenaBCDinstructionisexecutedandNON–BCDnumberwasencountered. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. On whenthevalueofoperandislargerthanaccumulatorcanworkwith. Description 4 4 GX/GY A/B SP CT C S Y X K T NEXT ENT ENT bit instructionthat 0–137 320–717 NEXT 0–3777 0–1777 0–1777 0–177 0–377 0–477 0–477 aaa –– A DL260 Range bits aresettozero The unusedaccumulator Acc. 0 000 0000 000 1–16 bbb –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– E 00008 ON 4 X3 0 OFF Y13 OFF X2 ENT Y12 ON OFF 04 X1 2 OFF Y11 OFF X0 (Accumulator) (C0-C3) OFF Y10 000 0000 IFA aaa DIVF theremainder First stacklocationcontains K bbb 000 OFF C3 OFF C2 ON C1 OFF C0 Standard RLL Instructions 5–113 Accumulator stack after 1st LDD Accumulator stack after 2nd LDD 00395026 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX instruction, pushing the ADDS Level 1 Level 7 Level 8 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Math Instructions Math Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard Load Double DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. V1500 V1420 V1400 5026 2056 7082 7082 5026 2056 X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 V1501 V1401 V1421 0039 0039 0017 0017 0056 0056 ENT ENT Acc. Acc. Acc. 0 0 ENT A A value in the first level 0 2 0 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered. On when a BCD instruction is Description causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction results in a carry. On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry. On when the 32 bit addition instruction is negative. On anytime the value in the accumulator loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The value in loaded in the accumulator onto the A C A 4 4 0 E E A loaded into the accumulator using the loaded into the accumulator using 1 1 5 Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until ENT previously the Add Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and the Add Stack instruction. The value B B F Load the value in V1420 and V1421 into the accumulator Add the value in the accumulator with the value in the first level of the accumulator stack Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Load the value in V1400 and V1401 into the accumulator 1 RST SP75 Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP66 SP67 SP70 S B NOTE: Inthe following example, when Double instruction. The value in V1420 and into the accumulator using the Load V1421 is value Add Top of Stack is a 32 bit instruction that is a 32 bit instruction of Stack AddTop the accumulator BCD value in adds the first level of the BCD value in the with the accumulator result resides in stack. The The the accumulator. stack is removed and of the accumulator are moved up one level. all stack values the first level of the accumulator stack is added with the value in the accumulator the first level of the accumulator using V1501 using the Out Double instruction. 3 3 3 ENT D D D V1500 V1400 V1420 4 260 3 3 1 3 3 ADDS OUTD LDD LDD D D B D D 5 250–1 0 SHFT A L L ANDST ANDST 5 240 SOFT32 Display X1 STR OUT 5 SHFT SHFT SHFT GX $ 230 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct Add Top Add Top of Stack (ADDS) Standard RLL 5–114 Instructions (SUBS) of Stack TopSubtract DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Direct Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld 230 GX $ SHFT SHFT SHFT 5 OUT STR X1 SOFT32 Display 240 5 ANDST ANDST S L L SHFT RST Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 D D D B SHFT LDD OUTD SUBS LDD 3 1 3 3 260 4 V1400 V1500 V1420 U D D ENT ISG 3 3 up onelevel. andallstackvaluesaremoved removed the firstlevelofaccumulatorstackis resides intheaccumulator. Thevaluein BCD valueintheaccumulator. Theresult level oftheaccumulatorstackfrom that subtractstheBCDvalueinfirst Subtract Topof is copiedtoV1500andV1501usingtheOutDoubleinstruction. accumulatorusingtheSubtractStackinstruction.The valueintheaccumulator the value inthefirstl value V1421 is into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.ThevalueinV1420and the followingexample,when In NOTE: B B SP75 SP70 SP65 SP64 SP63 Discrete BitFlags 1 1 accumulator stack fromthevaluein level oftheaccumulator Subtract thevalueinfirst V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and and V1501 accumulator toV1500 Copy thevaluein V1421 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1420and F S B B previously loadedintotheaccumulatorontostack.TheBCD RST Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. 1 5 1 loaded intotheaccumulatorusing A E E ENT 0 4 4 Stack isa32bit A C A evel oftheaccumulatorstackissubtractedfromBCDvalue in On whenaBCDinstructionisexecutedandNON–BCDnumberwasencountered. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whenthe32bitsubtractioninstructionresultsinaborrow. On whenthe16bitsubtractioninstructionresultsinaborrow. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description 0 2 0 A A ENT 0 0 Acc. Acc. Acc. ENT ENT 0022 0022 0039 0039 0017 0017 X1 ison,thevalueinV1400andV1401willbeloaded V1421 V1401 V1501 instruction 5026 2056 2970 2970 5026 2056 V1500 V1400 V1420 Load Double Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 1 SUBS instruction, pushingthe XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 00172056 after2ndLDD Accumulator stack after1stLDD Accumulator stack Standard RLL Instructions 5–115 Accumulator stack after 1st LDD Accumulator stack after 2nd LDD 00005000 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Level 1 Level 7 Level 8 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 MULS Math Instructions Math Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. V1420 V1500 V1400 5000 0200 0000 0000 0200 5000 V1501 0000 0000 0100 0100 Acc. Acc. Acc. The unused accumulator bits are set to zero The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded Load Double instruction, pushing ENT ENT ENT 0 0 0 Description causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction is negative. On anytime the value in the accumulator executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered. On when a BCD instruction is ack is a 16 bit instruction ack is a A A A 0 2 0 A C A 4 4 5 Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until BCD value in the accumulator. The in the accumulator. BCD value ENT E E F Load the value in V1420 into the accumulator Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Load the value in V1400 into the accumulator Multiply the value in the accumulator with the value in the first level of the accumulator stack 1 1 1 RST Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 SP75 B B S B NOTE: is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the In the following example, when X1 accumulator the Load instruction. The value in V1420 is loaded into the using the accumulator using stack. The BCD value in the first level of the in the accumulator onto the accumulator accumulator is multiplied by the BCD value in the accumulator using the stack in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and Multiply Stack instruction. The value V1501 using the Out Double instruction. Multiply Top of St of Top Multiply value in the a 4-digit BCD that multiplies a stack by of the accumulator first level 4-digit result resides in the accumulator. The the accumulator. result resides in level of the accumulator value in the first and all stack values stack is is removed level. are moved up one ENT V1420 V1500 V1400 L ANDST 4 260 3 1 3 3 MULS OUTD LD LD ISG U D B D D 5 250–1 ORST SHFT M L L ANDST ANDST 5 240 SOFT32 Display X1 STR OUT 5 SHFT SHFT SHFT GX $ 230 Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Multiply Top Multiply Top of Stack (MULS) Standard RLL 5–116 Instructions (DIVS) of Stack Divide byTop DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Direct $ GX 230 SHFT SHFT SHFT 5 OUT STR X1 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 240 ANDST ANDST 5 D L L SHFT 3 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 D I D D B 3 8 3 3 1 OUTD DIVS LDD LD 260 4 V D V1500 V1420 V1400 ENT AND 3 accumulator stack. accumulator residesinthefirstlevel of the remainder result residesintheaccumulatorand first leveloftheaccumulatorstack.The accumulator bya accumulator that dividesthe8-digitBCDvaluein Divide Top ofStackisa32bitinstruction The OutDoubleinstructioncopiesthevalue intheaccumulatortoV1500andV1501. The value inthefirstlevelofaccumulatorstackusingDivideStackinstruction. onto LoadDoubleinstruction,pushing the V1400 In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,Loadinstructionloadsvaluein NOTE: B S B SP75 SP70 SP63 SP53 Discrete BitFlags RST 1 1 accumulator stack the firstlevelof accumulator bythevaluein Divide thevaluein the accumulator Load thevalueinV1400into and V1501 accumulator toV1500 Copy thevaluein V1421 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1420and the accumulatorstack.TheBCDvalueinisdividedby F B E ENT Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. 5 4 1 into theaccumulator. ThevalueinV1420isloaded intotheaccumulatorusing A E A 0 4 0 A C A 0 2 0 4-digit BCDvalueinthe On whenaBCDinstructionisexecutedandNON–BCDnumberwasencountered. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. On whenthevalueofoperandislargerthanaccumulatorcanworkwith. Description A ENT ENT bits aresettozero The unusedaccumulator 0 Acc. Acc. Acc. ENT 0050 0002 0002 0050 0000 V1421 V1501 the valuepreviouslyloadedinaccumulator 0020 0000 5000 5000 0000 0020 V1400 V1420 V1500 DIVS Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 00000000 00000020 first stacklocation The remainderresidesinthe after2ndLDD Accumulator stack after1stLDD Accumulator stack Standard RLL Instructions 5–117 Accumulator stack after 1st LDD Accumulator stack after 2nd LDD 003A50C6 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX instruction, pushing the Level 1 Level 7 Level 8 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 ADDBS Math Instructions Math Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard Load Double DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. onto the accumulator stack. The binary onto the accumulator stack. The V1400 V1420 V1500 50C6 0125 0125 B05F 50C6 B05F V1501 V1401 V1421 X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 003A 003A 0017 0017 0052 0052 ENT ENT Acc. Acc. Acc. 0 0 ENT A A 0 2 0 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On anytime the value in the accumulator sign bit. on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect Description causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction results in a carry. On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry. On when the 32 bit addition instruction A C A using the Add Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied using the Add Stack instruction. The 4 4 0 ENT E E A loaded into the accumulator using the loaded into the accumulator using 1 1 5 Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until RST B B S F Load the value in V1420 and V1421 into the accumulator Add the binary value in the accumulator with the binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Load the value in V1400 and V1401 into the accumulator 1 1 SP70 SP73 Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP66 SP67 B B NOTE: Inthe following example, when Double instruction. The value in V1420 and into the accumulator using the Load V1421 is value previously loaded in the accumulator value previously loaded in the accumulator stack is added with the binary value in the value in the first level of the accumulator accumulator Double instruction. to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Add Binary Top of Stack instruction is a 32 instruction of Stack AddTop Binary bit binary value in that adds the instruction in binary value with the the accumulator stack. level of the accumulator the first The The resides in the accumulator. result level of the accumulator value in the first and all stack values are stack is removed moved up one level. 3 3 3 ENT D D D V1500 V1400 V1420 4 260 3 3 1 3 3 ADDBS OUTD LDD LDD D D B D D 5 250–1 0 SHFT A L L ANDST ANDST 5 240 SOFT32 Display X1 STR OUT 5 SHFT SHFT SHFT GX $ 230 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct Add Binary Add Binary of Stack Top (ADDBS) Standard RLL 5–118 Instructions (SUBBS) Top ofStack Binary Subtract DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Direct 230 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes GX $ SHFT SHFT SHFT 5 OUT STR X1 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 240 5 ANDST ANDST S L L SHFT RST Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 D D D B SHFT LDD OUTD SUBBS LDD 3 1 3 3 260 4 V1400 V1500 V1420 U D D ENT ISG 3 3 are moveduponelevel. stack isremovedandalllocations value inthefirstlevelofaccumulator resultresidesintheaccumulator.The The from thebinaryvalueinaccumulator. in thefirstlevelofaccumulatorstack thatsubtractsthebinaryvalue instruction Subtract BinaryTop ofStackisa32bit is copiedtoV1500andV1501usingtheOutDoubleinstruction. accumulatorusingtheSubtractStackinstruction.The valueintheaccumulator the value in value previouslyloadedintheaccumulator V1421 is into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.ThevalueinV1420and the followingexample,when In NOTE: B B SP70 SP65 SP64 SP63 Discrete BitFlags 1 1 V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and accumulator binary valueinthe accumulator stackfromthe the firstlevelof Subtract thebinaryvaluein and V1501 accumulator toV1500 Copy thevaluein V1421 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1420and F B B B Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. 1 1 5 1 the firstlevelofaccumulatorstackissubtractedfrombinaryvalue in loaded intotheaccumulatorusing A S E E RST 0 4 4 A C A ENT On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whenthe32bitsubtractioninstructionresultsinaborrow. On whenthe16bitsubtractioninstructionresultsinaborrow. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description 0 2 0 A A ENT 0 0 Acc. Acc. Acc. ENT ENT 0020 0020 003A 003A 001A 001A X1 ison,thevalueinV1400andV1401willbeloaded V1421 V1401 V1501 50C6 205B 306B 306B 50C6 205B V1500 V1420 V1400 onto theaccumulatorstack.Thebinary Load Double SUBBS Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 1 instruction, pushingthe XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 001A205B after2ndLDD Accumulator stack after1stLDD Accumulator stack Standard RLL Instructions 5–119 Accumulator stack after 1st LDD Accumulator stack after 2nd LDD 0000C350 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Level 1 Level 8 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 MULBS Math Instructions Math Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. V1500 V1400 V1420 0014 4240 4240 C350 0014 C350 V1501 0000 0000 000F 000F Acc. Acc. Acc. The unused accumulator bits are set to zero The unused accumulator bits are set to zero ENT ENT ENT 0 0 0 Description causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction is negative. On anytime the value in the accumulator A A A multiplies the 16 bit binary multiplies 0 2 0 ENT A C A lue in the accumulator using the Multiply Binary Stack instruction. The Out Multiply Binary Stack instruction. The lue in the accumulator using the 4 4 5 into the accumulator. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using into the accumulator. Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until RST E E S F Load the value in V1420 into the accumulator Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Load the value in V1400 into the accumulator Multiply the binary value in the accumulator with the binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack 1 1 1 1 Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 B B B B the Load instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the Load instruction, pushing the the is multiplied by the first level stack. The binary value in the accumulator stack’s binary va in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501. Double instruction copies the value NOTE: X1 is on, the Load instruction moves the value in In the following example, when V1400 Multiply Binary Top of Stack is a 16 bit a 16 of Stack is Binary Top Multiply instruction that value in the first level of the accumulator the first level of value in value in the the 16 bit binary stack by result resides in the The accumulator. accumulator (8 digits and can be 32 bits max.). value in the first level of the The all accumulator and stack is removed moved up one level. stack locations are ENT L ANDST V1420 V1500 V1400 4 260 3 3 3 1 MULBS OUTD LD LD ISG U D B D D 5 250–1 ORST SHFT M L L ANDST ANDST 5 240 SOFT32 Display X1 STR OUT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5 GX $ 230 Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Multiply Binary of Stack Top (MULBS) Standard RLL 5–120 Instructions (DIVBS) OF Stack Top Divide Binaryby DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Direct Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld 230 5 GX $ SHFT SHFT SHFT OUT STR X1 SOFT32 Display 240 5 ANDST ANDST D L L SHFT 3 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 D I D D B OUTD DIVBS LDD LD 3 8 3 3 1 260 4 V1500 V1420 V1400 V D ENT AND 3 stack. resides in the the accumulatorandremainder stack.Theresultresidesin accumulator binary valueinthefirstlevelof value intheaccumulatorby16 bit instruction thatdividesthe32bitbinary Divide BinaryTop ofStackisa32bit copied toV1500andV1501usingtheOutDoubleinstruction. stack usingtheDivideBinaryStackinstruction.Thevalueinaccumulatoris theaccumulatorisdivided by thebinaryvalueinfirstlevelofaccumulator in l previously into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstructionalso,pushingvalue usingtheLoadinstruction.Thevalue inV1420andV1421isloaded accumulator In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,valueinV1400willbeloadedinto NOTE: SP70 SP63 SP53 Discrete BitFlags B B B 1 1 1 of theaccumulatorstack binary valueinthefirstlevel the accumulatorby Divide thebinaryvaluein the accumulator Load thevalueinV1400into and V1501 accumulator toV1500 Copy thevaluein V1421 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1420and F S B E RST Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. 5 4 1 oaded intheaccumulatorontostack.Thebinaryvalue A E A ENT 0 4 0 first leveloftheaccumulator A C A On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. On whenthevalueofoperandislargerthanaccumulatorcanworkwith. Description 0 2 0 A ENT ENT 0 bits aresettozero The unusedaccumulator Acc. Acc. Acc. ENT 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 V1501 V1421 C350 0014 C350 09C4 09C4 0014 V1400 V1500 V1420 DIVBS Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 8 Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 00000000 00000014 first stacklocation The remainderresidesinthe after2ndLDD Accumulator stack after1stLDD Accumulator stack Standard RLL Instructions 5–121 ASINR SINR COSR SINR Math Instructions Math expressed in radians. You can work can You expressed in radians. Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Description accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. point number. On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating sign bit. on when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect number was On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real encountered. Range of Argument can work with. On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator transcendental functions include the trigonometric sine, cosine, and include the trigonometric transcendental functions sine of the real number stored in the Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 SP72 SP73 SP75 Math Function SP53 The Tangent takes the Real instruction The Tangent tangent of the real number stored in the the in The result resides accumulator. and Both the original number accumulator. the result are in IEEE 32-bit format. The Arc Sine Real instruction takes the inverse the in The result resides accumulator. and Both the original number accumulator. the result are in IEEE 32-bit format. The Sine Real instruction takes the sine of The Sine Real instruction takes the real number stored in the accumulator. Both The result resides in the accumulator. are in the original number and the result 32-bit format. IEEE takes the The Cosine Real instruction cosine of the real number stored in the the in The result resides accumulator. and Both the original number accumulator. the result are in IEEE 32-bit format. The its real number to complement numerical functions features special DL260 CPU The capability. and arc tangent). The square their inverses (arc sine, arc cosine, tangent, and also grouped with these other functions. root function is also Thereal number in the accumulator math instructions operate on a transcendental The (it in the accumulator. The real number result resides cannot be BCD or binary). positive real numbers. The sine, operates on the full range of square root function functions require numbers cosine and tangent with with the Radian first converting them to radians angles expressed in degrees by All transcendental functions then performing the trig function. (RAD) instruction, flag bits. utilize the following Transcendental Functions Transcendental 4 4 4 4 260 260 260 260 5 5 5 5 250–1 250–1 250–1 250–1 5 5 5 5 240 240 240 240 5 5 5 5 230 230 230 230 Arc Sine Real (ASINR) Tangent Real Tangent (TANR) Cosine Real (COSR) Sine Real (SINR) Standard RLL 5–122 Instructions (ACOSR) Arc CosineReal (SQRTR) Square RootReal (ATANR) Arc TangentReal DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 230 5 5 5 240 240 240 5 5 5 Math Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 250–1 250–1 5 5 5 260 260 260 4 4 4 the resultareinIEEE32-bitformat. accumulator. Boththeoriginalnumberand the accumulator. Theresultresidesin the inverse cosineoftherealnumberstored in The ArcCosineRealinstructiontakesthe numbers, using theLDR(LoadReal)instruction. numbers, conversion to NOTE: V-memory. Theresultis32-bitswide,requiringtheOutDoubletomoveit. OUTD (OutDouble)instructiontomovetheresultfromaccumulator using functions operateonlyinradians,sowemustconvertthedegreestoradiansby functions operateonlyonrealnumbers,wedoaLDR(loadreal)45.Thetrig The followingexampletakesthe extractfunctionbuiltin. square-root asthePVtoaPIDloop,notethatloopalreadyhas measurement are tryingtodothesquare-rootextractfunctionforanorificeflowmeter NOTE: the resultareinIEEE32-bitformat. accumulator. Boththeoriginalnumberand accumulator. Theresultresidesin the root square SquareRootRealinstructiontakesthe The the resultareinIEEE32-bitformat. accumulator. Boththeoriginalnumberand the accumulator. Theresultresidesin the inverse The ArcTangent Realinstructiontakesthe Direct X1 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 the RADRcommand.AfterusingSINR(SineReal)instruction,weusean The current HPPdoesnotsupportrealnumber entrywithautomatic The Thesquarerootfunctioncanbeusefulinseveralsituations.However, if you tangent oftherealnumberstoredin oftherealnumberstoredin RADR LDR OUTD SINR the 32-bitIEEEformat. You mustuse V2000 R45 the accumulator. Load therealnumber45into accumulator. leaving theresultin Convert thedegreesintoradians, radians. the accumulator, whichisin Take thesineofnumberin and V2001. accumulator toV2000 Copy thevaluein sine of45degrees.Sincethesetranscendental (viewed asrealnumber) Direct Accumulator contents 0.7071067 0.7071067 0.7358981 45.000000 SOFT32 forenteringreal SQRTR ATANR ACOSR Standard RLL Instructions ON X10 5–123 ON X11 X12 OFF ON X13 X14 OFF X15 OFF ON X16 SUM ON X17 V1500 0000000011001011 0005 0005 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Operation Instructions Bit Operation Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0000 Acc. The unused accumulator bits are set to zero ENT ENT 0 8 I A 0 A 0000000000000000 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 0 5 ENT Acc. A F oaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The using the Load Formatted oaded into the accumulator 1 1 B B ORST PREV M K8 5 V1500 The Sum instruction counts number of bits number of instruction counts The Sum The in the accumulator. that are set to “1” in the accumulator. HEX result resides formed by discrete locations example, when X1 is on, the value In the following X10–X17 is l number The using the Sum instruction. the accumulator set to “1” is counted of bits in the Out instruction. is copied to V1500 using value in the accumulator ISG ENT PREV F U OUT LDF X10 SUM 3 1 Sum the number of bits in the accumulator set to “1” Load the value represented by discrete locations X10–X17 into the accumulator Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500 SHFT PREV B D 4 260 RST 4 S L ANDST 250–1 SOFT Display X1 5 Direct 240 STR OUT SHFT SHFT GX $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 5 230 Sum (SUM) Bit Operation Instructions Bit Operation Standard RLL 5–124 Instructions (SHFL) Shift Left DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct $ GX 230 SHFT SHFT 4 OUT STR X1 SOFT 240 ANDST 4 S L SHFT RST Bit OperationInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 positions totheleft accumulator isshifted10bit The bitpatterninthe V2001 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV2000and V2011 accumulator toV2010and Copy thevaluein D D B SHFT SHFL LDD OUTD 3 3 1 260 4 H D V2000 V2010 ENT KA 3 7 the accumulatoriscopiedtoV2010andV2011 usingtheOut Doubleinstruction. is accumulator into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.Thebitpatternin the following example,when In C F lost. the bitsshiftedoutofaccumulatorare vacant positionsarefilledwithzerosand (Aaaa)ofplacestotheleft.The number the bitsinaccumulatoraspecified Shift Leftisa32bitinstructionthatshifts Constant V memory DataTypeOperand 2 5 ANDST A L C 0 2 B A A K V 1 0 Acc. Acc. accumulator Shifted outofthe shifted 10bitstotheleftusingShiftLeftinstruction.Thevaluein A A SHFT All (Seepage3–50) 0 0 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 000101 0000010000000000 0110011100000101 DL230 Range A A 1–32 aaa ENT 0 0 ENT ENT 14 0011000100 X1 ison,thevalueinV2000andV2001willbeloaded V2011 4 All (Seepage3–51) C DL240 Range 1–32 aaa 6705 V2001 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 All (Seepage3–52) 3101 000001 0011000100000001 DL250–1 Range V2000 1–32 aaa S SHFL S S 0 S 0000000 A aaa V2010 40 All (Seepage3–53) DL260 Range 0 1–32 aaa 0 0 0 Standard RLL Instructions 5–125 Shifted out of the accumulator aaa 1–32 DL260 Range All (See page 3–53) 01001100 A aaa A 14 V2010 C SHFR aaa 1–32 DL250–1 Range All (See page 3–52) 0011000100000001 3101 Bit Operation Instructions Bit Operation 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 1 1 000001 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 01 V2001 V2000 S aaa The 6705 1–32

10 S DL240 Range S All (See page 3–51) S Constant 1 X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 000 1 V2011 ENT ENT 0 00 9 C 0 0 aaa ENT 1–32 A A DL230 Range All (See page 3–50) 0 0 00000 SHFT A A shifted 10 bits to the right using the Shift Right instruction. The value shifted 10 bits to the right using the 00 0000010000000000 0110011100000101 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 a 32 bit instruction that shifts a 32 bit instruction V K A 0 1 Acc. Acc. A B 2 0 ORN C R A 5 2 Operand Data Type V memory Constant vacant positions are filled with zeros and are filled vacant positions of the accumulator are the bits shifted out lost. Shift Right is Shift Right a specified in the accumulator the bits number right. of places to the (Aaaa) in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction. in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 Inthe following example, when Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the into the accumulator using the accumulator is F C 7 3 KA ENT V2010 V2000 D H 4 260 SHFR OUTD LDD 3 3 1 SHFT D B D Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator The bit pattern in the accumulator is shifted 10 bit positions to the right 4 250–1 RST 4 SHFT S L ANDST 240 SOFT X1 4 STR OUT 230 SHFT SHFT GX $ Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Shift Right (SHFR) Standard RLL 5–126 Instructions (ROTL) Left Rotate Direct DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld $ GX 230 SHFT SHFT 5 OUT STR X1 SOFT Display 240 ANDST 5 R L SHFT ORN Bit OperationInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 bit positionstotheleft accumulator isrotated2 The bitpatterninthe V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and and V1501 accumulator toV1500 Copy thevaluein D O D B INST# ROTL LDD OUTD 3 3 1 260 4 T D V1400 V1500 ENT MLR K2 3 ANDST number (Aaaa)ofplacestotheleft. number the bitsinaccumulatoraspecified Rotate instruction. value intheaccumulatoriscopiedtoV1500andV1501usingOutDouble isaccumulator rotated 2 into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.Thebitpatternin the following example,when In B L Constant V memory DataTypeOperand 1 F B 5 1 Left isa32bitinstructionthatrotates A C E Acc. Acc. A K V 2 0 4 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0000010000000000 1001110000010100 0110011100000101 A A ENT All (Seepage3–52) 0 0 DL250–1 Range A 1–32 aaa ENT 0 bit positionstotheleftusingRotateLeftinstruction.The 9C14 ENT V1501 X1 ison,thevalueinV1400andV1401willbeloaded All (Seepage3–53) DL260 Range 1–32 aaa 6705 V1401 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 3101 1100010000000101 0011000100000001 V1400 ROTL C405 V1500 S A aaa S S S Standard RLL Instructions 5–127 A aaa A V1500 4C40 ROTR V1400 0011000100000001 0100110001000000 3101 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Operation Instructions Bit Operation Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. V1401 6705 aaa 1–32 DL260 Range All (See page 3–53) S X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 S V1501 ENT S 59C1 S 0 aaa ENT 1–32 A DL250–1 Range 0 0 All (See page 3–52) ENT A A 00000100000000000101100111000001 0110011100000101 rotated 2 bit positions to the right using the Rotate Right instruction. rotated 2 bit positions to the right 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 4 0 2 V K A Acc. Acc. E C A 5 1 B F 1 Operand Data Type V memory Constant ORN Inthe following example, when Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the into the accumulator using the accumulator is The is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double value in the accumulator instruction. Rotate Right is a 32 bit instruction that is a 32 bit Rotate Right a accumulator the bits in the rotates of places to the number (Aaaa) specified right. R B 3 K2 MLR ENT V1500 V1400 D T 4 260 OUTD ROTR LDD 3 1 3 INST# O D B D Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Load the value in V1400 and V1401 into the accumulator The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated 2 bit positions to the right 4 250–1 ORN 5 SHFT R L ANDST 240 SOFT Display X1 5 STR OUT 230 SHFT SHFT GX $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct Rotate Right (ROTR) Standard RLL 5–128 Instructions (ENCO) Encode DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct GX $ SHFT SHFT 230 OUT STR 4 X1 SOFT 240 ANDST E L 4 4 Bit OperationInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 of theaccumulatortoV2010 Copy thevalueinlower16bits 4 accumulator the lower16bitsof Load thevalueinV2000into 5 bitbinaryvalue to “1”intheaccumulatora Encode thebitpositionset N D B SHFT TMR 3 1 LD OUT ENCO 260 4 V C V2000 V2010 ENT AND 2 C O C using theOutinstruction. instruction. Thevalueinthelower16bitsofaccumulatoriscopiedto V2010 isencodedtothecorresponding5 bitbinaryvalueusingtheEncode accumulator usingtheLoadinstruction.The bit positionsettoa“1”in the accumulator In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,ThevalueinV2000loadedinto flags isexecuted. NOTE: INST# will beencodedandSP53seton. position set to a “1”, theleast sign value to be will placeazerointheaccumulator. Ifthe encoded is0000or0001,theinstruction 31) intheaccumulator. Ifthe value to be would placethevalueHEX1F(decimal set to1(Bit31),theEncodeinstruction Ifrepresentation. the of 1,andreturnstheappropriatebinary inposition The Encodeinstructionencodesthe bit SP53 Discrete BitFlags 2 2 A A ENT 0 0 The statusflagsareonlyvaliduntilanotherinstructionthatusesthesame B A the accumulator havingavalue encoded hasmorethanonebit 1 0 Acc. Acc. A A 0 0 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 with. On whenthevalueofoperandislargerthanaccumulatorcanwork Description 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 most significantbitis ENT ENT ificant “1” 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0000000000001100 0001000000000000 to binary converted Bit postion12is ENCO 1000 V2000 000C V2010 for 12. Binary value Standard RLL Instructions ON X10 5–129 ON X11 The binary vlaue is converted to bit position 11. X12 OFF ON X13 X14 OFF DECO 0000100000000000 0000000000001011 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 215 1 14 13 0 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Operation Instructions Bit Operation Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. ENT umulator contains umulator 5 ue to be decoded is ue to be decoded F 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 attern in the accumulator is decoded by setting the corresponding bit is decoded by setting the attern in the accumulator Acc. Acc. oaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The using the Load Formatted oaded into the accumulator 0 A 1 ENT B The Decode instruction decodes a 5 bit decodes a 5 instruction The Decode HEX) in the of 0–31 (0–1F binary value accumulator bit setting the appropriate by acc the If 1. a to position the value F (HEX), bit 15 will be set in the the value F (HEX), val If the accumulator. greater number is divided by than 31, the is less than 32 and then 32 until the value the value is decoded. INST# O In the following example when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations example when X1 is on, the value In the following X10–X14 is l p binary five bit using the Decode instruction. position to a “1” 5 2 K5 ENT F C 4 260 3 4 1 DECO LDF X10 B D E Decode the five bit binary pattern in the accumulator and set the corresponding bit position to a “1” Load the value in represented by discrete locations X10–X14 into the accumulator 4 250–1 3 L D 4 ANDST 240 SOFT X1 STR 4 SHFT SHFT 230 $ Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Decode (DECO) Standard RLL 5–130 Instructions (BIN) Binary ConversionInstructions(Accumulator) Number DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct 230 GX $ SHFT SHFT 4 OUT STR X1 SOFT32 240 4 ANDST B L SHFT 1 Number ConversionInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 accumulator toV2010andV2011 Copy thebinaryvaluein 4 V2001 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV2000and binary equivalentvalue the accumulatorto Convert theBCDvaluein D I D B BIN LDD OUTD 3 8 3 1 260 4 V2000 V2010 N D ENT TMR 3 V2010 andV2011 asaHEXvalue.) Double instruction.(Thehandheldprogrammerwilldisplaythebinaryvaluein The binaryvalueintheaccumulatoriscopiedtoV2010andV2011 usingtheOut isconvertedtothebinary(HEX)equivalentusingBINinstruction. accumulator the accumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.TheBCDvaluein the followingexample,whenX1ison,valueinV2000andV2001loadedinto In C accumulator. binary value.Theresultresidesinthe value int The BinaryinstructionconvertsaBCD ENT 2 A C 0 2 he accumulator B A 1 0 Acc. Acc. A A 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 8 4 6 3 8 4 4 7 4 1 2 0 0000000000000010 8421842184218421 0 0000000000000000 4 2 8 1 4 7 3 7 0 1 A 2 1 9 0 7 8 6 3 5 ENT 0 6 5 4 5 3 4 8 6 2 to theequivalent 8 2 7 7 1 2 4 3 1 ENT 4 6 8 8 0 1 7 6 2 3 4 4 5 5 3 3 28529 =16384+8192204810245122566432161 6 1 2 7 7 7 6 1 8 0 6 8 8 3 8 4 0 3 4 9 1 4 2 5 1 7 9 0 2 6 7 5 8 4 0 1 0000 0002 8 8 2 4 2 5 Binary EquivalentValue V2011 V2001 4 4 1 2 6 2 2 7 0 1 3 1 BCD Value 6 3 5 5 6 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 6F71 8529 8421842184218421 1000010100101001 0110111101110001 8 6 7 2 3 V2010 V2000 4 8 3 6 1 2 9 1 8 6 9 0 4 BIN 8 4 0 2 copied toV2010 The binary(HEX)value 4 2 0 1 2 1 5 6 5 2 8 2 1 4 6 2 3 6 1 8 4 2 1 Standard RLL Instructions 5–131 1 2 4 8 1 6 3 2 6 4 1 2 8 2 5 6 BCD 5 1 2 1 0 2 4 The BCD value copied to V2010 and V2011 2 0 4 8 4 0 9 6 8 1 9 2 1 6 3 8 4 V2010 V2000 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 3 2 7 6 8 1000010100101001 0110111101110001 8421842184218421 8529 6F71 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 5 5 3 6 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 1 3 1 0 7 2 Number Conversion Instructions Conversion Number 2 6 2 1 4 4 BCD Equivalent Value V2011 V2001 5 2 4 2 8 8 0002 0000 1 0 4 8 5 7 6 2 0 9 7 1 5 2 4 1 9 4 3 0 4 8 3 8 8 6 0 8 1 6 7 7 7 2 1 6 ENT 16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 1 = 28529 16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 3 3 5 5 4 4 3 2 6 7 1 0 8 8 6 4 0 ENT 1 3 4 2 1 7 7 2 8 A lue in the accumulator the in lue 2 6 8 4 3 5 4 5 6 Binary Value 0 0 5 3 6 8 7 0 9 1 2 A A 1 0 7 3 7 4 1 8 2 4 0000000000000010 0000000000000000 2 1 4 7 4 4 8 3 6 4 8 8421842184218421 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 0 1 A B Acc. Acc. 2 0 C A 2 ENT The Binary Coded Decimal instruction Coded Decimal The Binary va binary converts a to the equivalent BCD value. The result BCD to the equivalent the accumulator. resides in C In and V2001 the binary (HEX) value in V2000 following example, when X1 is on, the is instruction. The binary value in accumulator using the Load Double loaded into the value using the BCD instruction. is converted to the BCD equivalent the accumulator using the Out V2010 and V2011 in the accumulator is copied to The BCD value Double instruction. 3 3 ENT V2010 V2000 D D 4 260 2 3 3 1 OUTD BCD LDD D C D B Convert the binary value in the accumulator to the BCD equivalent value Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator 4 Copy the BCD value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 250–1 1 SHFT L B 4 ANDST 240 SOFT32 X1 STR OUT 4 SHFT SHFT 230 GX $ Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) Standard RLL 5–132 Instructions (INV) Invert DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct GX $ 230 SHFT SHFT 4 OUT STR X1 SOFT32 240 ANDST 4 I L SHFT 8 Number ConversionInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 in theaccumulator Invert thebinarybitpattern V2001 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV2000and V2011 accumulator toV2010and Copy thevaluein D N D B TMR OUTD INV LDD 1 3 3 260 4 V D V2010 V2000 ENT AND 3 copied toV2010andV2011 usingtheOutDoubleinstruction. isin accumulator into theaccumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction.Thevaluein the following example,when In C accumulator. accumulator.result residesinthe The one’s The Invertinstructioninvertsortakesthe ENT 2 A C complement of the 32 bit value in the 0 2 B A 1 0 Acc. Acc. A A verted usingtheInvertinstruction.Thevalueinaccumulatoris 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0 0 1111101111111010 0000010000000101 A ENT 0 ENT X1 ison,thevalueinV2000andV2001willbeloaded BAFDAF FBFA 0405 V2001 V2011 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 8 1 9 2 10 11 3 12 4 13 14 5 15 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0250 0000001001010000 1111110110101111 V2000 V2010 INV Standard RLL Instructions 5–133 BCDCPL V2010 V2000 ENT 9913 0087 9913 0087 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 ENT A V2011 V2001 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 9999 9999 0000 0000 0 0 Number Conversion Instructions Conversion Number ENT A A Acc. Acc. 0 1 A L B ANDST 2 0 CV C P A 2 2 C C 3 3 ENT 100000000 complement value 10’s D D The 10’s complement is taken for the 8 digit accumulator using the for the 8 digit accumulator using complement is taken The 10’s V2000 V2010 – accumulator value 3 2 1 3 LDD BCDCPL OUTD B D C D Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator of complement a 10’s Takes the value in the accumulator Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 1 SHFT L B ANDST SOFT32 X1 STR OUT SHFT SHFT $ GX The Ten’s Complement instruction takes instruction Complement The Ten’s digit 8 the of (BCD) complement the 10’s The the resides in result accumulator. this for The calculation accumulator. instruction is : Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct In and V2001 is loaded into when X1 is on, the value in V2000 the following example the accumulator. and is copied to V2010 instruction. The value in the accumulator Complement Ten’s the Out Double instruction. using V2011 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 4 230 Ten’s Complement Ten’s (BCDCPL) Standard RLL 5–134 Instructions (BTOR) Conversion Binary toReal DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 Direct Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld GX $ SHFT SHFT 240 OUT STR 5 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 X1 Number ConversionInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 ANDST L B SHFT 1 accumulator toV1500andV1501 Copy therealvaluein V1401 intotheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400and number equivalentformat the accumulatortoreal Convert thebinaryvaluein 260 4 D T D B MLR BTOR LDD OUTD 3 3 1 V1400 V1500 O D INST# ENT accumulator. mayuseall32bitsofthe number accumulator. Boththebinaryandreal Theresultresidesinthe format. equivalent realnumber(floatingpoint) binary valueintheaccumulatorto its The Binary-to-Realinstructionconvertsa value. handheld progr the accumulatoriscopiedtoV1500andV1501usingOutDoubleinstruction.The (decimal). weight oftheMSBisconvertedtorealnumberexponentbyaddingit127 the binaryvalueinaccumulatorequivalentrealnumberformat.The accumulatorusingtheLoadDouble the the followingexample,whenX1ison,valueinV1400andV1401loadedinto In 3 SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags B R ORN 1 F B ENT Then theremainingbitsarecopiedtomantissaasshown.Thevaluein 5 1 Sign Bit Acc. Acc. A E ammer would would ammer 0 4 On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description 0100100010101110 0000000000000101 8421842184218421 A A 0 0 Exponent (8bits) 145 =128+161 A ENT 127 +18=145 0 2 (exp18) display thebinaryvalueinV1500andV1501asaHEX ENT instruction. TheBT 48AE 0005 V1501 V1401 Real NumberFormat Binary Value 4820 7241 8421842184218421 0010100000100000 0111001000100001 V1500 V1400 Mantissa (23bits) BTOR OR instructionconverts copied to V1500 to copied The realvalue (HEX) number Standard RLL Instructions 5–135 Real Number Format The binary number copied to V1400. RTOB Mantissa (23 bits) Mantissa V1500 V1400 0010100000100000 8421842184218421 0111001000100001 7241 4820 Binary Value Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard V1501 V1401 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0005 48AE Number Conversion Instructions Conversion Number instruction. The RTOB instruction converts instruction. The RTOB ENT display the binary value in V1500 and V1501 as a HEX display the binary value in V1500 0 2 (exp 18) 128 + 16 + 1 = 145 127 + 18 = 145 ENT A tion converts the tion converts 0 0 Exponent (8 bits) A A 8421842184218421 0100100010101110 0000000000000101 Description causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the result of the instruction is negative. On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number. On anytime the value in the accumulator subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit. on when a signed addition or converted to binary. On when a number cannot be 4 0 E A ammer would Acc. Acc. Sign Bit 5 1 ENT B F 1 1 B B 3 Discrete Bit Flags SP63 SP70 SP72 SP73 SP75 ENT In X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the following example, when the accumulator using the Load Double the the equivalent binary number format. The value in real value in the accumulator the instruction. The accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double handheld progr value. The instruc Real-to-Binary real number in the accumulator to a binary in the accumulator real number value. The the resides in result binary and the real Both the accumulator. number use all 32 bits of the may accumulator. INST# D O V1500 V1400 1 3 3 MLR RTOB OUTD LDD B D T D 4 260 Convert the real number in the accumulator to binary format. Load the value in V1400 and V1401 into the accumulator Copy the real value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 ORN SHFT L R ANDST 4 250–1 X1 SOFT32 Display STR OUT 5 SHFT SHFT $ GX 240 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct 5 230 Real to Binary Real to Conversion (RTOB) Standard RLL 5–136 Instructions (RADR) Conversion Real Radian (DEGR) Conversion Degree Real DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 5 5 240 240 5 5 Number ConversionInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 250–1 5 5 260 260 4 4 Direct accumulator. in radians.Theresultresidesthe totheequivalentrealnumber accumulator converts The RadianRealConversioninstruction The followingexampletakesthesine The usingtheLDR(LoadReal)instruction. numbers, conversion to NOTE: contains from degreeformattoradianformat,andvisa-versa.Inacircle The twoinstructionsdescribedaboveconvertrealnumbersintotheaccumulator accumulator. degrees. Theresultresidesinthe in totheequivalentrealnumber accumulator realradianvaluestoredin degree the The DegreeRealinstructionconvertsthe is 32-bitswide,requiringtheOutDoubletomoveit. Double) AfterusingtheSINR(SineReal)instruction,weuseanOUTD(Out command. only inradians,sowemustconvertthedegreestoradiansbyusing RADR onlyoperate on between both between trigonometric functions(seethesectiononmathinstructions). trigonometric circle. Thesefunctionsareveryusefulwhencombinedwiththetranscendantal SP75 SP74 SP72 SP71 SP70 SP63 Discrete BitFlags SOFT32 Display SOFT32 X1 The current HPPdoes notsupportrealnumberentrywithautomatic The instruction tomovetheresultfrom 360 degrees.Inradianformat,acirclecontains 2 the realdegreevaluestoredin OUTD SINR RADR LDR the 32-bitIEEEformat. You mustuse positive andnegativereal real numbers,wedoaLDR(loadreal)45.Thetrigfunctionsoperate V2000 R45 On whenaBCDinstructionisexecutedandNON–BCDnumberwasencountered. On anytimeafloatingpointmathoperationresultsinanunderflowerror. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisavalidfloatingpointnumber. On anytimetheV-memory specifiedbyapointer(P)isnotvalid. On anytimethevalueinaccumulatorisnegative. On whentheresultofinstructioncausesvalueinaccumulatortobezero. Description accumulator. leaving theresultin Convert thedegreesintoradians, the accumulator. Load therealnumber45into radians. the accumulator, which isin Take thesineofnumberin and V2001. accumulator toV2000 Copy thevaluein of 45degrees. numbers, andforanglesgreaterthanafull the accumulatortoV-memory. Theresult (viewed asrealnumber) Direct Accumulator contents Since transcendentalfunctions 0.7071067 0.7071067 0.7358981 45.000000 P SOFT32 forenteringreal DEGR RADR radians.Theseconvert Standard RLL Instructions 5–137 aaa V specified in the ASCII ATH the constant (K4) is loaded into 8 9 F A B E C D Hex Value aaa Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) to convert an octal address to the HEX to convert an octal address to the DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Number Conversion Instructions Conversion Number 46 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 ASCII Value aaa All (See p. 3–52) DL250–1 Range 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hex Value V ASCII Values Valid for ATH Conversion for ATH Valid ASCII Values stack when the next Load instruction is executed. The starting location stack when the next Load instruction The starting location for the HEX table (V1600) is table (V1600) is The starting location for the HEX t: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory t: — For parameters that require ASCII values to a specified table of to a specified ASCII values 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 30 ASCII Value Operand Data Type Vmemory In on the following page, when X1 is ON the example conversion. lists valid ASCII values for ATH to HEX instruction. The table below equivalent and load the value into the accumulator. equivalent and load the value into the instruction and will be placed in the first level of the accumulator using the Load accumulator for is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address the ASCII table (V1400) instruction. This means an ASCII table of four V memory locations would only require two V would only require two table of four V memory locations This means an ASCII memory are loaded table. The function parameters locations for the equivalent HEX by two additional instructions. stack and the accumulator into the accumulator an ASCII to HEX table function. the steps necessary to program Listed below are for the ASCII to HEX table the following page shows a program The example on function. Step table into the first memory locations for the ASCII 1: — Load the number of V stack. level of the accumulator for the ASCII table into the the starting V memory location Step 2: — Load This parameter must be a HEX value. accumulator. for the HEX table in the memory location (Vaaa) Step 3: — Specify the starting V instruction. ATH Helpful Hin be used locations, the LDA instruction can The ASCII TO HEX instruction converts a converts HEX instruction TO The ASCII table of are two digits ASCII values HEX values. are one digit. HEX equivalents and their 4 260 4 250–1 5 240 5 230 ASCII to HEX ASCII to (ATH) Standard RLL 5–138 Instructions (HTA) HEX toASCII Direct DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld 230 5 $ SHFT SHFT SHFT STR SOFT32 Display SOFT32 X1 240 5 ANDST ANDST A L L 0 Number ConversionInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 T D D B MLR ATH LDA LD 3 3 1 260 4 O 1400 V1600 H A ENT K4 0 7 equivalent andloadthevalueintoaccumulator. locations, theLDAinstructioncanbeused Hin Helpful HTA instruction. Step 3:—SpecifythestartingVmemorylocation (Vaaa) fortheASCIItablein accumulator. ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue. Step 2:—LoadthestartingVmemorylocationforHEXtableinto of theaccumulatorstack. 1:—Loadthe Step the followingpageshowsaprogramforHEXtoASCIItablefunction. are thestepsnecessarytoprogramaHEXASCIItablefunction.Theexampleon accumulator locations forthe This meansaHEXtableoftwoVmemorylocationswouldrequirefour their ASCIIequivalentsaretwodigits. ASCII table ofHEXvaluestoaspecified The HEXtoASCIIinstructionconvertsa Vmemory DataTypeOperand PREV the accumulator 300 andloadthevalueinto Convert octal1400toHEX ASCII table memory locationinthe defines thenumberofV accumulator. Thisvalue into thelower16bitsof Load theconstantvalue location fortheHEXtable V1600 isthestarting B B E values. HEXvaluesareonedigitand 1 1 4 t: —ForparametersthatrequireHEXvalueswhen referencingmemory G E ENT stack andtheaccumulatorbytwoadditionalinstructions.Listedbelow 6 4 V equivalent ASCIItable.Thefunctionparametersareloadedintothe A A 0 0 number ofVmemorylocationsintheHEXtableintofirstlevel A A DL250–1 Range All (Seep.3–52) 0 0 aaa ENT ENT V1402 V1401 V1403 V1400 to convertanoctaladdresstheHEX All (Seep.3–53) DL260 Range ASCII TABLE 35 36 37 38 31 32 33 34 aaa HTA V aaa Equivalents Hexadecimal 5678 1234 V1601 V1600 Standard RLL Instructions 5–139 V1401 V1402 V1400 V1403 33 34 35 36 31 32 37 38 ASCII TABLE 45 46 38 39 41 42 43 44 ENT ENT ASCII Value Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 0 A A DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 5678 1234 0 0 Number Conversion Instructions Conversion Number Hexadecimal Equivalents A A 8 9 F E A B C D 5 4 ENT Hex Value F E V1500 V1501 1 2 1 C B B PREV 36 37 30 31 32 33 34 35 0 0 K2 ASCII Value ENT A A V1400 O 1500 ASCII Values Valid for HTA Conversion for HTA Valid ASCII Values 3 3 1 HTA LD LDA MLR D D T B V1400 is the starting location for the ASCII table. The conversion is executed by this instruction. Load the constant value into the lower 16 bits of the This value accumulator. defines the number of V locations in the HEX table. Convert octal 1500 to HEX 340 and load the value into the accumulator 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 L L H ANDST ANDST Hex Value X1 SOFT32 Display STR SHFT SHFT SHFT $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes The table below lists valid ASCII values for HTA conversion. values for HTA The table below lists valid ASCII In the following example, when X1 is ON the constant (K2) is loaded into the (K2) is loaded ON the constant when X1 is example, In the following accumulator table for the HEX The starting location instruction. using the Load The Address instruction. using the Load accumulator is loaded into the (V1500) to ASCII in the HEX is specified ASCII table (V1400) location for the starting instruction. Direct Standard RLL 5–140 Instructions D (SEG) Segment DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 irect 230 5 X1 SOFT32 Display ANDST GX L $ ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld SHFT OUT STR Segment 240 5 Labels S D SHFT Number ConversionInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 RST 4 accumulator toY20–Y57 Copy thevaluein lower 16bitsoftheaccumulator Load thevalueinV1400nto format seven segmentdisplay value intheaccumulatorto Convert thebinary(HEX) 3 UFY20 OUTF SEG LD e f F B SHFT 260 4 1 5 V1400 d g a K32 E B ENT b c 1 4 resides intheaccumulator. seven segmentdisplayformat.Theresult four digitHEXvalueintheaccumulatorto The BCD/Segmentinstructionconverts a instruction. The bitpatternintheaccumulatoriscopiedtoY20–Y57usingOutFormatted isconvertedtosevensegmentformatusingtheSegmentinstruction. accumulator 16 bitsoftheaccumulatorusingLoadinstruction.Thebinary(HEX)valuein thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,valueinV1400loadedintolower In C G E 6 2 4 A A Acc. Acc. ENT 0 0 13 92 72 52 32 12 91 716 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 OFF Y57 g db g edcba –gf edcba –gf 0111110101110001 0000000000000000 A Y56 ON 0 Y55 ON D ENT 3 Y54 ON Y53 ON C 2 g edcba –gf S S ENT S S 51 31 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 6F71 0110111101110001 0000011100000110 V1400 S S S S SEG g edcba –gf OFF Y24 OFF Y23 Y22 ON Y21 ON OFF Y20 Segment Labels Standard RLL Instructions ON X10 5–141 X11 OFF ON X12 S S S 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 1022 1023 S S S V2010 S 0006 S S S GRAY Gray Code0000000000 0000000001 BCD 0000000011 0000000010 0000000110 0000000111 0000000101 0000000100 1000000001 1000000000 X25 OFF X26 OFF 0000000000000101 0000000000000110 X27 OFF 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 415 14 3 13 12 2 11 10 1 9 0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Number Conversion Instructions Conversion Number ENT 6 G 1 ENT B 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 3131 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 0 A Acc. Acc. 720 counts per revolution you 360 counts per revolution is to is 360 counts per revolution 0 1 revolution. If a device having a having revolution. If a device A B he accumulator is converted to BCD using the Gray Code instruction. The he accumulator is converted to BCD having a resolution of 512 or 1024 having a resolution 1 0 ENT code value to a BCD value. The BCD to a BCD value. code value B A 2 MLS Thebit a 16 converts Gray code instruction gray bits of the requires 10 conversion to 22 bits are set The upper accumulator. is designed for use “0”. This instruction encoders) that use with devices (typically scheme. The the grey code numbering Gray instruction will directly convert Code to a BCD number for a gray code number devices counts per resolution of be subtract a BCD value of used you must value to obtain the 76 from the converted a proper result. For a device having resolution of must subtract a BCD value of 152. In represented by X10–X27 is the following example, when X1 is ON the binary value the Load Formatted instruction. The gray code loaded into the accumulator using value t in value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V2010. value in the lower 16 bits of the Y C 5 0 X10 AND ENT V2010 F A V 4 260 GRAY OUT LDF K16 3 1 ORN SHFT D R B Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 Convert the 16 bit grey code value in the accumulator to a BCD value Load the value represented by X10–X27 into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator 4 250–1 6 L G 4 ANDST 240 SOFT32 X1 STR OUT 5 SHFT SHFT 230 GX $ Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Gray Code (GRAY) Standard RLL 5–142 Instructions (SFLDGT) Digits Shuffle Block Diagram Shuffle Digits DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 4 Number ConversionInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 maximum ofmaximum 8 The Shuffle Digitsinstructionshuffles a Step 3:—InserttheSFLDGTinstruction. See exampleonthenextpage. significantduplicatenumberisvalid.The resultresidesintheaccumulator.most Note:—If thenumberusedtospecifyordercontainsduplicatenumbers, See exampleonthenextpage. positionwillbesetto0. corresponding Note:— Ifthenumberusedtospecifyordercontainsa0or9–F, the Step 2:—Loadtheorderthatdigitswillbeshuffled tointotheaccumulator. stack. 1:—Loadthevalue(digits)tobeshuffl Step necessary to instructions. Listedbelowarethesteps withtwoadditional accumulator of theaccumulatorstackand the toparameters be l specified order. Thisfunctionrequires a programfortheShuffle Digitsfunction. example onthe The define define the bitpositionsinaccumulatorthat to digits tobeshuffled.correspond They level ofthe be shuffled. Thebitpositionsinthefirst areamaximumof8digitsthatcan There resides intheaccumulator. The digitsareshuffled andtheresult the orderdigits accumulator stackdefines the use theshuffledi digits rearrangingthemina oaded intothefirstlevel following pageshows will be git function. shuf fled. ed intothefirstlevelofaccumulator Bit Positions Result (accumulator) Specified order(accumulator) shuffled (firststacklocation) tobe Digits SFLDGT BCEF 8765 1287 9ABC E 0 DEF 0DA9 4321 3654 Standard RLL Instructions Acc. Acc. Acc. 5–143 V2000 V2006 V2010 4321 9ABC DEF0 4321 9ABC DEF0 4321 4321 4321 V2011 V2001 V2007 8765 8765 8765 9ABC 4321 4321 0000 0000 9ABC Acc. Acc. Acc. V2010 V2000 V2006 0021 EDA9 CBA9 0021 4321 4321 4321 EDA9 CBA9 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. V2011 V2001 V2007 Number Conversion Instructions Conversion Number 8765 8765 8765 0FED 0043 0043 0000 0000 0FED Acc. Acc. Acc. ENT ENT V2010 V2000 V2006 6 0 ENT ENT A G 4321 4321 4321 3654 0DA9 DEF0 3654 0DA9 DEF0 ABC 0 0 0 MLR A A T A V2011 V2001 V2007 8765 8765 8765 0 0 6 1 1287 9ABC 1287 9ABC BCEF BCEF A A G B is executed, the most significant duplicate number in the order specified most significant duplicate number is executed, the 2 2 3 0 Original bit Positions Specified order New bit Positions C C D A 2 L C ANDST In level of the accumulator value in the first X1 is on, The example when the following in the accumulator. by the value in the order specified be reorganized stack will –F is not used when when 0 or 9 digits works the shuffle A shows how Example Also, there are no duplicate the digits are to be shuffled. specifying the order numbers in the specified order. a 0 or 9–F is used when digits works when how the shuffle Example B shows Digits when the Shuffle Notice the digits are to be shuffled. specifying the order a first stack location that had the bit positions in the instruction is executed, corresponding “0”. (order specified) are set to 0 or 9–F in the accumulator duplicate numbers are used digits works when how the shuffle Example C shows Digits when the Shuffle Notice the digits are to be shuffled. specifying the order instruction is used in the result. 3 3 5 ENT D D F V2006 V2010 V2000 1 3 3 3 SFLDGT OUTD LDD LDD SHFT D D D B Shuffle the digits in the first Shuffle level of the accumulator stack based on the pattern The in the accumulator. result is in the accumulator. Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator Load the value in V2006 and V2007 into the accumulator RST SHFT L L S ANDST ANDST SOFT32 X1 STR OUT SHFT SHFT SHFT GX $ Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Standard RLL 5–144 Instructions (MOV) Move Table Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 240 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld 4 X1 $ SHFT SHFT SHFT STR Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 ANDST ANDST M L L ORST 260 4 LD MOV LDA O D D B INST# 3 3 1 O 2000 V2030 K6 the Moveinstruction. is loadedintotheaccumulator. The executed. and isplacedinthefirststacklocationafterLoadAddressinstruction usingtheLoadinstruction.Thisvalue accumulator In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,constantvalue(K6)loadedinto equivalent andloadthevalueintoaccumulator. locations, Helpful H (Vaaa) forthedestinationtable. 3:—InserttheMOVEinstructionwhichspecifiesstartingVmemorylocation Step accumulator.the ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue. Step 2:—LoadthestartingVmemorylocationforlocationstobemovedinto the accumulatorstack.ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue. 1:—LoadthenumberofVmemorylocationstobemovedintofirstlevel Step necessary toprogramtheMovefunction. instructions. Listedbelowarethesteps bytwoadditional accumulator l first function parametersareloadedintothe V memory tablethesamelength.The from aVmemorytabletoanother The Moveinstructionmovesthevalues V A V memory DataTypeOperand ENT AND 0 evel oftheaccumulator SHFT int: — of theaccumulator (HEX) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue6 beginning atlocationV2030 locations toatable Copy thespecifiedtable the accumulator 400 andloadthevalueinto Convert octal2000toHEX The octaladdress2000(V2000),thestartinglocationforsourcetable the LDAinstructioncanbeusedtoconvertanoctaladdressHEX C C K JMP 2 2 V For parametersthatrequireHEXvalueswhenreferencingmemory A A G 0 0 6 All (Seepage3–50) DL230 Range D A ENT 3 0 aaa A A stack andthe 0 0 ENT ENT destination tablelocation(V2030) All (Seepage3–51) DL240 Range XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 0123 aaa S S S S V2007 V2006 V2005 V2004 V2003 V2002 V2001 V2000 V1777 V1776 specifies thelengthoftable All (Seepage3–52) DL250–1 Range aaa MOV aaa V XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 0123 S S S S is specifiedin All (Seepage3–53) DL260 Range V2026 V2037 V2036 V2035 V2034 V2033 V2032 V2031 V2027 V2030 aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–145 into the aaa DL260 Range aaa All (See page 3–53) V aaa K MOVMC LDLBL source address Table Instructions Table the aaa Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL250–1 Range DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. All (See page 3–52) (LDLBL Kaaa) into the accumulator when (LDLBL Kaaa) into the accumulator from from V memory to ladder memory. This is where from V memory to ladder memory. V memory. result in data outside of the source data area being aaa to DL240 Range All (See page 3–51) source data label offset for the data label area in the program ladder memory and for the data label area offset used with the MOVMC used with does not V only boundaries, then unknown data values will be transferred into the boundaries, then unknown data values will be transferred into The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0, but may be The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0, but may

data from ladder memory to V memory. Load Load data from ladder memory to V memory. copy data between V memory and between V memory copy data Operand Data Type V memory accumulator when copying data the source address is a V memory location, the the value will be copied from. If value must be entered in HEX. Step is the MOVMC instruction which specifies destination (Aaaa). This 4:— Insert where the value will be copied to. copying the beginning of the V memory block into the first level of the accumulator stack. the beginning of the V memory block Step 3:— Load the Step 1:— Load the number of words to be copied into the second level of the Step 1:— Load the number of words accumulator stack. Step 2:— Load the The instruction is Cartridge Move Memory used to Load Label The program ladder memory. is instruction instruction when copying data instruction when program ladder memory To copy data between V memory and data between V memory copy To the function program ladder memory, parameterstwo are loaded into the first the and stack levels of the accumulator accumulator by two additional below are the steps instructions. Listed the Move Memory necessary to program Cartridge and Load Label functions. copied into the destination table. When an offset is outside of the source information destination table. WARNING: any number that 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 5 230 Move Memory / Cartridge Load Label (MOVMC) (LDLBL) Standard RLL 5–146 Instructions V Memory Data LabelAreato Copy DataFroma DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 4 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 location andexecutesthecopyingofdatafromDataLabelAreatoVmemory. LDLBL instruction.TheMOVMCinstructionspecifiesthedestinationstarting address wheredataisbeingcopiedfromloadedintotheaccumulatorusing placed in instruction. executed. Theconstantvalue(K0)isloadedintotheaccumulatorusingLoad stack locationafterthenextLoadandLabel(LDLBL)instructionsare Thisvaluespecifiesthelengthoftableandisplacedinsecond instruction. X1 ison,theconstantvalue(K4)loadedintoaccumulatorusingLoad thefollowingexample,dataiscopiedfromaData Label AreatoVmemory.In When destination table. destination information intothedestinationtable.Whenanoffsetisoutsideof the source copied numberthat any WARNING: Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct $ SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT STR X1 SOFT32 ANDST ANDST ANDST M L L L ORST the firststacklocationafterLDLBLinstructionisexecuted.Thesource destination locations offset forsource and accumulator specifyingthe Load thevalue0into copied. number oflocationstobe accumulator specifyingthe Load thevalue4into to becopied. starting addressofthedata Data LabelAreaK1asthe accumulator specifyingthe Load thevalue1into to becopied. starting addressforthedata V2000 isthedestination This valuespecifiestheoffset forthesourceanddestinationdata, is

O D D D B INST# The offsetforthisusageoftheinstructionstarts at0,butmaybe boundaries, thenunknowndatavalueswillbe transferredintothe MOVMC LDLBL LD LD 1 3 3 3 V2000 ANDST V L ENT AND does not K1 K0 K4 M B SHFT SHFT ORST 1 resultindataoutsideofthesourcearea being ANDST C L K K JMP JMP 2 A E DLBL K1 N N N N K K K K 0 4 Instruction After theEND Programmed Data LabelArea CON CON CON CON 8845 6151 4532 1234 C B ENT ENT 2 1 A ENT 0 A 0 XXXX XXXX 8845 6151 4532 1234 S S S S A 0 V2003 V2002 V2000 V2004 V1777 V2001 ENT Standard RLL Instructions 5–147 DLBL

Offset specified

7041 4648 6151 8845 2500 6835 CON CON CON CON CON CON K K K K K K N N N N N N DLBL K1 Data Label Area Programmed After the END Instruction ENT Table Instructions Table 1 ENT B Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 JMP V2005 V2003 V2004 V2006 V1777 V2000 V2002 V2001 A K DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. destination data, and is placed in the first destination data, 0 S S S S ENT ENT SHFT A and 8845 2500 6835 1234 4532 6151 XXXX XXXX 4 2 0 E C A Offset 2 2 JMP JMP K K C C ORST SHFT SHFT M loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This using the Load instruction. loaded into the accumulator 0 K1 K2 K4 AND ENT A V O 2000 3 3 3 1 MOVMC LD LDA LD INST# B D D D O The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0. If the offset (or the for this usage of the instruction starts at 0. If the offset offset The Convert octal 2000 to HEX 400 and load the value into This the accumulator. specifies the source location where the data will be copied from K1 is the data label destination area where the data will be copied to Load the value 4 into the accumulator specifying the number of locations to be copied. Load the value 2 into the accumulator specifying the for source and offset destination locations. ecifies the offset for the source ecifies the offset ORST L L L M ANDST ANDST ANDST location after the next Load and Load Address instructions are executed. The are executed. instructions and Load Address after the next Load location SOFT32 X1 STR SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The source address the Load Address instruction stack location after the accumulator using the Load copied from is loaded into where data is being specifies the destination starting The MOVMC instruction Address instruction. memory to the data label area. the copying of data from V location and executes In area. When to a data label from V memory data is copied the following example, the Load using into the accumulator (K4) is loaded the constant value X1 is on, instruction. second is placed in the of the table and the length This value specifies stack constant is value (K2) value sp specified data table range) is large enough to cause data to be copied from V specified data table range) is large enough to cause data to be memory of the DLBL area, then anything after the to beyond the end WARNING: area will be replaced with invalid instructions. 5 260 5 250–1 4 240 5 230 Copy Data From V Copy Data to a Data Memory Label Area Standard RLL 5–148 Instructions (RSTBIT) Reset Bit (SETBIT) Set Bit DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 5 5 240 240 5 5 250–1 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 5 260 4 260 4 set ifthebitspecifiedisoutsiderangeoftable. r permissible length is of thefirstwordtablearenumberedfrom within arangeofV-memorylocations. SetBitinstructionsetsasinglebitto one The shown toa“1”. showshowto setthebitas program table, bit’s octaladdressfromthestartof (bit14).Thenwecomputethe reference 12inthesecondword,weuseitsoctal bit contains 16bits,or0to17inoctal.To set shown totheright.Eachwordintable starting at For example,suppposewehaveatable — oranotherinstructionthatusesthesameflag isexecuted. — theendofscan NOTE: Helpful hint: — first bitinthetableisnumber“0”. bitnumberoftheyouwanttosetorreset.Theisinoctal,and the Step 3:—InserttheSetBitorResetinstruction.Thisspecifiesreferencefor octal addresstohex. This Step 2:—LoadthestartingVmemorylocationfortableintoaccumulator. level oftheaccumulatorstack.ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue,0toFF. 1:—Loadthelengthoftable(numberVmemorylocations)intofirst Step following descriptionappliestoboththeSetBitandResettableinstructions. The locations. to zerowithinarangeof V-memory The ResetBitinstructionresetsasinglebit SP53 Discrete BitFlags Vmemory DataTypeOperand parameter mustbeaHEXvalue.You canusetheLDAinstructiontoconvertan so 17+14=34octal.The following Statusflagsareonlyvaliduntil: six words,then6words=(6x16)bits,96bits(decimal),or140octal.The V3000 thatistwowordslong,as ange ofbitreferencenumberswouldbe0to137octal.Flag53will V Remember thateachVmemorylocation exceeds therangeoftable on whenthebitnumberwhichisreferencedinSetBitorReset Description All (Seepage3–51) DL450 Range aaa 0 to17octal.Forexample,ifthetable S LSB LSB MSB MSB 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 contains 16 bits. So,thebits 16 contains 3 1 2 1 RSTBIT SETBIT V3000 V3001 1 1 16 bits 0 1 aaa A aaa A 7654321 0 Standard RLL Instructions 5–149 Table Instructions Table use the Set Bit (or Reset Bit) Set Bit (or Reset use the ENT Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 ENT A DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 4 0 X0 to trigger the Set Bit operation. First, we the Set Bit operation. X0 to trigger and. Finally, we and. Finally, A E 0 3 ENT A D 3 2 NEXT D C Convert octal 3000 to HEX and load the value into the This is the accumulator. table beginning. Set bit 34 (octal) in the table to a ”1”. Load the constant value 2 (Hex.) into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator. MLR PREV T 0 8 K2 ENT O 34 A I O 3000 specify the octal adress of the bit (bit 34), referenced from the table adress of the bit (bit 34), referenced specify the octal 0 3 3 1 LD LDA SETBIT hex by using the hex by using LDA comm A D D B SHFT L L ANDST ANDST SOFT Display X0 SET STR SHFT SHFT $ X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct In will use input example, we this ladder load the stack. Next, we the accumulator (2 words) into the table length will load to number we have V3000 is an octal Since starting into the accumulator. address to it convert instruction and beginning. Standard RLL 5–150 Instructions (FILL) Fill DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Direct 230 Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld $ 5 SHFT SHFT SHFT STR SOFT32 Display X1 240 5 ANDST ANDST F L L 5 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 D B I D 1 8 3 3 FILL LDA LD 260 4 ANDST O 1600 L A V1400 ENT K4 0 function. the stepsnecessarytoprogramFill two additionalinstructions. two stackandtheaccumulatorby accumulator are loadedintothefirstlevelof 4-digit constant.Thefunctionparameters which iseitheraVmemorylocationor locationswithavalue(Aaaa), memory Fillinstructionfillsatableofupto255V The value tofillthetablewith(V1400)isspecifiedinFillinstruction. tableandisloadedintotheaccumulatorusingLoadAddressinstruction.The the isexecuted.Theoctaladdress1600 (V1600)isthestartinglocationfor instruction and isplacedonthefirstlevelofaccumulatorstackwhenLoadAddress usingtheLoadinstruction.Thisvalue accumulator In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,constantvalue(K4)loadedinto equivalent andloadthevalueintoaccumulator. locations, theLDA Helpful Hint: — For par Step 3:—InserttheFillinstructionswhichspecifiesvaluetofilltablewith. This parametermustbeaHEXvalue. Step 2:—LoadthestartingVmemorylocationfortableintoaccumulator. stack.ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue,0–FF.accumulator 1:—LoadthenumberofVmemorylocationstobefilledintofirstlevel Step ANDST L Constant Pointer Vmemory DataTypeOperand PREV of theaccumulator (HEX) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue4 in V1400 Fill thetablewithvalue value intotheaccumulator 1600 toHEX380andloadthe Convert theoctaladdress B E 1 4 B G ENT 1 6 A K P V E A 0 4 instruction canbeusedtoconvertanoctaladdresstheHEX All Vmem(Seep.3–53) A A All (Seep.3–53) ameters thatrequire DL260 Range 0 0 0–FF aaa Listed beloware A ENT 0 2500 V1400 ENT HEXvalueswhenreferencingmemory specifies thelengthoftable XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2500 2500 2500 2500 S S S S FILL V1605 V1604 V1603 V1602 V1601 V1600 V1577 V1576 A aaa Standard RLL Instructions fset 5–151 A aaa A FIND that uses the same flags is Table Instructions Table specifies the length of the table Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. HEX values when referencing memory l another instruction following Load instruction is executed. The of octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location he starting address to the first Vmemory location which he starting address to the first Vmemory aaa 0–FFFF DL260 Range ameters that require All (See p. 3–53) instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX instruction can be used to convert Description value. ON if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search V K A The offset from t offset The value in a V memory table of up to a V memory table value in level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0–FF. stack. This parameter must level of the accumulator into the first and second levels of the and second levels into the first Status flags are only valid unti instruction is executed. The Operand Data Type V memory Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP53 for the table and is loaded into the accumulator. This value is placed in the first level This value for the table and is loaded into the accumulator. of the accumulator stack when the Load instruction. (K2) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator using the If a value is The value to be found in the table is specified in the Find instruction. (from the starting location of the table) found equal to the search value, the offset where the value is located will reside in the accumulator. In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) accumulator using the Load instruction. This value Address and and is placed in the second stack location when the following Load Load NOTE: executed. The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator. contains the search value is returned to the accumulator. SP53 will be set on if an to the accumulator. contains the search value is returned or the value is not found. If the in the offset address outside the table is specified in the accumulator. value is not found 0 will be returned par For — Helpful Hint: locations, the LDA the accumulator. equivalent and load the value into accumulator by stack and the accumulator instructions. Listed below three additional the to program are the steps necessary Find function. of V memory locations) into the the length of the table (number Step 1:— Load second Step level of the location for the table into the first 2:— Load the starting V memory accumulator must be a HEX value. stack. This parameter to begin the search. This from the starting location the offset Step 3:— Load parameter must be a HEX value. Step specifies the first value to be found in the 4:— Insert the Find instruction which table. Results:— The for a is used to search Find instruction specified 255 are function parameters locations. The loaded 4 260 5 250–1 5 240 5 230 Find (FIND) Standard RLL 5–152 Instructions (FDGT) Find GreaterThan DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Direct Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 X1 260 4 where thevalue8989resides Find thelocationintable of theaccumulator 2 intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue of theaccumulator (HEX) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue6 the accumulator. 300 andloadthevalueinto Convert octal1400toHEX FIND LD LDA LD equivalent andloadthevalueintoaccumulator. locations, theLDAinstructioncanbeusedtoconvert anoctaladdresstotheHEX Helpful Hint: set onifthevalueisnotfoundand0willbereturned intheaccumulator. contains thegreaterthansearchvalueisreturned totheaccumulator. SP53willbe Results:— value. Step 3:—InserttheFDGTinstructionswhichspecifies thegreaterthansearch mustbeaHEXvalue. parameter 2:—LoadthestartingVmemory locationforthetableintoaccumulator. This Step stack.ThisparametermustbeaHEX value,0–FF.accumulator Step 1:—Loadthelengthoftable(upto255locations)intofirstlevel FIND instruction. NOTE: theFindGreaterThanfunction. program Listed belowarethestepsnecessaryto bytwoadditionalinstructions. accumulator first leveloftheaccumulatorstackand functionparametersareloadedintothe The a Vmemorylocationor4-digitconstant. specified V memorytablethatisgreaterthanthe search FindGreaterThaninstructionisusedto The O 1400 K8989 K2 K6 Thisinstructiondoesnothaveanoffset, suchastheonerequiredfor for thefirstoccurrenceofavaluein a value (Aaaa),whichcanbeeither The offset fromthe startingaddresstothefirstVmemorylocationwhich — ForparametersthatrequireHEXvalueswhen referencingmemory Begin hereBegin Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Offset $ SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT STR ANDST ANDST ANDST F L L L 5 XXXX XXXX 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 0123 I D D D B S S S S 8 3 3 3 1 N A PREV V1400 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 ENT TMR 0 D C 5 0 4 3 2 1 PREV 2 3 Tablelength B G ENT 6 1 E NEXT ENT specified table. specified ofthe location afterthestart The value8989wasthe4th where thematchwasfound. location the contains V1404 0000 4 Accumulator I A 0 8 FDGT 0004 J 9 A aaa I 8 J 9 ENT Standard RLL Instructions fset 5–153 0002 Accumulator 0000 V1402 contains the location the first value greater where value was than the search found. 9999 was the 2nd location after the start of the specified table. ENT 9 Table length Table that uses the same flags is J Table Instructions Table 0 1 2 3 4 5 8 specifies the length of the table ENT I V1400 V1401 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 9 J A S S S S DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0 8 0123 0500 9999 3074 8989 1010 XXXX XXXX I A l another instruction l another instruction 4 ENT NEXT E 6 1 Begin here G B aaa 0–FFFF MLR DL260 Range PREV T All (See p. 3–53) 0 6 Description that is greater than the search value. on if there is no value in the table K6 ENT A G K8989 O 1400 V K A 1 3 3 3 If there is no value in the table that is greater than the search value, a If there is no value in the table that LD LDA FDGT B D D D Load the constant value 6 (HEX) into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator. Find the value in the table greater than the specified value The octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location for the table and is The octal address 1400 (V1400) is Than instruction. If a value is found greater than the search value, the of Than instruction. If a value is found 5 Status flags are only valid unti Status flags are L L F ANDST ANDST SOFT32 Display X1 STR SHFT SHFT SHFT $ Vmemory Constant Discrete Bit Flags SP53 Operand Type Data Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the In the following example, when X1 accumulator using the Load instruction. This value location after the Load Address instruction is and is placed in the first stack executed. in the Find The greater than search value is specified loaded into the accumulator. Greater NOTE: executed. in the accumulator. instruction starts at 0 and resides The pointer for this (from where the value is located will reside in the the starting location of the table) accumulator. and SP53 will come ON. zero is stored in the accumulator Standard RLL 5–154 Instructions (TTD) Destination Table to DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 260 4 program theTableprogram To Destinationfunction. Listed belowarethestepsnecessaryto bytwoadditionalinstructions. accumulator first leveloftheaccumulatorstackand functionparametersareloadedintothe The value equalsthelastlocationintable. Thetablepointerwillresetto1whenthe on. once perscanprovidedtheinputremains instruction willbeexecuted The moved. indicates the tablecontainspointerwhich by pointer locationandincrementsthetable memory from aVmemorytableto aV value a The Table To Destinationinstructionmoves not 0. firstglanceitmayappearthatthepointer shouldresetto0.However,At itresetsto 1, pointerforthisinstruction startsat0andresetswhenthetablelength isreached. The — theendofscan — anotherinstructionthatusesthesameflagis executed,or NOTE: value willonlybesetinonescanandnotaffect theinstructionoperation. operation Helpful Hint:—Thepointerlocationshouldbesettothevaluewheretable should beusedintheinputlogic. you donotwanttheinstructiontoexecuteformorethanonescan,ashot(PD) Helpful equivalent andloadthevalueintoaccumulator. locations, theLDA Helpful Hint: — For par (Vaaa). 3:—InserttheTTDinstructionwhichspecifiesdestinationVmemorylocation Step mustbeaHEXvalue. parameter (Remember, thestartinglocationoftableisusedaspointer.) This Step 2:—LoadthestartingVmemorylocationfortableintoaccumulator. first leveloftheaccumulatorstack.ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue,0toFF. 1:—Loadthelengthof data table(numberofVmemorylocations)into the Step SP56 Discrete BitFlags Vmemory DataTypeOperand Statusflags(SPs)areonlyvaliduntil: Hint:— Theinstructionwillbeexecutedeveryscaniftheinputlogicison.If the nextlocationintableto be will begin.ThespecialrelaySP0ora 1. ThefirstVmemorylocation in A V ON whenthetablepointerequalslength. Description instruction canbeusedtoconvertanoctaladdresstheHEX ameters thatrequire All (Seep.3–53) DL260 Range aaa HEXvalueswhenreferencingmemory one shot(PD)shouldbeusedsothe TTD A aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–155 V1500 V1400 C0 C1 C1 PD SET RST Table Pointer Table Destination 0000 XXXX K6 follow the TTD 1 2 3 4 5 0 6 must LD Load the constant value 6 (HEX) into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator S S Table Since Special Relays are reset at the end of the scan, this latch instruction in the program. Table Instructions Table 0500 9999 3074 8989 1010 2046 XXXX specifies the length of the table the length of the specifies X1 C0 C1 ENT ENT SP56 SOFT32 Display (optional latch example using SP56) V1401 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 0 Direct A A DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0 0 A A 4 5 ENT E F 6 1 1 ble to Destination instruction. The table pointer (V1400 ble to Destination G B B Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into This is the the accumulator. table pointer location. Load the constant value 6 (HEX) into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Copy the specified value from the table to the specified destination (V1500) PREV 3 0 K6 ENT A D V1500 O 1400 3 3 1 TTD LD LDA MLR B D D T specified in the Ta MLR L L T ANDST ANDST SOFT32 Display X1 STR SHFT SHFT SHFT $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the (K6) is loaded the constant value when X1 is on, example, In the following accumulator This value the Load instruction. using and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is Address instruction after the Load stack location in the first and is placed source location for the is the starting 1400 (V1400) The octal address executed. V1400 is used as the pointer Remember, into the accumulator. table and is loaded source. The destination location actually part of the table data location, and is not (V1500) is in this case) will be increased by “1” after each execution of the TTD instruction. be increased by “1” after each execution in this case) will Ittable the how important to understand is locations are numbered. If you examine the that the example table, you’ll notice be used first data location, V1401, will and when the pointer is equal to zero, to six. again when the pointer is equal Why? Because the pointer is only equal to zero beforethe veryfirst execution. From then on, it increments from one to six, and then resets to one. Also, our example uses a normalinput Since execution. the control to contact (X1) the CPU scanis extremely fast, and the the table pointer increments automatically, would cycle through the locationsvery If this is aquickly. problem, you have an option of using SP56 inconjunction with a example) for (C1 latch a and one-shot(PD) to allow thetable tocycle through all logic The stop. then and time locationsone shown here is not required, just it’s an optional method. Standard RLL 5–156 Instructions is onlyonuntiltheendofscan. thepointerautomaticallycyclesfrom0–6,andthenstartsoverat1insteadof0.Also,noticehowSP56 how The followingdiagramshowsthescan-by-scanresultsofexecutionforourexampleprogram.Notice DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Example ofExecution Scan N Scan N+1 Scan N+6 Scan N+5 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1401 V1401 eoeTDEeuinAfter TTD Execution Execution Before TTD Before TTD Execution Before TTD Execution Before TTD Before TTD Execution Before TTD XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 Table Table Table Table S S S S S S S S 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 XXXX 2046 000 1010 000 0500 000 0000 Destination Destination Destination Table Pointer Table Pointer Destination Table Pointer Table Pointer SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 6 5 1 SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF V1400 V1400 V1400 V1500 V1500 V1500 V1500 V1400 S S S V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 After TTD Execution After TTD After TTD Execution After TTD After TTD Execution After TTD XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 9999 0500 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 2046 1010 8989 3074 Table Table Table Table S S S S S S S S 0 6 0 6 0 06 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 6 Table Pointer(AutomaticallyIncremented) Table Pointer(Resetsto1,not0) Table Pointer(AutomaticallyIncremented) Table Pointer(AutomaticallyIncremented) 0002 0500 0001 0500 0001 2046 0006 9999 Destination Destination Destination Destination SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF SP56 =ON SP56 =OFF V1400 V1400 V1500 V1500 V1400 V1500 V1400 V1500 that usesSP56 or nextinstruction until endofscan Standard RLL Instructions 5–157 aaa A RFB Table Instructions Table one shot (PD) should be used so the one shot (PD) should be used so Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. HEX values when referencing memory The first V Listed below are aaa DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) ameters that require instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX instruction can be used to convert have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program. Description on when the table pointer equals 0 V A will begin. The special relay SP0 or a will begin. The special relay SP0 or Hint:— The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If Hint:— The instruction will be executed Status flags (SPs) are only valid until: Discrete Bit Flags SP56 Operand Data Type Vmemory NOTE: — another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or — the end of the scan The It is not set pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. You automatically. Step into the first Load the length of the table (number of V memory locations) 1:— parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF. level of the accumulator stack. This location for the table into the accumulator. Step 2:— Load the starting V memory (Remember, This location of the table blank is used as the table pointer.) the starting parameter must be a HEX value. Stepmemory location 3:— Insert the RFB instructions which specifies destination V (Vaaa). par For — Helpful Hint: locations, the LDA the accumulator. equivalent and load the value into Helpful execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) you do not want the instruction to should be used in the input logic. should be set to the value where the table Helpful Hint: — The pointer location operation value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation. and will not affect value will only be set in one scan The Remove From Bottom instruction From Bottom The Remove bottom of a value from the moves a V and V memory location table to a memory 1. by pointer table decrements a memorythe table contains location in the next indicates the table pointer which table to be moved. The location in the executed once per scan instruction will be input remains on. The provided the stop operation when the instruction will The function parameters pointer equals 0. the first level of the are loaded into accumulator by stack and the accumulator two additional instructions. the the steps necessary to program Remove From Bottom function. 4 260 5 250–1 5 240 5 230 Remove from Remove Bottom (RFB) Standard RLL 5–158 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions case) willbedecrementedby“1”aftereachexecutionoftheRFBinstruction. (V1500) isspecifiedintheRemoveFromBottom.Thetablepointer(V1400this location, andisnotactuallypartofthetabledatasource.Thedestinationlocation table andisloadedintotheaccumulator. Remember, V1400isusedasthepointer executed. Theoctaladdress1400(V1400)isthestartinglocationforsource and isplacedinthefirststacklocationafterLoadAddressinstruction usingtheLoadinstruction.Thisvalue accumulator In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,constantvalue(K6)loadedinto to high. theinput contacttransitionsfrom low time (PD)toremoveonevalueeach one-shot applicaton, youhaveanoptionofusinga very quickly. Ifthisisaproblemforyour table wouldcyclethroughthe locations the pointerdecrementsautomatically, the Since the contact (X1)tocontroltheexecution. Also, ourexampleusesanormal input when thepointerisequaltotwo,etc. second when thepointerisequaltoone.The first datalocation,V1401,willbeused the exampletable,you’llnoticethat the numbered. Ifyouexamine are locations isimportant tounderstand how the table It Direct X1 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 data location,V1402,willbeused CPU scanisextremelyfast,and destination (V1500) the tabletospecified Copy thespecifiedvaluefrom of theaccumulator (HEX) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue6 table pointerlocation. the accumulator. Thisisthe 300 andloadthevalueinto Convert octal1400toHEX RFB LDA LD O 1400 V1500 K6 $ SHFT SHFT SHFT Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes STR ANDST ANDST R L L ORN F D D B 5 3 3 1 B A ENT Direct 1 0 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 SOFT32 Display(optionalone-shotmethod) SOFT32 PREV C0 X1 specifies thelengthoftable XXXX 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 Table B B G S S 1 1 6 table pointerlocation. the accumulator. This isthe 300 andloadthevalueinto Convert octal1400toHEX of theaccumulator (HEX) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue6 LDA LD F E ENT 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 O 1400 K6 A A 0 0 XXXX 0000 Table Pointer Destination A A PD C0 0 0 V1400 V1500 ENT ENT Standard RLL Instructions 5–159 until end of scan or next instruction that uses SP56 V1500 V1500 V1400 V1500 V1400 V1500 V1400 V1400 SP56 = ON SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 Destination Destination Destination Destination 1010 0001 9999 0000 0500 0005 2046 0004 Table Pointer (Automatically Decremented) Table Table Pointer (Automatically Decremented) Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer (Automatically Decremented) Pointer (Automatically Table Table Instructions Table 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard S S S S S S S S DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Table Table Table Table 1010 2046 3074 8989 1010 2046 0500 9999 3074 8989 1010 2046 0500 9999 3074 8989 0500 9999 3074 8989 1010 2046 0500 9999 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX V1401 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1401 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1401 V1402 V1401 tice how SP56 is only on until the end of the scan. the of end the until on only is SP56 tice how S S S V1500 V1500 V1400 V1500 V1500 V1400 V1400 V1400 SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer Table Destination Destination Destination Destination 0001 9999 0002 3074 0005 2046 0006 XXXX 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 S S S S S S S S Table Table Table Table 0500 9999 3074 8989 1010 2046 0500 9999 3074 8989 1010 2046 0500 9999 3074 8989 1010 2046 0500 9999 3074 8989 1010 2046 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Before RFB Execution Execution After RFB Before RFB Execution Execution After RFB Before RFB Execution Execution After RFB Before RFB Execution Execution After RFB V1401 V1401 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1401 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1401 Scan N+5 Scan N+4 Scan N+1 Scan N Example of Execution The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example program. Notice how Notice program. example our for execution the of results scan-by-scan the shows diagram Thefollowing no Also, 6 – 0. from decrements automatically the pointer Standard RLL 5–160 Instructions (STT) Source toTable DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 260 4 function. necessary toprogramtheSourceTo Table instructions. Listedbelowarethesteps withtwoadditional accumulator level oftheaccumulatorstackand the function scanprovidedtheinputremainson.The per value. the nextlocationintabletostorea contains thetablepointerwhichindicates The firstVmemorylocationinthetable reaches theendoftable,itresetsto1. pointer by1.Whenthetable V memorytableandincrementsa value fromaVmemorylocationinto The SourceTo Table instructionmovesa length isreached. pointerforthisinstructionstarts at0andresets The — theendofscan — anotherinstructionthat usesthesameflagisexecuted,or NOTE: will onlybesetinonescanandnotaffect theinstructionoperation. range, the data w could beinthepointershouldbetween0and6.Ifvalueisoutsideofthis For example,ifthetableis6wordslong,thenallowablerangeofvaluesthat theoperation.Also,itmustbesettoavaluethatiswithinlengthoftable. for Helpful Hint:—Thet should beusedintheinputlogic. you donotwanttheinstructiontoexecuteformorethanonescan,ashot(PD) Helpful equivalent andloadthevalueintoaccumulator. locations, theLDA Helpful Hint: — For par (Vaaa). Thisiswherethevaluewillbemovedfrom. Step 3:—InserttheSTTinstructionwhichspecifiessourceVmemorylocation mustbeaHEXvalue. parameter (Remember, thestartinglocationoftableisusedaspointer.) This Step 2:—LoadthestartingVmemorylocationfortableintoaccumulator. level oftheaccumulatorstack.ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue,0toFF. 1:—Loadthe lengthofthetable(numberVmemorylocations)intofirst Step SP56 Discrete BitFlags Vmemory DataTypeOperand The instructionwillbeexecutedonce Statusflags(SPs)areonlyvaliduntil: Hint:— Theinstructionwillbeexecutedeveryscaniftheinputlogicison.If parameters areloaded V ill notbemoved.Also,aoneshot(PD)shouldusedsothevalue on whenthetablepointerequalslength Description instruction canbeusedtoconvertanoctaladdresstheHEX able countervalueshouldbesettoindicatethestartingpoint ameters thatrequire All (Seep.3–53) DL260 Range aaa into thefirst HEXvalueswhenreferencingmemory to 1automaticallywhenthe table STT V aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–161 V1500 V1400 C0 PD Table Pointer Table Data Source 0000 0500 K6 O 1400 1 2 3 4 5 0 6 LDA LD Load the constant value 6 (HEX) into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into This is the the accumulator. starting table location. S S ENT Table Table Instructions Table ruction. The table pointer will ruction. The table XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 0 specifies the length of the table the length of the specifies X1 C0 ENT A SOFT32 Display (optional one-shot method) V1401 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 0 Direct A A DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 5 0 A F 4 1 ENT E B 6 1 G B MLR PREV T 0 MLR ENT K6 T A V1500 O 1400 3 3 1 STT LD LDA SHFT B D D table and table pointer, is loaded into the accumulator. The data source The data the accumulator. is loaded into table and table pointer, Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator 1500) is specified in the Source to Table inst Table to in the Source 1500) is specified Load the constant value 6 (Hex.) into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Copy the specified value from the source location (V1500) to the table CPU scan is extremely fast, and RST S L L ANDST ANDST SOFT32 Display X1 STR Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT $ Direct In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the (K6) is loaded the constant value when X1 is on, example, In the following accumulator This value the Load instruction. using and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is Address instruction after the Load stack location in the first and is placed for the starting location which is the 1400 (V1400), The octal address executed. destination location (V be increased by “1” after each time the instruction is executed. “1” after each time the instruction be increased by Also, our example uses a normal input Also, our example uses a normal contact (X1) to control the execution. Since the the the pointer increments automatically, source data would be moved into all the If this is a table locations very quickly. an have problemyou for your applicaton, option of using a one-shot (PD) to move one value each time the input contact transitions from low to high. Ittable the how important to understand is locations are numbered. If you examine the that the example table, you’ll notice will be first data storage location, V1401, to zero, used when the pointer is equal and again when the pointer is equal to six. Why? Because the pointer is only equal to zero beforethe veryfirst execution. From then on, it increments from one to six, and then resets to one. Standard RLL 5–162 Instructions This is not required, but it makes it easier to see how the data source is copied into the table. the into copied is source data the how see to easier it makes it but required, not is This s (data V1500 in value the changes that program the of affected by the execution. Although our example does not show it, we are assuming that there is another part 0. insteadof Also, notice how 1 at SP56 over starts then 6, and is – 0 from cycles pointer automatically the followingThe diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example program. Notice how DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Example ofExecution Scan N Scan N+5 Scan N+1 Scan N+6 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1401 Before STT Execution Before STT Execution eoeSTEeuinAfter STT Execution Before STT Execution Before STT Execution XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 0500 XXXX XXXX XXXX 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 Table Table Table Table S S S S S S S S 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 1234 0006 2046 0005 9999 0001 0500 0000 Table Pointer Table Pointer Table Pointer Table Pointer SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 Source Source Source Source SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF V1500 V1500 V1500 V1500 V1400 V1400 V1400 V1400 S S S ource) prior to the execution of the STT instruction. STT the of execution the to prior ource) V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 After STTExecution After STTExecution After STTExecution XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 0500 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 1234 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 9999 0500 Table Table Table Table S S S S S S S S 0 6 0 0 6 06 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 6 Table Pointer(AutomaticallyIncremented) Table Pointer(AutomaticallyIncremented) Table Pointer(AutomaticallyIncremented) Table Pointer(Resetsto1,not0) 0500 0001 1234 0001 2046 0006 9999 0002 SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 Source Source Source Source SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF SP56 =ON SP56 =OFF V1500 V1500 V1500 V1400 V1400 V1400 V1400 V1500 that usesSP56 or nextinstruction until endofscan Standard RLL Instructions 5–163 aaa V RFT Table Instructions Table every scan if the input logic is on. If every scan if the input logic is on. Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. to convert an octal address to the HEX to convert an octal address to the hich specifies destination V memory location hich specifies destination V memory aaa nstruction pops a nstruction DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) able counter value should be set to indicate the starting point able counter value should be set additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to are the steps necessary additional instructions. Listed below RFT instructions w have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program. table all other values are table all Description on when the table counter equals 0 each time the instruction is each time the instruction The instruction will be executed V the table counter should be between 1 and 6. If the value is outside of this the table counter should be between 1 and 6. If the value is outside t: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory t: — For parameters that require zero, the data will not be moved from the table. Also, a one shot (PD) should zero, the data will not be moved from the table. Also, a one shot (PD) parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the parameters are loaded into the first Status flags (SPs) are only valid until: Operand Data Type Vmemory Discrete Bit Flags SP56 for to a value that is within the length of the table. the operation. Also, it must be set long, then the allowable range of values that For example, if the table is 6 words in could be range or the instruction be used so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect operation. NOTE: — another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or — the end of the scan The It is not set pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. You automatically. (Vaaa). This is where the value will be moved to. This is where the value will be (Vaaa). Helpful Hin be used locations, the LDA instruction can Helpful Hint: — The t Step of the table (number of V memory locations) into the first 1:— Load the length parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF. level of the accumulator stack. This location for the table into the accumulator. Step 2:— Load the starting V memory table is used as the table length counter.) the starting location of the (Remember, This parameter must be a HEX value. Step 3:— Insert the the accumulator. equivalent and load the value into Helpful Hint:— value off of a table and stores it in a of a table and value off is a value location. When V memory removed from the The first V memory shifted up 1 location. table contains the table location in the The table counter length counter. 1 decrements by length counter is zero or executed. If the greatermaximum table length than the the first level of the (specified in accumulator will not stack) the instruction will be on. execute and SP56 execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) you do not want the instruction to should be used in the input logic. The Remove From Table i The From Table Remove The on. The scan provided the input remains will be executed once per instruction function function. program the Remove From Table accumulator by two two accumulator by 4 260 5 250–1 5 240 5 230 Remove from Table Remove (RFT) Standard RLL 5–164 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions by “1”aftertheinstructionisexecuted. specified in table andisloadedintotheaccumulator. Thedestinationlocation(V1500)is executed. Theoctaladdress1400(V1400)isthestartinglocationforsource and isplacedinthefirststacklocationafterLoadAddressinstruction usingtheLoadinstruction.Thisvalue accumulator In thefollowingexample,whenX1ison,constantvalue(K6)loadedinto to high. theinput contacttransitionsfrom low time (PD)toremoveonevalueeach one-shot applicaton, youhaveanoptionofusinga quickly. Ifthisisaproblemforyour data the pointerdecrementsautomatically, the Since the contact (X1)tocontroltheexecution. Also, ourexampleusesanormal input instruction execution. locations wouldbeaffected duringthe table the topoftable.Forexample,if that examine theexampletable,you’llnotice table locationsarenumbered.Ifyou table, it is range of data that w Since thetablecounterspecifies $ SHFT SHFT SHFT Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes STR Direct X1 the datalocationsarenumberedfrom would beremovedfromthetablevery SOFT32 Display SOFT32 counter startedat6,thenallsixof the ANDST ANDST R L L ORN important tounderstandhowthe CPU scanisextremelyfast,and F D D B the RemovefromTable RFT LDA LD 5 3 3 1 O 1400 T A V1500 ENT MLR K6 0 ill beremovedfrom the PREV specified location(V1500) from thetableto Copy thespecifiedvalue of theaccumulator (Hex.) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue6 the accumulator 300 andloadthevalueinto Convert octal1400toHEX B B G 1 1 6 F E ENT 5 4 instruction.Thetablecounterwillbedecreased A A 0 0 A A Direct 0 0 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 SOFT32 Display(optionalone-shotmethod) SOFT32 ENT ENT C0 X1 specifies thelengthoftable XXXX 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 Table S S table pointerlocation. the accumulator. This isthe 300 andloadthevalueinto Convert octal1400toHEX of theaccumulator (HEX) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue6 LDA LD 6 5 4 3 2 1 O 1400 K6 XXXX 0006 Table Counter Destination PD C0 V1400 V1500 Standard RLL Instructions 5–165 V1500 V1500 V1500 V1500 V1400 V1400 V1400 V1400 until end of scan or next instruction that uses SP56 SP56 = ON SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF 1 3 2 SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 Table Counter Table Table Counter Table Counter Table Table Counter Table Destination Destination Destination Destination 9999 000 4079 0000 8989 000 0500 000 (Automatically Decremented) (Automatically Decremented) (Automatically Decremented) (Automatically Decremented) 9 9 9 0 8 9 7 0 9 9 0 5 Table Instructions Table 8 9 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard S S S S S S DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Table Table Table Table 4079 8989 8989 8989 1010 2046 9999 4079 8989 8989 1010 2046 XXXX XXXX 2046 8989 8989 8989 8989 1010 2046 8989 8989 8989 8989 1010 XXXX XXXX V1401 V1406 V1407 V1401 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1401 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1401 of the execution for our example program. In our Start here Start here Start here Start here ially. (Remember, you can set the (Remember, table counterto any ially. e positions, 5 and 6, are not moved up through the table. the through up moved not are 6, and 5 e positions, V1400 V1400 V1400 V1500 V1500 V1500 V1400 V1500 SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 Destination Destination Destination Table Counter Table Table Counter Table Table Counter Table Table Counter Table Destination 0001 4079 0002 9999 0003 0500 0004 XXXX 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 S S S S S S S S Table Table Table Table 8989 8989 8989 8989 1010 2046 XXXX 4079 8989 8989 8989 1010 2046 XXXX 2046 0500 9999 3074 8989 1010 XXXX 9999 4079 8989 8989 1010 2046 XXXX Before RFT ExecutionBefore RFT Execution RFT After Before RFT ExecutionBefore RFT Execution RFT After Before RFT ExecutionBefore RFT Execution RFT After Before RFT ExecutionBefore RFT Execution RFT After V1401 V1401 V1401 V1401 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1406 V1407 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 Table Counter Table indicates that these 4 positions will be used Scan N+3 Scan N+2 Scan N+1 Scan N Example of Execution The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results example we’re showing the table counter set to 4 init value that iswithin the range ofthe table.) The tablecounter automaticallydecrements from 4–0 asthe tabl two last the how Notice executed. instructionis only on until the the when is end comes table counter on is zero, of the scan. which Also, SP56, how notice Standard RLL 5–166 Instructions (ATT) Add toTop DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 260 4 location. table allothervaluesarepusheddown1 location. Whenthevalueisaddedto on toaVmemorytablefrom AddToThe Top instructionpushesavalue automatically. You pointerforthisinstructioncanbesettostartanywhereinthetable. Itisnotset The — theendofscan — anotherinstructionthatusesthesameflagis executed,or NOTE: thevaluewillonlybesetinonescanandnotaf so zero, thetablecountershouldbebetween1and6.Ifvalueisoutsideofthisrangeor in example, if operation.Also,it the Helpful should beusedintheinputlogic. you donotwanttheinstructiontoexecuteformorethanonescan,ashot(PD) Hint:— Helpful equivalent andloadthevalueintoaccumulator. locations, theLDAinstructioncanbeused Hin Helpful (Vaaa). Thisiswherethevaluewillbemovedfrom. Step 3:—InserttheATT instructionswhichspecifiessource Vmemorylocation This parametermustbeaHEXvalue. (Remember, thestartinglocationoftableisusedaslengthcounter.) Step 2:—LoadthestartingVmemorylocationfortableintoaccumulator. level oftheaccumulatorstack.ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue,0toFF. 1:—Loadthelengthoftable(numberVmemorylocations)intofirst Step theAddToprogram Top function. byaccumulator parameters function instructionwillbeexecutedonceperscanprovidedtheinputremainson.The The SP56 Discrete BitFlags Vmemory DataTypeOperand the datawillnotbemovedintotable.Also,aoneshot(PD)shouldused Statusflags(SPs)areonlyvaliduntil: Hint: —Thetablecountervalueshouldbesettoindicatethestartingpointfor t: —ForparametersthatrequireHEXvalueswhenreferencingmemory the tableis6wordslong,thenallowablerangeofvaluesthatcouldbe V The instructionwillbeexecuted two additionalinstructions.Listedbelowarethestepsnecessaryto on whenthetablecounterisequaltosize Description have toloadavalueintothepointersomewherein yourprogram. are loadedintothefirstlevelofaccumulatorstackand must be All (Seep.3–53) DL260 Range aaa set toavaluethatiswithinthelengthoftable.For to convertanoctaladdresstheHEX every scaniftheinputlogicison.If fect the ATT instruction operation. V aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–167 V1400 V1500 2 C0 PD Data Source Table Counter Table 000 XXXX K6 O 1400 (e.g., 6 – 2 = 4). 1 2 3 4 5 6 LDA LD Load the constant value 6 (HEX) into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into This is the the accumulator. starting table location. S S Table Table Instructions Table 0500 9999 3074 8989 1010 2046 XXXX specifies the length of the table the length of the specifies X1 C0 ENT ENT SOFT32 Display (optional one-shot method) V1401 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1405 V1406 V1407 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 0 Direct A A DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0 0 A A 4 5 ENT E F 1 1 6 G B B PREV 0 MLR K6 ENT A T V1500 O 1400 3 3 1 ATT LD LDA MLR Copy the specified value from V1500 to the table B D D T Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator 1500) is specified in the Add to Top instruction. The table counter will be instruction. Top in the Add to 1500) is specified Load the constant value 6 (Hex.) into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator CPU scan is extremely fast, and using a one-shot (PD) to add one 0 length – table counter = number of executions L L A ANDST ANDST SOFT32 Display X1 STR Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT $ Table Table Direct Also, our example uses a normal input Also, our example uses a normal contact (X1) to control the execution. Since the the table counter increments the data would be moved automatically, If this is a into the table very quickly. an have problemyou for your applicaton, option of value each time the input contact transitions from low to high. For the ATT instruction, the table counter ATT the For determinesnumber of additions that the will can be made before the instruction to stop executing. So, it is helpful understandthis how the system uses counter to control the execution. was set For example, if the table counter 6 words, to 2, and the table length was then there could only be 4 additions of data before the execution was stopped. This can easily be calculated by: In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the (K6) is loaded the constant value when X1 is on, example, In the following accumulator This value the Load instruction. using and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is Address instruction after the Load stack location in the first and is placed for the starting location which is the 1400 (V1400), The octal address executed. The source is loaded into the accumulator. and table counter, destination table location (V increased by “1” after the instruction is executed. increased by “1” Standard RLL 5–168 Instructions in V1500(datasource)priortotheexecutionofATTinstruction. example how SP56comesonwhenthetablecounteris6,whichequaltolength.Plus,althoughour counter is followingdiagramshowsthescan-by-scanresultsofexecution forourexampleprogram.Thetable The DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Example ofExecution Scan N Scan N+2 Scan N+1 Scan N+3 does notshowit,weareassumingthatthereisanotherpartoftheprogramchangesvalue Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions set to2initially, anditwill V1401 V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1401 eoeATEeuinAfter ATT Execution After ATT Execution Before ATT Execution After ATT Execution Before ATT Execution Before ATT Execution eoeATEeuinAfter ATT Execution Before ATT Execution XXXX 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 1234 XXXX 2046 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 XXXX XXXX 8989 3074 9999 0500 1234 5678 3074 9999 0500 1234 5678 4343 Table Table Table Table S S S S S S S S 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 automatically incrementfrom2–6astheinstructionisexecuted.Notice 7777 0005 4334 0004 5678 0003 1234 0002 Data Source Table Counter Data Source Table Counter Data Source Table Counter Data Source Table Counter SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF V1500 V1500 V1400 V1500 V1400 V1500 V1400 V1400 V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1407 V1406 V1405 V1404 V1403 V1402 V1401 V1401 XXXX XXXX 9999 0500 1234 5678 4343 7777 3074 9999 0500 1234 5678 4343 XXXX XXXX 5678 1010 8989 3074 9999 0500 1234 8989 3074 9999 0500 1234 Table Table Table Table S S S S S S S S 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 8 2 10 0 9 0 7 8 4 1 7 4 5 1 4 9 Discard Bucket Discard Bucket 6 0 Discard Bucket Discard Bucket 7 3 6 2 7 4 7 3 7 3 8 4 (AutomaticallyIncremented) (AutomaticallyIncremented) (AutomaticallyIncremented) (AutomaticallyIncremented) 000 1234 000 7777 000 4343 000 5678 Data Source Data Source Data Source Data Source Table Counter Table Counter Table Counter Table Counter SP56 SP56 SP56 SP56 4 3 6 5 SP56 =ON SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF SP56 =OFF that usesSP56 or nextinstruction until endofscan V1400 V1400 V1400 V1400 V1500 V1500 V1500 V1500 Standard RLL Instructions 5–169 Discard bits A aaa A aaa TSHFL TSHFR contains 16 bits. So, the bits Table Instructions Table table. Flag 67 will be set if the Table Shift Right Table Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. within the of V-memory locations. The Table Shift Left and locations. The Table V-memory of or Table shift Right instruction. This specifies the Table or Shift in zeros aaa Shift in zeros DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) Remember that each V memory location V A table is just a range A table is just a range e by 20 bits, that is 24 octal. Flag 53 will be set if the number of bits to be e by 20 bits, that is 24 octal. Flag 53 will be set if the number of bits larger than the total bits contained out the end of one word and into the opposite end of an adjacent word. At the out the end of one word and into the parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an parameter must be a HEX value. You Table Shift Left Table Vmemory Operand Data Type The Table all the Shift Right instruction shifts TheTable table to the right, a bits in a V-memory of bit positions. specified number Shift Right Shift Left and Table applies to both the Table The following description instructions. The Table Shift Left instruction shifts all the Left instruction Shift The Table the to the left, table V-memory bits in a number of bit positions. specified entire table. Bits are shift bits serially throughout the Shift Right instructions Table shifted discarded, or zeros are shifted into the table. The ends of the table, bits are either four words long. example tables below are arbitrarily Step into the first — Load the length of the table (number of V memory locations) 1: 0 to FF. level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, the accumulator. Step 2: — Load the starting V memory location for the table into This octal address to hex. Shift Left Step —Insert the Table 3: number of bit positions you wish to shift the entire table. The number of bit positions must be in octal. — Helpful hint: of the first word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal. If you want to shift the entire tabl shifted is last bit shifted (just before it is discarded) is a “1”. 4 4 260 260 5 5 250–1 250–1 Discard bits V–xxxx +2 V–xxxx +1 V–xxxx 5 5 240 240 5 5 230 230 Table Shift Right Shift Table (TSHFR) Table Shift Left Table (TSHFL) Standard RLL 5–170 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions octal. instruction andspecifythenumberofbitstobeshifted(12decimal),whichis14 convert ittohexbyusingtheLDAcommand.Finally, weusetheTable ShiftRight addressintotheaccumulator.starting SinceV3000isanoctalnumberwehaveto will loadthetablelength(5words)intoaccumulatorstack.Next,we shown above.We followingladderexampleassumesthedataatV3000toV3004 alreadyexistsas The been shiftedinatthebottom. andthe 0–0–0sequence discarded, has Notice resulting tableshownatthefarright. specifying Using Converting tooctal,12bitsis14octal. shift rightby3BCDdigits(12bits). purposes). BCD dataasshown(fordemonstration example tabletotherightcontains The — oranotherinstructionthatusesthesameflagisexecuted. — theendofscan NOTE: Direct Discrete BitFlags SP67 SP53 $ SHFT SHFT SHFT Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes STR X0 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 the TableSh ANDST ANDST T L L that the2–3–4sequencehasbeen Statusflagsareonlyvaliduntil: MLR a shiftbyoctal14,wehavethe Suppose wewanttodoatable D D A SHFT TSHFR LDA LD 0 3 3 O 3000 S A O 14 ENT K5 RST on whenthelastbitshifted(justbeforeitisdiscarded)a“1” contained withinthetable on whenthenumberofbitstobeshiftedislargerthantotal Description will useinputX0totriggerthe ift Rightinstructionand 0 H PREV 7 of theaccumulator. (Hex.) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue5 bits, whichis14octal. Do atableshiftrightby12 table beginning. accumulator. Thisisthe and loadthevalueinto Convert octal3000toHEX F D F 5 3 5 R A ENT ORN 0 A 0 A NEXT 0 Table ShiftRightoperation.First,we 3 1 5 1 5 30 V3000 V3000 B ENT 3 1 6 2 5 1 4 2 7 3 6 E 4 2 8 4 6 4 ENT 5 3 1 6 0 0 6 4 2 7 0 6 4 2 8 5 3 1 5 1 Standard RLL Instructions 2 6 2 6 5–171 2 6 2 6 A aaa A aaa A aaa K6666 ANDMOV ANDMOV LDR XORMOV Table Instructions Table 3 F 3 F 3 F V3000 V3100 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 3 F Next we load the starting addrss of the -memory locations. These instructions DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. – V3001 already exists. First we load the a range of V aaa DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) LDA instruction. Then we load the data into the accumulator words) into the accumulator. words) into the accumulator. V that the data in the table at V3000 parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an can use the LDA instruction to convert You parameter must be a HEX value. Operand Data Type Vmemory The contains example table to the right BCD data as shown (for demonstration purposes).a Suppose we want to move table of two words at V3000 and AND it at with K6666. The copy of the table AND V3100 shows the result of the operation for each word. The program on the next page performs the ANDMOV operation example above. It assumes table length (two table length specify the table to be ANDed with the table. In the ANDMOV command, we destination, V3100. The following description applies to the AND Move, OR Move, and Exclusive OR The following description applies Move is just instructions. A table specified location, preforming a logical operation copy the data of a table to another contents as the new table is written. on each word with the accumulator Step into the first — Load the length of the table (number of V memory locations) 1: parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF. level of the accumulator stack. This location for the table into the accumulator. Step 2: — Load the starting V memory This octal address to hex. Step pattern into the accumulator which will be logically 3: — Load the BCD/hex bit as they are copied. combined with the table contents Step the AND Move, OR Move, or XOR Move instruction. This specifies 4: —Insert the new table will automatically starting location of the copy of the original table. This table. be the same length as the original the using source table, The copies data from a Or Move instruction memory location, table to the specified with the accumulator ORing each word written. contents as it is Move instruction copies The Exclusive OR to the specified memory data from a table each word with the location, XORing accululator value as it is written. The data from instruction copies AND Move memory location, to the specified a table the accumulator each word with ANDing it is written. data as 4 4 4 260 260 260 5 5 5 250–1 250–1 250–1 5 5 5 240 240 240 5 5 5 230 230 230 AND Move (ANDMOV) Exclusive OR Move (XORMOV) OR Move (ORMOV) Standard RLL 5–172 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Direct SOFT32 Display SOFT32 X0 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions LD LDA LD ANDMOV O 3000 O 3100 K6666 K2 must usetheSHFTkey and spell“XORMOV”explicitly. ORMOV. JustusetheXORMOV instruction.Onthehandheldprogrammer, you The ladderprogramexamplefortheXORMOV is similartotheoneabovefor foreachword. operation V3100 showstheresultofXOR with K3333.Thecopyofthetable at two wordsatV3000andlogicallXORsit exampletotherightshowsatableof The foreachword. operation V3100 showstheresultofOR with K8888.Thecopyofthetable at two wordsatV3000andlogicallyORs it exampletotherightshowsatableof The table destination,V3100. the ORMOVcommand,wespecify tobe accumulator Then weloadthedatainto source table,usingtheLDAinstruction. Next weloadthestartingaddressof length (twowords)intotheaccumulator. already exists.Firstweloadthetable the dataintableatV3000–V3001 ORMOV exampleabove.Itassumesthat The programtotherightperforms Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Q $ SHFT SHFT SHFT STR OR accumulator asitiswritten. ANDing itscontentswiththe Copy thetabletoV3100, of theaccumulator. (Hex.) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue2 16 bitsoftheaccumulator. 6666 (Hex.)intothelower Load theconstantvalue table beginning. accumulator. Thisisthe and loadthevalueinto Convert octal3000toHEX ANDST ANDST ANDST L L L SHFT D D D A M ORST 3 3 3 0 A O INST# ENT 0 ORed withthetable.In PREV PREV V AND Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes V $ SHFT SHFT SHFT AND STR D I C 3 2 8 ANDST ANDST ANDST L L L SHFT A D I ENT 0 3 8 D D D A M ORST 3 3 3 0 A B I 0 1 8 A O INST# ENT 0 A A I 0 0 8 PREV PREV V 1 1 1 1 AND 30 V3100 V3000 V3100 V3000 A ENT ENT Direct 1 1 1 1 0 D G C 1 1 1 1 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 X0 3 6 2 ENT 1 1 1 1 A D G ENT 0 3 6 ORMOV XORMOV K8888 K3333 A B G ORMOV LD LDA LD 0 6 1 accumulator asitiswritten. ORing itscontentswiththe Copy thetabletoV3100, of theaccumulator. (Hex.) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue2 16 bitsoftheaccumulator. 8888 (Hex.)intothelower Load theconstantvalue table beginning. accumulator. Thisisthe and loadthevalueinto Convert octal3000toHEX O 3000 V 3100 K8888 A A G K2 0 0 6 9 9 2 2 A ENT ENT 0 2 2 9 9 2 2 9 9 ENT 2 2 9 9 Standard RLL Instructions This 5–173 Number of bytes parameter must A aaa A FINDB Block Table Instructions Table V memory. This V memory. Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard he LDA instruction to convert an octal Start Addr. DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal You Number of words aaa DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) All (See p. 3–53) HEX value. You can use t HEX value. You Description find the block on when the Find Block instruction was executed but did not of data in table specified a specified block of values in specified block a P V Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table n Table must be a HEX value. will search multiple tables that are adjacent in will search multiple tables that are End Addr. Start Addr. Vmemory Discrete Bit Flags SP53 Operand Data Type Vmemory address to hex. Step table starting location for all the tables into the accumulator. 4: — Load the parameter must be a a be parameter must address to hex. Step the starting location of the 5: —Insert the Find Block instruction. This specifies block of data you are trying to locate. be a HEX value, 0 to FF. This for all the tables into the accumulator. Step 3: — Load the ending location parameter The steps necessary to program the Find Block function. steps listed below are the Step bytes in the block to be located. This parameter must 1: — Load the number of be a HEX value, 0 to FF. (number of words) to be searched. The Find Step 2: — Load the length of a table Block The Find Blockinstruction searches for an searches for Blockinstruction The Find occurrance of The function parameters memory table. V a are levels of loaded into the first and second the accumulator stack and the accumulator instructions. If the block by three additional is address will be stored in found, its starting not found, If the block is the accumulator. set. flag SP53 will be 4 260 5 250–1 5 240 5 230 Find Block (FINDB) Standard RLL 5–174 Instructions (SWAP) Swap DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Table Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 260 4 table atanyparticulartime.So,remembertoswapjustonasinglescan. multipleconsecutivescans,itwillbedifficult to knowtheactualcontentsofeither on Helpful to convertanoctaladdresshex. two tablesofequallength. Swapinstructionexchangesthedatain The which tablewedeclare“first”,becausetheswapresultswillbesame. LDA instruction,convertingtheoctaladdresstohex.Notethatitdoesnotmatter Then weloadtheaddressoffirsttable(V3000)intoaccumulatorusing transition). First,weloadthelengthoftables(twowords)intoaccumulator. exampleprogrambelowusesaPDcontact(triggersforonescanoff-to-onThe ladderprogramisgivenbelow.required 3100 byusingtheSwapinstruction.The contents two wordsatV3000.We willswapits exampletotherightshowsatableof The second Step 3:—InserttheSwapinstruction.Thisspecifiesstartingaddessof octal addresstohex. This 2:—LoadthestartingVmemorylocation forthefirsttableintoaccumulator. Step thatthetablesmustbe ofequallength. Remember level oftheaccumulatorstack.ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue,0toFF. Step 1:—Loadthelengthoftables(numberVmemorylocations)intofirst following descriptionappliestoboththeSetBitandResettableinstructions. The Direct Vmemory DataTypeOperand $ SHFT SHFT SHFT Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes STR X0 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 parameter mustbeaHEXvalue.You canusetheLDAinstructiontoconvertan ANDST ANDST S L L SHFT RST hint: —Thedataswap table. ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue.You canusetheLDA with another D D P SHFT CV SWAP LDA LD 3 3 V O 3000 V 3100 W A D ANDN K2 0 3 table oftwowordsat A PREV All (Seep.3–53) DL260 Range 0 aaa of theaccumulator. (Hex.) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue2 V3100. instruction withtheoneat table intheprevious Swap thecontentsof table beginning. accumulator. Thisisthe and loadthevalueinto Convert octal3000toHEX P D C A CV 2 0 3 occurs withinasinglescan.Iftheinstructionexecutes A ENT ENT 0 D A 0 3 B A 1 0 5 1 A 30 V3100 V3000 ENT 6 2 0 7 3 A 0 8 4 SWAP ENT SWAP aaa A A 0 instruction B 0 C 0 D 0 Standard RLL Instructions 5–175 V aaa Day Day of Week 0301 DATE Format ENT ENT In this example, the Date instruction uses the value set in V2000 and V2001 to set the date in the appropriate V memory locations (V7771–V7774) 1 0 B A V2001 V2000 aaa Year Month Standard RLLInstructions Standard 9401 0 0 ENT DL260 Range A A All (See p. 3–53) Clock / Calendar Instructions / Calendar Clock V2000 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0301 0301 0301 0301 V Memory Location (BCD) (READ Only) V7774 V7773 V7772 V7771 4 0 0 ENT E A A aaa) Constant (K) 9 0 0 2 V2001 J A C A 9401 9401 9401 9401 0 Acc. Acc. NEXT PREV A aaa 2 4 ENT All (See p. 3–52) DL250–1 Range NEXT C E Range 0–99 1–12 1–31 0–06 3 1 MLR NEXT D B T V2000 V2000 K94010301 V A . If the values in the specified . If the values in 3 0 3 0 DATE LDD OUTD NEXT D A D A Copy the value in the accumulator to V2000 and V2001 Load the constant value (K94010301) into the accumulator Set the date in the CPU using the value in V2000 and V2001 3 3 accumulator using the Load Double instruction (C0 should be a contact from accumulator using the Load Double SHFT L D D ANDST SOFT32 Display C0 0 set the date STR OUT SHFT SHFT $ A GX Year Month Day Day of Week Operand Data Type Vmemory Date Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes The values entered for the day of week are: 6=Saturday 5=Friday, 4=Thursday, 3=Wednesday, 2=Tuesday, 1=Monday, 0=Sunday, In loaded example, when C0 is on, the constant value (K94010301) is the following into the The used to set the instruction can be Date The instruction requires date in the CPU. two(V consecutive V memory locations to valid, the date will not be locations are not 4 date can be read from set. The current locations V memory consecutive (V7771–V7774). a using (PD) instruction). The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 one shot the instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the Out Double instruction. The Date date in the CPU. 4 260 4 250–1 5 240 5 230 Date (DATE) Clock / Calendar Instructions / Calendar Clock Standard 5–176 RLL Instructions (TIME) Time DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 Clock /CalendarInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 260 4 set thetime locations(Vaaa)memory whichareused to instruction requirestwoconsecutiveV time (24hourclock)intheCPU.The TimeThe instructioncanbeused to set the in theCPU. Doubleinstruction.TheTime instructionusesthevalueinV2000tosettime Out shot(PD)instruction).ThevalueintheaccumulatorisoutputtoV2000using one the accumulatorusingLoadDoubleinstruction(C0shouldbeacontactfrom thefollowingexample,whenC0ison,constantvalue(K73000)loadedinto In V7766–V7770. locationsV7747and memory set. Thecurrenttimecanbereadfrom locations arenotvalid,thetimewillbe Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Vmemory Operand DataType Hour Minutes Seconds 1/100 seconds(10ms) Date GX A $ SHFT SHFT Direct OUT STR 0 C0 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 ANDST T D L SHFT MLR 3 and V2001 using thevalueinV2000 Set thetimeinCPU the accumulator value (K73000)into Load theconstant and V2001 accumulator toV2000 Copy thevaluein D A D NEXT SHFT . Ifthevaluesinspecified TIME OUTD LDD 0 3 3 A V K73000 I B D V2000 V2000 NEXT 8 3 1 0–23 0–59 0–59 0–99 Range M C NEXT ORST ENT DL250–1 Range All (Seep.3–52) 2 aaa E A PREV NEXT Acc. Acc. 4 0 0007 0007 0007 0007 A H A V2001 0 7 0 Constant (K) C A D ENT 3 2 0 V7770 V7767 V7766 V7747 (READ Only) V MemoryLocation(BCD) 3000 3000 3000 3000 V2000 All (Seep.3–53) A A ENT DL260 Range 0 0 aaa A A 0007 0 0 Used Not memory locations(V7766–V7770) set thetimeinappropriateV value setinV2000andV2001to The Time instructionusesthe 20 V2000 V2001 A A 0 0 Hour TIME Format ENT ENT aaa V iue Seconds Minutes 3000 Standard RLL Instructions 5–177 END NOP CPU Control Instructions Control CPU Standard RLL Insturctions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. ENT ENT END NOP 3 CV D P not conditional; therefore, no TMR INST# N O the normal program scan. An End 4 TMR E N SOFT32 SOFT32 SHFT SHFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes instruction is required at the end of the of instruction is required at the end the End instruction If main program body. is omitted an error will occur and the CPU labels, will not enter the Run Mode. Data subroutines and interrupt routines are The End placed after the End instruction. instruction is input contact is allowed. Direct Handheld Programmer Keystrokes The termination End instruction marks the point of The No Operation is an empty (not Operation is The No programmed) location. memory Direct 4 4 260 260 4 4 250–1 250–1 4 4 240 240 4 4 230 230 End (END) No Operation (NOP) CPUInstructions Control Standard RLL 5–178 Instructions (STOP) Stop (RSTWT) Timer Reset WatchDog DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 5 4 240 240 4 4 CPU ControlInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 250–1 4 4 260 260 4 4 CPU willstopoperationandswitchtotheprogrammode. thefollowingexample,whenSP45comesonindicatingaI/Omodulefailure, In instruction isexecuted.SeetheFor/Next foradetailedexample. In thefollowingexampleCPUscantimerwill beresetto0whentheRSTWT Direct package. ThiseliminatestheneedforRSTWTinstruction. AUX 55ontheHPPorappropriateauxiliaryfunctioninyourprogramming valuemaybepermanentlyincreasedfromthedefaultof200msby timeout setting,the If thescantimeisconsistentlylongerthanwatchdogtimer’s setting. executed beforethescantimeexceedswatchdogtimer’s RSTWT instructionintheprogramisveryimportant.Thehastobe mode ifthescantimeexceedswatchdogtimersetting.Placementof A softwaretimeouterror(E003)willoccurandtheCPUenterprogram reset thetimer. setting, thisinstructioncanbeusedto that couldexceedthewatchdogtimer When instructionsareusedinamanner the scanbecomeslongerthan200ms. instructions interruptroutines,andtable subroutines, but itispossible.For/nextloops, Scan timesveryseldomexceed200ms, setting forthewatchdogtimeris200ms. resets theCPUscantimer. Thedefault The ResetWatch DogTimerinstruction failure. shutdown conditionsuchasaI/Omodule typically usedtostopPLCoperationina (Stop)mode.Thisinstructionis Program operational The Stopinstructionchangesthe module falure if thereisanI/O SP45 willturnon SOFT32 SP45 mode oftheCPUfromRunto can beprogrammedsuchthat RSTWT STOP Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld SHFT $ SHFT STR R S ORN RST S SHFT SHFT RST T T SP STRN MLR MLR W O E ANDN INST# 4 T P F MLR RSTWT CV 5 STOP ENT ENT ENT Standard RLL Instructions ENT 5–179 5 ENT F 5 aaa ENT ENT 1–FFFF F DL260 Range K aaa 7 2 K aaa INST# GOTO H O C Instruction Set Instruction 2 2 LBL MLR ENT ENT ENT C T C L ANDST 1 5 1 2 INST# SHFT SHFT O B B F C aaa 6 1–FFFF G L ANDST DL250–1 Range Program Control Instructions Control Program DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. STR STR STR OUT OUT SHFT SHFT $ $ GX $ GX S S Handheld Programmer Keystrokes K5 Y2 C2 OUT OUT aaa GOTO 1–FFFF DL240 Range K X5 X1 C7 S S S SOFT32 LBL K5 Operand Data Type Constant Direct The Goto / Label skips all instructions / Label skips The Goto and the corresponding between the Goto LBL value for the instruction. The operand corresponding LBL Goto and the the same. The logic instruction are LBL instruction is not between Goto and the Goto instruction is executed when and Goto instructions enabled. Up to 128 can be used in the 64 LBL instructions program. In the following example, when C7 is on, all the program logic between the GOTO In the following example, when C7 (designated with the same constant Kaaa and the corresponding LBL instruction being skipped will not be executed by the value) will be skipped. The instructions CPU. 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 5 230 Goto Label (GOTO) (LBL) Program Control Instructions Standard RLL 5–180 Instructions (NEXT) (FOR) For /Next DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 4 Program ControlInstructions Instruction Set 250–1 4 260 4 loop usingtheRSTWTinstruction. watch dogtimerinsideoftheFor/Next execution, it tocompletetheprogram required that execution is completedfor program the instructions, I/Owillnotbeupdateduntil With theexceptionofimmediateI/O the ForandNextinstructionisexecuted. on theamountoftimeslogicbetween scan executing the For / issuspended housekeeping while occur. ThenormalI/OupdateandCPU Next loopsisexceeded,errorE413 will Ifthemaximumnumberof For/ program. to64For/Nextloopsmaybeusedina Up For /Nextinstructionscannotbenested. instructions isnotexecuted. of ladderlogicbetweentheForandNext instructionisnotenergizedthesection For loop thespecifiednumberoftimes.If instruction isenabled,theprogramwill oftimes.WhentheFor numbers the ForandNextinstructiona specified execute a sectionofladderlogicbetween ForandNextinstructionsareusedto The Constant V memory DataTypeOperand scan. Depending on can increase significantly, depending may benecessarytoresetthe A K V Next All (Seepage3–51) DL240 Range loop. Theprogram the lengthoftime 1–9999 aaa All (Seepage3–52) DL250–1 Range 1–9999 aaa NEXT A aaa FOR All (Seepage3–53) DL260 Range 1–9999 aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–181 Instruction Set Instruction Program Control Instructions Control Program DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. ENT ENT ENT 123 3 0 MLR ee times. If X1 is off the program inside the loop will not inside the the program If X1 is off ee times. ENT D T A 2 MLR ANDN W C T K3 Y5 FOR OUT NEXT RSTWT SET MLR ORN ENT ENT X R T 4 8 5 1 RST INST# I F E B O S 5 TMR ORN SHFT N F R X1 X20 SOFT32 STR STR OUT SHFT SHFT SHFT $ GX $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct In the following example, when X1 is on, the application program inside the For / program inside the application when X1 is on, example, In the following Next executed thr loop will be be executed. The immediate instructions may or may not be necessary depending may or may not instructions The immediate be executed. For / Next if the is not necessary The RSTWT instruction application. Also, on your setting. For more Dog Timer the scan time larger the Watch loop does not extend refer to the RSTWT instruction. Dog Timer, information on the Watch Standard RLL 5–182 Instructions (SBR) (GTS) Goto Subroutine (RT) Subroutine Return (RTC) Conditional Subroutine Return DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 230 230 5 5 5 240 240 240 5 4 4 Program ControlInstructions Set Instruction 250–1 250–1 250–1 4 4 4 260 260 260 4 4 4 termination oftheSubroutine. termination Subroutine Return(RT) isstillrequiredfor conditional returnfromthesubroutine.The with ainputcontacttoimplement a instruction isaoptional used The SubroutineReturn Conditional (no inputcontactontherung). andisa standaloneinstruction subroutine which mustbethelastinstructionin is usedasterminationofthesubroutine which itwascalled.TheSubroutineReturn point inthemainbodyofprogramfrom the CPUwillreturnto subroutine the When aSubroutineReturnisexecutedin Constant DataTypeOperand program. impact theoverallscantimeof Code whichisnotscanneddoes since itresidesaftertheEndinstruction. scanned andexecutedwhenneeded By placingcodeinasubroutineitis only instruction whichcalledthesubroutine. same constantnumber(K)astheGTS execute thesubroutine(SBR)with the themainprogram, from the CPU will Whenthesubroutineis called program. placed aftertheEndstatementin l subroutine notrequiredtoexecuteeveryscan.The is loprogram used inanapplicationwhereablockof limits areexceeded.Typically thiswillbe An errorE412willoccurifthemaximum instructions canbenestedupto8levels. instructions usedinaprogram.TheGTS of 128GTSinstructionsand64 SBR when needed.Therecanbeamaximum mainbodyoftheprogramexecuteonly the section of l The GotoSubroutineinstructionallowsa adder logictobeplacedoutside gic maybeslowtoexecuteand abel andallassociatedlogicis K DL240 Range 1–FFFF aaa DL250–1 Range 1–FFFF aaa SBR aaa K RTC GTS RT aaa K DL260 Range 1–FFFF aaa Standard RLL Instructions 5–183 instruction. ENT 7 ENT Instruction Set Instruction 1 3 ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT 0 5 5 3 1 0 1 Y K ENT 1 3 3 0 2 5 2 K Program Control Instructions Control Program K3 Y5 RT DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Y10 RSTI RTC GTS END OUTI OUTI K10 Y0 Y17 Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will K3 will be called. Subroutine Y X X Y X Y X R ENT ENT ENT LD 1 S B C D ENT X1 C0 X21 X35 X35 X20 I I I I I I I X CPU will return to the main program at the RTC program at the return to the main CPU will T T T N SHFT S S S E S R R G SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SBR K3 S S SOFT32 Display X35 is on the X35 is on STR STR STR RST STR OUT OUT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT STRN Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Direct In when X1 is on, example, the following will be in the subroutine ladder logic Label K3 and the the Subroutine jump to If executed. to the main CPU will return and then the If to off will be reset X35 is not on Y0–Y17 body of the program. Standard RLL 5–184 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Program ControlInstructions Set Instruction instruction isexecuted. executed. TheCPUwillreturntothemainbodyofprogramafterRT jump totheSubroutineLabelK3andladderlogicinsubroutinewillbe thefollowingexample,whenX1ison, In Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct S S GX $ GX $ $ SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT OUT OUT STR STR STR SOFT32 R S E G SHFT SHFT B K3 SBR ORN RST 4 6 F I N T B T B I SHFT S S S TMR MLR MLR 1 1 8 8 5 A B D S X21 X20 ENT ENT ENT X1 RST 3 0 1 C C R ENT ENT ORN 2 2 B A D 0 1 3 OUT OUT END GTS Y10 D RT Y5 K3 ENT ENT ENT 3 ENT Subroutine K3willbecalled.TheCPU Standard RLL Instructions 5–185 aaa 0–7 aaa 1–7 DL260 Range DL260 Range MLS MLR K aaa K aaa InstructionSet aaa 0–7 aaa 1–7 The MLR instructions note the end of the Master area. Control When contact X0 and X2 are ON, logic When contact X0 and X2 are under the second MLS will be executed. When contact X0 is on, logic under the first MLS will be executed. DL250–1 Range DL250–1 Range K1 K2 K1 K0 Y7 Y10 Y11 OUT MLS MLS MLR MLR OUT OUT Program Control Instructions Control Program DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. aaa 0–7 aaa 1–7 DL240 Range DL240 Range the logic ference is one PLUS, aaa 0–7 aaa 1–7 DL230 Range DL230 Range following example shows how the MLS and MLR instructions following example shows how the K K X3 X2 X1 SOFT32 X0 X10 within the master control relays is still within the master will even though it scanned and updated MLS is off. not function if the The the instruction allows Line Set Master of ladder logic to control sections program rail controlled by a new power by forming the rail is The main left left power rail. main K1 0. When a MLS always master line a new power rail is instruction is used, 1. Master Line Sets and created at level can be used to nest Master Line Resets power to seven levels deep. Note rails up in RLL that unlike stages Operand Data Type Constant Operand Data Type Constant The Master Line Reset instruction marks The Master Line Reset instruction the end of control for the corresponding MLS The MLR re instruction. less than the corresponding MLS. The and Master Line Reset (MLR) instructions allow you to Master Line Set (MLS) of the RLL program. This provides program quickly enable (or disable) sections The control flexibility. operate for control logic. by creating a sub power rail Direct 4 4 260 260 4 4 250–1 250–1 4 4 240 240 4 4 230 230 Understanding Master Control Relays Master Line Reset (MLR) Master Line Set Master Line (MLS) Standard RLL 5–186 Instructions MLS/MLR Example MLS/MLR DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Program ControlInstructions Instruction Set (B) willfunctiononlyifinputX0ison. (B) thefollowingMLS/MLRexamplelogicbetweenfirstMLSK1(A)andMLRK0 In of theMLScoils. willfunctiononlyifinputX10andX0ison. (D) Direct SOFT32 X7 X0 X10 X6 X5 X3 X2 X1 X4 X5 OUT MLS OUT OUT OUT OUT MLR OUT OUT MLR OUT MLS K1 Y4 C1 C0 C2 Y1 K2 Y0 K0 Y3 K1 Y2 The logicbetweentheMLS B D C A Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Thelastrungis Y $ GX $ GX $ GX $ Y $ GX $ T GX $ GX $ T GX $ GX $ OUT OUT OUT OUT MLR OUT OUT MLR OUT OUT MLS MLS STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR C B A D C B B A E H A D G F B C E B F SHFT SHFT SHFT 1 1 1 4 1 2 0 3 2 0 7 0 3 6 5 2 4 1 5 not controll A C C C C ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT 0 2 2 2 2 K2 (C)andMLRK1 B A C ENT ENT 1 0 2 ed by either ed by ENT ENT ENT Standard RLL Instructions 5–187 statement O aaa he End . INT after t aaa 0–3 DL260 Range Interrupt Instructions Interrupt Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard INT 0 INT 1 INT 2 INT 3 Interrupt Routine DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. aaa 0–3 #00 which means the hardware interrupt #00 which means logic must be placed DL250–1 Range X1 X2 X3 DL240/250–1/260 Hardware interrupt) Interrupt Input along with s/w X0 (cannot be used aaa 0–3 DL240 Range –– –– –– INT 0 Interrupt Routine ladder logic then execute the designated interrupt routine. Interrupt ladder logic then execute the designated O nterrupts will be used in an application where a fast response to an input in an application where a fast nterrupts will be used interrupt, the CPU will complete execution of the instruction it is currently interrupt, the CPU will complete execution interrupts are labeled in octal to correspond with the hardware input signal interrupts are labeled in octal to correspond See the example program of a software interrupt. See the example program of a software the program or by external interrupts the program or by –– –– –– DL240/250–1/260 Software time Interrupt Input V7634 sets interrupt The Interrupt a section instruction allows be placed outside the of ladder logic to program and executed main body of the Interrupts can be called when needed. from interface module via the counter (D2–CTRINT) provides 4 interrupts. which Operand Data Type Constant in the program. When the interrupt routine is called from the interrupt module or in the program. When the interrupt software processing in module (X1and it is labeled will initiate interrupt INT1). There is only one software interrupt INT was before the interrupt 0. The program execution will continue from where it occurred interrupt is serviced. once the programming the interrupt time in V7634. The The software interrupt is setup by must be a BCD value. The interrupt will not valid range is 3–999 ms. The value execute if the value is out of range. The interrupt uses interrupt software together interrupt cannot be used #0 and the software i Typically, is normal CPU scan. needed or a program section needs to execute faster than the The interrupt label and all associated NOTE: 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 5 230 Interrupt (INT) Interrupt Instructions Standard RLL 5–188 Instructions (IRT) Interrupt Return (DISI) Disable Interrupts (ENI) Enable Interrupts (IRTC) Conditional Interrupt Return 230 230 230 230 DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 5 5 5 5 240 240 240 240 4 4 5 4 Interrupt Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 250–1 250–1 250–1 4 4 4 4 260 260 260 260 4 4 4 4 on therung). stand aloneinstruction(noinput contact instruction inaninterruptroutineandisa Return isprogrammedasthelast from whichitwascalled.TheInterrupt pointinthemainbodyof program the interruptroutine the the When anInterruptReturnisexecutedin terminate theinterruptroutine. terminate Disable Interruptinstruction. until theinterruptisdisabledby been energizedinterruptswillbeenabled software interrupts.Oncethecoilhas toenable hardwareor instruction) application program(beforetheEnd inthemainbodyof programmed The EnableInterruptinstruction is routine. return fromtheinterrupt condtional with aninputcontacttoimplementa instruction isaoptionalused The InterruptReturnConditional the EnableInterruptinstruction. disabled untiltheinterruptisenabledby been energizedinterruptswill be software interrupts.Oncethecoilhas todisable bothhardwareor instruction) application program(beforetheEnd inthemainbodyof programmed The DisableInterruptinstructionis The InterruptReturn is CPU willreturnto requiredto IRTC DISI ENI IRT Standard RLL Instructions 5–189 When X40 is When X40 ill be enabled. Interrupt Instructions Interrupt ENT ENT ENT ENT Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0 0 1 1 ENT ENT B A B A DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. the interrupts w the interrupts 2 8 2 5 1 ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT C B I C F 0 8 0 3 RST MLR MLR T A I A S D T 8 8 8 8 8 4 4 TMR TMR TMR ORN I I R E N E I N N I I 8 4 3 4 8 SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT I E D E I SET SET STR STR STR STRN SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT $ X $ X $ SP Handheld Programmer Keystrokes S S will be performed. The CPU will return to the main body of the program after the main body of will return to The CPU will be performed. Y5 IRT ENI Y10 DISI END SETI SETI In X40 is on, example, when the following off CPU will X1 is received the a interrupt signal disabled. When interrupts will be the interrupt logic in the application ladder INT O 1. The the interrupt label jump to routine instruction is executed. the IRT X40 X21 X20 X40 S S S SOFT32 INT O 1 Direct Interrupt Example for Interrupt Module Standard RLL 5–190 Instructions Interrupt for Software Interrupt Example Direct N O0 INT DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 SOFT32 S S S Interrupt Instructions Standard RLLInstructions SP0 X1 X20 X35 X20 X20 of theaccumulator* (K10) intothelower16bits Load theconstantvalue V7634 16 bitsoftheaccumulatorto Copy thevalueinlower OUT LD OUT LD CPU willreturntothemainbodyofprogram. routine willbeperformed.IfX35isnotonY0–Y17resettooff andthenthe jump totheinterruptlabelINTO0.Theapplicationladderlogicin enabled. W sets thesoftwareinterruptto10ms.WhenX20turnson,will be thefollowingexample, In NOTE: V7634 V7633 K104* K40 0Y17 Y0 SETI END DISI RSTI ENI IRT Y5 Only onesoftwareinterrupt isallowedintheDL240anditmustbeInt0. hen X20turnsoff, theinterruptwillbedisabled.Every10msCPU * Thevalueentered,3-999,mustbefollowedbythedigit4tocompleteinstruction. S S Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld X SP X $ SP $ GX $ SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT STRN STRN OUT STR STR STR SET SET ANDST E D E L I I SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 8 4 8 4 3 when X1ison,thevalue10copiedtoV7634.This N I C N C D B R I I I I N SHFT ORN TMR TMR TMR 2 2 8 8 8 8 8 3 1 D S A I A V T T ENT AND MLR MLR RST 3 8 0 0 I H B D F C SHFT ENT ENT ENT ENT ENT 7 1 3 8 5 2 G K A F A A ENT ENT JMP 0 6 0 5 0 D B ENT ENT ENT 3 4 E A B 4 0 1 H ENT ENT 7 ENT Standard RLL Instructions 5–191 ENT 2 ENT aaa C DL260 Range All (See p. 3–53) 0 0 Address 0 Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 Address 5 V aaa A A 0 1 RD 12 34 56 78 90 01 ENT Data ENT A B 4 aaa 0 0 6 E A G A Intelligent Module All (See p. 3–52) DL250–1 Range 1 PREV PREV PREV B Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard Instructions I/O Intelligent DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. ENT aaa CPU 3 3 3 1 3 3412 7856 0190 XXXX XXXX D D D D B DL240 Range All (See p. 3–51) V1400 V1402 V1403 V1404 V1401 ORN L L L R ANDST ANDST ANDST STR SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT $ Handheld Programmer Keystrokes aaa DL230 Range All (See p. 3–50) Description wrong parameters. on when RX, WX, RD, WT instructions are executed with the V Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. Status flags are valid only until The constant value K0102 specifies the base number (01) and the base slot number (02) The constant value K6 specifies the number of bytes to be read The constant value K0 specifies the starting address in the intelligent module V1400 is the starting location in the CPU where the specified data will be stored Discrete Bit Flags SP54 Operand Data Type Vmemory NOTE: In will read six bytes of data the following example when X1 is on, the RD instruction 1, slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent from a intelligent module in base locations V1400–V1402. module and copy the information into V-memory The Read from Intelligent Module from Intelligent The Read a block of data (1–128 instruction reads bytes maximum) from an intelligent I/O It loads V memory. CPU’s module into the and first the into the function parameters accumulator stack, and second level of the by three additional the accumulator instructions. from Intelligent module function. the steps to program the Read Listed below are Step slot number (0–7) (0–3) into the first byte and the 1: — Load the base number stack. byte of the second level of the accumulator into the second bytes to be transferred into the first level of the Step 2: — Load the number of accumulator bytes) stack. (maximum of 128 StepLoad the address from which the data will be read into the accumulator. 3: — This parameter must be a HEX value. which specifies the starting V memory location Step 4: — Insert the RD instruction where the data will be read into. (Vaaa) to convert an octal address to its HEX Helpful Hint: —Use the LDA instruction when the hex format is required. equivalent and load it into the accumulator K0 K6 V1400 K0102 4 260 LD RD LD LD 4 250–1 4 240 X1 SOFT32 Display 4 230 Direct Read from Intelligent Module (RD) Intelligent I/O Instructions I/O Intelligent Standard 5–192 RLL Instructions (WT) Module Write toIntelligent Direct DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 4 SOFT32 Display SOFT32 X1 240 4 Intelligent I/OInstructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 4 WT LD LD LD 260 4 V1400 K0102 K0 K6 function function a blockofVmemoryintheCPU.The to maximum) writes ablockofdata(1–128 bytes The Write toIntelligentModuleinstruction and copytheinformationfromVmemorylocationsV1400–V1402. to anintelligentmoduleinbase1,slot2 thefollowingexample, whenX1ison,theWT In NOTE: equivalent andloaditintotheaccumulatorwhenhexformatisrequired. Helpful Hint:—UsetheLDAinstructiontoconvertanoctaladdressitsHEX (Vaaa) wherethedatawillbewrittenfrominCPU. 4:—InserttheWTinstructionwhichspecifiesstarting Vmemorylocation Step accumulator. ThisparametermustbeaHEXvalue. Step 3:—Loadtheintelligentmoduleaddresswhichwillreceivedatainto stack.(maximumof128bytes) accumulator Step 2:—Loadthenumberofbytestobetransferredintofirstlevel into thesecondbyteoflevelaccumulatorstack. 1:—Loadthebasenumber(0–3)intofirstbyteandslot(0–7) Step Intelligent modulefunction. necessary toprogramtheReadfrom instructions. Listedbelowarethe steps and theaccumulatorbythree additional and secondleveloftheaccumulatorstack, SP54 Discrete BitFlags Vmemory DataTypeOperand number (02) (01) andthebaseslot specifies thebasenumber The constantvalueK0102 written from the specifieddatawillbe location intheCPUwhere V1400 isthestarting in theintelligentmodule specifies thestartingaddress The constantvalueK0 bytes tobewritten specifies thenumberof The constantvalueK6 Statusflagsarevalidonlyuntilanotherinstructionusesthesameflag. parameters an intelligentI/Omodulefrom V on whenRX,WX,RD,WTinstructionsareexecutedwiththewrongparameters. Description All (Seep.3–50) are loadedintothefirst DL230 Range aaa $ SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes STR ANDST ANDST ANDST W L L L ANDN All (Seep.3–51) DL240 Range V1404 V1403 V1402 V1400 V1377 V1401 T D D D B aaa starting ataddress0intheintelligentmodule MLR 1 3 3 3 XXXX XXXX XXXX 0190 7856 3412 ENT P IntelligentModule CPU instruction willwritesixbytesofdata B PREV PREV PREV DL250–1 Range All (Seep.3–52) 1 aaa A G A E 0 0 6 4 WT B A ENT ENT 1 0 aaa V Data All (Seep.3–53) 01 90 78 56 34 12 A A DL260 Range 0 0 aaa C Address 5 Address 4 Address 3 Address 2 Address 1 Address 0 ENT 2 ENT Standard RLL Instructions 5–193 aaa 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 DL260 Range 0–137 540–617 All (See page 3–53) A aaa All V mem. (See page 3–53) RX Network Instructions Network –– aaa 0–777 0–777 0–377 0–177 0–1777 0–1777 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0–137 540–617 DL250–1 Range DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. All (See page 3–52) All V mem. (See page 3–52) –– aaa 0–177 0–177 0–377 0–777 0–177 0–177 DL240 Range 0–137 540–617 All (See page 3–51) All V mem. (See page 3–51) Network instruction is used Network instruction T V P X Y S A C SP CT GX/GY Global I/O Special Relay Operand Data Type V memory Pointer Inputs Outputs Control Relays Stage Timer Counter The Read from by a network to read the master device on from another CPU. The a block of data are loaded into the function parameters level of the accumulator first and second accumulator by three stack and the Listed below are additional instructions. to program the Read the steps necessary from Network function. into the first byte and the PLC the slave address (0–90 BCD) Step 1: — Load DCM or ECOM (0–7) into the or slot number of the master internal port (KF1) of the accumulator stack. second byte of the second level bytes to be transferred into the first level of the Step 2: — Load the number of accumulator stack. This the data to be read into the accumulator. Step 3: — Load the address of parameter requires a HEX value. Step location — Insert the RX instruction which specifies the starting V memory 4: from in the slave. (Aaaa) where the data will be read require HEX values, the LDA instruction can Helpful Hint: — For parameters that be the value into used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the accumulator. 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 5 230 Read from Network Read from (RX) Network Instructions Standard RLL 5–194 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Network Instructions Standard RLLInstructions CPU withthemasterDCMorECOM. atstationaddress5andcopiedintoV memory locationsV2300–V2304inthe CPU masterinslot2.T a special In thefollowingexample,whenX1isonandmodulebusyrelaySP124(see Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct W $ SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT ANDN STR X1 SOFT32 ANDST ANDST ANDST R L L L ORN relays) isnoton,the SP124 X D D D B SHFT SET 1 3 3 3 the slaveaddress(5) the ECOM/DCMslotnumber(2)and The constantvalueK0205specifies A SP be readinto where thespecifieddatawill location fortheMasterCPU V2300 isthestarting loaded intotheaccumulator. converted to4C0HEXand Octal address2300is bytes toberead specifies thenumberof The constantvalueK10 data willbereadfrom CPU wherethespecified location intheforSlave V2000 isthestarting STRN ENT en consecutivebytesofdata(V2000–V2004)willbereadfroma 0 LDA LD LD RX C B SHFT SHFT O 2300 K0205 V2000 2 1 K10 RX instructionwillaccessaECOMorDCMoperatingas A C K K C JMP JMP 0 2 2 A D B C E –or– 2 0 3 4 1 A A A A ENT V2304 V2303 V2302 V2301 V2300 V2305 V2277 0 0 0 0 (DL250–1 andDL260only) and theslaveaddress(5) specifies thebottomport The constantvalueKF105 LD A F XXXX XXXX 1423 9571 1936 8534 3457 ENT ENT KF105 0 5 CPU Master S S S S ENT ENT XXXX XXXX 1423 9571 1936 8534 3457 CPU Slave S S S S V2004 V2003 V2002 V2000 V1777 V2005 V2001 Standard RLL Instructions 5–195 aaa 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 DL260 Range 0–137 540–617 All (See page 3–53) A aaa All V mem. (See page 3–53) WX Network Instructions Network –– aaa 0–777 0–777 0–377 0–177 0–1777 0–1777 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0–137 540–617 DL250–1 Range DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. All (See page 3–52) All V mem. (See page 3–52) –– aaa 0–177 0–177 0–377 0–777 0–177 0–177 DL240 Range 0–137 540–617 All (See page 3–51) All V mem. (See page 3–51) T V P X Y S A C CT SP GX/GY into the first and second level of the into the first and V memory Pointer Inputs Outputs Control Relays Stage Timer Counter Global I/O Special Relay Operand Data Type Step 1: — Load the slave address (0–90 BCD) into the first byte and the PLC the slave address (0–90 BCD) Step 1: — Load DCM or ECOM (0–7) into the or slot number of the master internal port (KF1) stack. second level of the accumulator second byte of the into the first level of the the number of bytes to be transferred Step 2: — Load accumulator stack. the data in the master that is to be written to Step 3: — Load the address of the This parameter requires a HEX value. network into the accumulator. Step specifies the starting V memory location 4: — Insert the WX instruction which to the slave. (Aaaa) where the data will be written require HEX values, the LDA instruction can Helpful Hint: — For parameters that be the value into used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the accumulator. The Write to Network instruction is used to instruction to Network TheWrite from the master block of data write a on the same a slave device device to parameters are The function network. loaded and the accumulator by accumulator stack below instructions. Listed three additional to program the are the steps necessary function. to Network Write 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 5 230 Write to Network Write (WX) Standard RLL 5–196 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Network Instructions Standard RLLInstructions address 5andcopiedtoVmemorylocationsV2000–V2004intheslaveCPU. master inslot2.10consecutivebytesofdataisreadfromtheCPUatstation a special In thefollowingexamplewhenX1isonandmodulebusyrelaySP124(see Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld Direct W $ SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT ANDN STR X1 SOFT32 ANDST ANDST ANDST W L L L ANDN relays) isnoton,the SP124 X D D D B SHFT SET 3 3 3 1 the slaveaddress(5) the ECOM/DCMslotnumber(2)and The constantvalueK0205specifies A SP bytes toberead specifies thenumberof The constantvalueK10 data willbewrittento CPU wherethespecified location intheforSlave V2000 isthestarting STRN ENT be readfrom. where thespecifieddatawill location fortheMasterCPU V2300 isthestarting loaded intotheaccumulator. converted to4C0HEXand Octal address2300is 0 LDA LD LD WX B SHFT SHFT SHFT O 2300 K0205 V2000 1 K10 RX instructionwillaccessaDCMorECOMoperatingas V K K C SHFT AND JMP JMP 2 C O B C E INST# 2 2 4 1 –or– A C A A ENT V2304 V2303 V2302 V2301 V2300 V2305 V2277 0 2 0 0 (DL250–1 andDL260only) and theslaveaddress(5) specifies thebottomport The constantvalueKF105 LD A D F ENT XXXX XXXX 1423 9571 1936 8534 3457 0 3 5 CPU Master KF105 S S S S A A ENT 0 0 A ENT 0 XXXX XXXX 1423 9571 1936 8534 3457 ENT CPU Slave S S S S V1777 V2004 V2003 V2002 V2000 V2001 V2005 Standard RLL Instructions 5–197 A aaa A FAULT aaa 1–FFFF DL260 Range All (See page 3–53) Message Instructions Message Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. aaa 1–FFFF DL250–1 Range All (See page 3–52) are stored in EEPROM. Make sure you consider are stored in EEPROM. Make sure aaa 1–FFFF DL240 Range V memory location in V memory location dheld programmer or dheld programmer All (See page 3–51) instruction takes a considerable amount of time to execute. This instruction takes a considerable amount V K A memory data, numerical constant memory data, numerical The FAULT FAULT The SOFT32. The message has a SOFT32. The Operand Data Type V memory Constant The Fault instruction is used to display a used to display instruction is The Fault message on the han Direct maximum and can be of 23 characters either V data or ASCII text. the value in a V memory display To the location, specify the data in display the instruction. To NCON constant) or ACON (ASCII (Numerical specify constant) instructions, for the the constant (K) value corresponding data label area. NOTE: the D) if you are attempting to use instructions execution times (shown in Appendix that require faster than normal execution instructions in applications the FAULT cycles. is because the FAULT parameters parameters isbecause the FAULT 4 260 4 250–1 4 240 5 230 Fault (FAULT) Message Instructions Standard RLL 5–198 Instructions Fault Example Fault DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Message Instructions Standard RLLInstructions displayed. (TheHEXASCIIforablankis20,131,434...) programmer.handheld In thefollowingexamplewhenX1ison,messageSW146willdisplayon Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld DLBL Direct S S $ SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT STR SOFT32 K1 S S S S N N A D E F TMR TMR 3 4 0 5 X1 ANDST C L N A B C C TMR 1 2 2 2 0 NCON NCON ACON O O O B D U INST# INST# INST# ENT ISG K 3436 K 2031 A SW 1 3 FAULT ANDST ANDST N N N L L ENT TMR TMR TMR The NCONsusetheHEXASCIIequivalentoftexttobe K1 END T MLR D C S B RST 3 2 1 E A W B ANDN ENT 1 4 0 D D ENT ENT 3 3 SW 146 G B 6 1 ENT ENT Standard RLL Instructions 5–199 aaa aaa aaa 0–FFFF 1–FFFF 0–9 A–Z DL260 Range DL260 Range DL260 Range K aaa K aaa A aaa NCON DLBL ACON aaa aaa aaa 0–FFFF 1–FFFF 0–9 A–Z Message Instructions Message DL250–1 Range DL250–1 Range DL250–1 Range Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. aaa aaa aaa 0–FFFF 1–FFFF 0–9 A–Z DL240 Range DL240 Range DL240 Range to store the aaa aaa aaa 0–FFFF 1–FFFF 0–9 A–Z DL230 Range DL230 Range DL230 Range ASCII / numeric data area. ASCII / numeric K A K with the DLBL instruction Operand Data Type Constant ASCII Operand Data Type Operand Data Type Constant The Constant instruction is Numerical used data HEX ASCII equivalent of numerical digits for use with other instructions. Two can be stored in an NCON instruction. The ASCII Constant instruction is used The ASCII Constant instruction ASCII with the DLBL instruction to store Two text for use with other instructions. in an ASCII characters can be stored ACON instruction. If only one character is will be stored in a ACON a leading space printed in the Fault message. The Data Label instruction marks the Label instruction The Data an of beginning after the End are programmed DLBLs statement. and of 64 (DL240 A maximum DL250–1/260) DLBL or 32 (DL230) be used in a program. instructions can and ACONs can be used Multiple NCONs in a DLBL area. 4 260 4 4 260 260 4 4 4 250–1 250–1 250–1 4 4 4 240 240 240 4 4 4 230 230 230 ASCII Constant (ACON) Data Label (DLBL) Numerical Constant (NCON) Standard RLL 5–200 Instructions Example Data Label DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Message Instructions Standard RLLInstructions on displayingmessages. instructiontobuildatext DLBL In thefollowingexample,anACONandtwoNCONinstructionsareusedwithin a S S ProgrammerKeystrokes Handheld DLBL Direct SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SOFT32 K1 S S S N N A D E TMR TMR 0 3 4 ANDST C C C L N TMR 2 2 2 NCON NCON ACON O O O B D INST# INST# INST# K 3436 K 2031 1 3 A SW ANDST N N N L ENT TMR TMR TMR END message. Seethe D C S B RST 3 2 1 E A W ANDN ENT 4 0 D D ENT 3 3 FAULT instructionforinformation G B 6 1 ENT ENT Standard RLL Instructions 5–201 SOFT32, SOFT32 to Direct Help Close Direct A aaa PRINT is a PLC message” “Hello, this Use for printing only Message Instructions Message 2 aaa Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL260 Range cated to send the Port 2 configuration DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. connect your printer to the DL250/260. K-sequence DirectNET MODBUS Non-sequence Remote I/O Choose a V-memory address for Choose a V-memory V2000 2 Choose number of stop bits and parity setting to aaa DL250–1 Range Port: Port 2 Choose the baud rate that matches your printer. Parity: Odd Click the check box to the left of “Non-sequence”, and then Click the check box to the left of Then click the button indi button the Then click to 3 for port wiring the CPU, and click Close. Then see Chapter information, in order to Protocol: Stop bits: 1 Data bits: 7 Baud rate: 9600 From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2”. From the port number list box at A K Setup Communication Ports Memory Address: Port: Memory Address: Protocol: below. you’ll see the dialog box shown use to store the port setup information. You will need to reserve 9 words use to store the port setup information. You for this purpose. Select “Always use for printing” if it in V-memory applies. Baud Rate: Stop Bits, Parity: match your printer. S S S S S Constant Data Type choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then Setup Secondary Comm Port. choose the PLC menu, then Setup, You may recall from the CPU specifications in Chapter 3 that the DL250–1 and CPU specifications in Chapter may recall from the You the configure a port using To capable of several protocols. DL260 ports are and follow the prompts, making the same use AUX 56 Handheld Programmer, in configure a port this page. To choices as indicated below on The Print Message instruction prints the Message instruction The Print embedded variable or text/data text communications to the specified message CPU), which the DL250–1/260 port (2 on port communications must have the configured. 4 260 4 250–1 5 240 5 230 Print Message (PRINT) Standard RLL 5–202 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Message Instructions Standard RLLInstructions table: charactersprecededbythedollarsignisinterpretedaccordingtofollowing two numbersprecededbythedollarsignmeansan8-bitASCIIcharactercode.Also, hex defined asthecharacter(morethan0)rangedbydoublequotationmarks.Two Text element serialinputconnections. printer 2ontheDL250–1/260hasstandardRS232levels,andshouldworkwithmost Port Length1withone$mark Length1withdoublequotationmark Length1withblank Length2withoneCRand oneLF Length1withcharacterA printinganordinary line of tex In Length2withoneCR andoneLF Length0withoutcharacter ” $ ” $0DA ” $RL ” $” ” ”A” ” Example: output totheprinter. The followingexamplesshowvarioussyntaxconventionsandthelengthof causes The followingexampleprintsthemessagetoport 2.We usea PDcontact,which instruction dataduringtheapplicationdevelopment. instruction containsinvalidtextornoquotations.ItisimportanttotestyourPRINT and before prepares theprintertoprintnextline,startingfromleftmargin. prepares of themessage,whichproducesacarriagereturn /linefeedontheprinter. This 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 # X1 the messageinstructiontobeactiveforjustonescan. Notethe$Natend Character code after thetextstring.Errorcode499willoccurinCPUwhenprint –thisisusedforprintingcharacterstrings.Thestringsare $N or$n $P or$p $R or$r $T or$t $L or$l RN K2 “Hello, thisisaPLCmessage.$N” PRINT $$ $” Tab Carriage return(CR) Form feed Carriage returnlinefeed(CRLF) Line feed(LF) Double quotation(”) Dollar sign($) t, youwillneedtoinclude Description X1 makesanoff-to-on transition. Print themessagetoPort2when double quotation marks Standard RLL Instructions 5–203 memory location represents a space Print the message to Port 2 when X1 makes an off-to-on transition. ∧ Message Instructions Message Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Description ∧ after V-memory number for representing the V-memory after ∧ 16-bit binary (decimal number) 16-bit binary (decimal 4 digit BCD number) 32-bit binary (decimal 8 digit BCD Floating point number (real number) Floating point number (real number with exponent) binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number binary number in V2000 and V2001 -memory number or V-memory number with “:” and data number with “:” number or V-memory -memory characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number – this is used for printing text stored in V-memory. Use the – this is used for printing text stored in V-memory. first location. Then it will start at the next V- in V2000) will be printed. with exponent – this is used for printing V-memory contents in the integer contents in the V-memory used for printing – this is : E : B : R : D : D B none PRINT“Reactor temperature = ” V2000 “deg. $N” K2 Character code Character Message will read: Reactor temperature = 0156 deg The following example prints a message containing text and a variable. The following example prints a message count from the real format. Use V real format. units of degrees to the line of text, and the $N adds a carriage return / line units of degrees to the line of text, There must be a space entered before and after the V-memory address to the V-memory space entered before and after There must be a 4 5 6 # 1 2 3 X1 and read that number of ASCII codes for the text from memory. Example: V2000 % 16V2000 % 0 16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed. The V-memory element text % followed by the number of characters will read the text. If you assign “0” as the number of characters, the print function character Example: V2000V2000 : BV2000 : DV2000 : D BV2000 : RV2000 : E data in V2000 BCD Print Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number Print data in V2000 and V2001 BCD Print Example: as real number floating point number in V2000/V2001 Print can use the : B the data, which is at V2000. You The “reactor temperature” labels point number in V2000/V2001 as real number floating Print is in BCD qualifier after the V2000 if the data format, for example. The final string adds the NOTE: separatein an error code 499. Failure to do this will result it from the text string. feed. V-memory element V-memory format or must be Character code The below. shown in the table data types are type. The capital letters. Standard RLL 5–204 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 Message Instructions Standard RLLInstructions shown inthetablebelow. bypreceded relay bit.Thebitelementcanbeassigned element Bit busy fromapreviousPRINT orWXRXinstruction. toensuretheladderprogramdoes nottrytoPRINTaportthatisstill command NOTE: description. ports (busy,See theappendixonspecial relays fora error). communications or Special relayflagsSP116 andSP117 indicatethestatus of theDL250–1/260CPU mnemonic is“PRINT”,followedbytheDEFfield. programmer’s handheld The PrintsthestatusofC100in1/0format for eachelementislistedinthetablebelow: maximumnumbers ofcharactersyoucanprintis128.Thenumber The Printsthestatusofbit15inV2000TRUE/FALSE format Prints thestatusofC00inON/OFFformat PrintsthestatusofC100inTRUE/FALSE format Printsthestatusofbit15inV2000,1/0format V2000.15 :BOOL C100 :ON/OFF C100 :BOOL C100 V2000 .15 Example: Bit (ON/OFFformat) Bit (TRUE/FALSE format) Bit (1/0format) V-memory/text Floating point(realwithexponent) Floating point(realnumber) 8 digitBCD 4 digitBCD 32 bitbinary 16 bitbinary Text, 1character 3 2 1 # Youappropriate specialrelayinconjunctionwiththePRINT the use must –thisisusedforprintingthestat Element type Data format the V-mem : ONOFF : BOOL none ory number or relay number.relay or number ory Theoutputtypeisdescribed as for anOFFstate Print “ON”foranONstate,and“OFF” “FALSE” foranOFFstate Print “TRUE”foranONstate,and OFF state Print 1foranONstate,and0 Characters Maximum by thedesignatingpoint Description e ofthedesignatedbitinV-memorya or 13 13 11 3 5 1 2 8 4 6 1 (.) and bit characters number Standard RLL Instructions 5–205 MODBUS Instructions MODBUS Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. specifies the starting memory address in specifies the starting slave memory address specifies the master memory address where specifies MODBUS 584/984 or 484 data format to specifies how many coils, inputs, holding registers or The following MODBUS function codes are supported by The following MODBUS function specify a slave station address (0–247) specify a slave station address must be DL260 Port 2 (K2) 01 – Read a group of coils 02 – Read a group of inputs 03 – Read holding registers 04 – Read input registers 07 – Read Exception status Code, slave station address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number address, starting master and slave Code, slave station Port Number: Slave Address: Function Code: the MRX instruction: input register will be read. See the table on the following page. MODBUS Data Format: be used Exception Response Buffer: page. the Exception Response will be placed. See the table on the following of the data to be read. See the table on the following page. Start Master Memory Address: the master where the data will be placed. See the table on the following page. Number of Elements: Start Slave Memory Address: S S S S S S S S Theto master by the DL260 network instruction is used Network (MRX) Read from MODBUS the data into V–memory device and to write a connected slave of data from read a block MODBUS to specify the The instruction allows the user the master. addresses within Function and the Exception Response Buffer. MODBUS data format of elements to transfer,

4 260 5 250–1 5 240 5 230 MODBUS MODBUS Network Read from (MRX) MODBUS (DL260) Instructions RTU Standard RLL 5–206 Instructions Response Buffer Exception MRX Elements Number of MRX Addresses Memory MRX Master Address Memory MRX Slave DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 MODBUS Instructions Standard RLLInstructions V–memory Operand DataType Exception ResponseBuffer Constant V–memory Operand DataType Number ofElements Global Outputs Global Inputs V–memory Special Relays Counter Bits Timer Bits Stage Bits Control Relays Outputs Inputs Operand DataType MRX MasterMemoryAddressRanges 07 –ReadExceptionStatus 04 –ReadInputRegister 04 –ReadInputRegister 03 –ReadHoldingRegister 03 –ReadHoldingRegister 02 –ReadInputStatus 02 –ReadInputStatus 01 –ReadCoil 01 –ReadCoil Function Code MRX SlaveAddressRanges GY GX SP CT C V K V V S Y X T 484 and584/984Mode 584/984 Mode 484 Mode 584/984 484 Mode 584/984 Mode 484 Mode 584/984 Mode 484 Mode MODBUS DataFormat all (seepage3–53) all (seepage3–53) all (seepage3–53) Registers: 1–125 DL260 Range DL260 Range DL260 Range Bits: 1–2000 0–3777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–1777 0–777 0–377 0–377 n/a 3000001–365535 (6digit) 30001–39999 (5digit)or 3001–3999 4000001–465535 (6digit) 40001–49999 (5digit)or 4001–4999 100001–165535 (6digit) 10001–19999 (5digit)or 1001–1999 1–65535 1–999 Slave AddressRange(s) Standard RLL Instructions 5–207 MODBUS Instructions MODBUS Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see Appendix D for (see Appendix D with it contacts associated two Special Relay port 2 has DL260

comm port special relays). One indicates “Port busy” (SP116), and the other and (SP116), “Port busy” One indicates special relays). comm port bit is on while the “Port Busy” The indicates ”Port Communication (SP117). Error” the the program can initiate is off with the slave. When the bit PLC communicates Error” bit turns on when the PLC The “Port Communication next network request. ahead of When used, it should be Use of this bit is optional. error. has detected an is reset when an MRX or MWX boxes since the error bit any network instruction instruction is executed. network scan. The program will last longer than 1 CPU communications Typically starting the next transaction. communications to finish before must wait for the MRX Example Standard RLL 5–208 Instructions (MWX) Write toNetwork MODBUS DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 250–1 MODBUS Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 5 260 4 transfer, MODBUSdataformatandtheExceptionResponseBuffer. station address,startingmasterandslavememoryaddresses,numberofelementsto thenetwork.Theinstructionallowsuser on network masters’s (DL260)memorytoMODBUSaddresseswithinaslavedevice MODBUS WriteThe toNetwork(MWX)instructionisusedwriteablockofdatafromthe S S S S S S S S the ExceptionResponsewillbeplaced Exception ResponseBuffer: be used MODBUS DataFormat: is selected. will bewrittento.Thisfieldisonlyactivewheneither functioncode15or16 Number ofElements: in themasterthatistowrittenslave. Start MasterMemoryAddress: where thedatawillbewritten. Start SlaveMemoryAddress: the MWXinstruction: Function Code: Slave Address: Port Number: 16 –PresetMultipleRegisters 15 –ForceMultipleCoils 06 –PresetSingleRegister 05 –ForceSinglecoil mustbeDL260Port2(K2) specifyaslavestationaddress(0–247) ThefollowingMODBUSfunctioncodesaresupportedby specifies howmanyconsecutivecoilsorregisters specifies MODBUS584/984or484dataformat to specifies themastermemoryaddresswhere specifiesthestartingslavememoryaddress specifies thestartingaddressofdata to specifytheMODBUSFunctionCode,slave Standard RLL Instructions 5–209 Slave Address Range(s) Slave Address 1–999 1–65535 4001–4999 or 40001–49999 (5 digit) (6 digit) 400001–465535 1–999 1–65535 4001–4999 40001–49999 (5 digit) or 4000001–465535 (6 digit) MODBUS Instructions MODBUS Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. 0–377 0–377 0–777 0–1777 0–1777 0–3777 0–1777 0–3777 0–3777 Bits: 1–2000 DL260 Range DL260 Range DL260 Range Registers: 1–125 all (see page 3–53) all (see page 3–53) all (see page 3–53) MODBUS Data Format MODBUS 484 Mode 584/984 Mode 484 Mode 584/984 Mode 484 585/984 Mode 484 Mode 584/984 Mode T V X Y S V V K C MWX Slave Address Ranges MWX CT SP GX GY Function Code Function V–memory Constant Exception Response Buffer Operand Data Type V–memory Timer Bits Timer Counter Bits Special Relays V–memory Global Inputs Global Outputs Number of Elements Operand Data Type 16 – Preset Multiple Registers MWX Master Memory Address Ranges Operand Data Type Inputs Outputs Control Relays Stage Bits 05 – Force Single Coil 05 – Force Single Coil 05 – Force Single Register 06 – Preset Single Register 06 – Preset Single Coils 15 – Force Multiple Coils 15 – Force Multiple Registers 16 – Preset Multiple MWX Exception Response Buffer MWX Number of Elements MWX Master Memory Addresses MWX Slave MWX Slave Memory Address Standard RLL 5–210 Instructions Example MWX DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 MODBUS Instructions Standard RLLInstructions must waitforthecommunicationstofinishbeforestartingnexttransaction. Typicallycommunications willlastlongerthan1CPUscan.Theprogram network instruction isexecuted. any networkinstructionboxessincetheerrorbitisresetwhenanMRXorMWX has detectedanerror. Useofthisbitisoptional.Whenused,itshouldbeahead next networkrequest.The“PortCommunicationError”bitturnsonwhenthePLC PLC communicateswiththeslave.Whenbitisoff theprogramcaninitiate Error” (SP117).Communication ”Port indicates The“PortBusy”bitisonwhilethe comm portspecialrelays).Oneindicates“Portbusy”(SP116), andtheother DL260 port2hastwoSpecialRelaycontactsassociatedwithit(seeAppendixDfor Standard RLL Instructions 5–211 rite instruction ASCII Instructions ASCII Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard ons protocol using port 2, H2–ECOM DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. – Use this instruction to write raw ASCII strings – Use this instruction to write raw – Use this instruction to create pre–coded ASCII – Use this instruction to create pre–coded – This instruction is used to compare two blocks of – usually used to swap V–memory bytes on ASCII data that – Extracts a specific portion (usually some data value) from the ocol. The AIN and AEX instructions have a built–in byte swap – Finds where a specific portion of the ASCII string is located in

L260 PLC is a master on a network, the Network W APB) – This instruction configures port 2 for raw ASCII input strings with configures port 2 for raw ASCII – This instruction protocol using port 2, H2–ECOM or D2–DCM. The RX instruction protocol using port 2, H2–ECOM port 2 on the DL260 can be used for either reading or writing raw ASCII can be used for either reading port 2 on the DL260 such as fixed and variable length ASCII strings, termination characters, variable length ASCII strings, termination such as fixed and (AFIND) Extract (AEX) the (PRINTV) instruction may be used to write the pre–coded ASCII string out the (PRINTV) instruction may be Print to V–memory (VPRINT) Print from V–memory (PRINTV) ASCII IN (AIN) continuous V–memory addresses. Forward and reverse searches are supported. continuous V–memory addresses. Forward and reverse searches ASCII V–memory addresses and is usually used to detect a change in an ASCII string. Compareddata types must be of the same format (i.e. BCD, ASCII, etc.). Swap Bytes (SW feature. (WX) can be used to write embedded ASCII data to an HMI or slave device directly from V–memory via a supported communicati or D2–DCM. strings within the The following instructions can be helpful in managing the ASCII CPUs V–memory: ASCII Find ASCII find location or other known ASCII data location. Compare V–memory (CMPV) was HMI or similar master device via a written directly to V–memory from an external communications prot The strings that allow ASCII and methods several instructions CPU supports DL260 ports. communications from the PLC into and written to be read Specifically, CPU. be used for both on the same strings, but cannot within a supported protocol also decipher ASCII embedded The DL260 can the CPU ports, H2–ECOM or Modbus, Ethernet) via (K–Sequence, DirectNet, D2–DCM module. found at www.asciitable.com. tables and descriptions can be ASCII character to read ASCII input strings. methods that the DL260 can use There are several 1) parameters Use barcode scanners, weight and instruction control bits. byte swapping options, input strings into port 2 based on the (AIN) scales, etc. to write raw ASCII parameters. instruction’s to V–memory from an external HMI or embedded ASCII strings directly 2) Write communications protocol using the CPU similar master device via a supported AIN instruction is not used in this case. ports, H2–ECOM or D2–DCM. The 3) Read instruction (RX) can If a DL260 PLC is a master on a network, the Network data from a slave device via a supported be used to read embedded ASCII communications places the data directly into V–memory. used to write ASCII output strings: The following instructions can be 1) etc. The instruction features the a serial printer, out of port 2 to a display panel or length, byte swapping options, etc. When the starting V–memory address, string the string is written to port 2. permissive bit is enabled, instruction’s 2) permissive bit is When the instruction’s strings in the PLC (i.e. alarm messages). into a pre–defined V–memory address location. enabled, the message is loaded Then are supported. stamps Asian Time/Date of port 2. American, European and D a if Additionally, 4 260 5 250–1 5 240 5 230 Managing the ASCII Strings Writing ASCII Writing Output Strings ReadingASCII Input Strings ASCII Instructions (DL260) Instructions ASCII Standard RLL 5–212 Instructions (AIN) ASCII Input DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 250–1 ASCII Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 5 260 4 Busy, CompleteandTimeoutError. Byte include, avariablelengthstringwith as registers.The V–memory specified communicationsportandplacesthestringintoaseriesof specified The ASCIIInputinstructionallowstheCPUtoreceivestringsthrough set. No set time,thespecifiedTimeout Errorbitwillbe between Inter–character Timeout: the fixedlengthASCIIstringportwillreceive Fixed Length: string willbeplacedinV–memory Data Destination: Port Number: CPU port length oftheASCIIstringthatwillbesentto Type:Length AIN FixedLengthConfiguration disables thisfeature. permissive bitsaredisabled. 0msselection The bitwillresetwhen the AINinstruction specified FirstCharacterTimeout bitwillbeset. character isreceivedexceedsthesettime, from First CharacterTimeout: selection disablesthisfeature. instructionpermissivebits aredisabled.0ms AIN V–memory location.Thebitwillresetwhenthe when theAINisenabledtotimefirst data willbestored incoming ASCIIcharactersexceedsthe Swap preferences,CharacterTimeout, anduserdefined flagbitsfor selectfixedlengthbasedonthe must beDL260port2(K2) specifies thelength,inbytes,of specifies wheretheASCII at the iftheamountoftime if theamountoftime ASCII data Data Destination specified terminationcharacter(s).Otherfeatures can bereceivedasafixednumberofbytesor above. See FirstCharacterTimeout explanation when First CharacterTimeout Error Bit: Character Timeout explanationabove. when t Inter–character Timeout ErrorBit: permissive bitsaredisabled. length andresetwhentheAINinstruction has beenreceivedforthespecifiedfixed Complete Bit: receiving ASCIIdata Busy Bit: SWAPB instruction fordetails. the FixedLengthASCIIstring.See low–byte withineachV–memoryregisterof Byte Swap: the FirstCharacterTimeout isexceed. he CharacterTimeout isexceed. See is ONwhiletheAINinstruction swapsthehigh–byteand is setoncetheASCIIdata is set is set Standard RLL Instructions 5–213 ASCII Instructions ASCII Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. K1–128 C0–3777 All V–memory DL260 Range (See page 3–53) Description the instruction On if the CPU cannot execute instruction is invalid On when a value used by the with another device On when CPU port 2 is communicating a communication error On when CPU port 2 has experienced AIN Fixed Length Examples Data Destination Fixed Length Overflow Error, Complete, Timeout Bits: Busy, Discrete Bit Flags SP53 SP71 SP116 SP117 Parameter Fixed Length example when the PLC is reading the port continuously and timing is not critical Fixed Length example when the PLC Fixed Length example when character to character timing is critical Standard RLL 5–214 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 ASCII Instructions Standard RLLInstructions First First feature. are disabled.0msselectiondisablesthis when theAINinstructionpermissive bits location. TheTimeout Errorbitwillreset attheDataDestinationV–memory stored Timeout exceedsthesettime, characters of timebetweenincoming ASCII Timeout:Inter–character Length ASCIIstringtheportwillreceive bytes, themaximumlengthofaVariable Maximum VariableLength: ASCII stringwillbeplacedinV–memory Data Destination: Number: Port characterswillvaryinlength termination ASCII stringlengthfollowedby Type:Length AIN Variable LengthConfiguration: selection disablesthisfeature. bitsaredisabled.0ms permissive will resetwhentheAINinstruction TimeoutCharacter bitwillbeset.The exceeds thesettime,specifiedFirst time thefirstcharacterisreceived time fromwhentheAINisenabledto Character Timeout: Error bitwillbeset.Nodata selectVari must beDL260port2(K2) specifies wherethe able Lengthif the if theamountof iftheamount specifies, in Length specified. data Overflow ErrorBit: above. See FirstCharacterTimeout explanation when theFirstCharacterTimeout isexceed. First CharacterTimeout ErrorBit: TimeoutCharacter explanationabove. when theCharacterTimeout is exceed. See TimeoutInter–character ErrorBit: instruction permissivebitsaredisabled. Itwillbe resetwhenthe characters. AIN been receiveduptotheterminationcode B Complete receiving ASCIIdata Busy Bit: the followingpage. or2characters.Refer totheASCIItableon 1 Termination SWAPB instructionfordetails. the Varaible LengthASCIIstring.Seethe low–byte withineachV–memoryregisterof Byte Swap: received exceedstheMaximumV isONwhiletheAINinstruction it: is Code Length: swapsthehigh–byteand setoncetheASCIIdatahas is setwhenthe ASCII consistsofeither ariable isset is set Standard RLL Instructions 5–215 ASCII Instructions ASCII Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. K1–128 C0–3777 All V–memory DL260 Range DL260 (See page 3–53) (See page AIN Variable Length Example Variable AIN Data Destination Length Max. Variable Complete, Bits: Busy, Overflow Error, Timeout Parameter AIN Variable Length example used to read barcodes on boxes (PE = photoelectric sensor) read barcodes on boxes (PE = photoelectric Length example used to Variable AIN Standard RLL 5–216 Instructions (AFIND) ASCII Find DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 ASCII Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 260 4 reference theFoundIndexValue.reference Reverse directionsearch,andFromBeginingEndselectionsto skipping register.V–memory Otherfeaturesinclude,SearchStartingIndexnumberfor (bytenumberwheredesiredstringisfound),inHex,intoaspecified number string withinarangeofV–memoryregistersandplacesthestring’s FoundIndex The ASCIIFindinstructionlocatesaspecificstringorportion of an ASCII parameters specified. parameters conflict intheAFINDsearch of EEEEwillresultifthereisa registersspecified.Avalue memory desired stringisnotlocatedinthe value ofFFFFwillresultifthe IndexValueFound willbestored. A registerwhere V–memory the Index: Found loaded byte of whether theBeginingor End IndexValue:Found registers. V–memory tolower numbered registers higher numbered V–memory Reverse doesthesearchfrom V–memory registers. numbered registerstohigher V–memory search fromlowernumbered Direction: the search the BaseAddress)beforebegining which Search StartingIndex: for thedesiredASCIIstring the totalnumberofbytestosearch Total NumberofBytes: memory entire ASCIIstringisstoredin the begining V–memoryregisterwhere Base Address: Found Index Search StartingIndex Total Numberof Bytes Base Address Parameter byte toskip(withrespect the ASCIIstringfoundwillbe into the over unnecessarybytesbeforebeginningtheFINDoperation,Forwardor Forward beginsthe Found Indexregister specifiesthe specifiesthe specifies specifies specifies (See page3–53) (See page3–53) (See page3–53) (See page3–53) DL260 Range DL260 All V–memory All V–memory All V–memory All V–memory or K0–127 or K1–128 Search forString: that theAFINDcansearchfor. item. Quotesarevalidcharacters required aroundtheSearchString NOTE: Quotationmarksarenot up to128characters. Standard RLL Instructions 5–217 V3004 V3005 V3006 V3007 V3000 V3001 V3002 V3003 ASCII Instructions ASCII that quotation marks Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low High High High High High High High High HEX Equivalent ASCII Characters Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 0012 54h 6Fh 64h 61h 79h 20h 69h 73h 20h 46h 72h 69h 64h 61h 79h 2Eh Notice are not placed around the Search String. Only use quota- tion marks if they’re actually part of the Search String. DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. i T o d a y s F r i d a y . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description execute the instruction On if the CPU cannot used by the instruction is invalid On when a value Base Address Found Index Number = V4000 Note that a Search Starting Index of constant (K) 5 combined with a Starting Index of constant (K) Note that a Search End Index Number Begining Index Number Forward Direction Search V–memory. V–memory. Reverse Direction Search SP53 SP71 Discrete Bit Flags Search start Index Number In the “day” portion instruction is used to search for the following example, the AFIND had previously been loaded which Friday.”, is ofthe ASCII string “Today “Friday” in into Forward “day” portion of the word is used to prevent finding the Direction Seach into V4000. The Found Index will be placed “Today”. AFIND Search Example Standard RLL 5–218 Instructions sired portionoftheASCIIstring.Oncestringisfound,AEXinstructioncanbeusedtoextractlocated When anAINinstructionhasexecuted,its’CompletebitcanbeusedtotriggerAFINDsearchforade- DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 ASCII Instructions Standard RLLInstructions AFIND ExampleCombinedwithAEXInstruction Standard RLL Instructions 5–219 ASCII Instructions ASCII Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. K1–128 or K0–127 All V–memory All V–memory All V–memory DL260 Range (See page 3–53) (See page 3–53) (See page 3–53) begining the Extract operation, Shift ASCII Option, for Shift ASCII the Extract operation, begining shifts all specifies Description On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction On when a value used by the instruction is invalid specifies the specifies which APB instruction for numerical characters if enabled, this will if enabled, this swaps the high–byte See the SW Extract at Index Number of Bytes Destination Base Address Discrete Bit Flags SP53 SP71 Parameter Source Base Address One Byte Left or One Byte Right, Byte Swap and Convert data to a BCD format One Byte Right, Byte Swap and One Byte Left or number. The data of bytes of ASCII specified number extracts a Extract instruction ASCII of into another series and places it registers series of V–memory from one V–memory over Index for skipping Extract at features include, registers. Other unnecessarybefore bytes Source Base Address: number of bytes to be extracted Shift ASCII Option: extracted data one byte left or one byte right to displace “unwanted” characters if necessary Byte Swap: and the low–byte within each V–memory extracted register of the data. details. Convert BCD(Hex) ASCII to BCD (Hex): convert ASCII to Hexidecimal numerical values Destination Base Address: specifies the V–memory register be where the extracted data will stored the begining V–memory register the begining V–memory ASCII string is where the entire stored in memory Extract at Index: respect to the byte to skip to (with Source Base Address) before extracting the data Number of Bytes: See the previous page for an example usinig the AEX instruction. 4 260 5 250–1 5 240 5 230 ASCII Extract (AEX) Standard RLL 5–220 Instructions (CMPV) ASCII Compare DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 ASCII Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 tables areequal,SP61willturnON. The CMPVinstructionexecuteswhentheAIN iscomplete.IfthecomparedV–memory 5 260 4 specified bytelength. ofV–memoryregisterstoanotherseriesfora (group) CMPV ASCIICompareinstructioncomparestwogroupsofV–memoryregisters.The The Number ofBytes: to. compared registerstobe V–memory the secondgroupof begining Address: “Compare to”Starting registers the firstgroupofV–memory begining Address: “Compare from”Starting group tobecompared the lengthofeachV–memory SP71 SP61 SP53 Discrete BitFlags Number ofBytes Compare toStartingAddress Compare fromStartingAddress Parameter will compareanydatatype(ASCIItoASCII,BCDBCD,etc.)ofoneseries V–memory registerof V–memory registerof to becomparedfrom. specifiesthe specifiesthe specifies CMPV Example On whenavalueusedbytheinstructionisinvalid On whenresultisequal On iftheCPUcannotexecuteinstruction Description (See page3–53) (See page3–53) (See page3–53) DL260 Range DL260 All V–memory All V–memory All V–memory or K0–127 SP61 =0(OFF),theresultisnotequal SP61 SP61 =1(ON),theresultisequal Standard RLL Instructions 5–221 ASCII Instructions ASCII Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Date / Time Stamp Options Date / Time – the codes in the table below can be used in the All V–memory DL260 Range DL260 American standard (month/day/2 digit year) European standard (day/month/2 digit year) Asian standard (2 digit year/month/day) standard 12 hour clock (0–12 hour:min am/pm) standard 24 hour clock (0–12 hour:min am/pm) (See page 3–53) Description On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction On when a value used by the instruction is invalid the begining of _Date:e _Date:a _Date:us _Time:12 _Time:24 swaps the high–byte Character code Character specifies V–memory Address +1: ASCII string message to “print to V–memory” the current time and/or date. ASCII string message to “print to V–memory” the current time and/or the ASCII string’s length in the ASCII string’s # 1 2 3 4 5 Parameter Print to Starting V–memory Address Discrete Bit Flags SP53 SP71 The ASCII Print to V–memory instruction will write a specified ASCII string into a ASCII string will write a specified instruction Print to V–memory The ASCII series of V–memory to Byte Swap, options include Other features registers. for options and _Time and _Date zeros or spaces, or convert leading suppress time formats. and 12 or 24 hour date formats and Asian U.S., European, Byte Swap: within each and low–byte V–memory register the ASCII to. See the string is printed instruction for details. SWAPB V–memory Print to Starting Address: a series of V–memory addresses where the ASCII string will be placed by the VPRINT instruction. Starting V–memory Address: the first V–memory register of the series of registers specified will contain bytes. Starting the 2nd and subsequent registers will contain the ASCII string printed to V–memory. VPRINT VPRINT Time / Date Stamping VPRINT Time 4 260 5 250–1 5 240 5 230 ASCII Print to ASCII Print V–memory (VPRINT) Standard RLL 5–222 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 ASCII Instructions Standard RLLInstructions data real ASCII stringmessageto“printV–memory”registercontentsinintegerformator VPRINT V-memoryelement Example withV2000=spsp18(binaryformat)where sp=space Example withV2000=0018(binaryformat) Print floatingpointnumberinV2000/V2001asreal number Print floatingpointnumberinV2000/V2001asreal convert leadingzerosorspaces.Thecharactercodemustbecapitalletters. The followingmodifierscanbeaddedtoanyofthemodifiesabovesuppressor Print BCDdatainV2000andV2001 Print PrintbinarydatainV2000fordecimalnumber Print BCDdatainV2000 V2000 :E V2000 :R V2000 :DB V2000 :D V2000 :B V2000 Examples: itfromthetextstring.Failure todothiswillresultinanerrorcode499. separate NOTE: eitrwith Register R with Register R V–memory V2000:BC0 V–memory eg eg V2000:BS 3 2 1 # 6 5 4 3 2 1 # V2000:B0 Modifier Modifier V2000:B V2000:B format. Use V-memory numberorV-memory numberwith“:”anddatatype. The V2000 V2000 i i types areshowninthetable s s t t TheremustbeaspaceenteredbeforeandaftertheV-memory addressto er w er w ith ith Character code Character code : DB none C0 : R : D : E : B S 0 sp sp 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 with exponent binary numberinV2000andV2001fordecimal –thefollowingmodifierscanbeusedinVPRINT Floating pointnumber(realwithexponent) Floating pointnumber(realnumber) 8 digitBCD 32-bit binary(decimalnumber) 4 digitBCD 16-bit binary(decimalnumber) Suppresses leadingzeros Converts leadingspacestozeros Suppresses leadingspaces below. TheCharactercodemustbecapitalletters. Number ofCharacters Number ofCharacters sp sp 0 2 2 2 0 0 2 Description Description 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 2 2 8 2 8 Standard RLL Instructions 5–223 ASCII Instructions ASCII Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard 2 1 5 3 1 6 4 8 11 13 13 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. Description Maximum Characters and read that number of ASCII codes for the and read that number – the following is used for “printing to V–memory” is used for – the following Print “ON” for an ON state, and “OFF” for an OFF state Print 1 for an ON state, and 0 for an OFF state Print “TRUE” for an ON state, and for an OFF state “FALSE” characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number characters in V2001 in V2000) will be printed. in V2000) will be – the following is used for “printing to V–memory” the state of the state used for “printing to V–memory” – the following is -memory location -memory location none function will read the character count from the first location. Then it the first location. count from will read the character function : BOOL mory text element mory text : ONOFF Data format Element type Element # 1 2 3 16 bit binary 32 bit binary 4 digit BCD 8 digit BCD Floating point (real number) Floating point (real with exponent) V-memory/text Bit (1/0 format) format) Bit (TRUE/FALSE Bit (ON/OFF format) Text, 1 character Text, VPRINT Bit element text from memory. Example: V2000 % 16V2000 % 0 V2000 to V2007 are printed. 16 characters in element can be or a control relay bit. The bit bit in V-memory the designated preceded by the V-memory designating point (.) and bit number assigned by the The in the table below. output type is described as shown The number or relay number. will at the next V start text stored in registers. Use the % followed by the number of characters after of characters by the number Use the % followed in registers. text stored of “0” as the number text. If you assign representing the number for V-memory characters, the Example: V2000 . 15C100C100 : BOOLC100 : ON/OFFV2000.15 : BOOL in V2000, in 1/0 format Prints the status of bit 15 format the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE Prints C00 in ON/OFF format the status of Prints format in TRUE/FALSE Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 you can VPRINT is 128. The number of The maximum numbers of characters characters of whether the :S, :C0 or :0 required for each element, regardless C100 in 1/0 format Prints the status of modifiers table below. are used, is listed in the VPRINT V-me VPRINT Standard RLL 5–224 Instructions DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 ASCII Instructions Standard RLLInstructions interpreted accordingtothefollowingtable: interpreted 8-bit ASCIIcharactercode.Also,twocharactersprecededbythedollarsignis double quotationmarks.Two hexnumbersprecededbythedollarsignmeansan The characterstringsaredefinedasthe(morethan0)rangedby Text element Length1withone$mark Length1withdoublequotationmark Length1withblank Length2withoneCRand oneLF Length1withcharacterA printinganordinary line of tex In Length2withoneCR andoneLF Length0withoutcharacter ” $ ” $0DA ” $RL ” $” ” ”A” ” Example: output totheprinter. The followingexamplesshowvarioussyntaxconventionsandthelengthof instruction dataduringtheapplicationdevelopment. instruction and before 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 # Character code contains invalidtextornoquotations.Itisimportanttotest after thetextstring.Errorcode499willoccurinCPUwhenprint –thefollowingisusedfor“printingtoV–memory”characterstrings. $N or$n $P or$p $R or$r $T or$t $L or$l $$ $” Tab Carriage return(CR) Form feed Carriage returnlinefeed(CRLF) Line feed(LF) Double quotation(”) Dollar sign($) t, youwillneedtoinclude Description double quotation your VPRINT marks Standard RLL Instructions 5–225 ASCII Instructions ASCII Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. VPRINT Example Combined with PRINTV Instruction with PRINTV Example Combined VPRINT The VPRINT instruction is used to create a string in V–memory. The PRINTV is used to print the string out The PRINTV is used is used to create a string in V–memory. The VPRINT instruction of port 2. Standard RLL 5–226 Instructions (PRINTV) V–memory ASCII Printfrom DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 240 5 ASCII Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 260 4 See thepreviouspagefor anexampleusingthePRINTVinstruction. permissive bitsaredisabled. permissive when thePRINTVinstruction ASCII Bit: Complete instruction isprintingASCIIdata Busy Bit: details. See theSWAPB instructionfor ofthestringwhileprinting. register low–byte withineachV–memory Swap: Byte specific terminationcharacters the stringfordevicesthatrequire tobeaddedtheendof characters Append Append length ofthestringtoprint Number ofBytes: contain theASCIIstringtoprint of seriesV–memoryregistersthat Start (K2) Port Number: flags forBusyandComplete. Byte Swapoptions,anduserspecified character(s), termination specific require Append Characterstobeplacedafterthedesireddatastringfordevices that a specifiedlengthinnumberofbytes.Otherfeaturesincludeuser specified designated c The ASCIIPrintfromV–memoryinstructionwillsendanstringoutofthe Number ofBytes Start Address Port Number Parameter SP117 SP116 SP71 SP53 Discrete BitFlags Bits: Busy, Complete Address: data hasbeenprintedandreset Characters: swaps thehigh–byte and will beONwhilethe ommunications portfromaspecifiedseriesofV–memoryregistersfor mustbeDL260port2 specifies thebegining will besetoncethe specifies specifies the communication error On whenCPUport2hasexperienceda another device On whenCPUport2iscommunicatingwith On whenavalueusedbytheinstructionisinvalid On iftheCPUcannotexecuteinstruction Description (See page3–53) (See page3–53) DL260 Range DL260 All V–memory All V–memory ASCII ork1–128 port 2(K2) C0–3777 Standard RLL Instructions 5–227 B D E B D A C E xx Low Low Low Byte Byte Byte 0005h 0005h A C xx A C E 0005h B D xx High High High ASCII Instructions ASCII V2000 V2001 V2002 V2003 V2000 V2001 V2002 V2003 V2000 V2001 V2002 V2003 Standard RLL Instructions RLL Standard DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. A, 08/03 DL205 User Manual, 3rd Ed., Rev. or K1–128 All V–memory All V–memory DL260 Range (See page 3–53) (See page 3–53) E E Description On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction On when a value used by the instruction is invalid E E E D C D D C specifies the begining specifies the number of specifies the number C D C D C B A B A B A B A B A Parameter Starting Address Number of Bytes Discrete Bit Flags SP53 SP71 Byte Swap All but Null Byte Swap Byte Swap All Byte Swap The ASCII Swap Bytes instruction swaps byte positions (high–byte to low–byte byte positions instruction swaps Swap Bytes The ASCII of register of a series V–memory within each to high–byte) and low–byte V–memory number of bytes. for a specified registers of a series of V–memory registers the of a series of to begin byte swapping instruction will use Number of Bytes: Starting Address: with the Starting Address, bytes, begining to byte swap (AIN, AEX, PRINTV, (AIN, AEX, VPRINT) PRINTV, No Byte Swapping 4 260 5 250–1 5 240 5 230 Byte Swap Preferences ASCII Swap Bytes ASCII Swap (SWAPB) Standard RLL 5–228 Instructions (ACRB) ASCII ClearBuffer DL205 UserManual, 3rdEd., Rev. A,08/03 230 5 Use aone–shotsotheSWAPB onlyexecutesonce. The AINCompletebitisusedtotriggertheSWAPB instruction. The AINCompletebitorthediagnosticbitsareusedtoclearASCIIbuffer. 240 5 ASCII Instructions Standard RLLInstructions 250–1 5 260 4 Port Number: specified communicationsportnumber. The ASCIIClearBuffer instructionwillcleartheASCIIreceivebuffer of the must beDL260port2(K2) SWAPB Example ACRB Example